Skip to main content

Full text of "Arabic grammar : paradigms, literature, exercises and glossary"

See other formats


/4^- 


JiLh. 


t^^^Mm^^ 


^n  m- 


^'^m^^1t<<k 


5^-  .  6 


— ^     ^    .r   ./ 


^\»•«: 


'j?s^^: 


Digitized  by  tine  Internet  Archive 

in  2008  with  funding  from 

Microsoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/arabicgrammarparOOsocirich 


PORTA 

LINGUARUM  ORIEUTALIOM 

INCHOAVIT 

J.  H.  PETERMANN 

CONTINUAVIT 

HERM.   L.    STRACK. 


ELEMEISTTA  LINGUARUM 

Hebraicae,    Phoeniciae,    Biblico-Aramaicae, 

Samaritanae,    Targumicae,    Syriacae,    Arabicae, 

Aethiopicae,     Assyriacae,     Aegyptiacae,     Copticae, 

Armeniacae,    Persicae,    Turcicae,    aliarum 

studiis  academicis  accommodaverunt 

J.  H.  Petermann,  H.  L.  Strack,  E.  Nestle,  A.  Socin,  F.  Praetorius, 

A.  Merx,  Aug.  Mueller,  Friedr.  Delitzsch,  C.  Salemann, 

Ad.  Erman,   V.  Shukovski,  Th.  Noeldeke, 

G.  Steindorff,    B.  Bruennow,  Dav.  S.  Mueller,   G.Jacob,  aiu. 


PAES  IV. 
ABIC    GRAMMAR 

BY 

A.    SOCIN. 

SECOND    EDITION. 


BEELIN, 
EEUTHEE  &   EEICHAED 
LONDON  NEW  YORK 

WILLIAMS  &  NORGATE  B.  WESTERMANN  &  Co. 

14,  HENBIETTA   STEEET  812,  BROADWAY. 

1895. 


ARABIC  GRAMMAR 

PARADIGMS,  LITERATURE,  EXERCISES 

AND 

GLOSSARY 


Dr.  a.  SOCIN 

PROFESSOR   ORDINARirS   IX  THE   UiaVERSITY   OF  LEtPZIO. 


SECOND  ENGLISH  EDITION 
TEANSLATED  FEOM   THE   THIED  GEEMAN  EDITION 

BY  THE 

Rev.  arch.  R.  S.  KENNEDY  D.  D. 

PROFESSOR  OF  HEBREW  ETC.  Df  THE  TTiaVERSITY  OF  EDtNBITRGH. 


OF  THE 

IVERSITY 


LONDON,  BERLIN, 

WILLIAMS  &  NORGATE  REUTHER  &  REICHARD 

1895. 


roioL 


All  rights  reserved, 
including  that  of  translation  into  other  languages. 


in 

PREFACE  fH't 

TO    THE 

SECOND  ENGLISH  EDITION. 

The  aim  of  the  following  pages  is  to  furnish  intend- 
ing students  of  classical  Arabic  with  the  most  import- 
ant rules  both  of  the  Accidence  and  of  the  Syntax 
in  the  briefest  possible  form.  The  present  edition,  the 
second  in  English,  is  a  translation  of  the  third  German 
edition  of  1894,  to  which,  save  for  a  few  corrections 
and  additions,  it  in  all  respects  corresponds.  Its 
German  counterpart  has  been  considerably  altered 
compared  with  the  second  edition  because  of  the 
publishers'  intention  to  issue  a  separate  chrestomathy 
of  Arabic  prose.  Professor  K.  Bruennow,  a  scholar 
of  approved  ability,  was  entrusted  with  the  prepara- 
tion of  this  work  which  appeared  in  the  year  1894. 
The  connected  narratives  which  formerly  composed 
the  chrestomathy  of  the  grammar  were,  according  to 
arrangement,  incorporated  in  Bruennow's  work,  and 
consequently  had  to  be  dropped  from  the  new  edition 


VI  Preface. 

of  the  grammar.  On  the  other  hand  the  latter  was 
now  extended,  more  particularly  in  the  part  dealing 
with  the  syntax,  with  the  result  that  it  will  now  be 
found,  with  few  exceptions,  to  be  sufficient  for  the 
understanding  of  the  new  chrestomathy.  At  the  same 
time,,  the  fact  must  again  be  emphasised  that  the 
present  work  does  not  pretend  to  take  the  place  of 
any  of  the  larger  treatises ;  the  English  student  who 
wishes  to  advance  beyond  the  elements  of  Arabic  must 
have  recourse  to  the  latest  edition  (the  third)  of 
Wright's  excellent  grammar.  For  this  reason  the 
author  has  deemed  it  his  duty  to  adhere  to  his  former 
view  and  to  decline,  in  a  book  intended  for  beginners, 
to  enter  into  the  technical  terminology  of  the  Arab 
grammarians — which  may  safely  be  left  to  the  larger 
grammars;  still  the  Arabic  specialist  will  easily  dis- 
cover that  their  views  have  been  taken  into  account 
even  in  the  present  elementary  work.  The  best  intro- 
duction to  this  department  of  study  will  be  found  to 
be  the  reading  of  the  Agrumiye,  which  Bruennow  has 
printed  in  his  Chrestomathy. 

In  order  to  lighten  the  first  lessons  in  grammar, 
the  exercises  consisting  of  short  sentences  and  anec- 
dotes have  been  increased  by  the  addition  of  a  few 
short  stories,  by  means  of  which  a  sort  of  stepping 
stone  is  provided  to  the  prose  chrestomathy. 


Preface.  YII 

The  passages  for  translation  into  Arabic  have  been 
retained  unchanged  along  with  the  appropriate 
glossary.  Experience  has  shown  that  this  part  of  the 
chrestomathy  has  unquestionably  been  of  service;  and 
although  I  am  strongly  of  opinion  that  this  class  of 
exercises  is  of  real  value  in  such  systematic  instruction 
as  is  necessary  at  first,  I  am  in  no  wise  blind  to  the 
difficulties  which  the  correction  of  such  exercises  entails 
even  on  the  teacher  of  Arabic.  In  order  to  meet  such 
difficulties,  I  have  selected  single  sentences  and  anec- 
dotes from  Arabic  authors,  and  have  so  arranged  both 
notes  and  glossary  that  the  student,  who  in  any  case 
will  have  to  make  diligent  use  of  grammar  and  dic- 
tionary, is  so  to  say  compelled  to  reproduce  exactly 
the  Arabic  original.  From  what  has  just  been  said, 
it  is  clear  that  this  part  of  the  book,  at  least,  presup- 
poses a  teacher,  for  I  am  convinced  that  the  grammar 
of  Arabic  as  a  whole,  and  the  syntax  in  particular, 
can  only  be  mastered  with  extreme  difficulty  by  self- 
instruction.  I  would  add,  however,  that  translation 
from  English  should  be  taken  at  first  in  the  smallest 
possible  doses,  and  even  in  this  way  only  after  the 
student  has  read  a  part  of  the  Arabic  texts. 

The  synopsis  of  Arabic  literature  has  also  been 
extended.  Strictly  speaking,  this  section  is  out  of 
place  in  an  elementary  work;   still  it  may  afford  a 


Vni  Preface, 

stimulus  to  a  beginner  here  and  there,  and  supply  an 
occasional  hint  to  those  pursuing  the  study  of  Arabic 
by  themselves,  or  at  a  distance  from  the  larger  seats 
of  learning. 

The  present  English  edition  is  an  entirely  new 
translation.  This  difficult  and  tedious  work  has  been 
undertaken  by  Professor  Archd.  R.  S.  Kennedy  of 
Edinburgh  University.  To  him  and  to  his  late  assistant, 
Mr.  W.  B.  Stevenson  B.  D.,  Vans  Dunlop  Scholar  in 
Semitic  Languages  of  the  same  University,  who  has 
rendered  us  great  assistance  in  the  reading  of  the 
proofs,  I  cannot  omit  to  express  here  my  warmest 
thanks  for  their  co-operation. 

A.  SociN. 


NOTE  BY  THE  TRANSLATOR. 

I  have  only  to  add  to  the  foregoing,  that  my 
responsibility  as  translator  does  not  extend  to  the 
English-Arabic  exercises  and  the  relative  glossary. 
A  few  verbal  changes  excepted — chiefly  where  the 
"violence  done  to  the  Queen's  English"  (p.  57*)  was 
greater  than  seemed  absolutely  necessary — these 
have  been  reprinted  from  the  first  edition.  I  have 
also  inserted  an  additional  reference  here  and  there, 
and  in  the  bibliographical  section  I  am  responsible 
for  one  or  two  additional  entries. 

I  wish  also  to  express  my  personal  indebtedness 
to  Mr.Stevenson,  without  whose  generous  co-operation, 
owing  to  my  absence  in  the  East,  the  book  would 
not  have  been  ready  in  time  for  this  winter's  work. 

20*li  September  1895. 

A.  K.  S.  K. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


GRAMMAR. 
I.   OflTHOGRAPHY  AND  PHONOLOGY  (§§  l-ii). 

Page 

§     1.  Consonants 1 

§     2.  Long  Vowels 6 

§     3.  Short  Vowels,  Nunation,  Gezma 8 

§     4.  Hamza 9 

§     5.  TesdTd 11 

§     6.  Wasla 12 

§     7.  Medda 15 

§     8.  The  Syllable 16 

§     9.  The  Tone 17 

§  10.  Pause         18 

§  11.  The  Arabic  Cyphers  and  Contractions 18 

II.   ACCIDENCE    (§§  12—96). 
Chap.  I.    The  Pronoun  (§§  12—15). 

§  12.  Personal  Pronouns 19 

§  13.  Demonstrative  Pronouns 21 

§  14.  Eelative  Pronouns 23 

§  15.  Interrogative  Pronouns 24 

Chap.  11.     The  Verb  (§§  16—54). 

§  16.  Groundform 24 

§  17.  Conspectus  of  the  derived  Stems 24 

§  18.  L  Stem 25 

§  19.  n.  Stem 26 

§  20.  III.  Stem 26 

§  21.  IV.  Stem 27 


Contents.  XI 

Page 

§  22.  V.  Stem 27 

§  23.  VI.  Stem 28 

§  24.  VII.  Stem 28 

§  25.  VIII.  Stem 28 

§  26.  IX.  and  XI.  Stems 29 

§  27.  X.  Stem 29 

§  28.  The  Stems  of  the  quadriliteral  Verb 30 

§  29.  The  Passive 30 

§  30.  The  Tenses 30 

§31.  The  Moods 31 

§  32.  Imperative 32 

§  33.  Inflexion  for  Person  and  Number 33 

§§  34—36.  Verbs  mediae  geminatae 34 

§§  37—38.  Verba  hamzata 36 

§  39.  Weak  Verbs         38 

§  40.  Verba  primae  3  et  ^ 38 

§§  41 — 44.  Verba  mediae  ^  et  (3 39 

§§  45—48.  Verba  ultimae  3  et  ^ 41 

§  49.  Doubly  weak  Verbs 44 

§  50.  The  Verb  J^J 45 

§  51.  Verbs  of  Praise  and  Blame 46 

§  52.  Forms  of  Admiration 46 

§  53.  The  Verb  with  Pronominal  Suffixes 46 

§  54.  Sign  of  the  Accusative 47 

Chap.  HI.     The  Noun  (§§  55—90). 

a.  Formation  of  Nouns. 

§  55.  Primitive  and  derived  Nouns ,     .  48 

§  56.  Summary  of  the  simple  Nouns 49 

§  57.  Nouns  with  Preformatives 49 

§  58.  Nouns  with  Aflformatives 50 

§  59.  Quadriliteral  Nouns 50 

§  60.  Participles 50 

§  61.  Infinitives 51 

§  62.  Verbal  Adjectives 53 


XII  Contents. 

Page 

§  63.  Intensive  Eorms 54 

§  64.  Nomina  loci,  instrument!,  specie! 55 

§  65.  Nomina  relativa 56 

§  66.  Nomina  deminutiva 57 

§67.  Nouns  from  Stems  mediae  geminatae 67 

§  68.  Nouns  from  Stems  with  Hamza 58 

§  69.  Nouns  from  Stems  primae  ^ 58 

§  70.  Nouns  from  Stems  med.  ^  and  ^ 59 

§  71.  Nouns  from  Stems  ultimae  ^  and  ^ 60 

b.  Gender  of  Nouns. 

§  72.  Masculine  and  Feminine  Gender 62 

§§  73—74.  Formation  of  the  Feminine 63 

c.  Inflexion  of  Nouns. 

§  75.  Number  and  Case 65 

§  76.  Formation  of  the  Dual  and  Plural 66 

§  77.  Case-endings  of  Singular.    Triptote  and  Diptote  Nouns  67 

§  78.  Diptotes 68 

§  79.  Inflection  of  the  Determined  Noun 68 

§  80.  Shortening  of  Dual  and  Plural  in  the  Construct  State  69 

§  81.  Inflection  of  Nouns  in  in  and  an  from  ult.  ^  and  ,3  70 

§82.  The  Noun  with  the  Pronominal  Suffixes     ....  71 

§  83.  Vowel  Changes  in  the  Pluralis  Sanus 72 

§  84.  Proper  Names  compounded  with  ^^\ 73 

§  85.  Vocative 73 

§  86.  Collective  Nouns 74 

§  87.  Broken  Plurals 75 

§  88.  List  of  the  principal  varieties  of  the  Broken  Plural  .  76 

§  89.  Broken  Plurals  from  Quadriliteral  Nouns    ....  78 

§  90.  Nouns  of  irregular  Formation 80 

CM^.  lY.     The  Numerals  (§§  91—93). 

§  91.  The  Cardinal  Numbers 83 

§  92.  The  Connection  of  the  numeral  with  the  thing  numbered  85 

6  93.  Ordinal  Numbers  and  Fractions 86 


Contents.  XIII 

Page 
Chap.   v.    Particles  (§§  94—96). 

§     94.  Adverbs,  Prepositions,  Conjunctions 88 

§     95.  Inseparable  Particles 88 

§     96.  Prepositions  and  Particles  with  Suffixes  ....  89 

III.     SYNTAX   (§§  97  —  160). 

Chap,  I.    Tenses  and  Moods  (§§  97—104). 

§     97.  Perfect  and  Imperfect 90 

§     98.  Use  of  the  Perfect 91 

§     99.  Use  of  the  Imperfect 92 

§  100.  Subjunctive 94 

§  101.  Modus  apocopatus 95 

§  102.  Modus  energicus 95 

§  103.  Passive 96 

§  104.  Participles 96 

Chap.  11.     Government  of  the  Verb  (§§  105—117). 

§  105.  The  Verb  and  its  Compliment 97 

§  106.  Accusative 97 

§  107.  Accusative  after  verbs  of  coming  &c 97 

§  108.  Verbs  with  two  Accusatives 97 

§  109.  The  Absolute  Object 98 

§  110.  The  Accusative  as  Predicate 99 

§111.  Accusative  with  ^i 100 

§  112.  Accusative  with  ^  of  Concomitance 101 

§  113.  Accusative  of  nearer  Definition 101 

§  114*  Accusative  in  Exclamations 102 

§§  114—116.  The  Verb  with  Prepositions 103 

§  117.  J  in  Dates 104 

Chap.  III.     Government  of  the  Noun  (§§  118—134). 

§  118.  The  Noun  with  the  Article  (Determination)       .     .  105 

§  119.  Apposition *106 

§§  120—122.  Qualifying  Adjuncts    . 107 

§§  123—130.  The  Genitive  Relation 109 


XIV  Contents. 

Page 

§131.  The  Construction  of  the  Infinitive 112 

§  132.  The  Participle  and  its  Object 118 

§  133.  The  Nomen  Regens  undetermined 114 

§  134.  Improper  Annexation 114 

Chap.  IV.     The  Simple  Sentence  (§§  135—151). 

§  135.  Distinction  bet.  Nominal  and  Verbal  Sentences       .  115 

§  136.  The  Verb  in  the  Verbal  Sentence 115 

§§  137—138.  Indefinite  Subject 117 

§  139.  The  Predicate  in  the  Nominal  Sentence  ....  118 

§§  140 — 146.  Connection  bet.  Subject  and  Predicate     .      .  119 

§  147.  The  Particles  Hnna  and  ^anna 122 

§  148.  Subordinate  Sentences 123 

§149.  More  than  one  Predicate 125 

§  150.  Negative  Sentences 125 

§  151.  The  Particle  of  Exception .  126 

Chap.  V,     Compound  Sentences  (§§  152—161). 

§  152.  Co-ordinate  Sentences 127 

§§  153—156.  The  Relative  Clause 128 

§157.  The  Circumstantial  Clause 131 

§  158.  The  Temporal  Clause     .........  132 

§159.  The  Conditional  Clause  with  the  Perfect       ...  133 

§  160.  The  Conditional  Clause  with  the  Apoc.  Impf.    .      .  134 

§  161.  The  Particle  \3  in  the  Apodosis 134 

APPENDIX. 

Computation  of  Time  (Names  of  the  Days  of  the  "Week,  the 

Months  &c.) 136 

LITERATURE. 

A.  Bibliography 139 

B.  Introduction  and  general 144 

C.  Chrestomathies       . 144 

D.  Grammars 145 


Contents.  XV 

Page 

E.  Lexicography 147 

F.  Koran,  Islam,  Life  of  Muhammed,  Bible  &c.         ...  150 

G.  Jurisprudence 153 

H.  Philosophy 154 

I.  Natural  Sciences  and  Medicine 156 

K.  History,  Biographies 157 

L.  Cosmography,  Geography,  Ethnography,  Travels        .      .  163 

M.  Poetry 166 

K.  Belles  Lettres,  Ethics,  Eomances 169 

PARADIGMS. 

I.  Suffixes  and  Prefixes  for  the  Conjugation  of  the  Verb  3* 

IL  Strong  triliteral  Verb  Act.  1 4* 

IIL  Strong  triliteral  Verb  Pass.  1 6* 

IV.  Quadrinteral  Verb,  derived  Steins 7* 

V.  Strong  triliteral  Verb,  derived  Stems 8* 

VI.  Verbum  mediae  geminatae  Act.  1 10* 

VII.  Verbum  mediae  geminatae  Pass.  1 11* 

VIII.  Verbum  mediae  geminatae,  derived  Stems     .      .      .  12* 

IX.  Verba  hamzata 13* 

X.  Verbum  primae  radicalis  3  et  ^ 14* 

XI.  Verbum  mediae  radicalis  ^  Act.  1 15* 

XII.  Verbum  mediae  radicalis  \^  Act.  1 16* 

XIII.  Verbum  mediae  radicalis  ^  vel  ^  Pass 17* 

XIV.  Verbum  med.  radicalis  ^  et  (3,  derived  Stems    .  18* 
XV.  Verbum  tertiae  radicalis  ^  (Jj-ii)  Act.  I.     .      .      .  19* 

XVL  Verbum  tertiae  radicalis  ^  ( J-»3)  -^-ct.  I.    .      .      .  20* 

XVII.  Verbum  tertiae  radicalism  vel  ^^  (jlsii)  -^^t  I.      .  21* 

XVIII.  Verbum  tertiae  radicalis  ^  vel  ,3  Pass.  I.     .      .      .  24* 

XIX.  Verbum  tertiae  radicalis  ^  vel  ,3,  derived  Stems   ,  22* 

XX.  Nomen  generis  masculini 25* 

XXI.  Nomen  generis  feminini 26* 

XXII.  Nouns  in  "in"  and  "an" 27* 

XXIII.  The  Nomi  with  Pronominal  Suffixes 28* 


XVI  Contents. 

Page 

EXERCISES  AND  TEXTS. 
I.  Exercises  on  the  Grammar 

A.  For  practice  in  Beading 30* 

B.  Exercises  on  the  Accidence 32* 

C.  Exercises  on  the  Syntax .  35* 

II.  Connected  Extracts 48* 

III.  For  Translation  into  Arabic 57* 

GLOSSARIES. 

A.  English- Arabic 79* 

B.  Arabic-English 104* 


PAET  I. 


GRAMMAR 

AND 

BIBLIOGRAPHY. 


Socin,  Arabic  Grammar. 


GRAMMAR. 

I.  THE  ARABIC  CHARACTERS.  PHONOLOGY 

(§§  1-11). 

The  Consonants.  The  Arabs  at  first  used  the  Syriac  1. 
characters  and  the  Syriac  alphabet,  in  which  the  order  ^' 
of  the  characters  is  the  same  as  in  Hebrew.  A  relic 
of  this  earlier  order  is  still  preserved,  in  the  employ- 
ment— afterwards  seldom  resorted  to  —  of  the  letters 
of  the  alphabet  as  cyphers  (cf.  pages  4 — 5).  At  an 
early  period,  however,  the  Arabs  distinguished  by 
means  of  diacritical  points  a  number  of  sounds  which 
were  not  so  distinguished  in  the  older  alphabet. 
By  a  process  of  curtailment,  moreover,  a  number  of 
characters  became  so  like  each  other  that  they  had 
to  be  distinguished  by  similar  diacritical  signs.  The 
next  step  was  to  group  together  in  the  alphabet  the 
characters  which  in  this  way  had  come  to  resemble 
each  other.  Hence  the  Arabic  alphabet  now  consists 
of  twenty-eight  consonantal  signs,  the  usual  order  and 


TABLE   OF  CHARACTERS. 


Fonn             I                           Value 

II 

5  " 

ti}to 

O  m     1 

■^  a 

-a  fl 

■*'  a  \\ 

0 

Names 

.a 

«  o 

^§1 

9 

o 

P4 

Is 
.2® 

^ 

o 
o 

Is 

K.  ft 

-2.2 

Pronunciation 

S5 

" 

G  ^ 

1 

1 

oUI  Alif* 

1 

L 

— 

— 

cf.  §§  2  an 

14 

1 

^ 

2 

sLrBa 

o 

V" 

A 

1 
J    1 

b 

b 

2 

n 

3 

gljTa 

^:i> 

OA. 

X 

j* 

t 

t 

400 

n 

.^^ 

English  hard  th.  as 

t 

500 

4 

jli-  Tha 

v£j 

vi^ 

X 

i- 

in  thing 

J, 

1 

\  orig.  g  hard ;  later 

^ 

Aji,^>^  Jim 

E 

t 

^ 

fi*.  j  V  gin  Italian  ^iorwo; 
||  J  English  j 

V 

g 

3 

a 

)  strong  h  with  fric- 

b 

8 

6 

gll  Hha 

c 

t 

:SV. 

^ 

>  tion  of  larynx  as  if 

n 

J  wheezing 

h 

600 

7 

glXKha 

0    ^ 

t 

t 

^!l 

^ 

ch  in  Scotch  loch 

d 

4 

"I 

8 

J|5  Dal 

t> 

t\ 



— 

d 

d 

700 

9 

:  JlS  Dhal 

(> 

tX. 

— 

— 

soft  th,  as  in  this 

r 

200 

n 

10 

l^lj  Zai 

) 

7 
> 



r 

11 

— 

— 

Z  as  in  zeal;  soft  s 
as  in  rose 

z 

7 

T 

12 

\^j^*^  Sin 

(J* 

LT 

MJ. 

AM 

hard  S 

1 

s 

60 

D 

13 

l^jc^  Sin 

u 

LT 

^ 

jsh 

s 

300 

tJ 

*  The  termination  o  i.  e.  un  (see  §  3  b)  is  neglected  in  the  translitera- 
tion, as  in  the  modern  Arabic  pronunciation. 


TABLE   OF   CHARACTERS. 


Names 


Form 


Value 


g? 


bo  OS 
'^  S 

<D    O 


O   IH    I     O   a 
l-S  ft   !   1-3  <s 


O  tfi 

.9  o 


Pronunciation 


i^ 


14  SLo  Sad 

15  !  oLi  Dad 
I 

16!&Lb  Ta 

17,gLb  Za 

18  ^jlc:  'Am 
j 

19  ^jjLC  Ghain 
20 ,  %\S  Fa 

21  Jli  Kaf 

22  JiyXaf 

23  ll^  Lam 
24 '  ^  Mim 

25  (j*j  Nun 

26  ili  Ha 

27  ]|^  Waw 

28  ^a  Ya 


e 

o 


o  ^ 

^ 


J 


^     15 


.«a 

^ 

^ 

^ 

k 

is 

k 

ib 

« 

*• 

^ 

A 

i 

a. 

s 

a 

< 

JL 

s 

•*• 

JO 

A 

j 

■i. 

56 

X 

J 

empliatic  S 

(emphatic  d(tongue 
pressed  against  the 
gum) 

emphatic  t 
emphatic  Z  C/^ 

\  pro  d  uced  h y  a  tight- 
ening of  the  vie 
lently  compressed 
glottis 

guttural  r 

f 

deep  emphatic  k 

k 

1 

m 

n 
h 
w 

y 


90 

800 

9 

900 

70 

1000 


^ 


80 
100 
20 
30 
40 


50     3 


5 

6 

10 


THE   VOWELS,  HOW  INDICATED. 


forms  of  which  are  exhibited  on  pp.  4 — 5.  These 
signs  are  written  and  read  from  right  to  left.  Some 
are  joined,  to  the  letters  preceding  or  following,  others 
are  not,  as  indicated  in  the  table  referred  to. 

b.  When  8  (No.  26),  at  the  end  of  a  word,  indicates 
the  feminine  termination  (§  73)^  two  dots  are  placed 
over  it  to  show  that  it  must  be  pronounced  as  t  (Nr. 
3) ;  thus :  H. 

c.  Very  frequently,   especially  at  the  beginning  of 
words,  certain  letters,  instead  of  being  written  along- 
side of  each  other,  are  placed  one  above  the  other 
this  is  particularly  the  case  with  the  letters  _  _    • 

(Nos.  5—7),  e.  g.  ^  for  ^xj  (Nos.  2  and  6),  B?:  (Nos. 
5  and  6)  for  ^v^,  :^  (Nos.  18  and  5)  for  ^sjld  &c. 
Instead  of  U  (Nos.  23  and  1)  the  Arabs  write  !^  or  *^ 
(the  Lam  in  the  latter  form  beginning  at  the  left 
of  Alif). 

2.  The  vowels^  how  indicated.    In  the  earliest  times 

^'  the  Arabs  indicated  only  the  long  vowels  a,  J,  ?7,  and 
the  diphthongs  au^  ai  (whose  second  element  they 
regarded  as  a  consonant);  this  was  done  by  employing 
the  sign  |  (No.  1)  for  «,  .  (No.  27)  for  u  and  (with  a) 
au,  (No.  28)  for  z  and  (with  a)  ai.  In  cases  where  . 
and  ^  indicate  the  sounds  au  and  ai,  which  we  pronounce 
as  diphthongs,  Sukun  (see  §  3  c)  is  ordinarily  placed 


THE  VOWEL   SIGNS. 


over  these  letters,  to  denote  that  they  have  no  vowel 
of  their  own.  Examples:  JU  kala^  "Lkmj  sira,  155-^ 
sukun,  ^  bafun,  ^yj  naumun. 

In  the  oldest  writing,  the  long  a  was  not  uniformly  5. 
represented  by  I,  but  was  occasionally  left  unrepre- 
sented. This  omission  has  continued  to  be  observed 
in  a  series  of  very  common  words;  in  such  cases, 
however,  an  upright  stroke  is  usually  placed  over  the 
consonant  that  is  to  be  pronounced  with  the  long  a, 

e.  g.  I  j^  (for  I6U0)  hddd^  »}\  Hlahun  (God),  \ji'^\ 
rahmdnu.  Frequently,  however,  in  our  printed  editions, 
we  find  this  long  a  represented  by  a  simple  JL,  thus: 

l3ki  hddd.y 

In  a  few  words  a  .  after  an  a  does  not  indicate  c. 

the  pronounciation  au  but  a  long  «,  originally  no  doubt 

an  obscure  «;  in  this  case,  too,  the  upright  stroke  is 

I 
the  usual  sign,  e.  g.  5«-jy2*.  (alongside  of  sLx^)  haydtun 

life  (but  I  with  Suffixes:  auLx:^  haydiuhu  his  life). 

At  the  end  of  many  words  (^  is  likewise  employed  d. 
to  represent  a  long  d\  in  such  cases  (like  the  .  in  c) 
it  does  not  receive  the  Sukiin  (§  3  c\  e.  g.  ^*  (or 

^C)  ramd  (he  has  thrown);  in  the  middle  of  a  word, 
on  the  other  hand,  |  takes  the  place  of  this  ^^ ;  thus 
with  a  suffix  sLo.  ramdhu  he  has  thrown  it. 


THE   SHORT  VOWELS. 


Note  a.     In  a  few  rare  cases,  in  the  middle  of  a  word,  we 

find  a  denoted  by  j^  _!_,  as  in  the  foreign  word  *i)j?  taurdtun  Torah. 
Note  b.   Should  ^—  be  preceded  by  a  j^,  f  is  written  for  the 
former  in  order  to  prevent  two  ^  coming  together;    e.  g.  tJj 
dunyd  world  fiir  ^^j  (§  74a). 

e.  Occasionally  an  |  is  added  to  a  final  u  or  «m,  but 

it  is  entirely  left  out  of  account  in  the  pronunciation ; 
e.  g.  SyjuiS' kaidbu^  Lxi.  ramau  (§§  33  and  53). 

3.  The  short  vowels  were  originally,  as  a  rule,  left 

^*  unrepresented^;  afterwards  the  following  signs  were 
employed  to  represent  the  short  vowels,  and  (in  con- 
junction with  the  signs  discussed  in  §  2)  the  long 
vowels  as  well: 

1)  k^Ci  Fatha^  (also  ^>JCi  Fath)  JL  for  a  (in 
certain  cases  to  be  pronounced  like  e  in  men,  also 
like  German  a  in  Manner),  e.  g.  jJcS  katala^  Jli  kdla. 

2)  slwy^Kesra  (also  IsI^Kesr)  ^for  ?,  e.  g.  vJa-*9-^ 
gadiba,    «juo  yabfu. 

3)  jC-*S   Damma   (also    I^  Damm)  _i_  for  xi^  e.  g. 

v^^^jcXj  yakiubu\  ^:y«-ftj  yafutu. 
h.  When  these  signs  for  the  short  vowels  are  written 


1  Many   books,   particularly   those   printed  in  the  East,  are 
printed  without  these  vowel  signs. 

2  The  terminations  «  ^-,  8—  are  here  represented  in  the  trans- 
literation by  a,  as  in  modern  Arabic. 


4.     HAMZA. 


twice  at  the  end  of  a  word,  they  are  to  be  pronounced 
with  a  final  n  (called  by  the  Arabs  j^.j^o  Tanwin, 
by  us  frequently  Nunation,  from  the  letter  nun),  e.  g. 
(j*fc4«Cw  samsin,  Jl^^  ragulun.  The  Nunation  an  receives 
as  an  additional  indication  the  letter  I,  but  the  pro- 
nunciation remains  unaffected,  e.  g.  ^iLo  malan.  This 
I  is  omitted  only  when  the  Nunation  accompanies  the 

feminine  termination  5  (see  above  §  1 2>),  e.  g.  XjJyo 
markuljatan  ^  or  in  cases  where  the  word  already  has 

a  final  |,  or  in  its  place  a  ^  quiescing  in  «,  e.  g.  G^    / 

riban,  ^jjo  hudan  (§  2<f).     The  same  holds  good  in   // 
most  cases  after  Hamza  (§  4).    The  vowel  of  the  Nu-  ^ 
nation  is  always  short. 

When  a  consonant  has  no  vowel  of  its  own,  this   c. 

is  indicated  Ixy  the  sign  _1_  xiyi-  Gezma  (also  called      j 

^^  JCw  Sukun  [Rest])  e.  g.  v:ijwiU«  safartu^  ouuiJo  mr/- 
sflrZ/rt'  (cf.  §  2).  On  the  omission  of  this  sign  see  §  5. 
A"'  consonant  which  is  thus  pronounced  without  a 
vowel  following  is  said  to  be  "resting". 

Hamza.   In  order  to  distinguish  the  cases  in  which  4. 
!  was  employed  to  denote  a  (§  2),  from  those  in  which  ^' 
it  had  (as  originally  in  Hebrew)  its  proper  force  as 
a  consonant,  the  Arabs  gave  it  the  additional  sign 


10  4.     HAMZA, 

hCjd  Hamza  ^  (in  form  a  modified  c  'Ain).  I  accord- 
ingly denotes  the  closure  of  the  larynx  by  which  the 
breath,  engaged  in  voice  production,  is  turned  on  or 
off,  according  as  the  Hamza  precedes  or  follows  a 
vowel.  It  is  best  heard  in  English  before  the  second 
of  such  pairs  of  words  as  "sea  eagle",  "mine  eyes". 
Its  effect  may  also  be  noted  by  comparing  the  two 
following  pronunciations  of  Kuran,  viz:  Ku-ran  and 
Kur-'an  (the  latter  with  Hamza).  In  the  translitera- 
tion we  indicate  |  by  '  except  at  the  beginning  of  a 
word  where  no  indication  is  required.  The  sign  s>  is 
placed  under   the   |,  when  followed  by  an   /-sound. 

Examples  yoj  ^amrun^  Jo!  Hhilun,  4^\  ^umamun\  jUw 
sa'ala^  ju-L  ra'-sim;  Iwb'l ik-ra\  In  the  last  two  exam- 
ples Hamza  closes  the  syllable. 

Before  or  after  an  i-  or  w-sound,  the  signs  .  and 
^  are  generally  employed  instead  of  |  as  the  bearers  of 
the  Hamza,  in  which<case  ^  is  written  without  the  two 

dots:  e.  g.  ^^j  Wnsa,  y^yj  yu'taru,  wj'lo  yu^atjiru) 
vi^As.  gi'ta^  CA^  saHha,  ^5^L1j  yubdrfu. 

After  a  long  vowel,  and  in  most  cases  after  Suktin, 
Hamza  as  a  rule  has  no  bearer,  but  is  written  on  or 

above  the  line,  thus:  eLoJ  Hrda'un^  Eo  (or  jo) 
bar'un.    After  a  vowelless  consonant  in  the  middle  of 


5.    TESDID.  11 

a  word,  Hamza  with  its  vowel  is  placed  over  the 
connecting  stroke  (except,  of  course,  when  no  such 

connection  is  possible,  as  after  .  in  'i^yX^jo  mamlu'atun), 

thus:  x-^iai^  hatVatun]  in  the  same  way  Ljui  sai'an\ 

On  the  other  hand,  in  cases  like  sLd/sl  'imdd'an  no 

Alif  is  written  at  the  end,  cf.  §  3  &. 

Tesdid.    That  a  consonant  is  to  be  sounded  twice  5. 

6        "  ^  a. 
is  indicated  by  the  sign  of  doubling  *,  named  Jo  Juiwo 

Tesdid  or  jLi  Sedd  (from  the  initial  Jjj  of  this  word 

the  sign  "  has  been  derived),  e.  g.  .^^^^u;  5«&&«,  S^r> 
tarahhulun.  This  doubling  of  a  consonant  is  either  due 
— as  in  the  examples  just  given — to  the  essential 
nature  of  the  form,  nominal  or  verbal  (as  for  example 
the  verbal  forms  corresponding  to  the  Hebrew  Ptel 
§  19),  or  is  the  result  of  assimilation. 

When  one  consonant  is  assimilated  to  another,  the  h. 
assimilation  is  further  graphically  represented  by  the 
removal  of  the  Sukun  from  the  assimilated  consonant. 

This  applies  to  the  /  of  the  article  J  I,  when  the  latter 
precedes  one  of  the  following  consonants:  ^:y,  vi^,  t>, 
'^'  )'>  y  LT'  U*"'  u^'  U^'  ^'  ^'  J'  ij  (^^^^^  ^^»  dentals, 
sibilants  and  r,  /,  n).  Examples:  Is^LJ I  attdgiru^  ^^^\ 

attalgu^  (jjw^mxJI  assamsu,  (the  sun),  but  ^iiUI  alkamaru 
(the  moon).    From  the  fact  that  the  two  last  examples 


12  6,    WASLA. 

are  stereotyped  those  consonants  that  may  be  assimi- 
lated are  technically  called  solar  letters,  those  that 
do  not  admit  of  assimilation,  lunar  letters. 

Note  a.    The  word  &)[  Hldhun,  God,  when  joined  to  the  article 

drops  the  first  syllable  and  becomes  &U I  (§  2  b)  alldhu. 

Note  b.  The  words  ^  min,  Ijs.  'an,  ^]  'an  (and  ^|  'w),  when 

followed  by  a  few  words  beginning  with  *  w  or  J  ^  are  usually 
combined  with  them  into  one   word,    the  final  ^^  n  being  at  the 

same  time  assimilated  to  the  following  consonant,  e.  g.  l*-o  mimmd 

from  U  ^  min  ma,  V I  'alia  from  V  ^I  ^an  Id. 

6.  Wasla  '^.     A. word  beginning  with  two  consonants 

receives  in  Arabic  either  a  full  helping-vowel  prece- 

ded  by  Hamza  in  accordance  with  §  4«  (e.  g.  ^  Jc^i  I 
Plato),  or  merely  a  vowel  which  is  heard  only  when 
the  word  is  standing  alone.,  but  which  must  be  given 
up  when  the  word  in  question  comes  to  stand  after 
another    word   in   the  sentence.    Thus  in  the  latter 

case  we  find  Jj^'t  uktul  instead  of  Jjo  ktul.  The  I 
which  is  prefixed  in  this  and  similar  cases  is,  however, 
still  written  although  the.helping  vowel  accompanying 
it  is  given  up,  and  it  then  receives  over  it  the  sign 


a 


o-o 


aULoT  wasla  e.  g.  >->vZJI  \::/J^  hintulrvaziri.  The  two 
words  thus  united  together  are  also  to  be  pronounced 
as  if  they  formed  a  single  word.  Such  an  Alif  Waslatum 
or  Wasla-bearing  Alif  is  called  a  connective  Alif  in 


6.     WASLA.  13 

contradistinction  to  a  disjunctive  Alif,  that  is,  an  Alif 
hamzatum  or  Hamza-bearing  Alif  (cf.  §  4). 

Note.   The  sign  ■*  is  a  modification  of  jo;  wasla  or  sila  deno- 
tes "close  connection". 

When   a  connective  Alif  has  to  be  employed  at   h. 
the  beginning  of  a  sentence,   a  full  vowel  must  be   • 
pronounced,  but,  as  written,  only  the  proper  vowel 
sign  may  accompany  the  Alif,  never  a  Hamza.    Thus 

we  have  J«»wJ!  arrasidu,  ^yi^\  uhrug  but  -,-yi*'!  JU 
pronounce  kalahrug. 

In  the  last  example  the  division  of  the  syllables   c. 
is  now  kd'lah-rug ,    If  the  vowel  preceding  a  connec- 
tive Alif  is  long,   it  must  now  be  pronounced  as  a 
short  vowel,   since  it  stands  in  a  shut  syllable  (see 

§  8).  Thus  viJUliJI  ^^,  properly  fi-lfulki^  has  now  the 
following  syllables  fil-ful-ki]  so  too  aJUl  ^^n  rida-llahi 
(§  2  rf)  =  ri-dal'ld-hi^  v;^  I  t^<>  (§  2 e)  da-ta-hul-iwazza. 

If  the  word  before  a  connective  Alif  ends  in  a  d. 
consonant  which  has  no  vowel  of  its  own,  the  conso- 
nant receives    a  helping-vowel.      The  most  natural 

vowel  in  such  a  case  is  e,  e.  g.  jJjLI  I  oowo  dardbati- 
ra&^«  (for  oowo);  so  JLjLLwI  istikhdlun  with  the  ar- 
tide  J  I:  JLlftAAw^l  alistikbdlu,  in  syllables  thus:  «-/w- 
tik-ld-hi.     In  certain  cases  original  final  vowels  that 


14  6.    WASLA. 

have   been    dropped    reappear   before    the    connec- 

tive  Alif,  e.  g.  ^^yi\j3\   *.fl>  hu-mul-kd-fi-ru-na.    The 

first  word  is  otherwise  uniformly  *jd  hum  (§  \2a).  — 
The  Nunation  (§  3  h)  is  also  treated  as  if  it  ended  in 
a  consonant;  the  favourite  vowel  in  this  case  is  ?,  e.  g. 

iLMwl  Jc^s  pronounced  as  if  written  x^^j  j^JL^>  r«^w- 

lunismuhu,  in  syllables:  ra-gu-lu-nis-mu-hu. 

Note,  Before  a  connective  alif  the  preposition  ^c  "away 
from"  becomes  ^JC,  the  preposition  ^-o,  "from"  becomes  ^ja,  but 
before  the  article  qa. 

e.  The  same  rule  applies  to  a  word  ending  in  a  so- 

called  diphthong  (cf.  §  2) ;  the  consonant  (.  or  ^) 
forming  the  second  part  of  the  diphthong  must  receive 
a  helping  vowel  before  a  connective  Alif,  which  vowel 
is  u  or  I  according  as  the  consonant  in  question  is  . 

or  ^.     Thus  we  have  aJLJI  JihSajo  mus-ta-fa-ivul-ld-hi 

in  place  of  xJLJI  ysdij^,  sJuJI  J^zs^srig-Ia-yil-ba-ka-ra- 

^«  for  5  Juj  I  J^ V    (So,  too,  with  the  termination  L_:L 

NoTE.  The  particles  ^I  "or"  and  ^'  "would  that!"  take  i  as 
helping  vowel. 

/.  The  connective  Alif  is  altogether  omitted  in  the 

following  cases: 


7.    MEDDA.  15 

1)  In  the  article  J|,  when  it  receives  as  prefixes 
the  particles  J^  li  or  J  /«;  e.  g.  |S..^vJU,  lil-hak-ki  for 
;3^3J!^,  tXsc^JU  lal-mag-du  for  tX^xJ^. 

Q      O 

2)  In  ^1  son,  in  apposition  to  the  proper  name 
of  the  son  and  followed  in  the  genitive  by  the  name 

of  the  father;  e.  g.  JuJlll  ^   *JLLo    mus-li-mub-nul' 

rva-U-di  Muslim,  the  son  of  al-Walid.  At  the  beginn- 
ing of  a  line,  however^  even  in  this  case  we  must  write 

S  o 

3)  In  the  word  ^^^\  ismun,  name,  after  the  prepo- 
sition  lo  bi  in  the  oft  recurring  formula  aJU!  *-wkO  bis- 
mil-ld-hi^  in  the  name  of  God. 

Medda.  Inasmuch  as  the  Arabic  orthography  7. 
cannot  tolerate  two  Alifs  side  by  side,  in  such  a  case  ^' 
only  a  single  Alif  is  written,  over  which  is  placed  a 

G    C5  ^  -_ 

idJo  Medda  or  Medd,  (a  sign  derived  from  Joo).  At 
the  beginning  of  a  word  or  syllable  the  Medda  carries 
with  it  the  force  of  a  Hamza;  the  vowel  sign  Fath  is  then 

also  dropped,  e.  g.  J^l  'd-ki-lun  for  J^t  |,  ^\js  kur-d- 

nun  for  ^llo;  so  ^\  'd-ma-na  for  ^jct  I,  since  the 
Hamza  of  the  second  Alif  disappears  as  explained 
§  38«. 


16  8.     THE   SYLLABLE. 

Note.  ^I^  ra'a  may  be  taken  as  an  example  of  the  rule  just 
given.    With  suffixes  it  ought  to  appear,  according  to  §  2^,  as 

811^,  which,  however,  is  written  81^  in  syllables  ra-a-lm. 

b.  Since  a  ^  after  a  long  a  |I__  is  written  on  the  line 

(§  4c)  without  receiving  an  Alif  as  bearer,  the  |  pre- 
ceding the  Hamza  in  such  cases  likewise  receives 
Medda,  as  a  rule,  although  the  latter  has  no  effect  on 

the  pronunciation  of  the  word,  e.  g.  ^\^  gd-a  (for 

ILi.),  SJ^tXjiS  ta-fd-a-lu]  and  the  same  where  •  or  ^ 

appears  as  the  bearer  of  Hamza  5.  UL^I   a-Mb-ba-u- 

hu,  Jo  Li'  kd'i-lun. 

Note.  Arabic  orthography  has  also  an  objection  to  two  Waws 
appearing  side  by  side,  if  the  first  has  a  Damma  (even  though 
the  first  may  be  only  the  bearer  of  a  Hamza,  as  expained  in  §  4  c). 

Thus  ^;«*55)  tu  usun  is  often  written  j-5). 

8.  The  Syllable.    An  open  syllable  ends  in  a  vowel 

short  or  long;  a  shut  syllable  ends  in  a  consonant. 
Every  syllable  begins  with  a  single  consonant,  not 
with  two  or  more  (cf.  §  6).  A  short  syllable  consists 
of  a  consonant  with  a  short  vowel,  as  in  the  second 

syllable  of  c^lJo  md-td  (with  two  open  syllables);  a 
long  syllable  consists  either  1)  of  a  consonant  with  a 
long  vowel,  like  the  open  syllable  md  in  the  above 
example,  or  2)  of  a  consonant,  a  short  vowel  and  a  con- 
sonant  (shut   syllable)   e.    g.    both  the   syllables  of 


9.    THE   TONE.  17 

J^x5  kat-lun  (so  too  v^y^  mau-tun  §  2«)  j^w  sar-ran^ 
or  3)  of  a  shut  syllable  with  a  long  vowel.  This  last 
variety,  however,  is  only  found  (exclusive  of  pausal 
effects  §  10)  when  the  following  consonant  has  been 

doubled  (§  5)  and  is  preceded  by  a  long  «,  as  in  jblo 

dab-da-tun  (rarely  after  ai  as  in  RajIJ  du-rvaib-ba-tun 
which  is  derived  according  to  §  66  from  ddbbatu?i). 
Such  a  syllable  may  be  described  as   doubly  long. 

Other  syllables  of  this  sort  are  shortened  as  Jjb  ijakul 

from  JjJb  yakul\  o».x)^  ramat  from  ^:i>Uoj  ramdt. 

Note.  A  word  consisting  of  but  one  short  syllable,  if  it  stands 
alone,  either  receives  an  addition  at  the  end  (see  §49a6),  or  is 
joined  to  the  following  word.  The  latter  method  is  adopted  in  a 
series  of  particles  (see  §  94),  which  notwithstanding  the  connec- 
tion are  still  regarded  as  more  or  less  independent  words.  The 
principal  stress,  however,  rests  on  the  words  with  which  the  par- 
ticles are  connected. 

The  Accent  or  Tone.  The  accent  in  Arabic  is  thrown  9. 
backwards  towards  the  beginning  of  the  word  till  it 
meets  a  long  syllable,  or  if  there  is  no  such  syllable, 
till  it  reaches  the  first  syllable  of  the  word.  A  simple 
long  syllable  at  the  end  of  a  word,  however,  does  not 
receive  the  accent.    Examples  of  words  with  a  final 

short  syllable:   C>^Li  daraba^  •SjXjmS  istdnkara\  with 

a  final  long  syllable:  Ujc^-^J  tamdmtumd,  4>^  fdrdun, 

xXJUjo  mdmlakatun,  IjJwo  ddrabu,  sjj  lidatun. 

Socin,  Arabic  Grammar.*  2 


18  10.  PAUSE.      11.  NUMERICAL   SIGNS.      ABBREVIATIONS. 

Exceptions:  A  syllable  with  a  connective  Alif  (§  6), 

"jo' 

as  in  Joi'l  (see  §  6«),  cannot  receive  the  accent;  the 
pronunciation  is  therefore  uktiiJ.     In  the  same  way 

monosyllabic  inseparable  particles,  like  :  and  ^  (cf. 
§  94),  prefixed  to  words,  do  not  affect  the  accentuation 

of  the  latter ;  e.  g.  ^-coii  famdsa. 

10,  In  pause  final  short  vowels  are   dropped.     Also 
the  Nunation  un  and  in\  the  Nunation  an  is  changed 

to  a,  the  feminine  termination  k  "   to  5^  (with  the  h 

sounded):  thus  ^oJsb   ndzilun  for  (OjJsLj   ndziluna\ 

Jls..^  ragul  for  Jkir  ragulun\  IJliw.jo  marhaM  for  Lla.*^ 

marlial)an\  }s,^\S  Fdtimah  for  H-ilbLi- 

11.  Numerical  Signs  and  Abbreviations.  The  usual  Arabic 
cyphers  are  the  following: 

♦,    t,   t',   t",   1^,   e,   %  V,   A,   ^ 
0,   1,  2,   3,  4,   5,   6,   7,  8,   9. 

The  tens,  hundreds  &c.,  are  written  to  the  left  of 
the  units  &c.  as  H  19,  tA^d  1895. 

The  following  are  a  few  of  the  most  frequently 
occurring  abbreviations : 

^  =  *!^LIlJI  xjJLi  V/to'^/-55«/<2mw  Peace  be  upon  him ! 

*.*JLo  =  aJLwI  itJJLc  aJU!  Jlo  salla-lldhu  ^alaihi 
wasallama  God  bless  him  and  give  him  peace  (said  of 
Mohammed). 


12.    THE  PEOXOUN.  19 


n.  ETYIMOLOGY  (§§  12—96). 
Chapter  I.    The  Pronoun.  (§§  12—15.) 

The  personal  pronouns  are  either  independent  or  12 
suffixed.  The  independent  or  separate  personal  pro-  ^' 
nouns  have  the  following  forms: 


I.  Pers. 
11.  Pers.  \ 

III.  Pers. 


XoTE  1.  The  second  syllable  of  the  pronoun  of  the  first  pers. 
singular,  although  written  with  I,  is  short.  —  The  forms  in  pa- 
rentheses (2^^  and  Z^^  pers.  plural)  are  used  particularly  before 
Wasla  (§  6d);  these  final  vowels  are  originally  long. 

Note  2.    When  joined  to  3  and  i»3  (see  §  95)  the  pronouns  of 

the  3^^  pers.  sing,  may  lose  their  first  vowel  e.  g.  5^3'  \J^' 

The  suffixed  personal  pronouns^  which  joined  to  a   h. 
noun  indicate  the  genitive,  joined  to  a  verb,  the  ac- 
cusative, are  the  following: 


Sing. 

Plur. 

Dua 

masc.  ,::»S| 
fern,     oi  1 

30^ 

i''A\  "'A 

U^l 

masc.     ye 
fem.        Ip 

(^)^} 
^ 

Ui 

20 

12.    THE  PRONOUN. 

Sing. 

Plur. 

I. 

Pers. 

[  with  nouns  ;^-j- 
1  with  verbs  ^ — 

Q 

II. 

Pers. 

masc.            0 — 

fem.               0 — 

III. 

Pers. 

f  masc.              8 — 
fem.             be — 

Dual 


IJ- 


Ui 


Before  a  connective  Alif  (§  6  d)  the  suffix  pron.  of 
the  1.  pers.  singular  may  receive  as  helping-vowel  the 
a  which  belonged  to  it  originally;  thus  we  may  write 

CjUXJI  (c^Ua^^t   oi'   i-jUjOI  ^lii£:|.     After  6f,  F  and 
ai  the  nominal  suffix  of  the  1.  pers.  sing,  has  the  form 

^  ya.    Occasionally  (in  the  Kur'an  particularly)  the 
suffix  of  the  1.  pers.  sing,  is  indicated  by  a  simple  i, 

of  which  the  sign  is  Kesr  ,  as  Cj^  my  lord!    In 

the  same  way  the  corresponding  verbal  suffix  may 
be  only  ^  ni. 

After  an  immediately  preceding  i  or  ai  the  suffixes 
»,  Lii,  Aifi,  J^  substitute  the  vowel  i  for  w,  thus 
assuming  the  forms  s,  U^,  I^,  J^;  e.  g.  ^JLo  instead 
of  aJUo.  Before  the  connective  Alif  Is^  generally 
becomes   ^.   —   The   suffixes    15   and    li  resume 


13.     THE  DEMONS TRATI\TS  PRONOUNS.  21 

their  original  forms  J^emd  ^  before  a  connective 
Alif. 

For  further  information  regarding  the  affixing  of 
these  pronominal  forms  see  §  82  and  the  table  of 
paradigms  No.  XXIII. 

The  reflexive  pronoun,  when  carrying  a  certain  e. 
amount  of  emphasis  with  it,  is  generally  expressed 

by  the  word  j^Ju  nafsun  soul,  to  which  the  proper 
suffixes  are  appended.  In  many  cases,  however,  the 
personal  pronoun  suffices  to  express  the  reflexive. 

The  demonstrative  pronouns  are  the  following  (with  13. 
their  inflexion  compare  §  76«). 

The  simple  pronoun  (rare)  a. 

Masc.  Fem. 

Sing.  Vo     ^b,  5J;  ^S  iu;  Ij 

Dual  (  ^°'"-         ^t  ^H 

I  Gen.  Ace.  ^^j  j  ^jjlS 


Plur.  j^l  iuUi)  or  £^f^|  (iiUCi) 

This  simple  pronoun  combines: 

(1)  with  the  demonstrative  particle  Li,  generally 
f 
written  defectively  (5>  or  less  correctly  i  §  2&).    The 

result  is  the  usual  demonstrative  pronoun  to  indicate 

that  which  is  near  at  hand  {this,  these): 


22  13.  THE  DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


Masc. 

Fern. 

Sing.                        (^tXiO 

(                          "  ' 

Norn.          ^ItXso 

Dual  \                    y^  ^  , 

Gen.  Acc./^cV.« 

Plur.                                    i 
The  simple  demonstrative 

combines   (2)  with  a 

suffix  of  the  second  person.  Only  in  the  older  Arabic, 
particularly  that  of  the  Kur'an,  however,  does  the 
suffix  vary  according  to  the  number  of  persons  ad- 

dressed  (e.  g.  plur.  Ixlo,  dual  UXJ(^),  elsewhere  it 
appears  uniformly  as  vil.  There  is  also  a  form  with 
J  before  cJ.  The  result  is  two  forms  of  the  demon- 
strative pronoun  to  indicate  that  which  is  more  remote 
(that,  those)\ 

^-^asc.  Fem.      _^ 

Sing.  dl  j,(^Jp(4!lS,  ^iS)  /  dU  (^0  (^ilW 


Dual 


Nom.  dbf  j,  diSt  j  vjjlj,  vii}LS 

Gen.  Ace.  dUoD,  vJCoo  *i*4-v^*j  ^^' 


.  i 


Plur.  k^^^\{^i^\),   rarely  dJ^;^ 

(i.  Among  the  demonstratives  we  must  also  place  the 

article  J I  (see  §  5  &).  When  the  noun,  in  the  circumstances 


14,     THE  RELATIVE  PRONOUNS .  23 

detailed  in  §  6/1,  begins  with  a  J,  this  letter  has  a 
Tesdid  placed  over  it  and  the  J  of  the  article  is  drop- 

-■(,53  ^  (J  a   -o  ii> 

ped.  Thus  we  get  XJLvJiJ  for  xJLJJ^;  so  too  xJJ  for 
dib  (§  5  note). 

The  relative  pronouns  are  the  following:  14. 

^(Xi\  who,  which,  that, — originally  a  compound  a. 

demonstrative  with  the  article  as  one  of  its  elements 
(hence  the  connective  Alif) — declined  as  follows: 

Masc.  Fern. 

Sing.  00^        C^y^ 

[  Gen.  Ace.     ijjJJJI  ^^^4^' 

piur.  (^^.4jjy/^^-ijC^^i;Ij1 

/^<jjo  (indeclinable)  one  who,  such  (a  one)  as,  he  h. 
who,  those  who. 

^Lc  (indeclinable)  that  which,  something  which. 
Among  the  relative  pronouns  may  also  be  included   c. 

j<|,  fem.  RjI  he  who,  she  who.  This  word  is  declinable 
in  the  sing.,  but  the  masc.  often  takes  the  place  of 
the  fem.    It  also  combines  with  the  prons.  in  &  above 

to  form  ,!mjI  every  one  who,  whosoever;  and  U-sj 
whatsoever. 


24  15.    THE  INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS.      16.   17.    THE  VERB. 

15.         The  interi'ogatlve  pronouns  are: 
/y  ^  who? 

I     Lo  what?  Frequently  strengthened  by  the  addition 
of  the  demonstrative  13:  13  Lo  what  then? 
^1,  fern,  abl  what  sort  of?  which? 
Note.    U  after  prepositions  is  shortened  to  *  e.  g.  J  why? 
"With  this  interrogative  U  is   also  connected   the   interrogative 
particle  iT  how  much? 


Chapter  II.    The  Verb.    (§§  16-54.) 

16.  The  great  majority  of  Arabic  verbs  have  three 
radical  letters ;  only  a  small  minority  have  four  radi- 
cals. The  ground-form  of  verbs,  according  to  which 
they  are  arranged  in  grammar  and  dictionary,  is  the 

third  person  singular  of  the  perfect.    The  verb  JJti 
(to  do)  is  used  as  a  model  paradigm. 

Note.  Since  all  Arabic  dictionaries  give  the  verbal  and  no- 
minal derivatives  under  their  respective  root-forms,  it  is  necessary, 
in  order  to  find  the  three  radicals  with  ease,  to  note  carefully  what 
consonants  are  employed  in  the  formation  of  verbs  and  nouns  as 
prefixes  and  affixes  to,  and  as  infixes  in,  the  stem. 

17.  From  this  ground-form  or  root,  which  is  named 
by  grammarians  the  first  stem,  other  stems  are  deri- 

'    ved  by  a  series  of  uniform  changes,  represented  by 


18.    THE  FIRST   STEM.  25 

modifications  of  the  verb  Jkii,  but  usually  referred 
to  by  their  respective  numbers  in  the  series.  Thus 
we  speak  of  "the  eighth  stem",  (indicated  in  the  dic- 
tionary simply  by  YIII)  not  as  in  Hebrew  and  Syriac 
of  the  Piel,  the  Afel  &c.  The  following  stems,  the 
order  of  which  must  be  carefully  noted,  are  those 
most  frequently  met  with: 


I  Jii 

IV    Joiil 

VII  Juuli. 

^  —  0  -  0 

X  jL»ii«,l 

II  Jlii 

V  S^ 

VIII  JixM 

XI      JLiij) 

II  jiu 

Vljilii' 

(ix  jobr 

Note  a.     Of  these  No.  IX  and  especially  No.  XI  are  of  less 

frequent  occurrence;  still  more  rare  are  XII  Jcj*5|,  XIII  Jj^^I, 

XIV  JiS^^I ,  XV  ^JU*il.  Which  of  these  derived  stems  are  formed 

from  any  given  verb,  and  to  what  extent  the  meaning  of  the  ground- 
form  is  modified  by  them,  will  be  found  in  the  dictionary  under 
each  verh. 

Note  b.    In  many  cases  the  verb  is  used  to  express  the  idea 
that  some  one  wishes  to  do  something  or  has  something  done; 

thus  «JU5  "he  killed  him''  may  also  signify  "he  wished  to  kill  him", 


J^O  s      ^   ^  ^ 


and  iAiic  s^yh  "he  cut  off  his  head  (prop,  neck)"  may  mean  "he 
had  (ciiravit)  his  head  cut  off." 

The  ground-form  I,  in  the  majority  of  verbs,  takes  18. 

the  form  Jkjii,  e.  g.  JcajJ  to  kill;  there  is  also — mostly 

with  intransitive  verbs — a  form  Joti  (cf.  153),  e.  g. 

^jyi  to  be  sad,  J^  to  do  (transitive),  and  also  a 


26  19,   20.    THE  II.  AND  III.   STEMS. 

form  J,*i  (cf.  p])) ,  confined  to  intransitive  verbs,  as 
^jumj^  to  be  beautiful.  Sometimes  both  the  transitive 
and  intransitive  forms,  J^ii  and  Juti  or  J.ii,  are 
found  side  by  side  in  the  same  verb.  One  and  the 
same  verb,  again,  may  have  both  the  forms  J^«i  and 

Ski. 

19.  The  II.  stem  J^ii  (corresponding  to  the  Hebrew 
Pi"el)  usually  denotes  a  greater  intensity  of  the  action 
expressed  by  the  simple  verb.  This  intensification 
may  affect  the  subject,  object  or  qualifying  adjunct, 

as  Jlr  to  kill  many  people,  to  massacre  (intensi- 
fication of  the  object).     In  the  majority  of  verbs, 

however,  the  IL_stem  is  causative  as  lli  to  know, 

^a  ^  ————————  I 

IJLi  cause  to  know,  to  teach.  It  is  also  declarative — 
as  in  ^j^  to  lie,  v.^J^to  take  one  for,  declare  one 
to  be,  a  liar — and  denominative,  as  in  ^J;^xs^  to  collect 
an  army  (jio-v^). 

20.  The  III.  stem  J.^li  expresses  an  attempt  or  effort 
to  perform  the  action  of  the  simple  verb  on  some  per- 
son, to  influence  some  person  or  thing.  Thus  JociJ  to 
kill,  but  JoU*  to  try  to  kill,  to  fight  with ;  ^Uc5^to 
write,  v2^J*L^  to   correspond  with  (with  accusative  of 


21,   22.    THE   IV.  AND  V.   STEMS.  27 

the  person  corresponded  with).  This  stem  also  means 
to  exercise  some  abstract  quality  on  a  person  or  thing, 

e.  g.  rjNf  to  be  soft,  gentle,  ^Twj^  to  exercise  gentleness 
on  some  one,  to  treat  one  kindly. 

The   IV.  stem  jjtit  (the  Hebrew  HipVil)  has  a 21. 

causative  signification,  as  ^JLo  to  be  in  good  condi- 

tion,    ^JLol    to    bring   into    good    condition.     Very 

frequently  we  find,  with  this  stem,  denominative  verbs 
which  appear  to  us  as  intransitive,  but  to  the  Arab 
as  possessing  an  implicit  transitive  force,  and  which 
express  the  idea  of  action  in  a  certain  definite  direction, 

as  ^jwwu^j^l  to  do  good.  Frequently,  too,  verbs  of  this 
stem  c_onvey_the  idea  of  going  to  a  place,  of  entering 

upon  a  certain  period  or  condition;  e.g.  CjZ^I  to  go 

towards  the  West,  ^-ye!  to  enter  upon  the  period  of 

the  morning,  to  be  something  in  the  morning,  OwCij 

to  reach  the  top^  to  be  high;  lUi  (from  lU*  rise  up, 
stand)  to  halt,  to  stay. 

The  V.  stem  Jii^  (Hebrew  Hithpa'^el),  a  sort  of 22. 
middje.  voice  is  formed  from  the  11.  stem  and  has  both  a 

reflexive  and  a  reciprocal  meaning,  e.  g.  llio  to  make 

one's  self  great,  llij  to  let  one's  self  be  taught,  to 
learn.    Sometimes  a  verb  in  the  V.  stem  conveys  the 


28  23,  24,  25.   THE  VI.,  VII.  and  VIIL  stems. 

idea  of  giving  one's  self  out  as  something,  e.  g.  Llli* 
to  give  one's  self  out  for,  to  conduct  one's  self  as,  a 
prophet. 

23.  The  VL  stem  jiLb,  derived  from  the  ITT,  stem,  is 
the  reflexive  form  oi  the  latter,  and  has  a  reflexive  or 
reciprocal  signification,  as  l^L^*  to  show  one's  self  bold ; 
JjLftj*  to  fight  one  another  (usually  in  the  plural). 
Another  signification  is  seen,  for  example,  in  JLij,  VI 

form  of  ^Lc^  to  be  high,  which  means  to  exalt  one's 
self  and  then  simply:  to  be  exalted. 

24.  The  VII.  stem  Jiiil  (the  Hebrew  NipVal  with 

the  connective  Alif  ace.  to  §  Qa),  derived  in  most  cases 
from  the  I.  stem,  is  a  middle  or  reflexive  form  of  the 
latter.     Its   signification   may  also  be  described  as 

quasi-passive,  e.  g.  1^  to  break  l^Ljol,  to  break  or 

be  broken  in  pieces. 

25.  The  VIIL  stem  j^ixil,  (with  connective  Alif  §  6«) 
is  likewise  a  middle  and  reflexive  form,  for  the  most 
part  of  the  I.  stem,  as  (jiljCfi^l ,  to  oppose  one's  self, 
object  to;  sometimes  also  with  reciprocal  signification 
as  |V-oJC^J,  to  dispute,  contend  with  each  other. 

Note.    In  the  case  of  verbs  whose  first  radical  is  jo,  j5,  b 
or  15,  the  Cf  of  the  VIII.  stem  is  changed  to  the  emphatic  h,  and 


26,  27.    THE   IX.  AND   X.   STEMS.  29 

is  even  assimilated  to  the  first  radical,  when  that  letter  is  a  dental 

as  (r.;hot,  instead  of  j-^ol  from  j^;  JUil  or  Jls]  for  JUI3I  from 
—    *      -•  .  "  *'''''-    ..s 

Jll3;  kl>  is  sometimes  assimilated  also  to  a  preceding  ki»,  e.  g.  C-Mjf 

or  C*-Jl  from  C^  properly  wUaXiI;  after  J,  o  and  3  C*  is  changed 

into  the  soft  o,  e.  g.  jIj^I  for  JU3I  from  J\'y,  ^yj\  for  ^^Jl. 

The  IX.  stem  Juiif  (as  also  the  XI.  stem  JLiil,26. 

hoth  with  connective  Alif)  is  used  of  verbs  which 
denote  the  possession  of  inherent  qualities  such  as 
colours   or  bodily  defects,  e.  g.  from  the  stem  uuo: 

ljJa\  to  be  or  become  yellow;  from  the  stem  .^:  Tl^l 

to  be  one-eyed;  from  the  stem  5-*^^:  ^Li^l  to  be  red. 

The  X.   stem  JutA;:**.!,  (with  connective  Alif)  is 27. 

primarily  a  reflexive  of  the  IV.  Jmi!  (otherwise  a 
reflexive,  formed  on  the  analogy  of  the  YIII.  stem,  from 

a  stem  JolLu;  with  a  prefixed  5),  as  from  the  stem  (ji^^« 

IV.  ^^^\  to   grieve:   X.  ^^iw^yuJ  to  grieve  (ones 

self).    Very  frequently  the  X.  stem  denotes  also  to 

wish  or  to  beg  something  for  one's  self,  e.  g.  from  ^Jl^S 

to  pardon,  X.:  wA*a*w[  to  ask  for  pardon;  or  to  think 

that  something  is  so,  as  vIa^Z  to  be  necessary,  IV: 

^jwrs^jl  to  make  necessary,  X:  .^^^jijJi  to  consider 

something  as  necessary  for  one's  self. 


30       28.   THE   QUADPaLIT.  STEMS.      29.  THE  PASSIVE.      30.  THE   TENSES. 

28.  The  quadriliteral  stems  are  denoted,  for  tlie  verbal 

and  nominal  forms,  by  the  paradigm  jJui  (that  is 

by  the  addition  of  a  fourth  radical  to  Jkii),  and  con- 
sist for  the  most  part  of  two  stems,  of  which  the  first 
may  be  said  to  correspond  to  the  second  stem  of  the 

triliteral  verb  (for  Joii  is  in  reality  JJtii),  and  the 

second  Jiiij  to  the  fifth,  e.  g.  vJ^Xls  to  overturn, 

cast  down,  v«JCaXj  fall  down. 

Note.  The  stems  III  JJU^I  and  IV  Jlx^l  (the  last  corre- 
sponding  to  the  IX.  stem  of  the  triliterals)  are  rare  e.  g.  ^jUbl,  to 
be  quiet,  from  a  stem  ^^W^. 

29.  In  addition  to  the  active^  the  Arabic  verb  has  a 
passive  voice.  This  passive  is  formed  in  the  perfect 
in  such  a  way  that  in  place  of  the  «!-vowels  of  the 
active  we  have  the  order  u-i-a  (i  with  the  second,  a 
with  the  third  radical);   thus  the  act.  of  stem  1.  is 

Juti,  the  pass:  Jjii.  The  additional  formative  syllables 

of  the  derived  stems  also  receive  the  vowel  w,  e.  g. 

pass.  V.  J^iftj,  VIII  Jk*JCi!  (with  connective  Alif). 

30.  The  Arabic  verb  has  two  principal  tenses,  a.  perfect 
^'  which,  generally  speaking,  denotes  a  completed  action, 

and  an  imperfect  which  in  general  denotes  an  uncom- 
pleted action. 


.SITY 

31.    THE  MOODS.  Vs,^;^^^^ 

The  imperfect  is  formed  by  adding  the  prefix  S  ya  h. 
for  the  active  of  the  L,  V.,  YL,  VII.,  YIII.,  IX.  and 

X.  stems,  and  the  prefix  j  yu  for  the  active  of  the 
II.,  III.  und  IV.  stems,  and  for  the  passive  of  all  the 
stems  without  exception. 

In  the  case  of  verbs  of  which  Juti  is  the  type,  the  c. 
s^cond^dical,  in  the  impf.  act,  of  stem  I.^  may  receive 
one  or  other  of  the  vowels  w,  i,  a.  Which  of  the  three 
must  be  used  for  a  particular  verb  will  be  found 
indicated  in  the  dictionary  under  that  verb  (e.  g.  Jlo 
impf.  u)  and  should  be  taken  careful  note  of.    Those 

verbs,  on  the  other  hand,  of  which  Joii  (with  e-vowel) 

is  the  type,  together  with  all  passives  point  their  second 

radical  with  a  only,  thus  impf.  act.  I.  JJLa.);  pass.  JJtij. 

Those  verbs,  finally,  of  which  Joii  (with  2/-vowel)  is  the 
type,  take  u  with  the  second  radical  for  the  imperfect. 
As  regards  the  active  imperfect  of  the  derived  stems, 
the  second  radical  takes  i  throughout,  with  the  excep- 
tion of  stems  V.  and  VI.  where  it  takes  «;  thus  impf. 

II.  Jlxaj  but  V.  JJtlo. 

In  the  imperfect  various  Moods  are  distinguished,  31. 
namely  the  ordinary  mood  which  we  call  the  indicative, 
the  dependent  mood  or  subjunctive,  and  a  modus  apo- 
copatus   (sometimes    called  the  jussive).     These  are 


32  32.    THE   IMPERATIVE. 

distinguished  as  follows:  in  the  indicative  the  last 
radical,  when  final,  always  takes  u,  as  impf.  I  JJtAj, 
III.  JlcLL;  in  the  subjunctive  always  a^  as  J^*ij, 
while  in  the  apocopatus  the  third  radical  is  vowelless. 
In  addition  to  the  above  there  is  a  double  modus 
energicus,  which  is  formed  by  a^Dpending  the  syllables 
anna  or  an  (in  some  forms  only  7i)  to  the  impf.  as 

'   a    -^"i^  .    T-^- 

jjJ.JUlJ  or  ^Xxsu. 

Note.  As  the  modus  energicus  is  of  comparatively  rare 
occurrence,  it  is  given  in  the  tables  of  paradigms  only  in  the  case 
of  the  ordinary  strong  verb.  From  the  examples  there  given  it 
may  easily  be  formed  for  the  other  verbs, 

32.  The  imperaiive  agrees  with  the  apocopated  imper- 
fect as  regards  vocalisation  and  termination,  except 
that  the  prefixes  ya  or  yu  are  wanting.  In  the  imper. 
of  the  I.  stem  a  helping  vowel  (therefore  with  connec- 
tive Alif  §  6  fl!)  is  prefixed  in  all  cases  where  the  first 
consonant  is  without  a  vowel  of  its  own.  This  vowel 
disappears,  however,  in  pronunciation  as  soon  as  the 

word  ceases  to  stand  alone,  e.  g.  JJiil  but       ^\  jU'. 

The  same  applies  to  stems  VII. — X.    The  imperative 
has  the  same  energetic  bye-forms  as  the  imperfect. 

IstoTE.  In  the  imper.  of  stem  I  the  prosthetic  vowel  is  u  when 
the  second  radical  has  u,  as  ^y3],  but  i  when  it  is  pointed  with 
a  or  i,  as  Jx^I,  ^31. 


33.     NUMBER,  PREFIXES   AND   AFFIXES.  33 

Note  b.  In  the  imper.  of  the  IV.  stem  the  prosthetic  T,  which 
is  characteristic  of  the  stem,  is  retained,  although  it  disappears 

after  the  prefixed  i  of  the  impf.  Hence  impf.  J^  (for  J*JVi), 

but  imper.  J«il. 

In  the  perfect,    imperfect  and  imperative,  there  33. 
are,  in  addition  to  the  singular  and  plural,  dual  forms 
for  the  second  and  third  persons.    Verbs  are  inflected 
by  the  addition  of  modified  and  abbreviated  forms 
of  the  personal  pronouns,  and  of  the  dual  and  plural 

terminations  of  nouns,  to  the  ground-forms  J^xi  and 

JJLftj  (for  the  terminations  ani  and  una  of  the  impf. 

indie,  vid.  §  76  «).  The  terminations  just  named,  along 
with  the  ending  ma  of  the  2.  pers.  fem.  sing., 
drop  the  syllables  ni  and  na  in  the  subjunctive,  the 
apocopated  imperfect  and  the  imperative.  The  I,  which 
appears  in  the  paradigm  after  the  final  .  _!_  in  the 
perf.  and  in  these  shortened  forms  of  the  impf.  and 
imper.,  has  no  phonetic  value  (cf.  §  2e). 

As  to  the  prefixes  of  the  impf.,  it  is  to  be  noted 
that  in  place  of  the  prefix  j  of  the  3.  pers.  masc,  we 
have  s  as  the  prefix  of  the  2.  pers.  sing,  and  plur., 
and  of  the  3  pers.  fem.  of  the  sing.,  |  to  indicate  the 
1.  pers.  sing.,  and  j  the  1.  pers.  plur. 

The  affixes  emplo^-ed  in  the  inflexion  of  the  verb  are  given 
in  paradigm  I. 

Socin,  Arabic  Grammar^.  3 


34  34.    VERBS  MEDIAE   GEMINATAE. 

Note  a.  In  the  V.  and  VI.  forms  of  verbs  whose  first  letter 
is  a  dental  or  a  sibilant,  the  formative  prefix  occasionally  drops 
its  vowel  and  is  assimilated  to  the  first  radical  of  the  verb,  in 
which  case  the  perf.  and  imper.  have  a  helping  vowel  (§  6)  prefixed 

6.  g.  yJl  wrap  one's  self  up,  impf.  y>^. 

Note  b.  In  the  impf.  of  these  two  stems,  the  prefix  5  may 
be  treated  in   such   a  way  that  instead  of  the  two  syllables  S? 

only  <f  remains,  e.  g.  from  JX9  2.  pers.  msc.  impf.  V.  j:^  for  J^^a^. 

Note  c.    In  the  impf.  VII.  and  VIII.  stems  the  tone  remains 

on  the  same  syllable  on  which  it  falls  in  the  perf.,  contrary  to 

the  rule  laid  down  in  §  9 ;  thus  J^Saj  J!^  yankcitilu,  ydktatilu. 

For  the  conjugation  of  the  strong  verb  with  three  radicals 
see  paradigms  II,  III  and  V,  for  that  of  the  quadriliteral  verbs 
see  paradigm  IV.  In  the  paradigms  the  participles  and  infinitives 
are  also  given,  although  the  discussion  of  these  forms  has  been 
deferred  to  §§  60  and  61.  - 

34.  Among  the  ordinary  strong  verbs  must  also  be 
reckoned  the  so-called  verbs  mediae  gemindtae^  i.  e. 
verbs  whose  second  and  third  radicals  are  identical. 
A  contraction  of  these  last  two  radicals  takes 
place  in  all  those  cases  in  which 
a.  1)  the  first,  second  and  third  radicals  have  each 
a  short  vowel;  in  this  case  the  vowel  of  the  second 

radical  is  always  dropped,  e.  g.  ^i  (to  flee)  contracted 

from  Tli  (which  statement  is  not  to  be  understood 

as  implying  that  a  form  Tli  once  really  existed  in 

Arabic)  3.  p.  perf.  pass.  I.  Is  from  Iwi;  3.  p.  impf. 

VII.  ^ji-o  from  .^^; 


35j   36.    VERBS  MEDIAE   GEMIXATAE.  35 

2)  When  the  first  two  radicals  have  each  a  short,  h. 
and  the  third  a  long,  vowel,  e.  g.  3.  p.   dual  masc. 

perf.   Ci  from  CCi; 

3)  Generally  also  when  the  first  radical  has  a  long  c. 
rt,  e.  g.  3.  s.  m.  perf.  of  the  III.  stem  Xi  contracted  from 
rrU  (which  is  also  found),  passive  ^sys- 

When  the  first  radical  is  vowelless  and  the  second  35. 
has  a  short  vowel,  then  contraction  takes  place  and 
the  vowel  of  the  second  radical  passes  over  to  the 

first.    Thus  3.  pers.  impf.  act.  ^aj  for  .Ju, ;  pass.  Ju 

from  »^. 

When  the  third  radical  is  vowelless,  there  is  no  36. 
contraction  in  the  body  of  the  word:  e.  g.  2.  pers.  sing. 

masc.  perf.  act.  visli;  3.  pers.  plur.  fern.  impf.  act. 


^     O        "  ^ 


..^jL).    But  when  the  third  radical  stands  at  the  end 

of  a  verbal  form  with  no  vowel  following,  as  in  various 
forms  of  the  apocopated  impf.  and  the  2.  pers.  sing. 

masc.  of  the  imper.,  we  find  the  full  forms  ;vAj,  ;vil 
only  in  the  dialects.  As  a  rule  contraction  takes  place 
and  an  additional  vowel  is  assumed  at  the  end  in 
order  to  preserve  the  doubling  of  the  radical;  thus 

we  have  ^aj,  ji,  from  4>.  imper.  jy 


36  37.    HAMZATE   VERBS. 

Note.     In  the  case  of  verbs  of  the  forms  J^  and  J^  the 

vowel  of  the  second  radical  appears  only  in  the  uncontracted  form 

6.  g.  J^  to  loathe,  1.  pers.  perf.  oJULo;  hence  the  vowel  a  of  the 

impf.  J^.. 

For  the  conjugation  of  verbs  mediae  geminatae  see  paradigms 

Nos.  VI— VIII;  model  verb  p  to  flee. 

37.  Those  verbs  that  have  a  Hamza  j^  as  first,  second 

or  third  radical  are  for  the  most  part  regular,  as  31  to 

>  ^^  -^-^  ^^"^ 

make  an  impression,  impf.  wjL>;  |^*  to  read,  impf.  |^. 

In  certain  cases  we  find,  according  to  §  4&,  *  or  ,^ 
(without  points)  as  bearers  of  the  Hamza,  or  ^^  may 

stand  without  a  bearer,  thus  3.  s.  m.  perf.  act.  »1aa5^ 
to  be  sad,  yjw«j  to  be  brave;  3.  s.  m.  impf.  passive  of 
3*1:  yJjj;  3-  sing.  masc.  perf.  act.  \n^  to  err,  fem. 
c^A^i;  3.  s.  m.  impf.  act.  of  JLI  to  ask:  J^J!o.  Oc- 
casionally an  I  takes  the  place  of  two  Alifs,  according 
to  §  7;  e.  g.  3.  s.  m.  perf.  III.  of  pT:  3  for  3||;  VI. 

of  l!^  (bind  up  a  wound  &c.)  1:&^S". 

38.  While  in  all  these  cases  the  j>  may  easily  be  distin- 
guished as  the  third  radical  of  the  verb,  there  are  a 
few  forms  in  which  the  verba  hamzata  are  more  diffi- 
cult to  distinguish,  inasmuch  as  the  *  sometimes 
entirely  disappears;  from  this  point  of  view  these 
verbs  ought  rather  to  be  reckoned  among  the  weak 


38.    HAMZATE  VERBS.  37 

verbs  (§  39  ff.).    The  most  important  of  such  cases 
are  the  following: 

1)  After  !,  I,  I  (also  after  a  connective  Alif  |,  |,  I  a. 

at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence)  ^  gives  up  its  power 

as  a  consonant  (cf.  §  7);  hence,  in  place  of  'a\  V,  Y 

^-^      — 
simply  '^,  \i,  %  e.  g.  3.  s.  m.  perf.  IV.  of  Ji\:  >.j|  for 

^-^^  --.^  .    ^   ^ 

IjII;  3.  s.  m.  perf.  pass.  IV.  of  yj\  is  ^i*  |  in  place  of 

J>^  I.    So  also  imper.  I.  J^j,[  for  wiSj. 

2)  In  the  imper.  of  the  I.  form  the  verbs  J^(  b. 
take,  J^l  eat,  ^^1  order,  drop  the  ^  altogether:  JLi&-, 
Jl^  yjo ;  in  the  same  way,  from  JLw  to  ask,  the  impera- 
tive  is  either  JLuj  or  JlL  &c. 

Note.  Should  3  or  3  come  to  stand  as  inseparable  particles 
(§  87)  before  one  of  the  imperatives  under  a,  the  prosthetic  Alif 
is   dropped  and  the  radical  Hamza  reappears,   receiving,  as  its 

bearer,  an  Alif  on  account  of  the  preceding  Fath,  as  in  p\}.   The 

same  holds  good  in  the  case  of  two  separate  words:  thus  4^5! 

i  - 

3.  s.  m.  perf.  pass.  VIII  of  ^^^I  connected  with  a  preceding  word 
becomes  Q^^)  ^jJI  elladi-tumina. 

3)  In  the  VI.  form  the  ^  of  verbs  primae  ^  is  c. 
sometimes  changed  to  .,  as  wo!i>  in  place  of  CoU 
(for^lb). 

4)  In  the  VIII.  form  the  >  of  the  verb  ^<L^  is  d 


38  39.    THE  WEAK  VERBS.      40.    VERBS  PRIMAE  5   AND   ^. 

assimilated  to  the  following  5,  the  result  being  j*,  as 

4\i*|  instead  of  an  original  jk^SJ,  impf.  tX^o,  but 

" ^  ^^  - 

from  wil,  to  order,  w.ajI 

For  the  conjugation  of  the  verba  hamzata  see  paradigm  IX. 

The  Weak  Verbs. 

39.  The  weak  verbal  stems  are  those  having  a  .  or 
a  j<  as  first,  second  or  third  radical;  under  inflection 
these  semivowels  in  some  cases  resolve  themselves  into 
full  vowels,  in  others  they  are  treated  as  consonants. 

40.  The  Verbs  primae  .  and  ^  differ  from  the  strong 
verbs  in  the  following  points: 

a.  1)  In  the  impf.  and  imper.  of  the  I  stem  a  number 
of  verbs  primae  .  surrender  their  first  radical  and 

take  the  vowel  i  with  their  second  (cf.  ^b']),  as  jJ. 

to  bring  forth^  impf.  jJLS,  imper.  jj. 

h.  2)  Under  the  influence  of  a  guttural  a  few  verbs 
take  a  in  place  of  i  with  their  second  radical,  drop- 
ping the  .,  however,  like  the  others,  as   i.^^  to  lay, 

impf.    «^j;  so  *i^  to  fall,  C^^  to  give  and  others 
(see  the  dictionaries). 
c.         3)  In  verbs  primae  (^,  jj_  is  changed  to  i7,   e.  g. 

the  impf.  IV  of  iaiG  to  be  awake,  properly  Joajo,  be- 

comes  iaio. 


41,   42.    VERBS  MEDIAE    5  AND   ^.  39 

4)  In  the  VIII.  stem  the   first  radical  of  verbs  d. 
primae  .   and  ^  is  assimilated  to  the  following  ^^^ 

e.  g.  from  ji^  to  promise,  Juij]  for  Job'^l  (cf.  §  38<?). 

Note.    A  few  verbs  of  the  form  ^yti  also  give  up  the  first 

radical  in  the  imperf.  as  >^f^  to  inherit,  impf.  >l»yi  (cf.  §  18). 

For  the  conjugation  of  the  verbs  primae  5  and  ^  see  para- 
digm X  where  will  be  found  the  principal  forms  of  the  verbs 

J-tf3  to  arrive,  ^J^  to  leave,  ^5  to  be  dirty,  Ja-^  to  be  anxious, 

jj*-3  to  be  sleepy,  ^-*i  to  be  easy. 

Verbs  mediae  ^   and  ^.    In  the  II.,  III.,  V.,  VI.  41. 
and  IX.  stems,  .  and       are  treated  as  consonants, 
and  the  inflexion  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  strong 

verb;  thus  3.  s.  m.  perf.  II  of  JIS*  (to  say)  med.  ,: 

J^",  3.  s.  m.  perf.  Ill  of  *Lww  (to  travel)  med.  ^:  oLL. 
In  the  other  stems  these  verbs  are  inflected  according 
to  the  following  rules: 

Long  a  takes  the  place  of  the  middle  radical:        42. 

in  the  perf.  active  of  the  I.,  IV.,  VII.,  VIII.  and  a. 

X.  stems,  as  Jli,  Jlil,  JUlj,  JUciJ,  ^\JCk1\\ 

in  the  impf.  passive  of  the  same  stems,  as  JLL,  JL1>,  h, 

in  the  impf.  active  of  VII.  and  VIII.,  as  JLsij,  JLiL ;  c, 
in  the  impf.  active  of  the  I.  stem  of  verbs  of  the  d. 

form  Joti  e.  g.  oL^  to  fear,  impf.  oL^. 


40  43,   44.    VERBS   MEDIAE  ^   AND   ^, 

43.  Long  J  takes  the  place  of  the  middle  radical: 

a.         in  the  perf.  passive  of  the  L,  IV.,  VII.,  VIII.  and 

X.  stems  as  Jur,  J^a^I,  J-aajI)  J-^'I?  J..>s3^Cwwl5 
^).         in  the  impf.  active  of  IV.  und  X.,  as  Juaj,  Jl^axa^j  ; 
'  c.         in  the  impf.  active  of  verbs  med.   ^,    as  ^.juao. 
The  corresponding  form  of  verbs  med.  .,  on  the  other 
hand,  takes  long  ?/,  as  J«.iij. 

Note.   The  nature  of  the  phonetic  changes  just  detailed  will 
be  more  readily  understood  from  the   standpoint   of  the  strong  • 

verb  if  it  be  noted  that  5 ,  i ,  5 ,  i ;   5 ,  i pass 

into  a;    5 ,  5 ,  ^ ,  f^ into  *;    j into  m.      It  is  not 

meant  by  this   that  the  corresponding  strong   forms   were  ever 
really  found,  in  these  verbs,  at  any  period  of  the  language. 

44.  The    whole    of   the    long    vowels    mentioned    in 
§§  42 — 43  are  shortened  (§  8)  in  a  shut  syllable,  e.  g.: 

2.  s.  m.  perf.  act.  IV.  of  JIS*  and  TLl:  v:;Jj|  and 


ojAwl; 


^i    0^9 


3.  sing.  masc.  apoc.  impf.  pass.  I  J^L,  y^^  (with 
the  tone  on  the  last  syllable  as  if  contravening  §  9). 
2.  pers.  masc.  sing,  imper.  I.  of  oLi>  (§  42</): 
(but  plur.  !^l^); 

2.  pers.  masc.  sing.  perf.  pass.  oJ^; 

3.  pers.  sing.  masc.  apoc.  impf.  act.  IV.  Jiaj  ; 

T        "  V 

2.  pers.  sing.  masc.  imper.  I:  wa«,  Jo. 


45,  46.    VERBS  ULTIMAE  5   AND   ^.  41 

In  the  perf.  acthe  of  I,  verbs  med.  .  take  u  where 
-we  should  expect  a,  (cf.  pipj?)  as  iJU,  while  verbs 
med.  ^  take  2,  as  iiv«- ;  «  is  also  found  in  verbs  of 
the  form  J^xi,  as  owi^  from  ^L^  (for  a  theoretical 

J- 

Note  a.  Instead  of  the  apocop.  impf.  ^J;Xj>  &c.  from  jjV,to  be, 
we  sometimes  find  the  still  shorter  form  JO. 

Note  b.  From  a  few  verbs  med.  %  and  ^  strong  forms 
are  found  in  stems  I.,  IV.,  YIIL,  X.;  e.  g.  IV.  ^ja.)  compel;  X. 
k^y^a:iml  to  find  correct,  a  denominative  form  from  ^]ya  correct. 

For[^the  conjugation  of  these  verbs  see  paradigms  XI — XIV. 

Verbs  ultimae  *  and  ^.   Verbs  ultimae  .  pass  into  45. 
ultimae  ^^  in  all  the  derived  stems,  and  in  the  perf. 
and  impf.  passive  of  the  1  stem;  thus  from  .ya  we 

have  3  s.  m.  perf.  II  ;^Lc.    The  same  applies  to  the 

active  of  stem  I  of  the  form  JjJ;  thus'LoT  becomes 

^^r  (to  have  pleasure  in). 

If  the  second  radical  has  «,  this  vowel  is  changed  46. 
in  every  case  into  a  long  final  a.  In  order  to  distinguish  ^' 
the  stems  ult.  ^  from  those  ult.  .  this  final  a  is  in  the 
former  case  indicated  by  (^,  in  the  latter  by  !  (this 

applies  only  to  the  3.  s.  m.  perf.  act.  I).    Thus    SI  to 

throw,  iCjt  carry  on  a  war ;  but  II.  ^T,  ^\is.  &c.  Similarly 


42  46.    VERBS  ULTIMAE  ^   AND   ^. 

in  the  imperfects  (cf.  §  45),  e.  g.  indie,  and  subj.  pass.  II 
^1)  (in  place  of  a  theoretical  j^^ols  and  Zi^vj) ;  impf. 
act.  I  of  ^s,  (^v:>;  impf.  act.  V.  ^aJk^^. 

Note.    With  the  same  reservation  as  mider  §  43c  note,   we 

would  call  attention  to  the  fact  that  the  combinations  5 ,  ^5 , 

5——,  y£ all  pass  into  long  a. 

h.  In  all  the  cases  mentioned  in  the  preceding  sub- 
section, a  diphthong  (§  2  a)  appears  before  the  in- 
flectional additions  that  begin  with  a  consonant.  Thus: 

2.  sing.  masc.  perf.  act.  I  \^/jo\  ;  from  lyi :  vci.Cc ;  II 

c.  In  the  case  also  of  the  inflectional  additions  2?, 
una,  ma  (and  its  shortened  form  «),  the  a  of  the  second 
radical,  (after  the  elision  of  the  third  radical)  unites 
with  their  initial  vowel  to  form  a  diphthong.    Thus: 

3.  pers.  masc.  plur.  perf.  act.  I.  \yos,  ^V^'  ^^*  ^^P^- 
pass.  II.  i^Joyj),  subj.  I^^l);  do.  act.  I.  ^y^J>,  V. 
(jyowicj;  2.  pers.  fem.  sing,  of  the  last  ^j^lx.j,  subj. 

d.  Before  the  dual  terminations  a  and  afii  the  last 
radical  of  this  class  of  verbs  is  treated  as  a  strong 
letter,  e.  g.  3.  pers.  perf.  act.  I.  LCvoT,  Ijy^;  impf.  pass. 
II.  ^Cv^^  ^^'    -^y  ^^®  addition  of  the  termination  at, 


47.    VERBS   ULTIMAK   5   AND    ^5.  43 

the  3.  pers.  fern.  sing,  of  the  perfect  must  originally 
have  ended  in  dt\  this  ending,  however,  has  now  become 
at  in  accordance  with  §  8,  as  v^^;  ^SL.  According 
to  the  analogy  of  the  above  is  also  formed  the  3.  pers. 
fem.  of  the  dual;  thus  we  find  LiX,  Ij^  (where  we 
should  expect  liUoT,  LSlyc.). 
•    In  the  impf.  active  of  stem  I,  verbs  ult.  .  of  the  47. 

form  JoiS  take  an  w,  those  ult.  ^  an  ?",  the  third 
radical  quiescing  in  these  vowels.  The  ending  u  of  the 

imperf.  is  lost,  e.  g.  ^\Ju,  {S^r?.-  "^^^  imperfects  active 
of  the  derived  forms  (with  the  exception  of  V  and  VI) 
are  formed  on  the  model  of  the  last  mentioned  forms, 

as  II  ^o,  (^Cij  and  so  on. 

Note.    With  the  same  reservation  as  under  §  43  c  note,  it 
may  be  pointed  out  that  ^ passes  into  ii,  ^ into  %. 

Affixes  beginning  with  a  consonant  are  appended  &• 
in  every  case  to  the  i  or  the  u  just  mentioned,  as  3.  pers. 

fem.  plur.  impf.  1.  ^\juow>,  r^<>3L^,\  similarly  in  the 
peif.,  e.  g.  2.  sing.  masc.  perf.  pass,  vi-uyox;  do.  from 
Jaj  I.  cy^> ;   from  J^  I  ^^.wl;. 

If  the  second  radical  has  i  or  w,  the  third  radical  c. 
is  dropped  and  the  terminations  ?7,  una^  ina  added  to 

the  second,  e.  g.  3.  plur.  masc.  perf.  pass,  lyo^  (not 


44    48.  VERBS  ULTIMAE  ^  AND  ^J.      49.  DOUBLY  WEAK  VERBS. 


l^s),   l^yt;   3.  plur.  masc.  impf.  act.  ^jyoo,  ^j^yb 
(not    ^yLolj,    ^^ylkj);     2.    pers.    fern.    sing.    impf. 

d.  Before  the  dual  endings  a  and  d?ii,  as  also  before 
the  terminations  a  of  the  3.  sing.  masc.  perf.,  at  of 
the  3.  sing.  fern,  perf.,  atd  of  the  3.  fern,  dual  perf., 
and  a  of  the  subjunctive,  the  third  radical  is  treated 
as  a  strong  letter,  if  the  second  has  i  or  u,  Exx:  3.  pers. 

masc.  perf.  act.  ^^y\yL\  do.  pass,  "^h,  j^yi^;  3.  pers. 
fem.  perf.  ouyof,  ^^Su\  3.  pers.  masc.  dual  Lup;? 
fem.  UloT;  3.  pers.  subj.  act.  I  ^^J,  ^7*?.'  ^*  P®^^* 
dual  impf.  ^LLo^j,  ^i^yiJ- 

48.  In  the  apocopated  impf.  and  in  the  imper.  every, 
final  a,  i  and  u  is  shortened,  as  3.  pers.  sing.  masc. 

apoc.  impf.  yivJ,  *o,  yiS;  2.  imper.  ^J,  j»  J,  yi.|. 

Eor  the  conjugation  of  these  verbs  see  paradigms  XV — XIX 
where  various  forms  are  given  of  the  verbs  !)fi  to  carry  on  war, 
^^  to  throw,  ^j  to  be  content,  ^^-loi  to  carry  out,  accomplish. 

49.  Of  verbs    doubly   weak   the    following   are    the 
principal  varieties: 

a.  Verbs  primae  .  and  ultimse  ^^  as  S^  to  take  care 
of;  impf.  according  to  §§  40  and  47  ^J,  apoc.  |^. 


50.     THE   VERB   jJJj.  45 

The  imper.  is  properly  ^v-,  for  which,  however,  when 

the  word  stands  alone,  i.  e.  in  pause,  we  write  xi*. 

The  verb  ^L  to  see,  which  in  the  impf.  elides  I. 
the  Hamza,  throwing  back  its  vowel  a  to  the  first 

radical.    Thus  j^o  yard  for  ^^lo  yafd\   3.  pers.  pi. 

^.Is;  imper.  \  (ace.  to  a  s^),  fern.  ^7.  The  IV.  form 

*  in  the  sense  of  'to  show'  is  similarly  inflected:   ^^ 

for  ^\s\,  impf.  j^o  for  ,^few>;    perf.  pass,  ^^sl  for 


--      o 


j^&J  and  so  on. 

The  verb     -i  to  live,  properly  ^^i ;  impf.  LI^  (cf.  c. 
§  2 1?  note)  like  a  verb  ult.  ^  or  ^k  like  a  verb  mediae 
geminatae;  perf.  IV  Ll^l,  perf.  X  ^x^LwwI^or  LxsLwj 
also  contracted  ^^C^S  (be  ashamed). 

The  verb  jlll  'there  is  not'  (compounded  of  the  50. 
negative  ^  and  an  obsolete  Arabic  noun  corresponding 
to  the  Hebrew  t:^^)  is  inflected  as  follows : 

Sing.  Dual  Plural 

3.  masc.      J^  LLIf  ^y^ 

3.  fem.  o^AwuJ  L£1aJ            ^-uJ 

2.  masc.  o^-ygJ  ^  I  ^ .'. "  1           (W^*«J 

2.  fem.  ci^  ,jJLyJ 

1.  com.  v.:iJLl  LLlJ 


46  51.  VERBS  OF  PRAISE  AND  BLAME.  52.  ADMIRATIVES.  53.  THE  SUFFIXES. 

51.  The  verbs  of  praise  and  blame,  1*3  to  be  good 
and  fjjj^j^  to  be  bad,  which  are  rarely  conjugated,  are 
written  as  above. 

52.  The  Arab  grammarians  adduce  as  special  forms 
the  so-called  admirative  forms,  that  is,  forms  expressive 
of  admiration.  These  are  strictly  the  3.  s.  m.  perf. 
and  2.  pers.  imper.  of  the  IV.  stem,  but  have  assumed 

a  special  signification;  so  I  Jo\  Jo^l  Lo  properly 'what 
has  madeZaid  excellent',  and  Juw  Ji-*dil  prop,  'make 
Zaid  excellent'  both  mean:  how  excellent  is  Zaid!  — 
The  verbs  mediae  ,  and  ^  may  in  these  forms  take 
the  inflection  of  the  strong  stems  (§  44  note  &)  as 

fjjo  ^^^  ^  ^ow  easy  this  is  I 

53.  The  addition  of  the  pronominal  suffixes  (§  Wb) 
alters  the  form  of  the  verb  only  to  a  slight  extent. 

a.         The  2.  pers.  fem.  sing.  perf.  with  a  suffix  receives 

a  long  final  vowel  as   ^LyCjlo. 
h.         The  I,  standing  after  ._L  u  (§  2^),  is  dropped  as 

s  Jui*  from  I  Jui*  with  the  suff.  of  the  3.  pers.  sing.  masc. 

c.  The  ending  ^^  of  the  2.  pers.  pi.  perf.  becomes  ^j* 
(cf.  §  12«,  note  1),  as  ^^^jjci*  from  j^jdjci*  with  the 
suff.  of  the  1.  pers.  sing. 

d.  Before  the  suffixes  to  the  1.  pers.  sing,  and  plur., 


54.     THE   PEOXOUN  AS    OBJECT.  47 

^   and  LS,  the  final  net  of  the  2.  fern.  sing,  and  3. 

and  2.  masc.  plur.  impf.  is  sometimes  dropped  (so  that 
these  forms  become  identical  with  those  of  the  sub- 

junctive  and  apocopated  moods).Ex.:    j^^^^*  alongside 

of  the  more  com^mon  ^AJuowid3*  thou  (fem.)  strikest 

me;  LS«jw«dj  alongside  of  the  more  common  US^jwoJ 

they  strike  us. 

When  the  object  of  an  active  verb  consists  of  a  54. 
personal  pronoun,  and  this  object  is,  for  the  sake  of  ^• 
emphasis,  made  to  precede  the  verb,  then  instead  of 
the  ordinary  suffixes  appended  to  the  verb  the  sign 

of  the  accusative  bl  (ns,  nfc<)  is  employed  with  the 
suffixes  of  the  noun  (with  the  suff.  of  1.  pers.  sing. 

^Q);  e.  g.  JujiS  ^i)Cl  to  thee  we  pray. 

The  Arabic  verb  may  have  two  suffixes  appended  b. 
at  the  same  time,  in  which  case  the  pronoun  of  the 
1.  person  precedes  those  of  the  2.  and   3.   persons, 
and  the  pronoun  of  the  2.  person  that  of  the  third, 

as  xjoUaxI  he  gave  it  me;  frequently,  however,  in 

place  of  the  second  suffix— more  particularly  when  both 
pronouns  are  of  the  third  person  —  we  find  the  above 

mentioned  periphrasis  with  Gt  as  LiCl  2t^«\  he  married 
him  to  her. 


48  55.    THE  NOUN. 

Chapter  III.    The  Noun.    (§§  55-90). 

a.    The  Formation  of  Nouns. 

55.  Nouns  in  the  wider  sense  comprise  1)  substantives, 
2)  adjectives,  3)  numerals  (§§91 — 93),  and  4)  pronouns 
(§§  12 — 14).  The  noun,  in  the  narrower  sense,  is 
limited  to  substantives  and  adjectives. 

Primitive  substantives  is  the  name  given  to  such 
substantives  as  cannot  be  derived  from  a  verb.  Accord- 
ing to  the  usual  arrangement  of  Arabic  dictionaries, 

it  is  true,  the  primitive  noun  u^K,  head  (un  affix)  for 

example,  is  found  under  the  verb  iw-ls,  but  this  verb 
is  in  all  its  significations  denominative.  On  the  other 
hand,  it  may  fairly  be  maintained  that  a  noun  like 

yj^t » goes  back  to  a  hypothetical  triliteral  root  ^  +  |  +  ^. 
—  In  contrast  to  these  primitive  nouns,  we  find  a 
large  number  of  nouns  which  are  derived  either  from 
verbs  or  from  other  nouns,  that  is,  which  are  either 
deverbals  or  denominatives.  All  the  forms  of  the  noun 
are  indicated  by  paradigms  from  the  root  J^jii  (cf. 

§  15  ff.);  thus  we  say  of  y^L  as  of  the  deverbal  in- 

finitive  Jdi*  killing,  that  it  has  the  form  JJti. 

Note.  The  numerous  foreign  words  which  have  found 
their  way  into  Arabic,  adapted  from  Persian  and  Aramaic,  and 
indirectly  from  Greek  and  Latin,  have  also,  to  some  extent,  been 
reduced  to  Arabic  nominal  forms. 


56,   57.    THE  FORMATION  OF   THE  NOUX.  49 

A  number  of  nouns  do  not  show  the  full  complement  56. 

s  ^  a. 

of  (three)  consonants  (see  §§  16  and  90),  as  *t>  blood; 

with  the  feminine  termination  (§  73) :  iLoj  a  slave-girl; 
to  this  group  belong  also  nouns  with  a  prefixed  vowel 

G  o 

(connective  Alif)  as  jv^*/!  name,  which  accordingly  must 
be  sought  for  in  the  dictionary  under  ^, 

Extremely  common  are  the  nominal  forms  with  b. 

one  short  vowel,  like  J^*i,  Joii,  Juii,  e.  g.  J^v  foot, 

according  to  the  form  Jijii.    There  are  also  nominal 

S^^       G^         G,^       G^ 

forms  with  two  short  vowels:  JJii,  Juii,  Joii,  JJii, 
Jjti,  Jjii,  e.  g.  Jo».s  a  man,  NF.  JJii;  Ji" old  age 
NF.  ^Ui- 

Next  in  order  we  may  put  nominal  forms  with  a  c. 

G 

long  vowel  either  with  the  first  radical  JldQ  or  with 
the  second  JLxi,  Jlii,  Jlii,  Jyii,  Jyii,  Juoii,  or 
with  both  Jj^li. 

Nominal  forms  with  doubling  of  the  second  radical  d. 
are  such  as  (ja.^^  chick-pea  NF.  JJU;  jUi  (§  63«); 

Note.    By  their  mode  of  formation  these  nouns  have  been 
raised  to  the  rank  of  quadriliterals  like  those  in  §§  57 — 58. 

The  preformatives  employed  in  the  formation  of  57. 

Socin,  Arabic  G-rammar.*  4 


50      58.  FORMATION  OF  NOUNS.  59.  QUADRILIT.  NOUNS.  60.  PARTICIPLES. 

nouns  are  the  following  (whose  vowels  vary  according 
to  circumstances):  a)  ^  cf.  §§  60  and  64.  d)  j*  cf.  §  61. 

c)  J  as  >*AAJ  fugitive  NF.  J^*ij  from  lii  to  flee,  d)  t 
(cf.  §§  62c;  63&),  e.  g.  li^J^I  story  NF.  U^j  from 
the  stem  viytX^. 

58.  The  afformatives  or  formative  additions  used  in 
the  formation  of  nouns  are:  a)  ^—  and  i>|__  (see 
§  74).   &)  ^1 —  (for  substantives)  or  ^.j (often  to 

9     — 

form  adjectives)  e.  g.  ^jL^aji  palpitation  of  the  heart 
NF.  ^^Vii  from  ^3!^ ;  ^I^-LL  drunk  NF.  ^fj^Lii  from 

vXlw.     c)    ^iy• (not   originally  Arabic)    as  c:i>jCLx> 

9    '  ^  ^ 
kingdom  NF.  ^:i>JLii,  which  takes  the  masc.  gend. 

in  Arabic. 

59.  The  quadriliteral  nouns  are  denoted  by  the  para- 
digm  JJjii  (§  28)  as  i^  JLc  scorpion  NF.  JJLii;  jj*^  JuL.o 
box  NF.  J^xi;  ^Xwjuo  military  camp  NF.  JJjiijo; 
f^LLilb.  a  species  of  beetle  NF.  i^xi. 

60.  From  among  the  rich  growth  of  nominal  forms  in 
Arabic  a  few  deverbals  and  denominatives  may  be 
singled  out  for  special  attention.  Such,  of  the  former 
class,  are  the  participles  and  infinitives,  whose  forms 
will  be  found  among  the  paradigms  of  the  verb. 


61.    THE  IXFIMTIVE.  51 

The  participles  —  the  active  is  generally  named  a. 
nomen  agentis,  the  passive  nomen  patientis  —  take 

the  form  jLcLi  for  the  active  of  the  I  stem,  and  for 

the  passive  the  form  Jyiijo.  In  all  the  derived  stems 
the  participle   is   formed   by   prefixing   the   syllable 

A\  in  the  active  the  second  radical  takes  /,  in  the 
passive  a  (see  below).  As  a  rule,  however,  the  active 
and  passive  participles  of  the  derived  stems  take  the 
vowels  of  the  active  and  passive  imperfs.  with  the 
exception  of  stems  V  and  YI. 

In  addition  to  the  participles  there  is  a  class  of  h. 
so-called  verbal  adjectives,  which  are  in  part  treated 
as  participles ;  they  might  be  called  quasi-participles, 

as  jjJlik  beautiful,  from  ^^www^^. 

The  Arabic  participles  do  not  in  themselves  convey  c 

G 

any  suggestion  of  time;  hence  JoU*,  for  example,  may 
mean  'one  who  has  killed'  as  well  as  *one  who  is  killing', 

G    >  o^ 

J«JCii>o  'one  who  ought  to  be  killed'  i.  e.  interficiendus 
as  well  as  interfectus. 

The  Infinitive  (nomen  verbi)  assumes  various  forms  61. 
in  the  I  stem,  and  is  therefore  specially  noted  in  the  ^* 
dictionaries  under  each  verb.  One  of  the  most  common 

forms  is  JJii ,  as  JjiiJ  killing.    The  infinitives  of  Jjii 

4* 


52  61.    THE  INFINITIVE. 

verbs  (§  28),  as  a  rule,  take  the  form  J^xi,  e.  g.  from 
».^^^,  .^^^.-oii  the  being  angry.  J^xi  and  Jlii  are 
also  common  forms  from  intransitive  verbs,  as  i^jJL^ 
a  sitting,  from  yUL^;  |*!^Lww  health,  from  ILI.  In- 
finitives are  also  found  with  the  prefix  ma,  as  J^^4> 
or  JCk  Juo  (for  the  same  verb  has  frequently  more  than 
one  form  of  the  infinitive,  sometimes  with  different 

meanings)  from  JlL3  to  enter. 

The  infinitive  of  the  II.  stem  has  the  form  JixxAJJ 

or  jUaaj  (cf.  §  57&);  the  inf.  of  the  III.  stem  the  form 

jLii  or  ilJLcLLo  (which  last  is  identical  with  the  fern. 

of  the  passive  participle).  The  infinitives  of  IV.,  VIL, 
VIII.,  IX.  and  X.  are  formed  by  the  insertion  of  a 
long  a  before  the  last  radical;    before  this  a  every 

short  a  of  the  perf.  becomes  t,  as  in  the  IV.  stem  JLnil. 
The  infinitives  of  V.  and  VI.  take  u  after  the  second 

radical,  as  V.  J^xAi. 

The  Arabic  infinitives  do  not  contain  the  idea  of 
time  and  may  be  used  both  in  an  active  and  in  a 
passive  sense.  Thus  JiLr  denotes  the  circumstance 
that  some  one  has  killed  or  has  been  killed,  the  idea 
of  killing  or  of  being  killed. 


62.    VERBAL  ADJECTIVES.  53 

Synopsis  of  participles  and  infinitives 

Partcp.  Act.     Partcp.  Pass.  Infin. 

JyXAjO  Cf.    §    61« 

Go  G 

JjLcjo  JLiil 

65-.-,  G  j5-^ 

JjLftJuO  JjLAJ* 

G  ^  ^o  ,  ®   ^     " 

G^  -'Of  G    ^      o 

Jotxixj  JLixiJ 

jl*il 

Quadr.   I.        JJUax)  JJLii^o       J^kii  iLUjii 

Gj,--^,  G^j,.-^,  6  Jo-" 

As  regards  Verbal  Adjectives  (cf.  §  60  c),  the  follow-  62. 
ing  forms  may  be  specially  noted: 

The  form  Jujii,  which  occurs  in  both  an  active  a. 
and  a  passive  sense;  as  Juuo  killed,  Juu^-^i  a  witness, 


L 

jL^Li 

II. 

III. 

G         -, 

IV. 

Go, 

V. 

VI. 

G        -^, 

VII. 

G     ^o  , 

VIII. 

G     ^o. 

IX. 

S     .0    , 

X. 

54 


THE  INTENSIVE  FORMS. 


*jya^  one  who  disputes  with  another  (in  the  sense 

of  [VAoLiS?  part.  act.  of  III). 

h.         \iyxs^  e.  g.  y.j^(of ten  an  intensive  form)  given 
to  lying. 

c.         JJii  f ,  a  form  denoting  colours  and  physical  defects, 

as  ysuc\  yellow;  ^yS-S  lame;  »^|  (with  .  as  a  strong 
letter)  one-eyed.  For  the  formation  of  the  feminine, 
see  §  74&. 
63.  Arabic  has  the  means  of  expressing  a  heightened 
or  intensive  form  of  the  root  idea.  Of  such  intensive 
forms  the  following  are  examples: 

a.         Jlii  intensive  form  of   JlcU   and  other  verbal 

adjectives,  as  ^\dS  (habitually)  given  to  lying.    As 
a  denominative  this  form  is  in  frequent  use  to  denote 

trades  or  professions  (nomina  opificum)  as  •.  ClL.  baker 

60' 
from  'yj^  bread. 

h.         Very  frequently  there  is  derived  from  adjectives 

the  form  JJii  f  in  the  sense  of  an  elative  (generally 
so   named   because  including  both  comparative  and 

superlative),  as  ^^jmjj:^  beautiful,  elative :  ^^..wwu:^!  more  b., 

most   b.;  yJLo  small,  young,  elative:  ^jLol  smaller, 

younger;  smallest,  youngest.  The  elatives,  when  stand- 
ing in  the  predicate,  do  not  admit  of  inflection  for 


64.    NOMINA  LOCI,  INSTRUMENTI,   SPECIEI.  55 

gender  and  number,  as  ^\li\  Ju^l  *^  they  are  the 

most  excellent  of  men.  When  used  in  a  comparative 
sense,  they  are  mostly  undetermined  (§  76bc),  and  are 
followed  by  the  preposition  \jo  in  the  sense  of  our 

"than"  (properly  'at  a  distance  from',  'measured  from'). 

Used  as  superlatives,   on  the  other  hand,  they  are 

generally  determined.     For  the   feminine  formation 

see  §  74  &. 

Note.  No  special  elative  is  formed  from  the  words  y^  good 

and  fit  bad,  which  are  used  as  elatives  in  the  form  just  given. 
As  a  matter  of  fact,  the  positive  of  other  adjectives  as  well  must 

IB   JO*       - 

sometimes  be  rendered  by  our  superlative;  thus  j**UJ|  y^  signifies 
the  (absolutely)  greatest  of  men. 

To  the  class   of  deverbal  nouns  belong  further:  64. 

Nouns  of  place  and  time  formed  with  the  prefix  a. 
A  ma,  as  ^^.JcJCo  the  place  where  one  writes,  the  school; 
also  with  the  fem.  termination  as  SwjjLo  a  buryingplace. 

Note.    Nouns  of  place  and  time  from  the  derived  stems  take 

the  form  of  the  pass,  participle,  as  j-^«*  (from  the  IV.  stem  of  g^ 

to  go  out,  of  which  lY.  --*i.T  cans.)  the  place  to  which  or  the  time 

at  which  something  is  brought  out;  IcjS*  (from  V.  stem)  the 
place  where  the  ritual  washing  is  performed. 

Nomina  instrumenti,  formed  with  the  prefix  a  mi,  h. 
as  ^^^X^  milk-pail,  from  v^UL^  to  milk;    -^Uci^  key, 
from  ^Jki  to  open. 


56  65.     NOIIIXA   T^fffjHfKflynnMKTCTXr-APF.qTfJ. 

c.         Nomina  specie!  of  the  form   xJlii ,  as   ilxS^  the 
manner  of  writing,  one's  "calligraphy". 
65.  To  the  class  of  denominatives  belong  especially 

the  nouns  of  relation  and  the  diminutives. 

a.  By  means  of  the  termination  ^ (corresponding 

to  the  Hebrew  "< ,  fem.  n« and  n"' )  there  is  derived 

from  nouns  a  group  of  other  nouns  which,  following 
the  example  of  the  Arabic  grammarians,  we  call  nomina 

(adjectiva)  relativa,  i.  e.  nouns  of  relation.   Thus  ^.  | 

belonging  to  the  earth  (,^.  I),  earthly;  ^^l-co  belonging 

to  |»Lo  (i.  e.  Syria),  a  Syrian.  The  feminine  termination 

is  dropped  when  this  ending  is  added,  as  ^jCo  (from 

xXjo)  an  inhabitant  of  Mecca;  occasionally  we  meet 
with  certain  changes  in  the  vowels  of  a  word,  e.  g. 

-3  Juo  an  inhabitant  of  Medina,  from  jLo <XJl   Medina ; 

^lij  a  Koreishite,  one  of  the  tribe  jjioj^'. 

b.  By  the  addition  of  the  feminine  ending  to  nouns 
of  relation  there  are  formed  feminines,  as  iouoLw  a 
Syrian  woman,  but  more  frequently  abstract  nouns;  as 
aU^!^l[  divinity  from  ^^"^l  divine,  (from  sl^^  God); 
iUJbcLi  heathenism  from  ^jeLi.  heathenish,  (from 
Jk^L^  ignorant). 


66.  NOM.  BBhi>iri¥x«LDT  DEMmUTIVA.  67.  NOUNS  FROM  STEMS  MED. GEM.    57 

Note.  It  is  usual  to  indicate  the  nomina  relativa  also  by 
paradigms  from  JxJ ;  thus  we  say  that  ^'«^)I  is  a  form  ^^^,  tAIbW. 
a  form  i^AsM. 

Diminutives  from  triliteral  nouns  take  the  form  66. 
J.AAi,  as  JuA£  a  little  slave,  servulus,  from  tXxc  slave. 
From  quadriliteral  nouns  the  form  is  JJU*i,  as  ^yxic 
a  little  scorpion,  irom  v^jJi^  (so  ,^^5,0  diminutive 
from  ,^^^^\Jo  companion).  From  quadriliteral  nouns 
with  a  long  vowel  between  the  third  and  fourth  radi- 
cals the  corresponding  form  is  JuJLlii,  as  ik^iXlLa 

G      '  o  > 

diminutive  from  ^v.  jJLo  a  box.   Diminutives  are  not 
unfrequently   derived   also    from   proper  names,   as 

jJul  tX-u^  'M&«/c?M//f7^ralongside  of  &JIJI  JlIc  'abdulldhi 
(Abdallah). 

The  formation  of  nouns  from  stems  mediae  gemi-  67. 
natae  and  from  those  with  a  hamza  or  the  semi-vowels, 
presents  many  irregularities,  for  a  general  idea  of 
which  we  must  refer  to  the  inflection  of  the  corre- 
sponding verbal  stems.  In  addition  to  what  is  there 
given  the  following  particulars  deserve  attention. 

For  the  formation  of  deverbal  nouns  from  stems 
mediae  geminatae  (see  §  34  ff.)  the  following  points 
may  be  noted: 

The  second  and  third  radicals  are  of  course  con-  a. 


58 


I.    NOUNS   FROM  STEMS   WITH  HAMZA  AND   PRIM. 


tracted  when  the  second  is  without  a  vowel  of  its 
own,  as  yi  irom  .^s. 

b.  If  the  first  radical  has  «,  and  the  second  i  or  a, 

contraction  takes  place  in  the  participles  and  infini- 

tives,  e.  g.  part.  act.  VII  of  3:  wiju  contracted  from 
)yAJuo'j  pass,  also  yJUxi  irom  »^ju/j.  Ihere  is  no  con- 
traction, however,  with  nouns  of  the  form  Juti,  as  ^[>j3 
inf.  to  be  hairy. 

c.  According  to  the  rule  given  in  §  35  &,  from  .jjo 
we  get  uuo ;  irom  ^Juo :  jAa. 

d.  The  act.  participle  of  I  is  ^li  from  !vLi  cf.  §  8. 

e.  Contraction    does   not  take  place  when  a   long 
vowel  stands  between  the  last  two  radicals  e.  g.  J^, 

68.  The  orthographical  rules  which  apply  to  the  in- 
flection of  the  verba  hamzata  (§§  37  £f.)  hold  good 

for  the  formation  of  nouns,  e.  g.  J^^  something  asked 

for;  Jtj^  a  question,  from  JUL  to  ask;  the  part.  act.  I 

of  3*  I,  to  make  an  impression,  is  wi'l  for  ^il ;  'iJu^  NF. 

nomen  instrumenti  aULii^  from  3*1  &c. 

69.  The  primae  .  stems,  which  according  to  §  40  lose 
^'  their  first  radical  in  the  impf.,  lose  it  also,  as  a  rule, 


70.    NOUNS  FROM   STEMS   MED.  j   AXD   ^^5.  ^^^—jQ^J^.   -  ■ 

in  the  nomen  verbi ;  as  compensation  the  latter  receives 
the  feminine  termination  (§  73)^  as  from  d^l  to  pro- 
mise  nomen  verbi  sjca;  from  cOl  to  allow:  aLftt>. 

TV  after  the  vowel  %  (. )  coalesces  with  the  latter  h. 

to  form  F,  as  inf.  IV  of  ii*:  fall:  cLib|^  for  cU.^;  O^Lcc 
time  of  one's  birth  NF.  Jlil^,  for  J^«-5  from  jjr. 

J passes  into  w  (§  40  c),  e.  g.  part.  IV  of  Jaij  c. 

to  be  awake:  Jai>-jo  for  iaiLyo. 

In  the  infs.  of  the  IV.  and  X.  stems  from  stems  70. 
med.  ,   and  ^  the  middle   radical   disappears;   the  ^' 
feminine  termination  is  added  as  compensation,  e.  g. 

I/LSj  for  Jlpl 

In  the  act.  part,  of  stem  I  the  tv  of  verbs  med.  .  6. 

becomes  y  and  j  (y/)  is  changed  into  'i  (j);  as  Juli' 

G      ^      Q  "^^  ^    G       ^ 

for  J.U,  .jLl  for  oLtf  (for  Medda  see  §  7). 

A  characteristic  formation  from  these  stems  is  jJi ;  c. 
thus  from  the  stem  t>Lww  med.  .  we  get  oJJm  master, 

G       y.^  ^ 

lord;  from  the  stem  i^Lb  med.  ^,  v^jJoo  good. 

Nouns  formed  on  the  model  of  JJii  contain  diph-  d. 

®o-     Go ^ 

thongs  (§  2 «),  as  Jyj,  yx^. 

The  place  of  the  second  radical  (see  §  42)  is  taken  e. 
by  a  long  a  in  the  act.  participles  of  stems  VII.  and 


60  71.    NOUNS  PROM   STEMS  ULTIMAE  ^  AND   ^. 

YIII.  and  in  the  pass.  part,  of  stems  IV.,  VII.,  VIII. 
and  X.;  e.  g.  part.  pass.  IV.  *lXo,  part.  act.  or  pass. 

G    ^o  f  G     '^''  9 

VII.  AjJuo  (from   a   hypothetical  active  *ysXA  pass. 

*  JiJuc).  Also  in  numerous  nominal  forms,  as  Ai^  (from 

a  hypothetical  v;<^)  house,  from  J4>  med.  .;  NF.  J^xa/j 

from  JU'  is  JLLo,  from  a  hypothetical  Jyixj. 
/.         The  place  of  the  second  radical  (see  §  43)  is  taken  by 

G  y  G^  t, 

a  long  2  in  nouns  of  the  type  of  Jmi  and  xJLki  from  med. 
.  and  (^  e.  g.  ^^^i  from  r.^  med.  ^  to  be  gentle ;  iUjyo 
(§  64  c)  for  xjyo  mode  of  death  from  med.  .;  in  the 
form  Joti  from  med.  ^,  e.  g.  (jd-o  for  (jd^o  white 
(plur.) ;  Jl*ax)  in  the  forms  from  med.  ^,  e.  g.  j^^.^, 

G       o  -^ 

walk  for  *jua^  ;  in  the  part.  act.  of  the  IV.  and  X.  stems 
from  verbs  mediae  .  and  ^,  e.  g.  *jva^,  ^-u^JCyg^;  in 
the  part.  pass.  I  from  med.  ^^  e.  g.   iju^  from  cLj, 
to  sell  (mediae  ^)  for  c«ju^. 
^.         The  place  of  the  second  radical  is  taken  by  long 

^  a  ,  G     ' 

u  in  nouns  of  the  type  of  J^*i  from  med.  .,  as  .^3 
light  from '113;  u  may  also  arise  by  contraction  from 
wu  in  the  pass.  part,   of  the  I  stem  of  verbs  med. 

G    ?  ^  G   J  o  ^ 

.,  as  J«.A^  for  J.yLo. 
71.         In  the  case  of  nouns  derived  from  verbs  ultimae 


a. 


71.  NOUNS  FROM  STEMS  ULTTMAE  5  AND  ^^.  61 

.  and  ^  those  forms  in  which  the  second  radical  is 
vowelless  are  treated  like  forms  from  strong  stems, 


i)0   ^  l3    O  ^ 


as  ^^D,  ^^  inf. 

If  the  second  radical  has  «,  there  results  (cf.  §  46  «)  h. 
at  the  end  of  words  a  long  a  (from  hypothetical  awu, 
ayu)  which  is  written  L_  or  ^_1_  (ace.  as  last  rad. 

is  ^  or  ^),  e.  g.  LkiJI  the  stick,  for^,,a*JI;  ^^y^^ 
the  pasture,  from  ^.  to  feed,  for  a  hypothetical 
^^f ;  ^t  NF.  jkiit  for  ^t,  elative  of  ^  gener- 
ous, liberal  (§  63  &).  The  same  applies  to  all  the  pass, 
participles  of  the  derived  stems.    With  the  nunation, 

these  forms  appear  as  i  vi^,  ^5^5  ^yo(ptc.pass.IV) 
in  which  the  original  long  final  vowel,  now  standing  in 
a  syllable  closed  by  the  n  of  the  nunation,  must  be  pro- 
nounced short  (§  8):  ^asan^  mar^an^  murman.    Long  a 

appears  before  the  feminine  termination  (cf.  §  70  e)  as, 
sItXl  morning  for  s.ji;  sli.  death  for  iSly 

If  the  second  radical  has  short  2,  from  iyu  arises  c. 
a  long  I  (cf.  §  47«),  e.  g.  ^^^01  part.  act.  I  in  place 
of  a  hypothetical   -^oU 1 5  and  so  in  the  act.  participles 
of  the  derived  forms.    If  the  nunation  is  added,  the 
result  is  *L,  ramin  &c.,  in  which  the  ^^  is  dropped 

even  in  the  written  form  of  the  word,    uyu  is  changed 


62  72.    NOUNS  FROM   STEMS  ULTIMAE  ^  AND   ^. 

to  iyu,  and  consequently  with  the  nunation  it  likewise 

becomes  m;  e.  g.  inf.  V.  ^f^dt  for  _xj1aJI;  IIS*  for 

JolS*.    In  the  act.  part,  of  stem  I  from  verbs  ult.  . 

irvun  is  changed  to  iyun,  and  consequently  with  the 

nunation  further  to  in,  e.  g.  ;5\LiJt  for  ^)LiLl|,  ^\LiJI; 

with  the  nunation  vL^.    Before  a  and  <^  (cf.  §  47^),  on 

the  other  hand,  the  third  radical  retains  its  conso- 
nantal value;  thus  the  inf.  of  stem  II,  according  to 
the  form  most  in  use  with  verbs  med.  .  and  ^  viz. 

aLlxaj  (§  61),  is:  JU^J>,  i^jyiJ*- 

d.  After  «,  ?/w  and  w^w  become  'w;  !/mw,  and  w;w;i  be- 

come  't/;?,  in  each  case  with  the  hamza,  e.  g.  i^jw^j 

for  .IwvwJI  with  the  nunation  %]y^  inf.  I  of  .^^  to  be 


(wvwJI  with  the  nunation  g|^  inf.  I  of  .^^ 


noble;  iLos^j  for  ,<Co.!^|,  with  the  nunation  ^LxiJ  inf. 


i»  .   ^  0 


IV  for  ^Uo^f. 

e.         If  the  second  radical  has  a  long  w,  the  forms  from 
verbs  ultimae  .  are  formed  regularly;  thus  the  pass. 

part.  I  of  IC^  is  Tybo  (for  ^•y*i)  magzuwun.    From 
verbs  ultimae  ^,  on  the  other  hand,  uyun  is  changed 

to  lyun^  e.  g.  ,1jooo  (from  ^^jo  Jo)  marmiyun^  so  from 

^.ojo  go  away  inf.  ^^^^  for  l^yoji  NF.  Jyti. 

/.         If  the  second  radical  has  a  long  %,  the  forms  from 


72.,   73.    THE   GENDER  OF  NOUXS.  63 

9 

verbs  ultimae  ^  are  formed  regularly,  e.  g.  NF.  Jujii 

s  .  s 

from  j^:  J:  saint  (for  ^i)   rvaUyun.     From  verbs 

ultimae  .,  on  the  other  hand,  twun  is  changed  into 
fj/w«,  as  Ji  'altyun  high  from  ^^cLd. 

6.    The  Gender  of  Nouns. 

Arabic  has  two  genders,  a  masculine  and  a  femin-  72. 
ine.  A  number  of  words  are  sometimes  masculine 
sometimes  feminine,<Jn  other  words) are  of  the  common 
gender.  Words  which  denote  female  beings,  collectives, 
countries,  cities,  winds,  parts  of  the  body  occurring 
in  pairs,  and  others,  are  in  themselves  feminine  with- 
out requiring  the  feminine  termination.  The  gender 
of  such  words  is  in  each  case  noted  in  the  dictionaries. 

As  an  outward  and  visible  sign  of  the  feminine  73. 

s  ^                    9  ^    a. 
we  find  most  frequently  the  ending  g aiun  (or  H 

atu  §  79),  e.  g.  Ijbli  (NF.  XJUli),  fem.  of  Jjli  killing ; 

9x      ^  9-     ^     '  5^5^^' 

dXJLjQ  (NF.  xJl*i)  queen,  from  dUU;  il^l)  fem.  of  masc. 
^jo\.  (§  71c)  content,  sUi  (NF.  xJLii)  maid,  from  ^ 
(§§  71  &  and  2d)  youth.  Many  substantives  are  found 
only  with  the  feminine  ending,  as  xl^  an  orchard. 

Note.  As  a  rarity,  the  feminine  ending  is  found,  particu- 
larly  in  the  Kuran,  written  with  »1»,  e.  g.  4UI  JUtA^  the  grace  of 
God  (for  4*^). 


64  73.    THE   GENDER   OF  NOUNS. 

h.         A  number  of  masc.  nouns  are  found  with   the 

feminine  ending,  as  aLftJli*-  Caliph,  ii^io  Talha  (proper 

name  of  a  man,  see  p.  8,  note  2).  On  the  other  hand, 
there  are  nouns  which,  as  being  essentially  feminine, 

do  not  require  the  feminine  termination^  as  wjjLi  barren 

(referring  to  a  woman). 

c.  The  feminine  ending  5_I_  is  occasionally  appen- 
ded to  common  or  class  nouns  in  order  to  indicate  a 

single  individual  (nomen  unitatis),  as   Ikj^b  a  gold 

piece,  from  ,^^b  gold;   xiLji.  a  dove,  from   JC^ 

G 

doves  (collective).  The  termination  8_1.  is  also  used 
for  the  formation  of  the  so-called  nomina  vicis,  i.  e. 
nouns  that  express  the  doing  of  an  action  once^  as 

s  Joii*  a  single  sitting  down,  from  Joti  to  sit  down. 

d.  The  feminine  termination,  again,  serves  to  form 

G^     ^ 

substantives  from  adjectives,  as  iUi'lL  conduit-pipe, 
water-channel,  from  the  part.  I  of  ^jLm  to  water.  Con- 
nected probably  with  this  is  the  feminine  ending  which 

G^    S5   ^ 

forms  intensives,  as  iuo^^  a  very  learned  person,  from 
the  adjective  J%^  §  63flf. 

e.  Collective  nouns  are  also  formed  by  means  of  the 

G     *^ 

feminine  termination,  e.  g.  from  ,joL5j  a  courier,  coll. 
2Lob\ ;  ^yo  (§  G5«)  Sufi  (mystic),  coll.  iliyc- 


74.     TERMINATION   OF   THE  FEMIN.        75.    NUMBER  AND   CASE.       65 

Other  feminine  terminations  are:  74. 

The  termination  ,^— ;  it  goes  to  form  feminines  a. 

of  the  type  J.*i,  e.  g.  ^Jd  fem.  of  ^I^Xl,  drunk, 

(§  58&);  feminines  of  the  nominal  form  (NF.)  Joii 

from  elatives  (§  63  &),  e.  g.  ^vA-o  fem.  of  oLo  I  smaller, 

J.I  from  Jll  the  first,   and  substantives  like  Lxjt) 
world  (§  2  note),  which  is  properly  a  feminine  to  the 


.-^ 


elative  j^J^^I,  that  which  is  nearer  at  hand;  also  fem- 
inines  of  the  NF.  Jkxi,  e.  g.  frdsm  J^l  one,  fem.  ^tXa.1 ; 
subst.  1^3^  remembrance. 

The  ending  ij ;  it  goes  to  form,  more  especially,  h. 

adjectives  of  the  NF.  ilxii  from  JJiit  (§  62c),  e.  g. 
i>\ySuo  fem.  yellow;  i-!;*^  fem.  one-eyed,  but  also 
substantives,  as  i>\y^P  desert. 

c.    Inflection  of  the  I^oun. 

Arabic  has  three  numbers:  singular,  dual  and  75. 
plural.  Of  the  last,  there  are  two  different  kinds; 
the  one,  the  ordinary  plural,  properly  so  called,  also 
known  as  the  pluralis  sanus  or  the  outer  plural,  which 
originally  denoted  rather  a  number  of  separate  persons 
and  things ;  the  other,  the  collective  plural,  also  called 
the  inner  or  broken  plural  (see  §§  86  ff.),  which  denotes 

Socin,  Arabic  Grammar.*  6 


66  76.    DUAL  AND   PLURAL. 

rather  a  continuous  mass,  in  which  the  individual 
member  is  not  distinguished.  At  present  we  shall  deal 
only  with  the  first-named.  Arabic  distinguishes  three 
cases:  Nominative,  Genitive,  and  Accusative. 

76.         The  terminations  of  the  dual  and  the   pluralis 
^'  sanus  are  as  follows: 

Dual  nominative  ij^—  (cf-  §  33) 

„      genitive  and  accusative  jjj—  (cf.  D"^-^) 

Plural  mascul.  nominative        r.^ (cf.  §  33) 

„             „         gen.-accus.  ^ —  (cf.   d"^— ) 

„          femin.  nominative  ^\—  (cf.  ni) 

„              „       gen.-accus.  ^— 

Before  these  terminations  the  Sectional  endings 
of  the  sing,  are  dropped;  the  H  of  the  feminine  ending 
is  changed  to  cj  before  the  dual  termination,  (as  it  is 
before  the  pronominal  suffixes  appended  to  the  sin- 

gular),  e.  g.  kSsLs*,  dual  ^Lcj^Li.. 

h.  By  the  addition  of  the  terminations  exhibited 
above  is  formed  the  plural  of  many  adjectives,  in 
particular,  and  also  of  a  number  of  substantives.  In 
the  formation  of  the  plural  we  find  substantives  with 
the  feminine  ending  taking  the  sign  of  the  masculine 

plural  (as  SjLw  year,  plur.  ^j-a-aw);  much  more  fre- 


77.    THE   CASE  INFLECTION  OF   THE    SINGULAR.  67 

quently,  however,  substantives  without  the  sign  of 
the  feminine  in  the  singular  are  found  forming  their 
plural  by  means  of  the  feminine  termination,   e.  g. 

JL^  condition,  plur.  ^:l^^!Li,  eI^  heaven,  plur.  ^:y|.UIw 
(with  the  original  waw  restored  §  71^),  also  written 

As  regards  the  case  inflection  of  the  singular,  it  77. 
is  necessary  to  distinguish  between  the  so-called  no- 
mina  triptota  or  triptotes,  i.  e.  nouns  which  are  in- 
flected for  all  three  cases,  and  the  so-called  nomina 
diptota  or  diptotes,  /.  e.  nouns  which  cannot  be  thus 
fully  inflected.  The  latter  never  receive  the  nunation, 
and  unless  they  are  determined  by  the  article  or  by 
a  following  genitive,  they  are  inflected  for  only  two 
cases. 

The  following  are  the  case-endings  of  the  triptote  a. 
noun:  Nom.  sing.  _Jl  un,  Gen.  sing. m.  Ace.  sing. 

I an.    With  the  feminine  termination  _1.  only  is 

written  instead  of  I as  "^^s-,  but  aU^Joo;  so  ^ci 

and  \Ak  (cf.  §  3&). 

The  case-endings  of  the  diptote  noun  are:   Nom.  &. 
sing.  w,  Gen.  and  Accus.  Sing.  J_  a. 

In  the  dictionary  the  triptotes  are  distinguished 
from  the  diptotes  by  being  always  written  with  the 

5* 


68  78.  NOM.-MMBB^BIPB^DIPTOTA.  79.  DETERM.  AND  UNDETERM.  XOUNS. 

nunation,  as  Jk:^s  a  man,  while  the  latter  are  always 
-     without  it,  as  t>j.A«l  black. 

78.  Whole  classes  of  nouns  are  always  diptote.  Such  are 
a.         1)  all  proper  names  that  are  either  feminine  or  have 

the  feminine  termination,  as  xljo,  ^^^/JJ•y  as  names  of 

women;  jLjLwuo  as  name  of  a  man.    To  these  must  be 
added  the  majority  of  such  proper  names  as  are  of 

foreign  origin,  e.  g.  f^\y^\  Abraham,  v«ju*;«j  Joseph, 

^*w*jo  Moses  (but  monosyllables  like      ji  Noah  are 
mostly  triptote). 
h.         2)  Many  so-called  broken  plurals ;  cf.  §  88  Nos.  18, 
19,  20;  §  89  Nos.  23  24,  25,  27,  29; 

c.  3)  adjectives  of  the  form  J^iil  (§  62  c;  §  63&); 

d.  4)  adjectives  of  the  form  ^^^jls  (§  58&),  which  form 
their  fem.  like  jjii,  e.  g.  J^Lyli  angry,  fem.  ^^.ydi. 

c.         5)  Feminines  formed  by  the  terminations  ^^—  or 

i|_l.  (§  74).  Cf.  also  the  broken  plurals  referred  to  under 
&,  §§  88,19  and  89^29. 

79.  The  inflection  of  the  singular  of  all  nouns  and 
of  the  plural  of  feminines  varies  according  as  a  noun 
is  determined  or  undetermined. 

a.         All  proper  names  are  in  themselves  determined 


-«  ^ 


9  "O 


as    cW'^   muhammadun    Muhammed;    c\t"*-t    ahmadu 


80.    SHOETEXIXG   OF  THE  DUAL  AND   PLDTIAL   TERMIXS.  69 

Ahmed;  such  proper  names  are  treated  either  as  trip- 
totes  or  as  diptotes  according  as  their  form  and  the 
custom  of  the  language  may  determine;  many  of  them 

always  take  the  article,  as  ^dj^Gil.  X 

Common  or  class  nouns  are  determined: 

1)  by  the  article;  as  y^wi  a  horse,  (j*^^l  the  horse,  b. 

2)  by  the  addition  of  a  following  genitive,  which  c. 
may  be  either  a  noun  or  a  pronominal  suffix,  whereby 

the  nomen  regens  is  put  in  the  construct  state;  as  ^li 

Jl=».1I|  the  horse  of  the  man,  auwli  his  horse. 

The  case-endings  of  a  noun  determined  (1)  by  the 
prefixing  of  the  article,  or  (2)  by  a  genitive  following 
— and  the  same  applies  to  proper  names  with  the 
article — are  distinguished  as  follows  from  those  of 
the  undetermined  noun: 

Singular       nom. ,  Gen. ,  Ace.  _1_. 

Plural  fem.  nom. ,  Gen.-Acc. 

i.  e,  the  nunation  is  always  dropped.  These  endings 
are  assumed  not  merely  by  all  triptotes,  but  also  by 
the  diptotes,  when  determined  by  the  article  or  a 

genitive  following :  e.  g.  Nom.  o^j,  Gen.-Acc.  SyZ\ ; 

but  Nom.  o^!^ !,  Gen.  t>^:^  |,  Ace.  j^I^I  |. 

Before  a  following  genitive  (which  ace.  to  §  79  c  80. 
may  be^  either   a  noun  or  a  pronominal  suffix)  the 


70  81.    INFiEXION  OF  NOUXS  FROM   STEMS   ULT.  5  AXD   ^j. 

terminations  ^  of  the  dual  and  -»  of  the  plural  are 

dropped,  thus: 

Dual  Nom.  of  tX^^:  ^IlXa^,  but  vJ\^I  IjJ^  the  two 

slaves  of  the  Vizier. 
Dual  Gen.-Acc.  ^^.j  J^^c,  but  y^  ^S^^^  o^^wo  I  have 

beaten  the  two  slaves  of  Omar  (before  a  connective 

Alif  thus:  vJ)^!  (^tU^j  cf.  §  6e). 
Plural  Nom.  of  vl^L^*  butcher,  executioner  r^yA^^ 

but  viUiJi  ^Lai  the  executioners  of  the  king. 

S3  ^  --"'^  83--        >    o^,- 

Plural  Gen.-Acc.  ^joLai*,  but  viU-iJ  I  ^5jLoi  o^jK   I 
have  seen  the  executioners  of  the  king. 

For  the  inflection  of  the  noun  see  paradigms  XX  and  XXI, 
where  -will  be  found  the  forms  of  the  masculine  triptote  b-^Ua^  an 
executioner,the  masculine  diptote  y^\  another,  the  feminine  triptote 
&e\m  hour,  and  the  feminine  diptote  i^-o  Mayya  (name  of  a  woman). 

81.  In  the  case  of  nouns  derived  from  stems  ultimae 
"'  ,  and  ^  when  the  second  radical  has  a  short  vowel 
the  nunation,  ace.  to  §  l\l)c,  is  taken  by  this  vowel 
of  the  second  radical. 
b.  Nouns  ending  in  an  or  a  are  unchangeable  for 
all  three  cases;  those  in  in  or  F,  on  the  other  hand, 
take  the  an  of  the  nunation,  as  well  as  the  simple  a 

(§  47^)  as  llclj,  ^\pl 


82.    THE  ADDITION  OF   THE   PRONOMINAL   SUFFIXES.  71 

Before  the  dual  terminations  (cf.  §  46^)  the  last  c. 
radical  is  treated  as  a  strong  letter,  as  ^jJkit  ^Lii^, 

In  the  plural  the  last  radical  is  dropped  before  d. 
the  terminations  una  and  ina^  which,  when  joined  to 
an  a  of  the  second  radical,  produce  diphthongs  (§  46c); 

thus  from  ^c^jjo:  j^y^xj,  j^^^jo;  if  the  second  radical 
has  i,  the  terminations  are  added  immediately  to  the 
former  (§  47  c),  as  ^^!j,  ^T^lj. 

For  the  inflection  of  these  nouns  see  paradigm  No.  XXII, 
where  will  be  found  the  forms  of  the  triptote  jiU  judge,  the 
triptote  ^jUa^AA  (ult.  ,^)  chosen  one  (often  as  a  proper  name),  the 
triptote  Ufltf  (ult.  5)  a  stick,  the  diptote  j^JTi  remembrance,  and 
the  diptote  UJj  world  (vgl.  §  74  a). 

For   the   forms    of  the   pronominal   suffixes  see  82. 
§  12&— J. 

Before  the  pronom.  suffix  of  the  1.  pers.  sing,  the  a. 
short  case-endings  of  the  construct  state  are  dropped, 

as  ^L^*.  The  said  suffix  after  a  final  «,  i  or  ai  be- 
comes ^  (y«),  as  with  the  nom.  dual  ^^ULoi,  with 
^ :  ^L5i  (§  2  <?;  81  a) ;  with  the  gen.-acc.  plur.  ^^Loi* ; 
with  ^^U  (§  81a):  ^^15;  with  gen.-acc.  dual  ^Lai*. 


72  83.    VOWEL   CHANGES  IX  PLUR.  SANUS. 

Note.    In  the  case  of  words  which  end  in  ^j ,  the  suffix 

may  either  be  attached  in  the  usual  way,  e.  g.  from  ,^  "sonny", 

,^,  or  appended  to  the  shortened  form  ^ ,  e.  g.  ^^  from  ^, 

and  ^. 

b.         The  final  il  of  the  construct  state  of  the  plural 

masc.   is  changed  to  t  before  the  appended  ^  (cf. 

§  lie),  thus  ^[Ja/s  becomes  ^L^a-S,  and  then  with 

the  suffix  of  the  1.  pers.  sing.  ^LoJ>  (no  longer  to  be 

distinguished  from  the  genit.  and  accus.  plural).  The 
same  applies  to  the  ending  au  from  stems  ult.  ^<  (see 

parad.  XXII),  e.  g.  «^k-o.x)  becomes  ^ak^xj,  with  the 
suffix  JJaj^jc  (also  identical  with  the  genitive-accu- 
sative form). 

For  the  union  of  the  noun  with  the  suffixes  see  paradigm 
XXIII.    For  the  change  before  suff.  of  final  8  into  *1>  see  §  76  a. 

83.         In  the  pluralis  sanus  of  substantives  of  a  masc. 
or  fem.  nominal  form  with  one  short  vowel  (that  is, 

of  any  of  the  following  types  JJii,  JJii,  JJii  and  iULii, 

xJlii,  iU-jii)  the  second  radical  frequently  receives  a 

complementary   vowel  which  is  either  identical  with 

Go^ 

that  of  the  first  radical  or  is  short  a.  Thus  ^s !  earth, 
plur.  J)».^)l,  more  rarely  ^^JJ^^\^  and  c^Lori,  more 
rarely  ^:dL^»  t;  X^JLii?  darkness,  plur.  v::^U.JLl5  alongside 


84.    ^jylf.      85.    VOCATIVE,  73 

of  i:i>LJUb  and  v:yLJLb.    This  is  a  favourite  method  in 

the   case  of  the   plural  of  the  form  kXxi,   as  iiljtJb 

(§  73c)  a  single  thrust  or  blow;  plur.  oLIiJb  several 
thrusts  or  blows. 


G    o 

Before  ^|  a  son,  a  proper  name  loses  its  nuna-  84. 
tion  in  the  case  mentioned  §  6/2,  and  ^|  is  itself 
written  without  the  prosthetic  1^,  e.  g.  JoJJI  ^^  *.JLwwuo 
musUmu'Tynu-lwalidi  Muslim,  the  son  of  al-Walid. 
wCio  ^jjI  Jo\  zaiduni'hnu  bischrin  (§  6c)  means,  on 
the  other  hand,  Zaid  is  the  son  of  Bishr  (nominal 
sentence). 

After  b  the  particle  of  address,  the  simple  noun  85. 
follows  in  the  nominative  without  the  nunation,  as 

tXZ^  Muhammed,  cCi?  Lj  Oh  M. !  (jj^"^  IJ  Oh  man ! 
(by  which  a  definite  person  is  hailed).  But  should 
anything  of  the  nature  of  a  complement  (a  genitive, 
for  instance)  be  added  to  the  noun  in  the  vocative, 
the  name  of  the  person  addressed  must  be  put  in  the 

accusative,  as  ^|  Ju^:  aJUl  Ju^  IJ  o  Abdallah!(Oh 

servant  of  God!);   » jJi^  ^  Ij  Oh  Banu  Kinda!  i.  e. 

members  of  the  tribe  of  Kinda  (here  ^u  cf.  §  80  and 

90  &  is  the  constr.  state  of  JvaaS).   If  an  Object  follows, 

the  noun  stands  in  the  accus.  with  the  nunation,  as 


74  86.     COLLECTIVE  NOUNS. 


\>^jj>\  \u6\s  Ij  Oil  thou  that  ridest  the  red  mare!  — 

The  particle  L^  I  (before  which  we  may  also  have  G) 
is  always  followed  by  a  nominative  with  the  article, 

as  (jwLU  I  LL>I  U  Oh  ye  people ! 

Note.  After  I3 ,  which  serves  as  the  expression  of  pain  and 
sorrow,  a  long  a  is  appended  to  the  noun;  in  pause  81— — ,  as 
«U|  13   Oh  mother! 

86.  There  are,  in  Arabic,  a  mass  of  words  which, 
though  singular  in  form,  have  a  collective  signification. 
The  following  varieties  may  be  singled  out  under 
this  head: 
a.  Simple  collectives  (masc.  gend.)  such  as  j»-j>,  which 
denotes  not  merely  ^a  people'  collectively,  but  also 


s»<^  0  ^ 


'people'  as  individuals;  jCwLc  an  army  and  also  the 
individual  soldiers  thereof.  From  such  words  broken 
plurals  may  be  formed. 

Names  of  the  inhabitants  of  a  country,  as  4>««^l 
the  Jews,  often  coinciding  with  the  name  of  the  country 

jo"'' 

itself,  as  JoLgJI  the  Hindus;  a  single  Jew  or  Hindu  is 

g  "^^  g  o 

called  (5^^.,  ^cXa^  §  65  «. 

Class  names  (masc.  gend.)  from  which  are  formed, 

nomina  unitatis  (§  73  c)  as  *U^  doves. 

So-called  quasi-plurals  (masc.  gend.),  from  which 

no  nomen  unitatis  is  formed,  as  n«!o>  a  company  of 


87.    THE   BROKEN  PLURALS.  75 

G        —  9  -^  ^ 

horsemen  (a  single  one  C^U)'i  (•tX^  ^^6  domestics 
(one  of  which  is  (•oLL.) ;  y-UJ^  a  number  of  asses  (one 
ass^U^);   Joui  slaves  (from  Jui). 

The  so-called  broken  plurals  (plurales  fracti  in  the  87. 
language  of  the  native  grammarians — by  German  ^* 
scholars  by  preference  called  'inner  plurals'  because 
due  to  changes  in  the  body  of  the  word)  are  also 
strictly  speaking  nothing  more  than  collectives.  Hence 
they  are  treated  in  Arabic  as  singular  nouns  of  the 
feminine  gender  and  construed   accordingly.      Thus 

'is^yAXjo  l-jIjJ  i  different  gates,  where  v«>lol  is  the  broken 

-  *     G    ^  G  ^'^tr 

plural  of  i^U  (on  the  model  of  JLiil),  and  the  par- 
ticiple act.  V.  of  j^li  is  put  in  the  fern.  sing. — These 
broken  plurals,  further,  take  the  same  inflection  as 
the  singulars,  discussed  in  §  77  ff. 

As  a  rule  the  broken  plurals  are  given  in  the  b. 
dictionaries  alongside  of  the  singular  of  their  respective 
nouns ;  when  this  is  not  so,  it  is  to  be  presumed  that 
the  word  either  has  no  plural  or  takes  a  pluralis  sanus. 
Sometimes  we  find  from  one  and  the  same  word  more 
than  one  plural ;  in  such  a  case,  'not  unfrequently,  a 
word  varies  its  plural  as  its  meaning  varies.  Certain 
of  the  broken  plurals  are,  as  a  rule,  confined  to  certain 
specified  singulars. 


76  88.    THE   BROKEN  PLURALS. 

88.         From  nouns  regarded  as  containing  three  con- 
sonants the  following  broken  plurals  may  be  formed : 

1.    Joti   from   Jotil  (§   62  c)   and   its  fern.   i.'^Jii 
(§   74&),    as  ^   from  !lL\  red;    J^   (cf.  §   10 ff) 

,      o-         ^  G         ^^  So, 

from  t>^|  black;   (jdo  (for   ^j<ijo  cf.  §  70/)   from 
(jdjol  white. 

/  G  ,  ?  G    '  ' 

L     2,    J^    from   various    singulars,  as  ,^^xS^  from 

G    •' 

[^Ixf  book.  , 

G^  S^o  G-'  S^o 

3.   JJii  from  sing.  &Jl*i,  as  «kiJ  from  ^jtHas  piece. 

^         ^    4.   Jii  mostly  from  sing,   ^ii,   as   v^JL^.   from 

aUJl^  box;   ^x)  I  from  xx)|  people;   occasionally  from 

xJLxi,  as  j^wi*  (for  ^liJ  ace.  to  §  71  &)  from  io^*  place. 

•   5.   xJLii,  as  5^1  from    •  |  brother. 

G>_,^  G        ^  S-'^"  S 

V  6.   aULii  esp.  from  sing.  Jut  Li,  as  xi^i^  from  JooL5^ 

perfect;    but   also    from  JJi   §   70c,    as    5oL.ww   (for 

G  f  '' 

HJoylw)  fi'om  jJLl  lord. 

*  G—  ^  G  r  {, 

7.   SJLii  (rare)  as  H3Ci'  from  Oys  monkey. 
'—  8.  iOLii   from  Jl^U  ult.   (^,   as  sLdJJ  (for  i^^j^ 
§  71  &)  from  ^U  judge. 

9.  Jlii  very  common,  from  various  singulars,  as 
J.fJ^  from  ^Jo  arrow. 


THE  BROKEN  PLURALS.  77 


10.  Jjjii  very  common,  also  from  various  singulars, 
as  C>y^  from  JO:^  band  of  soldiers;  ^j  (for  ^Jii 
see  §  71  e)  and  then  (with  change  of  w  to  i)  Jo  from 
^JLj  weeping. 

11.  xJLii  (rare)  as  sTIJfc  from  y^  stone. 

12.  Rjyii  (rare)  as  SLo^.*^  from  ^^^  uncle. 

9a  J  9        .  9  s,  9       ^ 

13.  Jjii  from  JlcU,  as  Jl^  from  Jl^Ij  an  un- 
branded  she-camel. 

14.  Jljii  from  Jut U,  as  ^ljc5  from  ^'l^  scribe. 
^          15.   JJtil  from  various  singulars,  as  J^i.^  from 

I      6  «  ^^ 

jLa..   foot. 

p        16.   xJUil  from  various  singulars,  as  sJl£.J  from 

'^       9       ^  "       --a     ^     ^  9  ^  "'^        9a  ^ 

v^ftxcs  a  cake,  aU:^|  (§  67c)  from  v«axa^  beloved;  g^\ 

from  lUo]^  president;   j^J!  from  »^|  God. 

V  ®  -"* 

f^        17.  JLiil  very  common,  from  various  singulars, 

9    ^    o^  9"    ^  ,  -  "^ 

as  ^LL2X)!  from  ^k/j  rain;   iULcil  (always  without  the 
nunation)  from  g^  thing. 

18.  i>^KjLs\  esp.  from  Juxi,  as  ib^'l  from  w^t?J> 
relative;   ill^l  fi'om  ^^c  rich. 

19.  j^ii  (rare),  as  ^^^v^^  from  ^.>^  wounded. 


78  89.    THE   BROKEN  PLURALS. 

'*>i  20.   i^xi,  as  ilot^  from  N-fcUb  poet. 

21.  jj^^,  as  ^Loi  from  ^xi  youth;  ^llw^ 
(for  ;jl>^£^  cf.   §  69 &)  from  ^Li  neighbour. 

22.  ^^*i,  as  ^IjJj  from  jUb"  district ;  ,jL;^ 
from  j^sLi  rider;   ^It^^-ww  negroes  from  fc>lll  black. 

Note.  Forms  5  and  15 — 17  are  used,  as  a  rule,  only  of  a 
number  of  objects  not  exceeding  ten  (hence  called  pluralia 
paucitatis). 

89.  From  nouns  with  more  than  three  radical  con- 

sonants (cf.  §  56^  ff.)  are  formed  plurals  in  which  the 
first  consonant  takes  «,  the  second  a  and  the  third  i. 
Such  plurals  are  diptotes  with  the  exception  of  all 
those  derived  from  stems  ult.  ^  (or  with  an  additional 

i^—  in  the  sing.  §  74  «)  which  take  the  nunation  in  in 
the  nominative  and  genitive,  but  not  in  the  accusative 

which  ends  in  ^ The  forms  of  the  singular  of 

Nos.  24  (cf.  also  ^^^^yc  §  66)  and  25  are  regarded 

as  quadriliterals.  No.  29  ends  in  long  a  and  is  diptote. 
The  following  are  the  principal  varieties: 

23.  JJUi   as  Lj<>U^   from   ^JO^   (NF.   Jd*i) 

locust.  This  form  is  also  found  from  nouns  that  are 
only  in  a  special  sense  quadriliterals,  inasmuch  as 
they   are   really  triliterals   with   the   addition   of   a 


THE  BROKEN  PLURALS. 


79 


formative  consonant;    examples  of   this    group  are: 

a)  J^UI,  as  JooUl  from  RJUil  (NF.  iULiiJ)  fingertip; 

also    from  elatives   used   as    substantives,    such    as 

oli^l  the  great  ones  from  J5  I  elat.  of  ^^u51  b)  Jc^Uj 
^    ,     ^-'  G^  o-  g'>*  o-  "^  "  '  ",  -^ 

as  vo>l^"  from  ibw^*  (NF.  iUjtAj)  experience;  c)  Jk^Ux? 

as  Jolyo  from  xJoy^o  (NF.  iUJii/))  dung-heap;  (jiobw 

^  G^^  S^o^,.^ 

(with  ^,  not  with  S)  from  iLiuotx>  (NF.  jUaaxj)  livelihood ; 
^Lju»  (ace.  ^^L*i)  of  ^^Juuo  (NF.  JoLai)  idea. 

>        ^^  G  -^        "  6        ^ 

24.  jLc!«i  especially  from  aUL^U  and  J^U  (used 
as  a  substantive),  as  fa-fila^o  from  iuLtLo  thunder-clap; 
^s\yi  from  jj^vU  rider;  ^!^  (for  ^jo^Syj^  §  67 &) 
from  ^JfiL^  person  of  distinction;  Jli.  (ace.  ^Jl^) 
from  Jb>Li  a  female  slave. 

25.  JoLii  from  such  nominal  forms  with  a  long 
vowel  after  the  second  radical  as  have  a  feminine 
form  or  signification,  as  a)  ySu^  from  svLI^  funeral 
obsequies;  b)  ^>|L^  from  iLc^  miracle;  c)  (j*ot^ 
from  (jijvi  bride. 

26.  Jlii  as  .Uci  from  i^lxi  (N.  F.  Jlii)  decision. 

27.  JuJLii  from  quadriliteral  nouns  with  a  long 
vowel  before  the  last  consonant,  as  JooLlt  from  4>  JUx 


80  90.    IRREGULAR  NOUXS. 

G     >  ^  J 

(N.  F.  JyXxi)  bunch  of  fruit;  this  form  is  also  found 
with  nouns  derived  from  triliteral  stems,  of  which  the 

following  are  specimens:   a)  JcA^^Lil  as  vi:ot>L£s*l  from 

'i^yd<s^\   (NF.   'i}yxi\)  story;    b)    JoutUj   as   Ut^Xjks 

Go-,  G     ^  0--  ^ 

from  ;^jw.o.J>  (infinitive  Ju*aj  used  as  a  noun)  turn ; 
c)  Ju^LLo  as  vJijUixj  from  ..JJi/j  (participle  J*.*avo 
used  as  a  noun)  fate;  but  also  Ju^Li  (cf.  No.  24)  as 
jjMjyM/l^  from  jjw^U^  (NF.  J^li)  spy. 

G-       ^- 

28.  RjULii,    from    quadriliteral   nouns    denoting 

G—  Gci—  ^c5^ 

living   beings,    as    SyjlJ^  from   sUi^    (NF.   JLii)    a 

G-       -^  G*o^.  Gr"        f'' 

mighty  man;  2LaijLwul  from  i^iiiAwl  bishop;  Hjoo^*  from 
Jl^JLj  pupil;  H4>4>L*S  from  ^^t^JtXxj  a  native  of  Bagdad. 

29.  Jlii,  as  (5;L^   from  ilC^   desert;    Lj|t\5 

-^-  Gc5-  G-'         -- 

(for  ^.ltX;c  §  2<?  note  h)  from  ioLXiO  (NF.  2dA*i  from 
ult.  ^)  present. 

90.  The  following  nouns  (arranged  in  alphabetical 
order)  are  more  or  less  irregular  in  their  mode  of 
inflection: 

a.         ^  father,    •  |  brother  and  j^^  father-in-law  take 

the  following  forms  in  the  construct  state  and  before 
suffixes  beginning  with  a  consonant: 


90.    IRREGULAR  NOUNS.  81 

Nominative     ^|,       ^^1,       ,|>^ 

Genitive         ^t,     ^|,      ^ 

-^  .^ 

Accusative      U|,       Lit,       i^^ 

The  Dual  of  ^«>|  is  jjlol  (i.  e.  the  two  parents),  the 
plur.  sGl  (§  88  No.  17).  The  vocative  singular  with 
suff.  of  the  1.  pers.  sing,  of  ^^1  is  ^t  L",  v:>j|  G, 
oo  I  b ;  from  -I :  ^.t ;  with  suffix  of  the  2.  pers.  masc. 
sing,  dyj  I,  <J^|. 

Go  '^ 

i^[  son;  plur.  sanus  has  nom.  ,j«Jb  (construct  i. 
yb),  gen.-acc.  ^j^aJLj  (st.  constr.  ^Jo);   broken  plur. 

eli;T(§  88,17). 

•I  brother,  see  a;    broken  plur.   syLl^,   ^ji^j.  ^• 
(§  88,5.  21). 

o^t  sister;  plur.  i:y|^|.  d. 

Eoof  or  .^x|^  (also  %ui)  man;  gen.  ;^5jo|;  ace.  I^joj.  e. 

slj^j   woman;    plur.    from    another    root    eLwwJ, /• 
gpj  or  l^S'yL^^  (§  88,9.  5.  21). 

S*"  9      --  S^  9      55^ 

*|  mother;  plur.  ^:yL^t  or  v;yLo!.  ^. 

jjLLjI^  man,  human  being;  plur.  jllit,  collective  h. 

Socin,  Arabic  Grammar.*  6 


82  90.    IRREGULAR  NOUNS. 


jLi  daughter,    frequently  also   aiLj   (with  con- 
nective Alif);  plur.  v^LL. 

*•         ;LL)i>  dinar,  gold-piece;  broken  plur.  irregular, 
'  .1  r" 

I-  'o  (only  in  the  st.  constr.)  possessor  of  .  .  .  .; 

gen.  (^3,  ace.  |6;  fern.  ^|j;  dual  nom.  U6;  plur.  nom. 
..3  (gen.-acc.  15.6)  fern.  ^^b\  for  the  plural  J.| 
(iclu),  gen.-acc.  j.|  is  used. 

m.         sju^  year;  plur.  nom.  ^^-Ly  (or  ^^.-Lu;);  gen.-acc. 


**•         .w4-t  'amrun^  'Amr,  proper  name  of  a  man.     A  . 
is  added  to  the  written  form  of  this  word  in  the  nom. 

and  gen.  {%y^)  to  distinguish  it  from  ^^  ^umaru  (a 

diptote).  Ace.  |w^ ;  followed  by  ^  it  is  written  .l*^ 
and  pronounced  ^amra-bna. 

0.         *i   or  5ji  mouth;    st.  constr.  usually  nom.  ^, 
gen.  ^,  ace.  U;  broken  plur.  (§  88,17)  »|^|. 

p.         JuJ  night;  broken  plur.  (from  the  root  J^)  JLII 
(§89,23). 

3.         gli  water;  broken  plur.  sLl^  or  sj^jol  (§  88,9.17). 


91.    THE   CARDINAL  NUMBERS.  83 

Jo  hand;  broken  plur.  (§  88,15)  Jo  I  from  ^^Jul  r. 
(cf.  §71c). 

Go  y  G    55^  G    ^o^ 

j»jj  day;  broken  plur.  j»L>|  from  *l5jl  (§  88,17).      s. 

Chapter  IV.    The  Numerals.    (§§  91—93.) 
The  cardinal  numbers  have  the  following  forms:  91. 


Masc. 

Fern. 

1 

1 

6  y 

inflected 

2 

u^^l 

(inflected  as  a  dua 

3 

l,lHla3) 

9^   ^--       6-.I  ^ 

inflected 

G.cf 

S_o^ 

4 

S  0^ 

n 

5 

(J«»»^ 

ituM^ 

jj 

6 

9o^ 

6  a 

» 

7 

«Aam 

n 

8 

^Ui(seep.27*)Loi:;i 

55 

9 

G"    ^ 

G^  o 

55 

0 

^ 

S^ 

55 

1 

p^  j^] 

V  •*•  «L 

^<5J.t 

indeclinable 

6* 

v'^ToR^^ 

/                       OK   THK 

f   rrTvTTTT-T-, -.-.-. 

84  91.    THE   CARDINAL  NUMBERS. 

Masc.  Fern. 

12      ^^^  Loj         Swww^  LxjlSJ      gen.-acc.  "^  ic^ji 


13  IcLc  xi'iLi*       nlcii  il>^*     indeclinable 

14  wCLft  jyijuj  »wXLfr  «jK  I  „ 


—      o 


It/      ywwL&    2UIaaO  8^^!wX     AaaO  n 

20  ^.wCLfc   inflected,  like  all  the  tens,  as  a 

pluralis  sanus. 

'-'-■  j^o^  >o^  ^o5 

30    ^^•^•,      40  jj^*Jj  Ij     50  ^j^,^.>»^,     60  ^^X*y, 

70    ^jyu-w,      80  jj^Ui*,     90  ^^»A*o 

100  xjU  (also  written  xX5,  and  always  so 
pronounced,  mfatun,  the  |  having  no  effect  on  the 
pronunciation). 


92.    THE   CARDINAL  NUMBERS.  85 

200  ^LBLo,  300  &5Lo  1,^-*,  400  k§U  l;jt   500 

xjLo  jm»  S.  ,  600  kjLo  o»-w,  700  kjLo  *-^,   800  j^jUj 

xjLo,  900  iGL>o   «.wkO. 
*>     -  ^^     -  ^  - 

1000  v-IjI,   2000  ^lijt,  3000  o^iT  SiSG    (v^SM 

is  here  a  broken  plural  of  the  form  Jlii!  §  88  No.  17) 
&c.  11000  lilt  lii  S^X  100000  ujVi5\jo,  1000000 

The  following  are  the  leading  points  to  be  noted  92. 
in  joining  the  cardinals  to  the  names  of  the  objects 
numbered : 

The  numerals  for  one  (4>^|;)  and  two  are  adjec-  a. 

tives;  the  numbers  from  3 — 10,  on  the  other  hand, 
are  substantives,  and  take  the  word  indicating  the 
objects  numbered  in  the  genitive  plural.  They  may 
also,  however,  be  placed  in  apposition  after  the  noun. 
Whatever  their  position  relative  to  the  substantive 
may  be — even,  in  fact,  when  the  latter  is  altogether 
omitted,  or  when  they  stand  as  the  predicate  of  a 
sentence — the  construction  is  such  that  nouns  of  the 
masc.  gender  take  the  fem.  forms  of  these  numerals, 


*  Often  written  iSlJVj  &c. 


86  93.    THE   ORDINAL  NUMBERS. 

and  vice  versa  nouns  of  the  fern,  gender  take  the  masc. 
forms.    Thus:  ^j.aaj   Rj^*   (Xj^*  ^yb)  three  sons, 

uyUj  jOnI  («jnI  vci^Lo)  four  daughters.  Also  before 
broken  plurals  of  which  the  singular  is  masculine, 
we  find  the  fern,  forms  of  these  numerals  (3 — 10),  as 

Jl^s  Jo!^'  3  men. 

h.  The  numbers  from  11  to  99  are  followed  by  the 
word  indicating  the  objects  numbered  in  the  accusative 

singular,  as  ^L^s  ^jJ^j  30  men. 

c.  The  numbers  from  100  upwards  take  the  thing 
numbered  in  the  genitive  singular  as  J^^  )LXjo  «jJ 
400  men. 

d.  In  the  compound  numbers  the  nature  of  the 
construction  depends  on  the  last  numeral.  The 
particle  l  is  used  to  join  the  numbers  together;  the 
units  and  the  tens  may  stand  either  before  the 
hundreds,  or  after  the  thousands  and  hundreds.   Thus 

the  year  1895  is  either  ^  ]j  RjLo  ^^}^j  ^ykL^^  ijU^ 

93^         The  ordinals  have,  for  the  most  part,  the  form 
a.  of  the  act.  part,  of  the  I  stem,  as  may  be  seen  from 
the  following: 


93.    THE   ORDINAL  NUMBERS.  87 

Masc.  Fern.  Masc.        Fern. 

!•     ^       J^l^    first       ^J  6.     jjj^oLw         Xjw^Lm; 


o-       ^ 


3.        viJli*  xjdLS*  8.     j^^Lj         5U>olJ 

G"  ®^^  G^S^^ 

5.       (jMytfL^  RamwoL^  10.  v-^Lc  S^Lfr 

11.  wcc^  ;5^La-      HwCLt  abi>La.    indeclinable 

12.  wwLft  /tfjLS*         HwM<w£  ^^Lj  „ 

13.  wCw^  oJLj  SwwwLfc  iLiJLS*    and  so  on. 

The  ordinals  of  the  numbers  from  20  upwards 
are   expressed  by  the   corresponding   cardinals,    as 

^•i*^*  oJU  thirty-third;  when  larger  totals  have 

to  be  expressed,  the  cardinals  are  used  even  for  the 
lower  numbers.     In   dates,    as  a  rule,    the  cardinal 

numbers  are  used  exclusively,  as  SwwLa  ^^*  xJlIu  ^ 

5*-sx^|  ^l%jo  <JJ\^  JuL«  id>^*5  in  the  1313  th  year  of 

the  Hegira  (which  began  on  the  24th  of  June  1895). 

Go, 

Fractions  are  usually  expressed  by  the  form  Joti,  b, 

G    *  ' 

as  viiJU  a  third. 


88  94,  95.    PARTICLES. 

Chapter  V.    The  Particles.    (§§  94—96). 

94.  The  adverbs,  prepositions  and  conjunctions  cannot 
here  be  given  in  detail.  The  prepositions,  like  many 
adverbs,  are  still  for  the  most  part  recognizable  as 
nouns  of  three  radicals  originally,  which  have  preserved 
the  accusative  ending  without  the  nunation.  Preposi- 
tions therefore  always  govern  the  genitive  case  in 
Arabic  and  may  also  stand  in  the  genitive  in  depen- 
dence on  other  prepositions.  Thus  ^^  above,  vith 
a  subst.  Jla4^|  ^^s  up  on  the  hill. 

Note.     A  few  adverbs  end  in  u    (which  in  this  case  lias 
absolutely  nothing  to  do  with  the  nominative  termination)  as 

ojw  afterwards;  so  J^  ^  in  the  same  sense;  but  as  prepositions 

jjw  or  iXW  ^  after. 

95.  The    following   particles  (in  alphabetical  order) 

because  written  with  a  single  letter  are  inseparably 

joined  to  the  following  word,  cf.  §  8  note. 

^  -^^"^    .  . 

a.         I  (n)  interrogative  particle,  as  Jcxi'l  did  he  kill? 

Before  the  connective  Alif:  viJU^I  for  |  +  dU^I  is  thy 
name .  .  .  ? 
b'         L->  (a)  preposition  'in';  with  suffixes  thus:  1.  ^ 
in  me,  2.  masc.  ^,  3.  masc.  s^  (§  I2d)  &c. 

^-         [^  particle  of  asseveration,  as  aJjb'  by  God. 


96.    PREPOSITIONS  AKD   CONJUXCTIOXS  WITH  SUFFIXES.  89 

^  shortened  from  o^-^/,  a  particle  which  gives  d, 

to  the  impf.  the  sense  of  the  future,  as  Jjciijcww  he 
will  kill. 

o,  then,  denotes  a  less  close  connection  than  1.  e. 

(J  (3)  like,  as.  f. 

J  a  corroborative  particle  before  verbs,  especially  g. 

in  oaths,   as  ^jJuiuJ  he  will  certainly  kill;  it  also 

stands  before  nouns,  especially  after  the  particle  J. I 
(§  125 «  note). 

J  (b)  preposition  and  conjunction ;  before  suffixes  h. 
(except    in   1.    pers.    sing.    J)  it  becomes  J,  as  vjj 
to  thee. 

5   (1,    1)    connective    particle;    as   a    particle   of  *• 
asseveration  it  takes  the  gen.,  as  adUl.  by  God. 

As  regards  the  addition  of  pronominal  suffixes  96. 
to  the  prepositions  and  conjunctions,  the  following 
points  may  be  noted  in  addition  to  what  has  been 
said  under  §  82. 

Before  the  suffixes  of  the  1.  pers.  sing.,  the  final  a. 
vowel  or  vocalic  ausJaut  is  dropped  as  is  the  case 

with  the  noun;  thus  Jou  'after'  with  the  suff.  of  the 

1.  pers.  sing.  ;^jJu,  but  ^iljJu  &c. 


90  97.  DISTINCTION  BETWEEN  PERF.  AND   IMPF. 

b.  In  the  prepositions  Jci  upon,  and  J[  towards, 
the  final  ^  is  sounded  before  suffixes  (contrary  to 
§2^),  e.g. 

with  suff.  of  the  2.  pers.  masc.  viLLCc,  viUJI^ 

«       «        «       1.    „  »         ^,     Ui  (see  §  82 «) 

c.  The  prepositions  ^j^  and  jtwi  double  the  n  be- 
fore the  suffix  of  the  1.  pers.  sing.,  as  ^Lo. 

^,         ^1  behold,  truly,  and  ^|  that,  become 

with  the  suff.  of  the  2.  pers.  sing.  masc.  db  1^  and   viLI 

"        »        "         "        1-     "  "  ^5^1    ^^     t5^l' 

„       „       „        „       1.     „      plur.  UJ^    or    G^, 

Oil     or     LJI 


III.    NOTES  ON  SYNTAX.    (§§  97—160). 

Chap.  I.     Moods  and  Tenses.     (§§  97—104). 

97.  The  perfect  expresses   a  completed  action,   the 

completion  of  which  falls  in  the  past,  present  or  future, 
or  is  thought  of  as  falling  in  one  or  other  of  these 


98.    THE   PERFECT.  91 

periods.  The  imperfect  expresses  an  uncompleted 
action,  which  may  likewise  fall  in  each  of  the  same 
three  spheres  of  time. 

The  perfect  is,  in  the  first  place,  the  tense  of  98. 
narration  (perfectum  historicum),  when  an  action  com-  ^' 
pleted  in  the  past  is  spoken  of,  and  may,  as  a  rule, 

be  rendered  by  our  past  tense,  as  jo\  ^L^  Zaid  came. 

By  the  perfect  the  idea  is  expressed  that  an  action  h. 
or  a  state  has  continued  from  the  beginning,  and  still 

continues,   as  iUJLiJI   \JiXjis>.\  the  learned  (always) 

disagree  (gnomic  aorist);  JL*j>  jJUj  God,  he  is  exalted 
(from  the  beginning). 

When  the  perfect  expresses  an  action  completed  c. 
in  the  present,  it  is  to  be  rendered  by  our  present, 

as  \(\s^  dLxjdiftt  I  present  you  with  this  (the  affair  is 
at  this  moment  concluded). 

In  a  sentence  containing  an  oath  or  a  wish,  the  d. 
perfect  expresses  an  action  which,  in  the  mind  of  the 

speaker,  is  completed  in  the  future,  as  aJUl  xliJ  God 
curse  him;  also  with  y  'not',  as  aJUl  x^^^  ^  may  God 
have  no  pity  on  him;  oJLjii  ^  «^K  hy  God  I  do 
it  not ! 

When  the  particle  Jo  stands  before  the  perfect,  e. 
the  latter  may  in  most  cases  be  rendered  by  our  per- 


92 


THE  IMPERFECT. 


feet  (either  the  present  or  the  past  perfect),  as  Jo 
Lj*5'j  we  have  (just)  mentioned,  or  we  had  mentioned. 

The  perf.  with  Jo  may  also  he  used  in  the  sense  given 
under  sub-section  c, 
/.  When  the  verb  ^^  (to  be)  stands  before  the  per- 
fect (with  or  without  JjJ),  we  must  render  as  a  rule 
by  our  past  perfect  (pluperfect),  as  ---lyo  jJ^  O 
jUio!^l|  JUiJb  jj^^i  vol  d3  ^L5  when  Moses  was 
born,  Pharaoh  had  (just)  commanded  to  kill  the  little 
children. 

Note.     Instead   of  the  above  verbal  sentence  (§  134),  ^jlT 
may  be  followed  by  a  compound  nominal  sentence  (§  138  d)  as  ^ir 

g.         Our  conditional  is  expressed  in  Arabic  by  the 
perfect,  that  is,  it  is  represented  as  something  already 

accomplished,  as  \::jS'S'^  Ishouldwish,  v:iJ4>3«  o^l5^(jL9) 
I  should  have  wished." 

h.         For  the  perf.  after  |3l  and  in  conditional  sen- 
tences see  §§  157,  158. 
99.         The  imperfect  indicative  is  to  be  rendered  accord- 
ing to  circumstances  by  our  present  or  our  future, 
sometimes  also  by  our  past  progressive  (imperfect). 

a.         If  the  future  is  to  be  expressed  with  greater  pre- 
cision than  by  the  Arabic  imperfect  alone,  the  latter 


99.    THE  niPEEFECT.  93 

has  prefixed  to  it  the  adverb  Oj^w  (^nd),  which  may  be 
shortened  to  ^  and  is  then  inseparably  joined  to  the  verb 
(see  §  95^),  as  (^^ULaj  oj!l  ye  will  know  (it);  jl^wU, 
(49  &)  we  shall  show  yotT.  '^A-^V^ 

By  the  imperfect  is  expressed   an   action  which  h. 
accompanies    another   action  completed  in  the  past, 
or  which  is  still  in  the  future  from  the  stand  point     /  V^' 


>^         O    J   ,    ^^ 


of  the  latter,  as  J\  jCo  liLJ  I  L  Li  they  came  to  their 

father  weeping  (cf.  §  157  &);  ^^>-wCo  (jJuJt  ^*|  he 
came  to  the  spring  to  drink. 

The  imperfect  can  also  express  the  continuance  c. 

of  an  action  in  the  past;  J^JbLiLiLs  may  also  mean 
'they  were  fighting  for  a  considerable  time',  or  'they 
fought  repeatedly,  with  each  other'.  More  frequently, 
however,  this  continuous  imperfect  is  expressed  by 

a  combination  of  ^li^with  the  impf.  (cf.  §  98/.  and 
note);  sometimes  we  can  render  such  a  combination 

by  our  'was  wont  to'  or  'used  to',  as  *^j  J^  ^  <^^L>  ^^S 

*jc|si>    xj^*  he    used   to   receive   every    day   three 

drachmae. 

If  Jo  stands  before  the  imperfect,  a  certain  in-  d. 
definiteness  is  the  result,  as  ^%Sii  tXi*  *it  will  most 


94  100.    THE   SUBJUNCTIVE. 

likely  be  that .  .  .',  an  idea  which  is  not  unfrequeiitly 
found  in  the  imperf.  without  Jo. 

Note  a.  The  impf.  also  stands  in  direct  subordination  to 
other  verbs,  as  ^^)  cJ^  U  I  ceased  not  to  drink  (cf.  §  110); 
juyUJI  JUJ  Jxk.  he  began  to  speak  with  the  people;  J*3l  ^j3l  U 

IoJTI  cannot  do  such  a  thing. 

Note  b.  Before  several  verbs  (perfects  or  imperfects)  joined 
together  with  3,  it  is  sufficient  to  write  ^  once,  and  so  with 

o^,  ^ym  and  J**. 

Note  c.  ^ir(see  note  to  §  98/*)  is  frequently  followed  by  a 
compound  nominal  sentence,  as  y»XL^\  '^yf^  ^Uic  yjVT  Osman  was 
wont  to  visit  the  graves  (the  cemetery). 

100.  The  Subjunctive  is  found  in  certain  kinds  of  depen- 
dent clauses  introduced  by  a  conjunction,  the  action 
of  which  is  to  be  represented  as  one  to  be  expected 
as  the  result  of  the  action  of  the  principal  clause, 
and  hence  as  one  that  is  only  likely  to  occur  in  the 
future.    Hence  this  mood  is  frequently  (not  always) 

used  after  the  conjunctions  ^\  that,  ^t  (from  !^  ^jl) 
that  not,  £i  until,  \S  (and  I)  that,  and  always  after 
s!»  v5^  »J^  in  order  that,  ^^  (made  up  of  SJ  ^J^) 
in  order  that .  .  not,  !|  in  the  sense  of  'except  that', 
'until',  as  ^"sJSl  ^l^  he  came  in  order  to  visit  me; 

vI^XJo  ^jl  sCil  he  commanded  him  to  write  (that  he 


101.  THE  MOD.  APOCOPAT.   OR  JUSSIVE,       102.   THE  MOD.  ENERGIC.    95 

should  write).  In  like  manner  the  subj.  is  used  after 
^  (^^t  y)  it  will  not  be  (the  case)  that,  as  ^JL«^t  \J 
I  shall  not  send  him. 

The  modus  apocopatus  (or  jussive)  is  found:  101. 

1)  in  positive  commands,  generally  with  the  particle  a. 

J  prefixed,  as  v_;JcCaJ  let  him  write. 

Note.    When  such  a  form  is  further  preceded  by  ^   and  ^ 
(which  is  sometimes  the  case,  without  any  special  stress  resting 

on   these   particles)    J    generally  loses   its    vowel,    as    &13]    ^J£% 

^^yjoyJl  JJ'j2-JL3  and  in  God  let  the  believers  (then,  therefore)  trust. 

2)  in  negative  commands  with  y,  as  JlO  ^  say  not,  h. 
thou  shalt  not  say.    The  imperative  can  never  take 

a  negative. 

3)  always  after  Ij,  not  as  a  prohibition  but  as  ne-  c. 
gativing  a  completed  action,  as  ljwoJ  *J  he  did  not 
strike,  (as  the  negation  of  CJJ^i)  \  in  like  manner  after 
LIJ  in  the  sense  of  'not  yet'. 

4)  in  the  protasis  and  apodosis  of  conditional  sen-  d. 
tences,  see  §  158. 

The  modus  energicus  is  usually  found  in  assevera-  102. 
tions,    and  particularly  in  connection  with  an  oath 

and  the  corroborative  particle  J,  as  aajwo^  idJL  by 

God,  I  will  certainly  strike  him;  this  mood  is  also 

used  with  the  prohibitive  y. 


96  103.    THE  PASSIVE.       104.    THE  PARTICIPLE. 

103.  The  Passive  is  employed  in  those  cases  in  which 
the  agent,  for  some  reason  or  other,  must  not  be 

mentioned.     Hence  a  sentence  like  J^jv  J^^i*  means 

'Zaid  has  been  killed  (by  some  person  unknown  or 
who  may  not  be  named)'.  Our  'Zaid  has  been  killed 
by  'Amr',  the  Arabs  express  by  the  active  construction. 
The  passive  is  frequently  found  in  an  impersonal  sense 
(see  §  121 «). 

104.  With  regard  to  the  employment  of  the  participles 
the  following  points  are  to  be  noted: 

a.  The  participle  (especially  as  predicate  of  a  nominal 

sentence  §  122^)  frequently  expresses  our  "to  be  about 

to",  as  dljJI  ^t>U  u|  I  am  about  to  come,   on  the 

point  of  coming,  to  you. 
b.         The  passive  participle  is  also  used  impersonally 

in  Arabic;  starting  from  the  sentence  au-Lfr   /c4^  ^^ 

fainted  (literally:  it  was  covered  over  him)   we  can 

also  say  xlXS  Z^iJuo  ^  he  has  fainted ,    fem.    "5, 

L^jJLe  ^MjJuQ.    In  such  constructions  the  impersonal 

part.  pass,  may  be  inflected  for  all  three  cases  and  be 

determined  by  the  article,  as  xjuLi  /^^^  J^r-?  ^)y^ 

I  passed  a  man  who  had  fainted;  ^^^jlJI  5t%-JI  o^K 
L^^Jli  I  saw  the  woman  that  had  fainted. 


105,  VERB.  COMPLEMENTS.   106 108.  ACCUS.  COMPLEMENT.   97 

Chap.  II.  The  Government  of  the  Verb.  (§§  105—117). 

In  Arabic  the  verb  may  take  as  its  complement  105. 
either  an  accusative,  or  a  preposition  with  its  case. 
The  numerous  combinations  of  the  latter  sort,  in 
which  the  preposition  with  its  case  is  sometimes  the 
necessary  complement  of  the  action  denoted  by  the 
verb,  sometimes  merely  accessory  (such,  for  example, 
as  specifications  of  place  and  time)  cannot  here  be 
given  in  detail.    See,  however,  §§  114  ff. 

The  accusative  is  the  case  depending  immediately  106. 
on  the  verb.  We  distinguish  here  the  cases  in  which, 
the  accusative  stands  a)  as  object,  p)  as  predicate, 
and  y)  as  limitation  or  more  precise  definition,  generally 
called  by  grammarians, .  the  accusative  "of  nearer 
definition". 

a)  Certain  classes  of  verbs,  as  for  example,  verbs  107. 
of  coming  and  going,  take  as  direct  object  the  goal 

to   which  the   action   is   directed,   e.  g.  ouuJi  JlLj 
he  went  into  the  house. 

Note.  On  the  other  hand  »iUA-J|  ^|  Ji.j  denotes  primarily 
the  direction  of  the  action  towards  the  goal;  C^]  ^  JaLj 
he  went  into  the  house  and  stayed  there. 

The  following  take  trvo  accusatives:  1)  The  causa-  108. 
tive  forms  of  transitive  verbs  with  one  accusative  in 


-     ^  ^     o-o 


the  I.  stem,  as  -JLt  to  know;  cans.  sVl  JiJI  a^JLc  he 

Socin,  Arabic  Grammar.*  7 


98  109.    THE  ABSOLUTE    OBJECT. 

taught  him  reading;  2)  verbs  that  express  the  ideas 
of  filling  or  giving,  of  making  into,  of  considering  or 
recognising  as,   of  naming,  and  many  others:  e.  g. 

LiLi  ijos^l  aJUt  Joi^  God  made  the  earth  (into)  a 

carpet;  tc^t<°  2aj|  *  "■  he  named  his  son  Muhammed. 
When  a  verb  of  this  class  is  put  in  the  passive,  the  second 

accusative  remains,  as  tc^i<°  iuj|    -4^  his  son  was 

named  Muhammed;  Uio^t>  ^'.j  he  was  presented  with 

a  dirhem,  from  the  active  Uist>  sbl  he  presented  him 

with  a  dirhem  (for  suff.  see  §  107). 

Note  a.  The  two  accusatives  of  such  verbs  as  express  the 
idea  of  finding  one  to  be,  or  considering  one  as  something,  stand 
to  each  other,   strictly  speaking,  in  the  relation  of  subject  and 

predicate  (§  139);  thus  a  sentence  like  U-^l*.  l>^  ^^^  nia-J  also 
be  translated  'I  found  that  he  waS  a  gentle  old  man'.  As  second 
object  we  may  have  a  verb  instead  of  a  noun,  as  t.^ps.\j!ui  ^^^^ 
'p^\  <^^)  they  found  their  payment  to  be  something  which  was 
returned  to  them  =  they  found  that  their  payment  was  &c. 

Note  b.  Verbs  expressing  not  an  intellectual  but  a  physical 
perception  are  also  frequently  found  with  two  accusatives.  The  se- 
cond, indeed,  is   generally  regarded   as   an  ace.  of  condition  (§ 

1136),  but  sentences  like  UTU  |^  c>-yti»,  it  must  be  admitted, 

may  also  be  translated:  I  heard  'Amr  weeping,  i.  e.  I  heard  how 
*Amr  wept. 

109.         For   the   purpose    of  strengthening  or  of  more 
precisely  defining  the  idea  conveyed  by  it,  every  verb 


110.   THE   ACCUSATIVE   AS  PREDICATE.  99 

may  take  a  so-called  absolute  object.  This  absolute  (or 
internal)  object  consists  gf  an  infinitive,  a  nomen  speciei     \  <■ 
(§  64  c)  or  other  noun.  U  sually  this  object  is  itself  more 
precisely  defined  either  by  some  qualifying  word  or 

phrase  (§  120)  or  by  a  genitive,  as  LLli  ^^^5  2u5l 
he  educated  him  with  a  good  education,  i.  e.  well; 
^.ii^.l  bl^  (c^y^  ^®  struck  him  with  a  stroke 
which  pained  me  (for  the  relative  sentence,  see  §  155); 
5jL:i  'iZ*^  *i)ULl  he  walked  in  the  way  of  his  grand 
father.  More  rarely  the  absolute  object  is  found  with- 
out any  qualification,  as  Ljw«S  Xil^  he  struck  him 
with  a  stroke,  as  much  as  to  say,  he  struck  him  a 

blow,  and  what  a  blow !  CJ^  Swo  he  wrapped  it  in 
(so  many)  parcels ;  here  the  absolute  object  expresses 
rather  the  result  of  the  action. 

Note.  Sometimes  the  place  of  the  infinitive  is  taken  by  the 
mere  qualification,  as  Uji  jb  ^U.  he  journeyed  long,  for  Uj>  jb  \y^  ^U. 
he  journeyed  a  long  journey,  or  by  some  other  form  of  nearer 
definition,  as  lasiLo  j*j»5.Jl  c^,  iA&  &ii]  ^SJ  God  allowed  him  to 
capture  Jerusalem  peacefully  =  ^La  ^si. 

p)  The  accusative  stands  as  the  predicate  with  verbs  110. 
which  express  the  idea  of  being  or  becoming  some- 
thing, and  is  especially  common  with  the  verb  J^li^ 
(med.   .).    This  verb  signifies  either  1)  to  be  in  the 

7* 


100  111.    THE   ACCUSATIVE  AS  PREDICATE. 

G      ^     --      "' 

sense  of  to  exist,  as  ^jv.  ^\S'  there  was  (there  lived) 

a  vizier,  or  2)  to  be  something  (in  particular);  in 
the  latter  sense  it  takes  its  predicate  (to  adopt 
the   nomenclature    of    the    native    grammarians)    in 

the  accusative,    as    !^L^   x-j|yo|  o^jLS^  his  wife  was 

pregnant.     The  same  construction  is  adopted  by  all 

verbs  of  similar  signification,    such  as  ,^Mjd\  to  be 

something  late,  ^^.j^S  to  be  something  early,  jL^  to 

be  or  become  something  a  second  time,  1\S  to  remain, 

to  last,   J|v  to  cease  to  be  something,  »Lo  to  become 

something,  juJJ  not  to  be  something.  The  place  of 
the  accusative  in  the  predicate  may  be  taken  by  a 

preposition  with  its  case  (cf.  §  114  ff.),  as  JoC  ^\S 
c>.A^M  ^  Zaid  was  in  the  bouse;  ^j^waJI  d^Xo  ooLT 
\jOy^\  ^J<J^  (JiaAl  1%^  the  kings  of  Persia  belonged 
to  the  most  powerful  sovereigns  on  earth.  The  con- 
struction of  ^SS  and  the  others  with  a  finite  verb 
(§§  98/;  99  c)  must  also  be  understood  in  this  way, 
that  is,  the  predicate  in  such  cases  consists  of  a  verbal 

sentence  (§  135),  as  |^ji  Jo  jllllf  ^^J^oi  the  people 
had  already  (prop,  early)  become  weary. 

111.         The  accusative,  further,  stands  in  the  predicate 


112.   ACC.    OF   CONCOMITAlSrCE.    113.   ACC.   OF  ^'EARER  DEFINITION.     101 

after  the  negative  S},  when  the  latter,  as  the  Arahs 

say,  expresses  a  general  negation.  The  accus.  after  y, 
which  is  always  undetermined,  drops  its  nunation,  as 

aJUl  ^1   xJ!   ^  there  is  (absolutely)  no  God  but  Allah. 

The  accusative  is  used  after  the  conjunction  ;  to  112. 
indicate  concomitance,  especially  in  verbal  sentences 

(§    135),    as    dGir  v:i4Al^   Uo   what  hast  thou    and  - 

thy  father  done?    JuyJL  wuwl  viJ\  Lc  I  ceased  not 

to  go  with  (along)  the  Nile;  also  without  a  verb  Lo 

|jo\.  dll  what  hast  thou  (to  do)  with  Zaid? 

Y)  The  accusative  of  nearer  definition  is  employed  113. 
in  the  following  cases: 

1)  To  give  details  of  place  and  time,  as  Llx«o  liiij  a. 

yU-w.  he  looked  to  right  and  to  left  of  him;  L^^  vLL 

i^  ^  ^ 

he  journeyed  a  parasang;  ^Li^  LL^  they  came  late 

- "       ^^  \     y^        ^ 
in  the  evening;  xjll^  sjoo  siiJo  jCi  ^ixl|  he  con- 
tinued faithful  thereto  during  his  life-time. 

2)  Very  frequently  the  accusative,  as  a  rule  un-  h. 
determined,    appears  in  verbal   (rarely  in  nominal) 
sentences  as   the  accusative    of  state  or   condition, 

as  xJo^XiJI  ^1  L^I£o  XSu  he  journeyed,  taking  the 
direction  of  Medina;  LI^TLj  tll^  ouyaJ  I  met  'Amr 
weeping. 


102      113,    114*.    ACC.    OF  NEARER  DEFINITIOX  AND  EXCLAMATION. 

Note  a.  "With  the  accusative  of  condition  the  student 
must  be  careful  to  note  to  which  of  the  nouns  in  the  sentence  it 
applies;  in  the  last  sentence  above,  for  example,  it  might  refer 

to  the  subject  pronoun  implicit  in  CUjvSJ  instead  of  to  "^Amr. 

Note  b.  Two  nouns  in  the  accusative  of  condition  are 
often  placed  beside  each  other  without  a  conjunction  (asyndeton) 

as  l;)A«i  U^j**  \^  ^^I  (Grod  said  to  Satan):  Go  out  of  it  (pa- 

radise,  fern.)  as  one  cast  off  and  despised  (for  U^j«o  see  %lh  note). 
Note  c.    In  some  rare  cases   an  infinitive  is  used  (in  place 

of  a  participle)  to  denote  a  qualifying  circumstance;  Sy^to  JX5  he 


*  ^  .,  ^ 


was  killed  bound  (i.  e.  while  bound)  =  I;5'^^. 

c.  3)  The  accusative  of  5j9^c?y?cfl^^20w(==accus.  of  respect), 
also  in  most  cases  undetermined,  expresses  a  more 

precise  reference,  as  llftjCwwwXJ  oUaa^^  it  (paradise)  is 
beautiful  with  reference  to  staying  (there),  i.  e.  as  a  dwell- 
ingplace ;  this  accus.  is  especially  common  with  elatives 

(§  63  &)  of  a  more  general  signification,  as  Sw^.^^  Juii 
stronger  with  regard  to  the  colour  red  ==  redder. 

d.  4)  The  accusative  of  nearer  definition  is  also  em- 
ployed to  indicate  the  motive  or  purpose  of  an  action, 
in  which  case,   also,  it  is  mostly  undetermined,   as 

.  LL^  1^5^  *^®y  fl^d  from  cowardice ;  nJ  \uo\S\  c^^i' 
I  stood  up  to  do  him  honour. 
114*         The  accusative  may  also  stand  in  cases,  parti- 
cularly in  exclamations,  where  a  finite  verb  can  be 

supplied,    as  ^Lg-ll  '^ksmS  welcome!     Here  we  must 


114,    115.    THE  VERB  WITH  PREPOSITIONS.  103 

supply  ouLs^.  and  the  meaning  of  the  phrase  comes 

to  be:  thou  art  come  to  relatives  and  a  smooth  (i.  e. 

pleasant)  place;  !^L^  slowly!  to  be  taken  as  the 
absolute  object  of  an  imperative  understood. 

Of  the  numerous  constructions  of  the  verb  with  114, 
a  preposition  attention  need  only  be  called   to   the 
following. 

Many  prepositions  are  still  treated  as  nouns,  in 
accordance  with  their  original  signification  (see  §  94), 

as  ^13^1.  )5^tXJi  ^Aj  yjuo  he  distinguished  between 
(prop,  the  distance,  difference  of)  males  and  females. 
Very  frequently  we  find  (cf.  §  110)  the  partitive  ^ 

used  in  this  way  as  object,  e.  g.  ALilaJI  ^jjo  J.fl  he 
ate  of  the  food. 

A  few  verbs  are  construed,  with  but  slight  differ-  115. 
ence  of  meaning,  now  with  a  direct  object,  now  with 

CO,  as  ^LiJLi  he  knew  it,  ju  *JLc  he  knew  about  it. 
Frequently  ^^  serves  to  introduce  an  object,  to  which 
the  action  of  the  verb  extends  only  indirectly,  as 
ItXjv  oju  he  sent  Zaid;  ^^LiXJU  oou  he  sent  the 
writing  (i.  e.  some  one  with  the  writing);  jJJlII  ojlj 
he  sent  the  slave,  jJjLib    ouu,  same  meaning,  but 


104  116,    117.    THE  VERB  WITH  PREPOSITIONS. 

with   the  understanding  that  the  slave  travels  under 
escort.     Verbs   of  going  construed  with  u>  take  the 

■  sense  of  bringing,  as  J^b  t  JoC  ^^\  ^®  brought  Zaid 
the  news. — This  i^  may  also  accompany  an  impera- 
tive as  a  periphrasis  of  the  first  person  of  the  dual 
and  plural,  as  Uj   \jcla\  let  (thou)  us  go,  Hi  l-^cucj 

let  (ye)  us  go. 

116.  The  meaning  of  many  verbs  is  often  so  altered 
according  to  the  preposition  with  which  they  are 
construed  that  a  sense  quite  the  opposite  of  the 
original,  according  to  our  idiom,  is  the  result;  thus 

ad  Lis  is  properly:  he  called  (to  God)  in  his  favour, 

i.  e.  he  blessed  him,  xlic  Lc3  he  called  (to  God) 

against  him,  i.  e.  he  cursed  him;   w^^L  jLiX«ij  he 

occupied  himself  with  the  affair;  but  with  Jv^  (which 

contains  the  idea  of  separation)  ^^1  ^j^  Juu^ij  he 

was  occupied  so  that  he  put  the  affair  in  question 
aside,  could  not  attend  to  it. 

117.  Of  the  various  uses  of  the   preposition  J  (see 

§§  130  ff.),  we  may  call  attention  to  its  special  use  in 
dates,  particularly  in  specifying  the  days  of  the  month, 

as  ^^  ^yo  xJUJ  J.y  in  the  first  (literally:  to  the  first) 

night  of  (the  month)  Muharram.    fjJL^  JLlJ  ftjJ^l 


118.     DETERMIXATION.  (  ^^^ ^^^^JB&ITY 

- .--  -.      .  ■    .  ^    .1-.  2LP^T.^hu\^ 

^Loui  Jv>o   or  with  the  omission  of  JLJ 

Jtlii  /y^  ^^  ^^®  ^^™^  ^^  seven  nights,  which  (lif. 

§  155)  h'ad  elapsed  of  Sa'ban,  i.  e.  when  seven  nights 

(or  days)  of  S.  had  passed;  oo^  (jLJ)  SwCL^  *jn!^ 

j^Lijof  ^^  when  still  fourteen  (nights)  were  left  of 

Ramadan.  / 

Chap.  III.  The  Government  of  the  Noun.  (§§118—134). 

A  noun  may  take  with  it  a)  the  article,  ^3)  a  permut-  118. 
ative  (noun  in  apposition),  y)  a  qualifying  (attribu- 
tive) adjunct,  h)  a  genitive. 

a)  When  a  noun  is  preceded  by  the  article,  it  is  said 
to  be  determined  (§  79  &).  This  determination  may  be 
stronger  or  weaker: 

A  very  strong  determination  is  found  in  certain  a. 

words  which  contain  the  idea  of  time,  as  aLc.LlJI  this 

hour  =  now,  ^^jJI  this  day  =  today.  In  these  cases 
the  article  has  the  force  of  a  demonstrative. 

By  means  of  the  article  a  single  definite  object  is  b. 
indicated,  which  the  speaker  has  in  mind,  or  which 

has  been  already  mentioned:  by  Jc^lJI  is  meant  some 
particular  known  man.  Proper  names  furnished  with 
the  article  (see  §  19  a)  were  originally  appellatives 
with  the  determination,  as  ^^..^lif. 


106  119.    APPOSITION. 

c.         The   determination   by   the   article    often   serves 
merely  to  denote  the  species  or  class  to  which  some- 

thing  belongs,  as  sU^I  Jcl«  Jt  he  is  like  an  ass. 

This  use  of  the  article  is  named  the  generic. 

119.  P)  From  among  the  cases  in  which  a  noun  follows 
another  noun  in  apposition,  the  following  may  be 
singled  out  as  worthy  of  note: 
a.  «  A  substantive  may  have  in  apposition  words 
expressing  a)  size,  b)  resemblance,  c)  the  parts  and 
d)  the  material  of  which  a  thing  is  made  up.    Thus 

G  ^  Go-' 

a)  els 6  ^yj  a  dress  an  ell  long  (lit.  a  dress,  an  ell); 

b)  Jos  Jla^o  J^.  a  man  like  (lit.  the  likeness  of) 
Zaid;  c)  ^LoJ  Ju:s»  a  rope  made  up  of  rotten  pieces; 
d)  JotXil  (vi'LiI  the  iron  finger-ring;  when  undeter- 

^   y  G  ^  " 

mined  preferably  with  ^j^  as  ^^^^>  J^c  a.jLo  an  idol 
of  gold.    For  the  last,  the  genitive  construction  is 
also  found  viz:  v^^jJI  *Jv«o. 
6.         The  word  J^ totality  is  construed  either  with  the 
noun  following  in  the  genitive,  or  stands  in  apposition, 

with  a  suffix  referring  back  to  the  noun,  as  jj^LDI  Ji^ 

or  fV.gJL5^jiwQj|  all  men.  (Note  that  Jo'being  a  substan- 
tive always  remains  unchanged  as  regards  gender  and 
number). 


120.    QUALIFYING  ADJUNCTS.  107 

Y)  a  substantive  may  be  qualified  1)  by  an  adjective,  120. 
2)  by  a  preposition  with  its  case,  or  3)  by  a  relative 
clause  (§§  155—6). 

1)   The  qualifying  word  may  be  an  adjective^  as  a. 

Jt>Lc.   *Uol    an   honest    Imam;    in    this    case    if   the 

substantive   is    determined    the    adjective  must  also 

receive  the  determination,  as  JoLill  *Uo^l|,  the  honest 

Imam. 

The  adjective  follows  its  substantive;  to  this  rule  h. 
the  demonstrative  pronoun  forms  an  apparent  excep- 
tion, in  as  much  as  it  generally  stands  before  (like  the 
article  §  118),  less  frequently  after ^  the  substantive 

which  it  qualifies.  Thus  we  find  *ikiJ|  I  j^  this  slave, 
alongside  of  Ij^  ^^^oLfl. 

The  adjective  must  agree  with  its  substantive  in  c, 
gender  and  number,  as  ^i^^   *^H^  ^  pretty  girl. 
Among  the  exceptions  is  the  word  ^^^Oo  much,  which 

generally  remains  unchanged,  like  a  noun  in  apposi- 

0      -  s  ^ 
tion,  even  after  the  plural,   as  wAA5^JL:i.,  many  men. 

That  the  broken  plurals  take  their  adjectives  in  d. 
the  feminine  has  been  already  noted  (see  §  87«);  the 
adjective,  however,  may  also  take  a  broken  plural,  as  /   / 

aIwT  JLis,  noble  men.  The  plur. sanus,  moreover,  is  not 


108  121.    PREPOSITIONAL  PHRASE    AS   ADJUNCT. 

unfrequently  found  especially  if  the  adjective  qualifies 

words  denoting  living  beings,  as  ^-^L^JI  ib  ^  I  the 

ancestors  that  were  of  old  (part,  of  j^-^)-  ^^  ^^  same 
circumstances  the  collectives  (§  86  a)  may  also  take  a 

plural  adjective,  as  i.^V^  *  Jj  miserly  people,  ^.j^Lb  *Js 

violent  people.    The  preceding  pronoun  often  stands 

then  in  the  plural,  as  ,jj-uJ|  ^!j*P  these  men;  but 

with  fern,  plurals  that  do  not  denote  living  beings 

generally  in  the  fem.  singular,  as  v:i>|  JUJI   s  jjo  these 

deserts;  before  broken  plurals  also  in  the  fem.  sing., as 

viLJUiJI  5  jcJC  these  slaves. 

2)  From  those  cases  in  which  a  preposition  with  its 

J21.  noun  is  dependent  on  a  verb  (§§  114  ff.)  or  its  equi- 

^'  valent,  must  be  clearly  distinguished  those  in  which 

they  form  the  qualifying  attribute  of  another  noun, 

as  -jjJJLj   ijLo  J<£.  \^:^JLXs^  I  sat  down  beside  a 

goldsmith  (who  was)  in  the  bazaar;  djJu  ,j-^  '^^.)i> 

thy  posterity  (that  will  be)  after  thee. 

Sometimes  this  attribute  does  not  stand  next  to 
b.  the  word  qualified;  so  particularly  with  the  relatives 

,%Jo  and  Uo,  as  ^-j^I  ^jjo  iLiJI  J^t>  ^  those  of 

the  Arabs  that  advanced  into  Syria;  oLio  Li  L.^1 


122.    ASYNDETON  OF  ATTRIBUTES.       123.     THE   GEXITIVE.        109 

&LwujJI  r\^  *Xf  marry  of  the  women  whatever  seemeth 

good  unto  you. 

Should  several  attributes  qualify  a  single  substan-  122. 
tive,  the  connecting  conjunction  is  usually  omitted 

(asyndeton),  as  ^xkiJI  JJtJ!  iJUl  the  high  and  mighty 

God;  ibwiiJI  ljI*-?I  Jvo  /t^U  ^b  a  wide  gate  of  the 

gates  of  the    town;    iJJh3  aLwl,    ,^^    K^.-^uo   aLoU-t 

a  thick  cloud  over  his  head  which  gave  him  shade. 

h)  One  noun,  when  in  dependence  on  another,  is  put  123. 
in  the  genitive  case — the  function  of  which  is  to  deter- 
mine more  exactly  the  application  of  the  preceding 
noun.  As  the  result  of  the  close  connection  subsisting 
between  the  second  noun  and  the  first,  the  latter,  now 
said  to  be  in  the  construct  state  (§  79  c)  and  therefore 
without  the  article,  is  regarded  as  determined.  There- 

fore  ^.LjiJI  ^sx>>  is  'the  (particular)  spear  of  the 
(particular)  horseman',  and  so  with  the  suffixes,  as 

2L^.  his  (particular)  spear.  When  the  dependent  noun 
(nomen  rectum)  is  undetermined,  the  governing  noun 
(nomen  regens)  is  only  defined  in  a  generic  sense 
(§118  c),  or  is  specialized  in  a  way  resembling  the 

generic  definition,  as  sdJLc  ou-s  a  daughter  of  a  king 

=  a  king's  daughter. 


110   124.CONS.AND  GEN.IXSEP.  125. DETER.BYSUFF.  126. COMPOS. NOUNS. 

Note.    More  rarely,  in  the  latter  case,   the  generic  article 

SB  «     J<»» 

may  be  attached  to  the  nomen  rectum,  as  y^tJ^\  ^ja.  barley  bread 

124.  The  genitive  cannot  be  separated  from  the  go- 
verning word  (nomen  regens);  adjectival  and  other 
additions  must  therefore  stand  after  the  genitive,  as 

«.«jtJI  viLiiJl  vii^^Aj  the  spacious  house  of  the  king. 

When,  according  to  our  idiom,  a  genitive  belongs  to 
two  substantives,  in  Arabic  it  is  made  dependent  on 
the  first  of  the  two,  and  represented  with  the  second 

by  a  personal  pronoun,  as  ^uuo•  xJUl  iU^^  the  mercy 

and  blessings  of  God. 

125.  Substantives  conveying  the  idea  of  time  sometimes 
receive  a  specially  strong  determination  by  the  addition 

of  suffixes  (cf.  §  118 «),  as  2JL1I  jLo  he  prayed  his 
night,  i.  e.  the  particular  night  in  which  he  then  was. 
lie.  The  close  connection  of  two  nouns  thus  standing 
in  the  genit.  relation  makes  sometimes  possible  their 
fusion  to  one  idea,  although  only  the  first  component 

admits  of  inflection.  Thus  xJUl  jJx.  (gen.  xiJI  tX^; 
ace.  aJLf!  tXlt)  the  servant  of  Allah,  as  a  proper  name, 
conveys  but  a  single  idea.  Further  illustrations  will  be 
found  in  the  numerous  examples  of  composite  proper 
names,  of  which  one  of  the  elements  is  one  or  other  of  the 
words  ^1  son,  CA  father,  ciJj  daughter,  jl|  mother. 


127.   SUBST.  USE   OF  ADJJ.   128.      EXPLICATIVE   GENITIVE.        Ill 

As  the  Arabs  have  no  family  names,  properly  so-called, 
the  name  of  a  man  or  woman  receives  for  distinction's 
sake  an  addition  by  the  help  of  the  above  words,  as 

Jowj  jj^  (Xt^  U^yj^'  V?'  (observe  the  order).  Very 
frequently  a  name  thus  made  up  has  become  the 
principal  name,  as  that  of  the  first  Caliph  ^xj  •jl, 
for  example,  or  that  of  the  savant  iujuCi*  ^^U  names 
of  tribes,  too,  like  s.^JL5  ^Lj,  are  in  the  same  way 
simple  notions  (Einheitsbegriffe). 

Not  unfrequently  an  adjective  which  in  our  idiom  127. 
would  be  made  to  qualify  its  substantive,  is  in  Arabic 
raised  to  the  rank  of  a  substantive,  on  which  its  proper 

substantive  is  made  to  depend ;  thus  xoAi>  ^.S  the 
noble(ness)  of  his  character  =  his  noble  character; 
y^UJl  Ji6\  most  men.  The  same  construction  is  found 
with  elatives  also,  as  x-«iuut  jjy^l  !«-wLc  they  lived 
the  easiest  life  (cf.  §  109). 

A  species  of  explicative  genitive  is  found  in  cases  128. 
where  a  general  conception  is  more  explicitly  defined 

by  a  following  proper  name,  as  ^j^l  ^J  the  land 

of  Yemen. — Under  this  head  may  be  reckoned  the 

suffixes  appended  to  numerals,  as  ^ (l'^'^^''^  the  three 
of  them. 


112     129.  CLAUSE  AS  GEN.     130.  PERIPH.  OF  GEN.    131.  CONS.  OF  INFIN. 

129.  A  few  words  containing  the  ideas  of  time  and 
place  may  have,  instead  of  a  genitive,  a  whole  clause 

depending  on  them,  as  Jjci*  *5«>  on  the  day  on  which 

he  was  killed. 

130.  When  a  noun  on  which  another  noun  is  in  the 
proper  sense  (cf.  §  134)  dependent  must  remain  absolu- 
tely undetermined  (see  §  123),  the  usual  genitive  rela- 
tion of  nomen  regens  and  nomen  rectum  is  inadmissible, 
and  the  connection  of  the  two  must  be  expressed  by 

a  preposition,  as  Ji}    •  |  a  brother  of  yours,  where 

jjG  is  attrib.  adjunct  to    •  I  (see  §  121 «). 

131.  Infiniiives  may  govern  their  object  according  to 
the  laws  either  of  verbal  or  of  nominal  government. 
In  the  first  instance  their  subject  is  subordinated  in  the 

genitive;  Jo;  J^XiJ  accordingly  means:  the  circumstance 

that  Zaid  has  killed.  If  no  subject  is  named,  the  object 
may  likewise  stand  in  the  genitive,  so  that  the  same 

expression  Jov  Joci*  may  also  mean :  the  circumstance 

that  Zaid  has  been  killed,  the  fact  of  Zaid's  being  killed. 
When  both  subject  and  object  are  present,  the  former 
is  treated  as  a  subjective  genitive ;  the  latter  remains 
in  the  accusative  or  J  with  the  genitive  is  used  as  a 

periphrasis  for  the  accusative,  as  y^\  lo^-xi  2lLo^IJuo 


132.    PARTICIPLE  WITH  OBJECT.  113      - 

the   circumstance    that   he  was  constantly  drinking 

0"?  w   J 

wine;  . t^J  ^^-^^  the  circumstance  that  I  am  fond 
of  wine.  J  also  stands  after  an  undetermined  infinitive 
(e.  g.  in  cases  like  §  113^  and  others)  as  UCi'l  o^* 
Jop  I  stood  up  to  do  honour  to  Zaid. 

In  the  case  of  the  participle,  the  object  of  the  132. 
verb  appears  as  the  objective  genitive,  and  when  the 
part,  has  the  sense  of  the  perfect  it  is  determined  by 
the  genitive  following,  as  ,jo>^t  (3JLL  ^JU!  God  is 
he  who  has  created  the  earth  =  the  creator  of  the 
earth.  With  a  present  or  future  sense  the  governing 
participle  is  not  determined,  as  ^j-iJl  'iJ^\b  ^y*JLi  Jo 
every  soul  is  one  that  will  taste  of  death ;  JliS%^  aJj^ 
he  is  one  that  will  meet  with  you.  If  the  participle 
is  in  itself  determined,  the  object  stands  in  the 
accusative  or  is  expressed  periphrastically  with  J,  as 
[JLfJLJ  vlJUaJI  he  who  strives  after  knowledge;  the 
same  applies  when  the  participle  is  strictly  undeter- 
mined,  as  auot  nU  CJLb  one  who  wishes  to  take 
blood  revenge  for  his  father;  *^Lw^  LLs?  oJs  Lo  I 
have  not  ceased  to  love  Islam. 

Socin,  Arabic  Grammar.^  8 


114   133.  UNDETEEM.  STAT.  CONSTR.  134.  IMPROP.  ANNEXATION. 

133.  A  special  idiomatic  use  of  certain  generic  words 
is  their  combination  with  a  following  genitive.  They 
are   determined   or  undetermined  according   to   the 

context,  e.  g.  .6  he  who  has,  possessor  of  (cf.  §  90/), 

JLo  ,3  the  possessor  of  wealth,  a  rich  man;  v_^Lo 

companion,  owner,  JJic  v^j=».Lothe  man  of  sense;  J^l 

people,  LyjJt  J^l  people  of  the  world= worldly  people; 

(jdxj  portion,  e.  g.  &LJLiJ!  u>d*j  one,  some  of  the 

learned;  tx^  prop,  change,  then  'another  than',  as 

5yj^  s  Joiu  viJUUi  viJULJJI  ^Lo  the  king  died  and  another 

than  he  reigned  after  him;    similarly  ^xij   one,  as 

*jCtX^t  one  of  them;  finally  ^j^jl  son,in  certain  common 

idioms,  as  XjLw  ^jjo^*  ^I  thirty  years  old. 

134.  A  special  kind  of  genitive  relation  is  presented 
by  the  so-called  improper  annexation,  by  which  a 
participle  or  a  verbal  adjective  (see  §  60  &)  is  more 
strictly  limited  or  defined  by  a  following  genitive,  as 

«is^  Jl  ^j.jufcfli-  Jii^)  ^  ^^^  beautiful  of  countenance. 
This  construction  is  best  rendered  by  a  relative  clause, 
the  subject  of  which  will  be  the  word  that  more  clearly 
defines  the  governing  idea,  in  other  words  the  genitive 
of  the  Arabic  will  be  the  nominative  of  the  English, 
a  man  whose  countenance  is  beautiful.  In  such  a  case 


135,   136.    THE  VERBAL   SENTENCE.  115 

the  governing  word  is  not  determined  by  the  following 
genitive;  should  the  latter  require  to  be  determined, 
it  may  receive  the  article  (contrary  to  the  rule  in 

§  123)  as  at&.Jl  ^jJ^\  J^  Jl  the  man  of  the  beautiful 

countenance,  i.  e.  whose  countenance  is  beautiful. 


Chapter  IV.    The  Simple  Sentence.     (§§  135—151). 

Sentences  in  Arabic  are  of  two  kinds,  verbal  and  135. 
nominal. 

The  chief  characteristic  of  a  verbal  sentence  is  the 
fact  that  it  always  contains  a  finite  verb ;  in  fact,  a 
verb  of  this  kind  with  its  inherent  (subject)  pronoun 

is  in  itself  a  complete  verbal  sentence,  as  ool^  thou 
hast  struck.  This  type  of  sentence  always  expresses 
the  commeficement  of  some  activity^  understood  in  the 
widest  sense.  If  a  special  exponent  of  the  idea  con- 
veyed by  the  subject  of  the  verb  is  added,  it  follows 
the  verb  in  the  case  appropriate  to  the  subject,  viz. 

the  nominative,  as  Ju\  C>^  he  has  struck,  Zaid  (has) 
=  Zaid  has  struck,  whereby  Zaid  is  singled  out  as 
the  agent. 

In  the  verbal  sentence,  the  finite  verb  does  not  136. 

always  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  following 

8* 


116  136.  CONCORD  IN  THE  VERBAL  SENTENCE. 

subject.     The  following  are  the  chief  points    to  be 
noted  in  this  connection: 

a.  The  verb  stands  in  the  masculine  singular  before 
sound  or  outer  plurals,  and  generally  before  the  masc. 
forms  of  the  dual. 

b.  The  verb  stands  in  the  feminine  singular  1)  before 
a  sing.  fern,  if  it  follows  the  verb  immediately,  2)  be- 
fore sound  plurals  feminine,  3)  before  the  fern,  forms 
of  the  dual,  and  4)  before  broken  plurals  (cf.  next 
sub-section). 

c.  The  verb  stands  in  the  masculine  or  feminine  singular 
1)  before  a  sing.  fem.  not  immediately  following  the 
verb,  2)  before  collectives,  3)  before  broken  plurals 
denoting  male  persons ;  if  these  plurals  do  not  imme- 
diately follow  the  verb,  the  latter  in  most  cases  takes 
the  masc.  singular  form. 

d.  Once  the  subject  is  introduced,  the  verbs  following 
agree  with  it  in  gender  and  number,  as  jJLL.  Jo;  ^l^ 
t  JU*.  iJUl  lXa^*  there  came  Zaid,  Halid  and'Abdallah 
and  they  said.  After  collectives  also  the  verb,  in  such 
a  case,  often  takes  the  plural,  as  tsSjsujI  ,jL^-ijtJl  o^-*dx) 
the  young  people  set  out  to  follow  him.  So  too  after 
words  like  l^i*  and  others.  Still  it  is  always  possible 
for  the  verb   to  remain  in  the  singular,   as  JwJp>^ 


137.    INDEFINITE   SUBJECT.  117 

&M*1^  J^  ^\0^  l^jo  nuj^  and  the  Kuraishites 
(the  tribe  Kuraish)  imprisoned  whomsoever  they 
could  imprison. 

A  subject  unknown,  or  purposely  left  unnamed,  137. 
is  treated  as  follows  (cf,  French  on  dit,  German  man 
sagt) : 

1)  The  verb  is  put  in  the  3.  pers.  sing,  of  the  a.    ^ 

passive  (see  §  103),  as  2uJI^  JLlo  they  journey  to  him. 
It  is  to  be  noted  that  this  impersonal  passive  can 
never  stand  without  a  complement  (here  «jjI). 

2)  Or  in  the  3.  pers.  plur.  of  the  active,  as  |  JU  h. 
they  said. 

3)  Or  in  the  2.  pers.  sing,  (or  plur.)  of  the  active,  c. 

e.  g.  in  the  Kur'an  ooK!  or  aJCjIJ  dost  thou  think? 
do  ye  think?  where  it  is  not  any  particular  persons 
that  are  addressed,  but  people  in  general,  as  much 

as  to  say  'could  any  one  suppose  that ....?'  Jju  one 
might  say  (cf.  Eng.  'as  you  might  say'). 

4)  There  may  be  added   to  the  verb  a  subject  d. 

(participle)  formed  from  the  same  root,  as  Job*  JU  or 

JoLflJI  jUj  some  one  said;   jsJ^jjo  ^^fJl  !^K  J  w«fli> 

a  castle,  the  like  of  which  had  never  been  seen. 

Note.    The  case  of  an  undefined  complement  of  a  verbal 
action  being  expressed  by  a  substantive  derived  from  the  verb  is 


118  138.    INDEFINITE    SUBJ.     139.    NOMINAL   SENTENCE. 

not  unfrequently  met  elsewhere  than  in  the  above  construction, 
e.  g.  UaS5  JX5  aliquem  (interfectum)  interfecit,  J)^  &«J  j^Jl>w  II 
they  did  not  fear  the  reproof  of  any  reprover. 

138.  Occasionally,  out  of  sometliing  that  has  heen 
mentioned,  a  story  or  the  like,  there  arises  an  in- 
definite subject  corresponding  to  our  "it",  which  is 
usually  expressed  by  the  feminine  of  the  verb;  for 

example,  after  a  fable  or  the  like,  %^  oJ^tXi?  and 
it  (i.  e.  this  story)  passed  into  a  proverb. 

139.  The  nominal  sentence^  in  contrast  to  the  verbal 
sentence,  expresses  a  state  or  condition  of  the  subject. 
This  last  as  a  rule  stands  at  the  head  of  the  sentence 
in  the  case  appropriate  to  the  subject,  viz.  the  nomina- 
tive ;  in  most  cases  it  is  determined  while  the  predicate 
is  undetermined.  The  predicate  may  consist  of  one 
or  other  of  the  following: 

a)  a  simple  noun,  as  (JLi  <Xjv  Zaid  is  wise; 

V)  a  preposition  and  its  case,  as  JjJt  ^  J^vJI  the 

man  is  in  the  house; 

c)  an  adverb,  as  Ll^  aJUl  <Xa.c  'Abdallah  is  here. 

d)  a  complete  sentence,  which  may  be  either  a)  a 
verbal  sentence,  or  P)  a  nominal  sentence;  the  whole 

^    ^     S  0^ 

now  becomes  a  compound  sentence.  Exx.:  a)  ,jOy>o  Jo\ 
Zaid  (he)  is  ill;    s^jf  <jiwo  Jo^  Zaid,  his  father  is 


140,   141.    NOMINAL   SENTENCE.  119 

ill;  P)  ^»yMO  sol  Jo;  Zaid,  his  father  is  aged  (i.  e. 

Zaid's   father   &c.).     The   sentence   constituting   the 

predicate  must  contain  a  pronoun  referring  back  to. 

the  subject.    The  subj.  thus  placed  at  the  head  of 

the  sentence  has  been  wrongly  named  the  nominative 

absolute. 

Note.   The  difficulty  we  feel  in  distinguishing  between  ^yc 

j>i3  and  >~»yc  jj^^  Zaid  has  struck,  may  be  explained  in  this  way. 
In  the  first  of  these  two  expressions  it  is  the  act  of  striking  that 
is  uppermost  in  the  speaker's  mind,  and  the  enquiry  as  to  the 
subject  or  agent  from  whom  the  act  proceeds  is  answered  with 

Zaid,  on  which  the  logical  emphasis  now  rests.  In  *^yc  j^^j,  on 
the  other  hand,  we  start  with  Zaid  as  a  given  subject  or  agent, 
and  the  question  as  to  what  is  to  be  predicated  regarding  this 

subject  or  as  to  what  this  agent  has  done  is  answered  by  ^^, 
on  which  in  its  turn  the  logical  centre  of  gravity,  so  to  say, 
comes  to  rest. 

Between  subject  and  predicate,  when  both  are  140. 
determined,  there  ought  to  stand  the  pronoun  of  the 
3.  person,  but  this  rule  is  not  always  observed,  as 

j^l  ye  ^JLI!  God  is  the  living  One. — Sometimes, 
also,  this  pron.  merely  serves  to  emphasize  the 
subject. 

In  negative  and  interrogative  sentences  the  predi-  141. 

Go-     -    o"^ 

cate  stands  before  the  subject,  as  Ju\  ^\  where  is 
Zaid?  I^j  ^vo  *X)  Li  ye  have  no  helper  (in  which 
case   the   subject  ^I   receives   the    addition  of  \jo 


120  142.    NOMINAL   SENTENCE. 

(=  Frencli  du,  &c.)  as  strengthening  the  negation).  In 
the  same  way  a  predicate  consisting  of  a  preposition 
and  its  noun,  or  of  an  adverb,  stands  before  the  subject 
when  the  latter  is  undetermined  and  is  not  more 
precisely  defined  by  any  qualifying  word  or  phrase, 

as  HlLol  sIjJI  ^  in  the  house  is  a  woman;   J^o  |V^x) 

Ix\  among  them  are  some  who  maintain. 

Note.    A  predicate  of  this  sort  may  even  stand  before  a 
determined  subject,  but  in  that  case  the  logical  emphasis  is  on  the 

subject,  as  ^^'y  ^^JJ*,  Zaid  is  with  me,  while  in  ^^  0.^3  the 

logical  stress  is  on  the  predicate;  Zaid  is  with  me. 

142.  Verbal  adjectives  (§  60&),  in  virtue  of  the  verbal 

idea  inherent  in  them,  sometimes  stand  as  predicate 

"before  the  noun  in  the  place  of  a  finite  verb,  as  Jov 
ll«.i  s.-?!  ^^>L3  Zaid,  his  father  struck  Amr  =  Zaid's 
father  &c.  The  predicate,  thus  placed  in  advance, 
frequently  agrees  in  gender  and  number  with  its  subject 

following,  as  ^J^J^  '^yij\  whose  hearts  have  been 
inclined  (to  Islam),  but  in  respect  of  case  it  agrees 
with   the    word    on  which  this  kind  of  sentence  is 


generally  dependent,  as  aju^  o tX^  ^  with  a  mouth, 

whose  saliva  is  sweet;  L^Ol  RiJUis?  Cj\%3  LIjI;  we 
found  animals,  the  species  of  which  differed  from  each 
other,  of  different  sorts.    A  circumstantial  accusative 


143,    144,    145.    NOMINAL   SENTENCE.  121 

(§  113  &)  may  also,  in  this  way,  refer  to  a  following 
subject,  although  it  is  really  dependent  on  the  preced- 
ing verbs,  as  s^jI  LIsI*  JoC  :^L^  Zaid  came,  while  his 
father  rode. 

When  the  subject  of  a  nominal  sentence  consists  143. 
of  a  demonstrative  pronoun,  the  latter  agrees  in  gen- 

der  with  the  following  predicate,  as  ib^l^  s  j^  this 
is  a  female  slave. 

The  predicate  of  Li  not  (often  also  that  of  J^  144.    u^ 
§§  50  and  110,  and  of /.li^§  110  when  occurring  with  a 
negative)  is  introduced  by  v^,  as  viJUUj  !  j^  Lo  this  is 
no  king. 

In  the  relation  of  subject  and  predicate  (cf.  §  119«)  145. 
may  stand  in  Arabic: 

A  thing  and  its  dimensions,  as  Lils<3  ^y^  A^«t|  a. 
the  pillar  is  thirty  cubits  (high). 

A  thing  and  that  which  it  resembles,  as  jd/j  »Il!  |  h.  , 

LJpl  selling  is  the  likeness  of  (is  like)  usury;  and  so 

with  vj  (§  95/),  which  likewise  may  stand  in  any  of 
the  three  cases. 

A  thing  and  its  parts,  as  ^Uub  «jnI  ^^\  J^  c.  ^ 
the  kings  of  the  Persians  fall  into  four  divisions. 


122        146.  NOM.  SENT.     147.  NOM.  SENT.  WITH  'iwwa,  'a?ma. 

d.         A  thing  and  its  material   JotX^    joLo^I  u»d*S 

oyi^  Llj^ajul  one  part  of  the  toes  was  of  iron  and 
another  of  clay. 

146.  In  certain  cases  a  pronoun  has  to  be  supplied  as 

subject  of  a  nominal  sentence,  as  J<i^  xj  JUb  it  is 
said   of  him    "he  is  Muhammed",  i.  e.  he  is  called 

Muhammed,  prop.  =  iX4^  yo. 

147.  The  particles  ^jl^  {T^SiT})  behold,  and  ^|  that  (cf. 
*  §  96^),  the  compound  particles  JjO  {,^S)  never- 

theless,  j^lj  as  if,  ^^  because,  and  other  combinations, 

and  also  JJu  perhaps,  ouJ  would  that,  are  all  follow- 
ed by  a  nominal  sentence  the  subject  of  which  stands 

in  the  accusative,  as  l^S  I  Jo\  J^l^  behold  (truly)  Z. 

is  generous.    The  predicate  of  the  nominal  sentence 

following  J^l  or  ^|,  if  it  should  consist  of  an  adverb 
or  a  preposition  with  its  case  (see  §§  139,  141),  may 
stand  before  the  subject,  which  must  still  be  in  the 

accusative,  as  !^L^\  LLc  ^\^  verily  (only  in  the  rarest 

cases  translatable)  here  is  a  man;  Uit^  X**UJI  ^^  ^jl 

in  the  citadel  is  a  prison. 

Note.  Sometimes  a  qualifying  phrase  consisting  of  a  preposi- 

tion  and  its  case  appears,  in  addition,  before  the  subject,  as  ^  ^^ 

^-.  ^     ..^^ 

&^\^  .^^  I  have  a  request  (to  make)  of  thee. 


148.   NOMINAL  SENT.  WITH  'inntt  AND  ^anna.  123 

The  corroborative  particle  J  (§  95^)  is  frequently  h. 

prefixed  to  the  predicate  after  a  preceding  J^l^,   as 

J^Lo  ^J  bbl  Jjl  truly  our  father  is  in  error;  or 

even  to  the  subject,  as  sJjlI  dlj^  ^  ^^1  truly  there- 
in is  an  example. 

After  the  particles  above  mentioned,  the  pronoun  c. 
of  the  3.  pers.  sing,  masc,  as  the  so-called  pronoun 
of  the  fact,  is  sometimes  used  as  the  subject  of  a 
nominal  sentence;  the  predicate,  in  this  case,  consists 

of  a  complete  sentence  (cf.  §  139^),  as  ^JUj  ^  xjl 


-       >     c^ 


^•»*^JI  of  a  truth  (=  the  fact  is),  the  evil-doers  do 
not  prosper;  .\y=^  •jJ  Jw^  ^o  xj  1  Joo  it  is  rela- 
ted  that  M.  had  four  female  slaves. 

c 

While  ^1  introduces  a  new  and  independent  sen-  148. 

"  05  ^  a. 

tence,   one  introduced  by  ^\  always  forms  part  of 

another  sentence,  as  ^^»i  ^^  jLa  aJUl  ^^1  Jou  *JI 
wjjo  knowest  thou  not  that  God  is  mighty  over  all; 
here  the  sentence  beginning  with  A  is  really  the  ob- 
ject.  In  JC4-&I  iol  3  ^iJwCio  i*-^  there  has  never  been 
any  doubt  that  he  is  blind,  the  sentence  with  ^\  is 
virtually  in  the  genitive;  in  ^<>^  ^u!  jc6*^  ^^  ^^^ 
reached  my  ears  that  he  is  married,  it  represents  the 
subject. 


124  148.   SENTENCES  WITH  'ttfi  und  md. 

b.  Verbal  sentences  introduced  by  ^|  also  form  in 
this  way  an  integral  part  of  the  principal  sentence ;  a 
distinction  must  be  made,  however,  between  two  va- 
rieties of  this  construction.   If  the  sentence  beginning 

with  ^1  asserts  that  something  is  now  going  on,  or 
that  it  has  now  ceased,  the  verb  in  the  subordinate 
clause  remains  in  the  indicative,  as  \\  \jq  o4^ 
(or  simply  ^|)  J^^  ^  I  am  surprised  that  he  takes 
the  field  against  me,  |^iix>  ^^\  J[  dUj  I^JLiii  and 
they  did  this  until  they  died ;  if,  on  the  other  hand, 
something  is  conceived  as  falling  in  the  future  and 
therefore  still  uncertain,  the  subjunctive  (cf.  §  100) 

is  required,  as  I  Jo  Jotii  ^^1  dU  it  falls  to  thee  to  do 
SO,  u^.a.1^1  ^yo  .iX^  ^\  j^xUj  it  is  fit  and  proper 
that  thou  shouldst  guard  against  shameful  actions. 

Note.   Sometimes  the  preposition  which  indicates  the  relation 
of  the  two  parts  of  the  sentence  is  omitted  before  ^  and  ^1,  as 

ffl*       -     i  s=       -      .' 

^jjl  ^J  =  ^U  JUj  this  was  for  the  reason  that,  and  it  was  so, 
because  &c. 

c.  In  the  cases  discussed  in  the  above  sub-section 
an  infinitive  may  take  the  place  of  ^1  with  the  finite 
verb.  Quite  as  frequently  as  ^|  in  such  cases,  we 
find  Uo  with  the  finite  verb  (of  course  always  in  the 


149.    SEVERAL   PREDICATES.       150.    NEGATIVE   SENTENCES.      125 

^     0  ^   "      ,     GS 


indicative),  as  |jo\  oowo  uLo  v.:>J!r^  I  am  surprised 
that  thou  hast  struck  Zaid  =  jjo*  i^yc  Jwx.  The 
use  of  this  so-called  infiiiitive-m«  is  very  common; 
thus  we  have  it  in  ^^(as) — made  up  of  (^and  Uo — 
with  a  verbal  sentence:  ^l^i,  Vr^  ^-^^b  Vr*^  ^^^^ 
was  beaten  as  'Amr  was  beaten. 

When  more  than  one  predicate  is  required  in  a  149 
nominal  sentence,  they  generally  follow  each  other 
without  a  conjunction  (cf.  §§  122,  113  &,  note  b),  as 

0       ^     s        ^        ^ 

l^jJLt  lflA.ft.&  ^\^  I  am  attentive  and  well-informed. 

The  same  is  the  case  with  the  predicates  of  the  verb 

^^li^ (which  frequently  occurs  as  the  substantive  verb) 

and  the  verbs  akin  thereto  (see  §  110),  as  xXJUmJI  ^^ 

L^j^dxj^  ^y}»  \  j^^.t..'^  HiljU^  \hAx,^  v^'yl  y^\  y-*r^ 

t,ji.Aj.o  the  kingdom  will  in  the  latter  days  become 

mixed  and  a  prey  to  dissension,  and  one  of  which 
one  part  will  be  strong  and  another  weak. 

In  negative  verbal  sentences  we  find  Uo  with  the  150. 
perfect,  as  ljj-Cw  Lo  he  did  not  drink,  or  ^  with  the 
apocopated  impf.  (jussive,  cf.  §  101  c). 

With  the  impf.  indicative  Lo  is  used,  as  ^yM  Uo  b. 


126  151.    EXCEPTIVE  PARTICLE. 

he  does  not  drink,  or  Sf  with  the  same  tense  il>l*io  ^ 
he  does  not,  or  he  will  not  drink. 

Other  uses  of  S  are  (a)  with  the  apoc.  impf.  (cf. 
§  101  &)  and  (b)  with  the  perfect  (cf.  §  98  d).  As  negativ- 
ing an  act  in  the  past  Si  can  only  stand  before  the  per- 
feet  when  two  perfects  come  together,  as  S"!  ^_w Juo  ^ 

Jco  he  neither  believed  nor  prayed,  or  after  sentences 
with  other  negatives. 

Note.  A  j)receding  negative,  even  in  the  same  sentence,  is 
frequently  resumed  by  means  of  IJ,  as  ^ua-lo  o^  ^i^A^I  ixsw  J  he 
did  not  find  the  village  nor  yet  his  friend  again. 

151.         After  the  exceptive  particle  ^|  that  which  is  ex- 
cepted stands  in  the  accusative  when  a  positive  sentence 

precedes,  as  ljo\  ^1^  jj>.UJ|  t\s^  the'people  came,  ex- 
cept Zaid;  when  a  negative  sentence  precedes  that 
which  is  excepted  is  less  frequently  in  the  accusative, 
but  rather,  as  a  rule,  in  the  same  case  as  the  word 
to  which  the  limitation  or  exception  applies,  as  Lo 
t\j\  *i\  f»y^l  ^^  the  people  came  not,  except  Zaid; 
4>ov  ^1^  tX^L  ^;vo  tx)  I  passed  no  one  except  Z.? 
\>^  !^t  \d^\  v:iol^  Li  I  have  struck  no  one,  excepi; 
'Amr.  Very  frequently  in  such  cases  it  is  the  exception 
that  brings  us  the  necessary  logical  complement,  as 


152.    CO-ORDINATE   SENTENCES.  127 

Ju'o   ^t  ^5^  ^  ^  have  not  passed  (anyone)  except 
Zaid,  i.  e.  I  have  passed  only  Zaid. 

Note.  Also  in  the  sentence  &Ul  ^f  ill  ^  (§  111)  there  is  no 
God  but  Allah,  the  last  word  is  in  the  nominative,  because  it  is 
the  logical  subject  (there  is  no  God,  if  not  Allah;  but  Allah  is). 

In  the  sentence  ^tJ^«J|  ^JWI  41)0  2)f  85J  2/3  J^a.  U  there  is  neither 

power  nor  strength  except  (in  union)  with  Allah,  the  high  and 

mighty  One,   the  ideas  of  power  and  strength  (8^*^  J)**)  ™^st 
logically  be  supplied  before  the  exception. 


Chapter  V.    Compound  Sentence.    (§§  162—161). 

Co-ordinate  sentences  are  as  a  rule  joined  together  152. 
by  a  copulative  particle.   Thus  a  simple  co-ordinated 

sentence  is  usually  introduced  by  ;  (§  95 e),  as  J^3 

JLs.  Jo\  Z.  entered  and  said,  o  (§  95  e),  on  the  other 
hand,  is  used  when  the  connection  of  the  two  sen- 
tences is  less  close,  when,  for  example,  the  second  event 

follows  the  first  only  after  a  certain  interval,  as  ^joJa 
^y^  Jo\  Zaid  was  ill;  soon  after  he  died,  o,  according- 
ly, is  often  used  when  the  subject  is  changed,  as  joC  *l^ 
iJ  oJUi  Zaid  came;  and  so  I  said  to  him.    ".U  with 

a  following  nominal  sentence  expresses  the  motive  of 
the  action  and  is  to  be  rendered  by  'then',  'therefore'. 


128  153,  154.    RELATIVE  CLAUSES. 

Note  a.  In  lively  narrative  prose  the  connective  particles 
are  often  dispensed  with,  particularly  when  the  story  is  told  in 
dialogue  form,  the  words  of  each  speaker  being  then  mostly  intro- 
duced by  a  simple  Jl5. 

Note  b.  As  illustration  of  the  omission  of  the  connectives 
(asyndeton)  must  not  be  quoted  certain  combinations  of  two  verbs 
(cf.  §  99  note  a),  in  which  the  second  verb  denotes  rather  the 
end  to  which  some  more  general  activity  is  directed;  such,  for 
example,  is  the  imperfect  with  verbs  denoting  a  beginning.  In 
other  cases,  a  perfect  may  be  made  to  depend  on  a  perfect,  an 
imperfect  on  an  imperfect,  an  imperative  on  an  imperative,  as 

]ylj\ju  lyolJ  they  arose   and   fought  with  each  other;    l^Ibxl  *^ 

arise  and  woo  her. 

Note  c.    Among  the  connective  particles  ^X^  may  also,  in 


result  expected  in  the  future   (§    100),   but  denotes   the  actual 

completion  of  an  action,  as  in  the  sentence  &JCo  jy  ^^Xs>.  y\m  he 
journeyed  until  he  alighted  at  Mecca  =  he  journeyed  and  at  last 

alighted  &c.  In  such  cases  ^^X^  may  also  be  followed  by  an  imperf. 

03 

indicative  or  by  ^J  with  a  nominal  sentence. 

153.  Relative  sentences  or  clauses  are  of  two  kinds, 
those  which  do  not  accompany  a  noun  and  those 
which  do  accompany  and  qualify  a  noun.  As  regards 
the  asyndetical  connection  of  seyeral  qualifications, 
the  latter  class  is  subject  to  the  same  treatment  as 
the  qualifying  adjuncts  discussed  in  §§  120 — 122. 

154.  Those  relative  sentences  that  do  not  depend  on 

or  qualify  a  noun  are  introduced  either  by  ^  jj|  (see 
§   14 «)   he  that,  that  which,  whoso,   &c.,  which  is 


155.    RELATIVE   CLAUSES.  129 

declinable  and  always  determined,  or  by  the  indeclin- 
able pronouns  ^  (he  that,  one  that,  whosoever,  those 

that,  such ...  as)  and  Co  (that  which,  a  thing  that,  what). 
The  former  is  sometimes  determined,  sometimes  unde- 

termined.  Exx:  xiLiiJI  v^^^  (^  '^^W  '^r^(J^<^^^ 
those  that  reject  our  revelations,  they  will  be  the  people 
of  the  left  hand  (Jo  jJI  is  here  in  the  nom.  as  being 
the  subject);  Luyb  v::JiJLia.  ^j^  J^(l  (the  devil  said:) 
Shall  I  fall  down  before  one  whom  thou  hast  formed 
of  clay  {^  is  here  in  the  genit.)  ?  *^t^L?  \jyy^, 
*-^  JLL  ^jJjl^  Li  they  speak  with  their  mouth  what 
is  not  in  their  hearts  (Lo  is  here  accus.). 

A  relative  clause  is  made  to  follow  and  qualify  155. 
a  substantive  by  means  of  j^  jJI  only  when  the  sub- 
stantive in  question  (the  antecedent)  is  determined', 
with  it  j^tXJI  agrees  in  gender  and  number,  as  o^wo 
■A^  i^JJI  J^ Jl  I  struck  the  man  that  came.  The 
explanation  of  this  is  that  ^^jJI  is  originally  not  a 

relative  in  our  sense  of  that  word,  but  a  demonstra- 
tive, and  as  such  it  is  always  determined.  The  above 
sentence,  for  example,  means,  strictly  speaking:  I 
struck  that  man  there,  he  came.    On  the  other  hand 


Socin,  Arabic  Grammar.* 


130  156.    RELATIVE   CLAUSES. 


OS^ 


the  relative  clause  is  appended  without  ,c JJI  when 
the  antecedent  is  undetermined,  as  ^L^  liviTs  ^"li 
I  struck  a  man  who  came  (prop.  I  struck  a  man,  he 
came). 

Note.  ^oJI  is  also  dispensed  with  when  the  antecedent  is 
only  determined  in  a  general  sense  (i.  e.  when  it  has  the  generic 
article  see  §  118  c?),  as  I^U-I  J*^^  yUs^S  Ji^J'  like  an  ass  that 
carries  hooks. 

156.  The  relative  clause,  which  we  have  seen  to  be 
strictly  speaking  merely  a  verbal  or  a  nominal  sen- 
tence subordinated  to  an  antecedent  noun,  ought  by 
rule  to  contain  a  pronoun  referring  back  to  this  an- 

tecedent,  as  ^^kh.  sol  ^^d^S  J^Ul  the  man  whose 

father  is  rich;  ItX^i  ^Zw  ^1  &J  ^^lyhe  had  a  son, 

who  was  named  M.  (in  this  case  the  pronoun  is  im- 

plied  in  the  verb);  Jo\  k}  JUj  J^n  a  man  who  is 
named  Z.  (prop,  of  whom  it  is  said:  [he  is]  Zaid,  cf. 
§  146).  The  pronoun  which  in  this  way  points  back 
to  the  antecedent  may  stand  in  any  part  of  the  rela- 

tive  sentence ;  thus  in  the  sentence  (ji^^^  ^^  Vr*  ^ 
Juuu  xjl  Jwb  ;^  jJl  the  army  had  come  up  close  to 
him,  regarding  which  he  thought  that  it  was  still  at 
a  distance,  it  does  not  appear  till  we  reach  the  sen- 

55  ^  S3    ^ 

tence  which  is  subordinated  by  ^1  to  the  verb  .jij?. 


157.    CIRCUMSTANTIAL   CLAUSES.  131 

Collectives  which  denote  living  creatures  (cf.  §  136^) 
may   be   followed   here    also    by   a  plural   verb,    as 

jTj-JjOjj  ^Js  people  that  believe. 

Note  a.    The  omission  of  the  pronoun,  however,  is  not  un- 
frequent,  especially  when  it  would  merely  consist  of  a  suffix  of 

the  3.  person,  as  CJJ  Lo  ^^Ic  CmojJ  for  4Xl5  I  regret  what  I  said. 

Note  b.   In  certain  cases  the  antecedent  may  be  repeated  in 
the  relative  clause;  indeed,  this  is  the  favourite  construction  with 

Jf  as  »->ur  1U9   X^JJo   j.j^   JT   iiu^  ^]jJ   JjjD  jJ^  j^jlTthe  (idol) 

Hubal  had  seven  arrows  (for  casting  the  lot),  of  which  each  single 
arrow  had  writing  upon  it. 

A   special  kind   of  subordinate    sentence   is   the  157. 
circumstantial  clause.    Such  a  clause  may  consist: 

1)  Of  a  nominal  sentence  introduced  by  the  particle  a. 
.,  the  subject  of  which  may  have  been  already  men- 

tioned  or  may  be  something  quite  new,  as  xjl*!  v:ioLo 

ajCo  ^11  ^^J^i;  (c^5  Amina  died  while  she  was  return- 

ing  to  Mecca;  vajLo  iCol.  Jo\  v:yLo  Zaid  died  while 

his  son  was  still  young;  with  a  compound  nominal 

sentence  iUj^XiJ!  <X*flib  ye.  nLI  he  journeyed  taking 

Medina  as  his  goal.  A  sentence,  whose  predicate  con- 
sisting of  a  preposition  and  its  case  comes  before 
its  subject,  ace.  to  §  141,  may  stand  as  a  circumstan- 

,  ,  "  Go-'  ^  ^  9      0^^ 

tial  clause,  without  .,  as  ^Ji  ^^.  di^)  oc:^Vi^  I 
went  out  with  a  bow  in  my  hand. 

9* 


132  158.    TEMPORAL  CLAUSES. 

h.         2)  Of  a  verbal  sentence  frequently;  in  this  case  the 

imperf.  either  stands  alone  or  is  preceded  hy  JL^r. 
When  the  sentence  is  a  negative  one,  the  negative  is 

y  or  Uo^;  or  the  verb  may  stand  in  the  apoc.  impf.  with 
jj  or  jjl  (as  the  negation  of  the  perf.).  We  may 
also  have  the  perfect  with  jjl  or  [jl?*,  when  negative 
with  Uo.;  thus  we  get  the  following:  dl^stj  Jo\  *Li 
Z.  came  laughing;  ooli^  1'%1.  j  ^y^.  ^^^  J^s 
Ua^  JXl!  ^f  oot-b  jo^  L^L^  (^)Y^^  (Zakariya) 
said:  how  shall  I  have  a  male  child,  seeing  my  wife 
is  barren  and  I  have  reached  too  great  an  age;  J^.^3 
,^  ivi*^  y  ^-P^  ^®  entered  the  room  without 
greeting  me. 

Note.  In  contrast  to  the  stiffer  accusative  of  condition 
(§  113  &)  the  verhal  circumstantial  clause  expresses  the  commence- 
ment  of  the   action;    there   is    very   little    difference,   however, 

between  ,iXs\jQj^  ^J^    zl^  and  l^Lo  o^^  i\s^. 

158.         In  temporal  clauses  (also  in  conditional  clauses) 

■  which  are  formed  with  the  particle  13 1  when,  if,  we  find 
in  the  protasis  as  well  as  in  the  apodosis  the  perfect 

in  the  sense  of  our  present  or  future,   ^S  ,j^l^  161 

xjuLfi  oJj  yo^l  when  John  takes  the  thing  in  hand, 

its  difficulties  are  easily  surmounted. 


159.    CONDITIONAL   CLAUSES.  133 

Noxe  a.  The  imperfect  maj'^  also  stand  after  !  j[  if  the  action 
takes  place  repeatedly.  Should  I Jl  be  followed  by  a  compound 
nominal  sentence,  as  ^yx^  «*^'  '-^l  when  hell  is  heated,  it  is 
considered  that  this  is  but  another  way  of  writing  what  we  should 

o 

expect  to  find  expressed  in  a  verbal  sentence  (and  so  with  y^^). 

Note  b.    A  sentence  with  IJI  may  also  be  inserted  between 

two  closely  related  words,  or  rather  it  is  to  be  regarded  as  form- 

ing  with  its  apodosis  a  complete  unitj'.  Thus :  l«si  \j[  ^bO  U^ili 

, — «*  «^  ^  ^  ^ 

lil*i  J  there  were   two  gates,   which  when  they  were  opened 

could  not  be  shut  (again).    In  the  apodosis  to  IJI  a  perfect  is  found 

where  we  should  expect  an  imperfect  (cf.  §  99c),  as  Ij/^I  l«3^  lyW 

4S*vdU  \y^  I^aUsI^  lU.^  they  were  wont,  when  they  captured  a 

man  and  then  released  him,  to  cut  off  his  front  lock  of  hair.  Very 


frequently  a  sentence  like  this,  with  lol,  is  inserted  between  j^S*. 
(§  152  note  c)  and  its  proper  verb,  as  ^loJl  Ja.j  lil  ^^Sa.  62'*^ 
iSSyi\  I  followed  him  until  I  overtook  him  as  he  entered  the  house. 

Lo  in  the  sense  of  'so  long  as'  takes  the  perfect,  as  h. 
S\Jii  Ul  v:>^0  Lo  so  long  as  I  live  I  shall  be  thankful. 

In  sentences  containing  the  notion  of  a  condition  159. 
which  is  the  case  after  ^\^  if,  ^  if  anybody,  Lo  if 
anything,  U-gjo  whatsoever,   oixS^  Lo  i^.ftjp  how,  how- 
soever,    JOo  when  &c.  the  perf.  is  used  in  the  sense 
of  our  present  or  future,   and  so  too  in  the  apodosis, 

as  viiJCibfi  viJL!6   oJLxi   ^j|  if  thou  doest  that,  thou 


134  160,   161.    CONDITIONAL   CLAUSES. 

wilt  perish;  Jb  JL^  jjJo  whoso  seeketh,  findeth  (if 
any  one  seeks,  he  finds). 

Note.  If  the  perf.  is  meant  to  retain  its  proper  force  in  the 
protasis,  the  verb  ^\S'  is  placed  after  ^^,  as  ^^  ^  i^aj^i  ^^IT  ^J 
C^,i^>a9  Ja^  if  his  camisole  is  torn  in  front,  she  has  told  the  truth. 

160.  The  particles  above  mentioned  may  also  take  the 
apoc.  impf.in  protasis  and  apodosis  alike,  as  Lwyoj*  ,j  1^ 
IXTr  *ijtX4.j  if  ye  wait  patiently,   God  will  help  you. 

2,.         The  apoc.  impf.  also  stands  in  the  apodosis  after 
an  imperative  (with  conditional  force)  in  the  protasis, 

as  UCJL^  .jji*  \ju3  (jiLfr  live  contentedly  (i.  e.  if  thou 

live  &c.)  thou  wilt  be  a  king. 
c.         An  apoc.  impf.  in  the  protasis  may  be  followed  by  a 

perfect  in  the  apodosis,  as  Oj4^  5-^•*^*  ul  ^^  i^iou 
wait  patiently,  thou  wilt  gain  the  victory.  If  the  clauses 
are  both  negative,  we  have  aJ  with  the  apoc.  impf., 
as  ,jo!|  Ij  I^Zaj  *J  jjI  if  he  does  not  go  away,  I  am 
not  satisfied. 

Note.  Occasionally  the  apodosis  of  a  conditional  sentence 
is  wanting,  e.  g.  I  jjb  ^  ^{  if  this  is  so— supply :  then  it  is  well 
(Arab.  l^). 

161.  Before  the  apodoses  of  conditional  sentences, 
other  than  those  discussed  in  §  159 — 160  we  find  the 

particle  o,  which  is  employed: 


161.    CONDITIONAL   CLAUSES.  135 

1)  When  the  apodosis  is  a  nominal  sentence,  as  a. 
a  Joii    c-»^  (j^  if  he  is  refractory,  then  alas  for 
him!     Also    before   sentences   with    ^.1^   and    before 
interrogative  sentences. 

2)  When  the  apodosis  is  a  verbal  sentence,  of  which  h. 
the  perfect  is  intended  to  retain  its  force  as  a  perfect 

(cf.  §  159  note),  especially,  too,  when  Jo  (cf.  §  98  e) 
is  employed,  as  yy>  ^\^^  l^jojcl  tym  \yj^\  ^\^ 
c^LjI  viJUJLfr  UjU  if  they  become  Moslems,  then  have 
they  come  to  the  right  way,  and  if  they  turn  aside, 
then  thou  hast  but  to  announce  the  message. 

3)  When  the  apodosis  is  a  verbal  sentence  that  con-  c. 

tains  an  impf.  with  one  of  the  particles  Oyww,  |j*<,  ,jJ, 
or  that  expresses  a  command  or  a  wish,  as  owL5^  ^l 
*-gjbl  ^^  vJ!JL:>.Li  *J5  ^i  if  thou  findst  thyself  among 
people,  milk  into  their  pail. 


APPENDIX. 
COMPUTATION  OF  TIME. 

a.    Names  of  the  Days  of  the  Week. 
In  the  following  list  the  various  names  may  also 
be  used  with  the  word  for  day,  113  omitted. 

1.  tX^^I  *•->  (1st  day)  Sunday. 

2.  jji^' 5r  ^jj  (2nd  day)  Monday. 

3.  feTj^Sjjf  1 J  (3rd  day)  Tuesday. 

4.  feULs  ^t  *5.j  (4th  day)  Wednesday. 

5.  jujuL«iL|  *•-)  (5th  day)  Thursday. 

6.  xilil  *1j  (day  of  assembly)  Friday. 

7.  c:a1JU|  *I5.  (Sabbath)  Saturday. 

5.    Names  of  the  Months. 

So" 

In  the  names  of  the  months  the  word  v.^,  month, 
may  be  prefixed  in  the  constr.  state  throughout; 
indeed,  as  the  following  table  shows,  some  of  the 
names  are  always  so  written. 


COMPUTATION  OF   TIME.  137 


J  a  ^    ? 


1.   **.^x^l  al-Muharram. 


r." 


2.  wi^  Safar. 


3.  J.  ^M  ajOn  w^  the  first  Rabi'. 

4.  j^IaJI  «-os  .  (^  ^v.  the  second  Rabi'. 

5.  J,.!^!  ;^3Lii  the  first  Gumada. 


f     ^  -m.C'O 


6.   5wa.!^ll  ^3ujL  the  latter  Gumada. 


t3      ^  ^ 


7.  v^jA^;  Ragab. 

8.  ^jujui  Sa'ban. 


9.   ^\JcXs  Ramadan  (the  month  of  fasting). 


-^   Ci    "     > 

10.  JI5-W  Sawwal. 

11.  5jJiifr^<3  Du-lka'da. 

12.  k^l  .J  Du-lhigga  (month  of  the  pilgrimage,  hagg). 

c.    The  Year. 

The  Moslems  reckon  by  lunar  years  of  354  days ; 
their  first  year  is  usually  considered  as  beginning 
at  the  date  of  the  Christian  era  given  below.  In 
calculating  from  one  era  to  the  other,  it  may  be 
reckoned  that  33  solar  years  are  equal  to  34  lunar  years. 


138 


COMPUTATION   OF  TIME. 


In  the  works  of  European  scholars  it  is  customary, 
by  means  of  comparative  tables,  to  give  the  precise 
day  of  our  era  with  which  each  Moslem  year  begins 
(see  the  Bibliography).  The  following  short  table  will 
be  useful  in  helping  to  a  rapid  approximation  of  the 
date  required. 
The  Moslem  year 


1  b 

egan 

16.  July  622  A. 

D. 

101 

11 

24.  July   719  « 

11 

201 

« 

30.  July  816  V 

» 

301 

n 

7.  Aug.  913  » 

n 

401 

11 

15.  Aug.  1010  « 

n 

501 

v 

22.  Aug.  1107  « 

V 

601 

n 

29.  Aug.  1204  « 

« 

701 

11 

6.  Sept.  1301  « 

11 

801 

11 

13.  Sept.  1398  « 

Y) 

901 

11 

21.  Sept.  1495  11 

» 

1001 

11 

8.  Oct.  1592  « 

11 

1101 

v 

15.  Oct.  1689  « 

11 

1201 

n 

24.  Oct.  1786  n 

n 

1301 

n 

2.  Nov.  1883  « 

v 

1313 

11 

24.  June  1895  « 

n 

LITERATURE. 


A  history  of  Arabic  literature  as  a  whole,  or  even  of  particular 
parts  of  it,  does  not  exist,  for  the  work  of  Hammer-Purgstall  (Litteratur- 
geschichte  der  Araber,  von  ihrem  Beginn  bis  zu  Ende  des  zwolften 
Jahrhundeits  der  Hidschret.  7  Bande.  Wien  1850 — 56.  40.)  must 
be  described  as  premature  and  as  useless  by  reason  of  its  numerous 
mistakes.  An  acquaintance  with  Arabic  literature  must  therefore  be 
got  partly  from  works  by  Arabs  on  the  history  of  their  literature,  partly 
from  European  catalogues.  In  the  course  of  the  present  century 
numerous  works,  including  not  a  few  specimens  of  the  earlier  litera- 
ture, have  been  printed  in  the  East,  especially  in  Cairo  (government 
press  in  Bulak),  Beiriit  (where  there  is  an  excellent  press  managed 
by  the  Jesuits)  and  Constantinople;  also  in  Persia,  India  and  the 
island  of  Java.  We  must,  in  particular,  mention  the  great  quantity 
of  valuable  Arabic  manuscripts  that  still  await  jjubhcation  both  in 
European  and  eastern  libraries.  A  synopsis  of  such  catalogues  of 
these  MSS.  as  have  hitherto  appeared  will  be  found  below. 

In  the  following  selection,  books  of  special  importance  are  marked 
with  a  star,  those  recommended  to  beginners  with  a  dagger. 


A.    BIBLIOGRAPHY. 
I.    Printed  Works. 

a  Written  by  Orientals. 

*Kitab  al-Fihrist  (by  Ibn  ahi  Ydkub  an-nadim;  wrote  in  the  year  377 
H.,  beg.  3.  May  987)  mit  Anmerkungen  herausgegeben  von  Gustav 
Flugel.  Nach  dessen  Tode  besorgt  von  Johannes  Rodiger  und 
August  Muller.     2  voll.     Leipzig  1871 — 2. 

*Lexicon  bibliographicum  et  encyclopaedicum  a  Mustapha  ben  Abdallah 
Katib  Jelibi  dicto  et  nomine  Haji  Khalfa  [Haggi  Haltfa  f  1658) 
celebrato  compositum.  Ad  codicum  Vindobonesium  Parisiensium 
et  Berolinensis  fidem  primum  edidit  latine  vertit  et  commentario 
indicibusque  instruxit  Gustavus  FlilgeJ.  Leipzig-London  1835  — 
1858.  7  voll.     40. 


140  Literature  A. 


P   Written  by  Europeans. 

Bibliotheca  arabica.  Auctam  nunc  atque  integram  edidit  D.  Christianus 
Fridericus  de  Schnurrer.     Halae  ad  Salam  1811. 

•f Bibliotheca  orien talis.  Manuel  de  Bibliographie  orientale.  I.  conte-. 
nant  les  livres  arabes,  persans  et  turcs  imprimes  depuis  I'invention 
de  I'imprimerie  jusqu'a  nos  jours  tant  en  Europe  qu'en  Orient  etc. 
par  J.  Th.  Zenker.  Leipzig  1846.  —  Bibliotheca  orientalis. 
Manuel  de  Bibliographie  orientale.  IL  contenant  1.  supplement 
du  premier  volume.  2.  Litterature  de  I'Orient  chretien.  3.  Litte- 
rature  de  I'Inde  etc.     Par  J.  Th.  Zenker.     Leipzig  1861. 

t(Eutin^)  Katalog  der  kaiserlichen  Universitats-  und  Landesbibliothek 
in  Strassburg.     Arabische  Litteratur.     Strassburg  1877.     4^. 

Bibliographie  des  ouvrages  arabes  ou  relatifs  aux  Arabes  publics  dans 
I'Europe  chretienne  de  1810  a  1885  par  Victor  Chauvin.  I.  Pre- 
face. —  Table  de  Schnurrer.  —  Les  Proverbes.  Liege  1892 
(is  being  continued). 

Wissenschaftlicher  Jahresbericht  iiber  die  morgenlandischen  Studien, 
von  1844  an  in  Zeitschrift  der  Deutschen  Morgenlandischen 
Gesellschaft  Leipzig  1847  ff.  The  annual  reports  on  works 
published  up  to  1858  appeared  in  the  Zeitschrift,  those  for  the 
years  1869—61,  62 — 67  (one  part),  autumn  1877  —  81  appeared 
as  independent  publications. 

Bibliotheca  orientalis  oder  eine  vollstandige  Liste  der  im  Jahre  1876 
in  Deutschland,  Prankreich,  England  und  den  Colonien  erschie- 
nenen  Biicher,  Broschiiren,  Zeitschriften,  u.  s.  w.  iiber  die  Sprachen, 
Religionen,  Antiquitaten,  Literaturen,  Geschichte  und  Geographie 
des  Ostens,  zusammengestellt  von  Karl  Friederici.  Leipzig. 
8  years  (to  1883). 

Bibliography  for  1883 — 85  (not  completed)  in  the  Literatur-Blatt  fiir 
orient alische  Philologie  unter  Mitwirkung  von  Dr.  Johannes 
Klatt  herausgegeben  von  Prof.  Dr.  Ernst  Kuhn.     1883 — 85. 

*Orientalische  Bibliographie  .  .  .  herausgegeben  von  A.  Muller,  now 
E.  Kuhn.     Berlin  1888  ff. 

Katalog  der  Bibliothek  der  Deutschen  Morgenlandischen  Gesellschaft. 
I.  Druckschriften  und  Ahnliches.  Leipzig  1880  (a  new  and 
largely  augmented  edition  will  appear  in  a  year  or  two). 

A.  0.  Ellis,  Catalogue  of  the  Arabic  books  in  the  British  Museum 
Vol  L  A-L.     London  1894. 

For  works  from  oriental  presses  an  important  guide  is:  E.  J.  Brill, 
Catalogue  periodique  de  livres  orientaux  I — IX,  Leide  1883  ff. 
(To  parts  I — VII  Index  de  noms  d'auteurs  et  de  noms  de  livres, 
ib.   1889). 


Literature  A.  141 

II.    Manuscripts. 

(Die  Handschriftenverzeichnisse  der  koniglichen  Bibliothek  in  Ber- 
lin. Vols.  7  ff.).  Yerzeichniss  der  arabischen  Handschriften 
von  W.  Ahlwardt.  40.  1.  Band.  Berlin  1887;  2.  Bd.  1889; 
3.  Bd.  1891;  4.  Bd.  1892;  5.  Bd.  1893;  6.  Bd.  1894.  A  7tli 
and  last  vol.  will  appear  soon. 

(Halle)  Katalog  der  Bibliothek  der  Deutschen  Morgenlandischen  Ge- 
sellschaft.     II.  Handschriften  u.  s.  w.     Leipzig  1881. 

Verzeichnis  der  orientalischen  Handschriften  der  Bibliothek  des 
Halle'schen  Waisenhauses  von  Fr.  Aug.  Arnold  und  August 
Mutter.  (Programm  der  Lateinischen  Hauptschule).  Halle 
1876.     40. 

(University  Library,  Leipzig)  Die  Eefaiya,  Von  Prof.  Fleischer: 
Zeitschrift  der  Deutschen  Morgenlandischen  Gesellschaft.  8, 
S.  573—584. 

(Municipal  Library  in  Leipzig)  Catalogus  librorum  manuscriptorum, 
qui  in  bibliotheca  senatoria  civitatis  Lipsiensis  asservantur,  ed. 
Naumann.  Codices  orientalium  linguarum  descripserunt  H.  O. 
Fleischer  et  Fr.  Delitzsch.     Grimmae  1838.     40. 

Catalogus  codicum  manuscriptorum  orientalium  Bibliothecae  regiae 
Dresdensis.  Scripsit  et  indicibus  instruxit  H.  0.  Fleischer. 
Lipsiae  1831.     40. 

Die  arabischen  Handschriften  der  herzoglichen  Bibliothek  zu  Qotha. 
Verzeichnet  von  Wilhelm  Fertsch.  5  Bande.  Gotha  1878 — 1892, 
(Also  w.  the  title:  Die  orientalischen  Handschriften  der  h.  B. 
zu  G.     Dritter  Theil). 

Die  arabischen  Handschriften  der  K.  Hof-  und  Staatsbibliothek  in 
ilfwncAen,  beschrieben  von  Jbsep7t -4nmer.  Miinchen  1866.  (Cata- 
logus codicum  manuscriptorum  Bibliothecae  regiae  Monacensis. 
Tomi  primi  pars  secunda.) 

{Tubingen  University  Library)  Catalog  arabischer  Handschriften  in 
Damaskus  gesammelt  von  J.  Q.  Wetzstein.    Berlin  1863. 

Catalogus  librorum  manuscriptorum  orientalium  in  bibliotheca  aca- 
demica  Bonnensi  servatorum  adornavit  Joannes  Gildemeister. 
Bonnae  1864—1876.     40. 

Katalog  der  hebraischen,  arabischen,  persischen  und  tiirkischen  Hand- 
schriften der  kaiserlichen  Universitats-  und  Landesbibliothek  zu 
Strasshurg.     Bearbeitet  von  S,  Landauer.    Strassbuvg  1881.    4^. 

Die  arabischen,  persischen  und  tiirkischen  Handschriften  der  kaiser- 
lich-koniglichen  Hofbibliothek  zu  Wien.  Von  Gustav  Flugel. 
3  Bande.     Wien  1865—7.     4*^. 

{Copenhagen)  Codices  orientales  Bibliothecae  regiae  Havniensis  enu- 
merati  et  descripti  a  N.  L.  Westergaard  etc.  II.  Codices  hebr. 
et  arab.     Hafniae  1851. 


142  Literature  A. 

Codices  Orientales  bibliothecae  regiae  universitatis  Lundensis  recensuii 
Carolus  Johannes  Tornberg.     Lundae  1850. 

Codices  Arabici,  Persici  et  Turcici  bibliothecae  regiae  universitatis 
Vpsaliensis.  Disposuit  et  descripsit  C.  T.  Tornberg.  Upsaliae 
1849.     40. 

(Paris)  Catalogue  des  manuscrits  arabes  de  la  Bibliotheque  Nationale 
par  le  Baron  de  Slane.  Pr.  Fascicule.  Paris  1883.  Sec.  Fasc. 
1889.     Trois.  Fasc.  1895.     4^.    (To  be  continued.) 

Catalogue  general  des  manuscrits  des  bibliotheques  publiques  de 
France.  DepartementS.  Tome  VI  (p.  437 — 482).  Marseille.  Par 
M.  I'abbe  Albams.  Paris  1892.  —  Tome  XVIII.  Alger.  Par 
E.  Fay  nan.     Paris  1893. 

[Leide)  Catalogus  codicum  orientalium  Bibliothecae  academiae  Lugduno 
Batavae  I.  II.  auctore  R.  P.  A.  Dozy.  III.  IV.  auct.  P.  de  Jong 
et  M.  J.  de  Goeje.  V.  auctore  M.  J.  de  Goeje.  VI.  auctore 
M.  Th.  Houtsma.  Lugduni  Bavatorum  1851 — 77.  —  Editio  se- 
cunda.  Vol.  I  auctoribus  M.  J.  de  Goeje  et  M.  Th.  Houtsma. 
Lugduni  Bat.  1888. 

(London)  Catalogus  codicum  manuscriptorum  orientalium  qui  in  Museo 
Britannico  asservantur.  Pars  secunda  codices  arabicos  amplectens. 
Londini  1846.     fol. 

[London)  Supplement  to  the  Catalogue  of  the  Arabic  manuscripts  in  the 
British  Museum  (By  Charles  Eieu).     London  1894,  40. 

(London)  A  catalogue  of  the  Arabic  manuscripts  in  the  library  of  the 
India  Office.     By   Otto  Loth.     London   1877.     4°. 

( Oxford)  Bibliothecae  Bodleianae  codicum  manuscriptorum  orientalium, 
videlicet  hebraicorum,  chaldaicorum,  syriacorum,  aethiopicorum, 
arabicorum,  persicorum,  turcicorum,  copticorumque  catalogus  a 
Joanne  Vri  confectus.  Pars  Prima  Oxonii  1787.  —  Partis  se- 
cundae  volumen  primum  arabicos  complectens  confecit  Alexander 
Nicoll.     Oxonii  1821.     fol. 

[Cambridge)  Catalogus  Bibliothecae  Burckhardtianae  cum  appendice 
librorum  aliorum  orientalium  in  Bibliotheca  Academica  Canta- 
brigensitis  asservatorum  —  confecit  T.  Preston.  Cantabrigiae 
1853.     4C. 

Catalogue  of  the  Oriental  Manuscripts  in  the  Library  of  King's  Col- 
lege, Cambridge.  By  Edward  Henry  Palmer:  Journal  of  the 
Roy.  As.  Societj'  of  Gr.  Britain  and  Ireland.  New  Series  III. 
105  ff. 

A  descriptive  Catalogue  of  the  Arabic,  Persian  and  Turkish  Manu- 
scripts in  the  Library  of  Trinity  College,  Cambridge.  By  E.  H. 
Palmer.     Cambridge  and  London  1870. 

(Escurial)  BibUotheca  arabico-hispana  Escurialensi  sive  Librorum 
omnium  Mss.  quos  Arabics  ab  auctoribus  magnam  partem  Arabo- 
Hispanis  compositos  Bibliotheca  CoenobiiEscurialensis  complectitur 


Literature  A.  143 

recensio  et  explanatio  opera  et  studio  Michaelis  Casiri  etc.    2  tomi. 
Matriti  1760.  fol.  —  Les  manuscrits  arabes  de  I'Escurial  decrits  par 
Hartwig  Derenbourg.     Tome  premier.     Paris  1884. 
Catalogo  de  los  Manuscritos   drabes   existentes   en  la  Biblioteca  Na- 

cional  de  Madrid  [F.  G.  RobUs).  Madrid  1889. 
[Florence)  Bibliothecae  Mediceae  Laurentianae  et  Palatinae  Codicum 
manuscriptorum  orientalium  catalogus,  Steph.  Evod.  Assemanus 
recensuit.  Florentiae  1742.  fol. 
(Venice)  Catalogo  dei  Codici  manoscritti  orientali  della  Biblioteca 
Naniana,  compilato  dell'  abbate  Simone  Assemani.  2  Part.  Pa- 
dova  1787—1792.     40. 

Remarques  sur  les  manuscrits  orientaux  de  la  Collection  Marsigli  a 
Bologne  suivies  de  la  liste  complete  des  Manuscrits  arabes  de 
la  meme  collection  par  le  Baron  Victor  Rosen.  Roma  1885  (atti 
della  R.  Academia  dei  Lincei.     Serie  3*.     Vol.  XII). 

[Milan)  Catalogo  dei  Codici  arabi,  persiani  e  turchi  della  Biblioteca 
Ambrosiana  [Hammer-Purgstall):  Biblioteca  Italiana  t.  XCIV, 
pp.  22  and  322. 

Cataloghi  dei  codici  orientali  di  alcune  biblioteche  d'ltalia.  5  fasc. 
Firenze  1878—1892. 

Catalogue  des  manuscripts  et  xylographes  orientaux  de  la  Biblioth^que 
Imperiale  publique  de  St.  Petersbourg.     St.  Petersbourg  1852. 

[St.  Petersburg)  B.  Dorn,  Catalogue  des  ouvrages  arabes,  persans  et  tui'cs, 
publics  a  Constantinople,  en  Egypte  et  en  Perse,  qui  se  trouvent  au 
Musee  asiatique  de  1' Academie.  —  Chronologisches  Yerzeichniss  der 
seit  dem  Jahre  1801  bis  1866  in  Kasan  gedruckten  arabischen, 
tiirkischen,  tatarischen  und  persischen  Werke,  als  Katalog  der  in 
dem  asiatischen  Museum  befindlichen  Schriften:  Melanges  asia- 
tiques  tires  du  Bulletin  de  I'Academie  Imperiale  des  sciences  de 
St.  Petersbourg.     Tome  V.     Livi'.  5.     St.  Petersbourg  1867. 

[St.  Petersburg)  Notices  sommaires  des  manuscrits  arabes  du  Musee 
asiatique  par  le  Baron  Victor  Rosen.     St.  Petersbourg  1881. 

[St.  Petersburg)  Les  manuscrits  arabes  de  I'lnstitut  des  langues  orien- 
tales  decrits  par  le  Baron  Victor  Rosen.     St.  Petersbourg  1877. 

[J.  M.  E.  Gottwald)  description  of  the  Arabic  Manuscripts  in  the 
Library  of  the  Imperial  University  of  Kasan.  Kasan  (no  date) 
[1885].     In  Russian. 

[Cairo)  Fihrist  al-kutub  al-'arabiya  al-mahfiiza  bil-kutubhana  al-hedi- 
wiye  el-ka'ine  biserai  derb  al-gamamiz.  (Under  the  management 
of  Spitta  and  Vollers.)  7  vols.  Cairo  1301—1308.  Second 
Edition.     Vol.  I  1310. 

Catalog  der  mektebe  'umumiye  in  Damascus.     Damascus  1299.     40. 

Studia  Sinaitica  No.  III.  Catalogue  of  the  Arabic  Mss.  in  the  Convent 
of  S.  Catharine  on  Mount  Sinai  compiled  by  Margaret  Dunlop 
Gibson.     London  1894. 


144  Literature  B,  C. 

(Batavia)  Friedrich,  Codicum  arabicorum  in  Bibliotheca  Societatis 
Artium  et  Scientiarum  quae  Bataviae  floret  asservatorum  Catalogus. 
Absolvit  indicibusque  instruxit  L.  W,  C.  van  den  Berg,  Bataviae 
et  Hagae  1873. 

B.    INTRODUCTION. 

General. 

Borhan-ed-dini  es-Sernudji  (as-Sarnugi  lived  at  the  and  of  the  12tli 
century  of  our  era)  Enchiridion  studiosi.  Arabice  edidit  latine  vertit 
et  lexico  explanavit  Carolus  Caspari.  Praefatus  est  H.  0.  Flei- 
scher.    Lipsiae  1838.     40. 

Einleitung  in  das  Studium  der  Arabischen  Sprache  bis  Mohammed 
und  zum  Theil  sj)ater  .  .  .  von  G.  W.  Freytag.     Bonn  1861. 

Orientalische  Skizzen,  Von  Theodor  NoldeTce.  Berlin  1892.  Trans- 
lated, with  the  title  'Sketches  form  Eastern  History'  by  J.  S.  Black. 
London  and  Edinburgh    1892. 

De  auctorum  graecorum  versionibus  et  commentariis  syriacis,  arabicis, 
armeniacis  persicisque  commentatio  quam  scripsit  Joannes  Georgius 
Wenrich.     Lipsiae  1842.   1845. 

C.    CHRESTOMATHIES. 

*-\R.  Briinnow,  Chrestomathy  of  Arabic  Prose-Pieces.  Berlin  and  Lon- 
don 1895. 

f  Chrestomatia  arabica  quam  e  libris  Mss.  vel  impressis  rarioribus 
coUectam  edidit  Fr.  A.  Arnold.  Pars  I.  Textum  continens.  Pars  II. 
Glossarium  continens.     Halis  1853. 

fChrestomathie  Arabe,  ou  extraits  de  divers  ecrivains  Arabes,  tant  en 
prose  qu'en  vers  a  I'usage  des  Aleves  de  I'ecole  sp6ciale  des  langues 
orientales  vivantes ;  par  A.  J.  Sylvestre  de  Sacy.  II.  ed.  corr.  et 
augm.  Paris  1826.  3  vol.;  Tome  IV  Anthologie  grammaticale 
arabe.     Paris  1829. 

f  Chrestomathie  elementaire  de  I'Arabe  litteral  avec  un  glossaire  par 
H.  Derenbourg  et  /.  Spire.     2  ed.     Paris  1892. 

JoJi.  Godofr.  Lud.  Kosegartenti  Chrestomathia  arabica  ex  codicibus 
manuscriptis  Paris.  Goth,  et  Berol.  coUecta  atque  tum  adscriptis 
vocalibus,  cum  additis  lexico  et  adnotationibus  explanata.  Lip- 
siae 1828. 

Georg,  Guil.  Freytag,  Chrestomathia  arabica,  grammatica  historica  in 
usum  scholarum  Arabicarum  ex  codd.  inedids  conscripta.  S^maj. 
Bonnae  1834. 


Literature  D.  145 

f  Thier  und  Mensch  vor  dem  Konig-  der  Genien.  Ein  arabisches  Mahr- 
chen  aus  den  Schriften  der  lauteren  Briider  ia  Basra  im  Urtext 
herausgegeben  von  Fr.  Dieterici.  2.  Ausgabe.  Leipzig  1881.  — 
Arabisch-deutsches  Worterbuch  zum  Koran  und  Thier  und  Mensch 
von  Fr.  Dieterici.     2.  Aufl.     Leipzig  1894. 

Brevis  chrestomathia  arabiea.  In  usum  scholarum  ed.  Joh.  Bollig. 
Koma  1881. 

Chrestomatia  arabigo-espanola  por  Fr.  J.  Lerchundi  y  Fr.  J.  Simonet, 
Granada  1881. 

Girgas  and  de  Rosen.  Arabic  Chrestomathy  (in  Russian).  St.  Peters- 
burg 1875.  1876.  —  Dictionary  to  the  Chrestomathy  and  to  the 
Koran  by  W.  Girgas.     Kasan  1881   (in  Russian). 

An  Arabic  reading-book  compiled  hy  W.  Wright.  Part  first,  The  texts. 
London  1870. 

Magani  el-adab  fi  hadaik  el-'arab.  6,  Ed.  Beirut  1885  ff.  Jesuit  Press. 
6  vols.    Sarh  magani  el-adab  (Notes  &c.).    4  vols.    ib.  1886 — 8. 

D.    GRAMMARS  &c. 

a  Written  by  Orientals. 

*a\-Muzhir  fi  *ulum  el-luga,  philological  Encyclopaedia  by  Galal 
ad-din  as-SuyUti  (f  911  H.,  beg.  4.  June  1505,  cf.  for  as- 
Sujuti  Goldziher  in  den  Sitzungsber.  d.  kais.  Akademie  der 
Wiss!  zu  Wien.  Phil.-histor.  01.  LXIX.  Bd.  1.  S.  7  ff.)  Bulak 
1282. 

*Le  livre  de  Sibawaihi,  traits  de  grammaire  arabe  par  Sibouya,  dit 
Slbaicaihi  (f  180  H.,  beg.  16.  March  796).  Texte  arabe  public 
d'apres  les  manuscrits  du  Caire,  de  I'Escurial,  d'Oxford,  de 
Paris,  de  St.  Petersbourg  et  de  Vienne  par  Hartwig  Derenhourg. 
Tome  I,  Paris  1881.  Tome  II,  Paris  1889.  —  SlbawaihVs  Bach 
liber  die  Grammatik  nach  der  Ausgabe  von  H.  Berenbourg  und 
dem  Commentar  des  Siraii  iibersetzt  und  erklart .  .  .  von  G.  Jahn. 
1.— 8.     Lieferung.     Berlin  1894.  1895. 

*A1-Mufassal,  opus  de  re  grammatica  arabicum  auctore  Abu  'l-Kasim 
Mahmiid  bin  'Omar  Zamahsario  [az-Zamah^ari  f  538  H. ,  beg. 
16.  July  1 143)  ed.  J.  P.  Broch.  Editio  altera^  Christianiae  1879.  — 
Also:   Ibn  Jals  (f  643  H.,   beg.  29.  May  1245)  Commentar  zu 

Zamachsari's  Mufassal.   Nach  den  Handschriften herausgeg. 

u.  s.  w.  von  Dr.  G.  Jahn.  Erster  Band.  Leipzig,  1882.  Zweiter 
Band.     Leipzig  1886.     40. 

*Alfijjah,  Carmen  didacticum  grammaticum  auctore  Ibn  Malik  (f  672  H., 

beg.  18.  July  1273)  et  in  Alfijjam  commentarius  quem  conscripsit 

Ibn  Akil  {Ibn  'Aktl  f  769  H.,  beg.  28.  Aug.  1367)  ed.  Fr. Dieterici. 

Lipsiae  1851.  —  Ibn  'Akil's  Commentar  zur  Alfijja  des  Ibn  Malik 

Socin,  Arabic  Grrammar.^  10 


146  Literature  D. 

aus  dem  Arabischen  zum  ersten  male  iibersetzt  von  Fr,  Dieterici. 
Berlin  1852. 

al-Agurrumiyya,  Arabic  Grammar  "bylln  Agurrum  as-Sinhagi  (f  723  H., 
beg.  10.  January  1323).  Often  printed  with  and  without  Com- 
mentaries. Cf.  E.  Trumpp,  Einleitung  in  das  Studium  der 
arabischen  Grrammatiken.  Die  Ajrummiyyah  des  Muhammad  bin 
Daud.  Miinchen  1876.  On  this  work  see  Fleischer  in  Zeitschrift 
der  D.  Morgenl.  Ges.  30  (1876),  pp.  487—513;  reprinted  in 
Kleinere  Schriften  II  (Leipzig  1888),  pp.  75—106.  Text  also 
printed  in  Briinnow's  Chrestomathy. 

Kafiya  iin-nahii.  Syntax  by  Ibn  al-Hdyib  (f  646  H.,  beg.  26.  April 
1248).     Frequently  printed  in  the  East.  ^ 

Mugni  al-labib,  Grammar  composed  by  Ibn  Sisani  al-Ansari  (f  762  H., 
beg.  11.  Nov.  1360).  Another  grammatical  work  by  the  same 
author  bears  the  title:  Katar  an-nada  wa-ball  as-sada;  a  third 
Sudur  ad-dahab.  All  three  works  have  been  frequently  printed 
in  the  East. 

al'Earlri's  (f  516  H.,  beg.  16.  July  1143)Durrat  al-gawvi^as,  heraus- 
gegeben  von  Heinrich  Thorbecke.  Leipzig  1871.  (On  errors  of 
speech).  With  the  commentary  of  al-Hafagi,  Constantinople  1299. 
Cf.  Le  livre  des  locutions  vicieuses  de  Djawaliki  publie  par 
Hartwig  Derenbourg  (al-Gawaliki  f  465  H.,  beg.  17.  Sept.  1072) 
•  in  Morgenlandische  Forschungen.     Leipzig  1875. 

Tarika  mustahdata  fi  tashil  al-hatt  al-arabi.  Calligraphic  models 
i2  parts.  Beirut  1891. 

P   Written  by  Europeans. 

*Die  grammatischen  Schulen  der  Araber  nach  den  Quellen  bearbeitet 
von  G.  Flugel.  Erste  Abthl.  Leipzig  1862.  Abhandlungen  der 
Deutschen  Morgenl.  Ges.  II.  Band.  Nr  4.  (This  work  gives 
a  list  of  grammarians  to  about  the  year  1000  of  our  era). 

f  Dr.  C.  P.  Oaspari^s  Arabische  Grammatik.  Eiinfte  Auflage  be- 
arbeitet von  August  Milller.  Halle  1887.  —  Grammaire  arabe  de 
C.  P.  Caspari  traduite  de  la  quatrieme  edition  allemande  et  en 
partie  remani^e  par  E.  Uricoechea.  Bruxelles  1880. —  A  Grammar 
of  the  Arabic  Language  translated  from  the  German  of  Caspai-i 
and  edited,  with  numerous  additions  and  corrections  by  W.  Wright. 
2.  ed.     2  vol.     London  1874 — 5.     A  3'^'^  edit,  is  announced. 

Geo.  Henric.  Aug.  Ewald.  Grammatica  critica  linguae  arabicae  cum 
brevi  metrorum  dopftrina.     Lipsiae  1831 — 1833.     II  vol. 

*Grammaire  arabe  a  I'usage  des  eleves  de  I'ecole  speciale  des  langues 
orientales  vivautes;  avec  figures.  Par  M.  le  Bon  Silvestre  de 
Sacy.  Seconde  edition,  corrigee  et  augmentee,  a  laquelle  on  a 
joint  un  traite  de  la  prosodie  et  de  la  metrique  des  Arabes.  2  tom. 
Paris  1831.  — Yery  important  notes  and  corrections  will  be  found  in 


Literature  E.  147 

"^Fleischer,  „Beitrage  zur  arabischen  Sprachkunde":  Berichte  iiber  die 
Verhandlungen  der  kgl.  sachsischen  Gesellschaft  der  Wissenschaften 
zu  Leipzig.  Philologisch-historische  Classe.  1863  (p.  93  ff.);  1864 
(p.  265ff.);  1866  (p.  286 ff.);  1870  (p.  227 ff.);  1874  (p.  71ff.);  1876 
(p.  44ff.);  1878  (p.  64ff.);  1880  (p.  89ff.);  1881  (p.  117ff.);  1883 
(p.  72ff.);  1884  (p.  272  ff.);  conf.  1856  (p.  Iff.);  1862  (p.  10  ff.) 
Reprinted  in  Kleinere  Schriften  von  Dr.  JS.  L.  Fleiscfier,  vol.  I, 
I8t.  and  2iid.  parts,  Leipzig  1886;  thetwolastarticlesinvol.il, 
part  1.     Leipzig  1888. 

/.  G.  L.  Kosegarten.  Grammatica  linguae  arabicae  pp.  1 — 688,  without 
title  and  date,  incomplete.    (Very  rare). 

Mortimer  Sloper  Howell.  A  Grammar  of  the  Classical  Arabic  Language, 
translated  and  compiled  from  the  "Works  of  the  most  Approved 
Native  or  Naturalized  Authorities.  Published  under  the  Authority 
of  the  Government  of  the  N.-W.  Provinces.  In  an  Introduction 
and  Four  Parts,     3  vols.     AUahabad  1880.  1883.  1886. 

Grammaire  arabe  composee  d'apres  les  sources  primitives  par  le 
P.  Donat  Vernier,  S.  J.    Tome  I.    Beyrouth  1891 ;  TomelL  1892. 

Darstellung  der  arabischen  Verskunst  mit  sechs  Anhangen  u.  s.  w.  nach 
handschriftlichen  Quellen  bearbeitet  und  mit  Registem  versehen 
von  G.  W.  Freytag.     Bonn  1830. 

Theorie  nouvelle  de  la  m^trique  arabe  preced6e  de  considerations 
generales  sur  le  rythme  naturel  du  langage  par  M.  Stanislas 
Guyard.     Paris  1875  (Extrait  du  Journal  as.  7  ser.,  t.  7.  8). 

Die  Rhetorik  der  Araber  nach  den  wichtigsten  Quellen  dargestellt  und 
mit  angefiihrten  Textausziigen  nebst  einem  literaturgeschichtlichen 
Anhang  versehen  von  Dr.  A.  F.  Mehren.     Kopenhagen  1853. 

E.   DICTIONARIES. 

a  Written  by  Orientals. 

*Sahah  al-*arabiyye  (or  as-Sahah)  by  al-Gauharl  (Abii  Nasr  Isma  il  ibn 

'    'Hammad  f  393  H.,  beg.  10.*  Nov.  1002).    2  vols.    Bulak  1282.   40. 

Lisan  al-'arab  by  al-Mukarram  (Ibn  Manziir  al-Ifriki  al-Misri  al-Ansarl 

al-Hazragif  711  H.,  beg.  13.  May  1311).   20  vols.  40.'  Cairo  1308. 
*al-Kamiis   al-muhit   (or    al-Kamus)    by    al-Fzruzdbddi    (f    816    or 

817  H.  =  1413/4).    2  vols.    Calcutta  1817;  4  vols.    Bulak  1279. 

40.     id.  1301/2.  —  With  Turkish  Commentaiy  3  vols.    Stambul 

1272  and  later.  —  ♦Commentary   to  the  Kamils  with   the  title 

Tag-el-* arus  composed  by  Sayyid  Murtadd  az-Zubaidi  (f  1205  H., 

beg.  10  Sept.  1790).     10  vols.     Caii'o  1307. 
Muhit  al-muhit  by  Butrus  al-Bistdni.    2  vols.    Beirut  1286.  (1869/70). 
an-Nihaya  fi  garib  al-hadit  by  Ibn  al-Atlr  (f  606  H.,  beg.  6.  July 

1209).     4  vols.     Cairo  1311  (Dictionary  to  the  Traditions) 


148  Literature  E. 


Asas  al-balaga  (Lexicographical  Work,  dealing  esp.  with  the  meta- 
phorical meanings  of  words)  by  az-Zamahsari  (f  538  H.,  beg. 
16.  July  1143).     2  vols.     Bulak  1299. 

Fikh  al-luga,  Synonyms  by  at-Tdalihi  (f  429  H.,  beg.  14.  Oct. 
1037).  (Frequently  reprinted;  esp.  in  an  expurgated  edition 
Beirut  1888).     Cf.  Fleischer,  Kleinere  Schriften  III,   152. 

'lalahs  (t  291  H.  =  904)  kitab  al-Fasili.  Nach  den  Handschriften 
von  Leiden,  Berlin  und  Rom  herausgegeben,  mit  kritischen  und 
erlauternden  Noten  versehen    von   Dr.  J.  Barth.     Leipzig  1876. 

*GaWaliki's  al-Mu  arrab  (a  work  on  Arabic!  loan-words,  by  al-GmcdJlki 
t  465  H.,  beg.  17.  Sept.  1072).  Nach  der  Leydener  Handschrift 
mit  Erlauterungen  herausgegeben  von  Ed,  Sachau.  Leipzig 
1867.     Cf.  Z.  d.  D.  Morg.  Ges.  33,  208. 

Liber  as-Sojutii  (f  911  H.,  beg.  4.  June  1505)  de  nominibus' relativis, 
inscriptus  Lubb  al-lubab,  arab.  cum  annot.  crit.  ed.  P.  J.  Veth. 
1—3.     Lugduni  Bat.  1840—51.     4^. 

*Al-Moschtabih  auctore  Schamso'ddin  Abu  Abdallah  Mohammed  ibn 
Ahmed  ad-DhahaU  (ad-Dahabi  f  748  H.,  beg.  13.  April  1347). 
E  codd.  mss.  editus  a  JP.  de  Jong.  Lugduni  Batav.  1881.  (On 
homonym  proper  names). 

Kitabo-'l-adhdad  sive  liber  de  vocabulis  arabicis  quae  plures  habent 
significationes  inter  se  oppositas  auctore  Abu  Bekr  ibno-'l-Anbdri 
(t  328  H.,  beg.  18.  Oct.  939)  ed.  31.  Th.  Houtsma.  Lugduni 
Bat.  1881. 

|3  Written  by  Europeans. 

■\G.  W.  Freytag,  Lexicon  Arabico-Latinum  praesertim  ex  Djeuharii 
Firuzabadiique  et  aliorum  libris  confectum.  Accedit  index  vocum 
latinorum  locupletissimus.    IV.  Tomi.    Hal.  1830 — 1837.    40maj. 

Q.  W.  Freytag^  Lexicon  Arabico-Latinum  ex  opere  suo  majors  in 
usum  tironum  excerptum  edidit.     Halis  1836.     4^  maj. 

*Maddu-l-Kamoos,  an  Arabic-Enghsh  Lexicon  derived  from  the  best 
and  the  most  copious  eastern  sources  comprising  a  very  large 
collection  of  words  and  significations  omitted  in  the  Kamoos, 
with  supplements  to  its  abridged  and  defective  explanations, 
ample  grammatical  and  critical  comments,  and  examples  in  prose 
and  verse:  composed  by  means  of  the  munificence  of  the  most 
noble  Algernon,  Duke  of  Northumberland  and  the  bounty 
cf  the  British  Government:  by  Edward  William  Lane.  In  two 
books:  the  first  containing  all  the  classical  words  and  significa- 
tions commonly  known  to  the  learned  among  the  Arabs;  the 
second,  those  that  are  of  rare  occurrence  and  not  commonly 
known.  Book  I,  Parts  1—5.  London  1863—1874.  Ed.  by 
Stanley  Lane  Poole,  Parts  6—8  (and  Supplement)  1877 — 1893. 


Literature  E,  149 

(From  the  letter  k  onwards,  the  book  is  incomplete;  its  continua- 
tion is  not  to  be  expected.) 
*Supj)lement  aux  dictionnaires  arabes  par  B.  Dozy.     2  torn.     Leyde 

1881.  —  Cf.  Fleischer,   Studien   iiber  Dozy's  Supplement:    Be- 

richte  iiber  die  Verhandlungen  der  kgl.  sachs.  Ges.  d.  Wiss.  zu 

Leipzig.    Philol.-histor.  Classe  1881 — 1887.    Reprinted  in  Kleinere 

Schriften   von  H.  L.  Fleischer.     Vol.  II,   pt.  1.     Leipzig  1888. 

Vol.  Ill  id. 
A.  Kazimirski  de  Biberstein,  Dictionnaire  arabe-frangais  I.  II.    Paiis 

1860. 
fJ..  Wahrmxmd.   Handworterbuch  der  deutschen  und  neu-arabischen 

Sprache.     I.  Neuarabisch-deutscher  Theil  I,    1.   2.  II,    1.  2.  — 

II.  Deutsch-neuarabischer  Theil.     Giessen  1870 — 77. 
F.  Steingass,  The  Student's  Arabic-English  Dictionary.  London  1884. 
H,  Anthony  Salmone,  An  Arabic-English  Dictionary  on  a  new  System. 

2  vols.  Vol.  I  Arabic-Enghsh ;  vol.  II  English  Index.  London  1890. 
fArabic-English  Dictionary  by  the  late  William  Thomson  Wortahet. 

Second  edition,  revised  and  enlarged,  Beyrout  1893. 
George  Percy  Badger,  Enghsh- Arabic  Lexicon.     London  1881. 
F.  Steingass,  English-Arabic  Dictionary  for  the  use  of  both  Travellers 

and  Students.     London   1882. 
English- Arabic  Dictionary  by  Mr.  J.  Abcarius.    New  edition  revised 

and  enlarged.     Beyrout  1894. 
fVocabulaire  arabe-frangais  a  I'usage  des  ^tudiants  par  un  p^re  mis- 

sionnaire  de  la  Cie  de  Jesus;  3.  6d.    Beyrouth  1893.    (Arab.:  al- 

Faraid  ad-durriye.) 
Dictionnaire  frangais-arabe  par  le    P.  J.-B.  Belot,    S.  J.     2  parties. 

Beyrouth  1890. 
*Die  aramaischen  Fremdworter  im  Arabischen.  Von  Siegmund  Frdnkel. 

Leiden  1886. 
Dictionnaire  detaille   des  noms  des  vetements  chez  les  Arabes.     Par 

B.  Dozy.     Amsterdam  1845. 
Die  Namen   der  Saugethiere  bei   den   siidsemitischen  Volkern.     Von 

Fritz  Hommel.     Leipzig  1879. 
Die  Waffen  der   alten  Araber   aus  ihren  Dichtern   dargestellt.     Ein 

Beitrag  zur  arabischen  Alterthumskunde,  Synonymik  und  Lexi- 

cographie  nebst   Begistem  von  Friedrich  Wilhelm  Schwarzlose. 

Leipzig  1886. 
*G-lossaire  des  mots   espagnols   et  portugais  derives  de  I'Arabe  par 

B.  Dozy  et  W.  H.  Engelmann.     2.  ed.    Leyde  1869. 
Glossario  etimologico  de  J  as  palabras  espanolas  de  origen  oriental  por 

D.  Leopoldo  de  Eguilaz  y  Yanguas.     Granada  1886. 
Dictionnaire  etymologique   des  mots  fiangais  d'origine  orientale  par 

Marcel    Devie.      Paris    1876.    —    Cf.    Eemarques    sur   les   mots 

frangais  derives  de  I'Arabe  par  Henri  Lammens.    Beyrouth  1890. 


1  50  Literature  F. 

F.   KORAN,  ISLAM,  LIFE  OF  MUHAMMED. 
CHRISTIANITY. 

a  Written  by  Orientals. 

Al-Coranus  seu  Lex  islamitica  Muhammedis  filii  Abdallae  Pseudo- 
prophetae  edita  ex  rouseo  Abrahami  Hinckelmanni,  Hamburg! 
1694. 

Alcorani  textus  universus  summa  fide  atque  pulcherrimis  characteribus 
descriptus,  in  latinum  translatus,  oppositis  notis,  auctore  Ludovico 
Marracio.     Patavii  1698  fol. 

f  Corani  textus  arabicus  ad  fidem  librorum  manuscriptorum  et  impres- 
sorum  et  ad  praecipuorum  interpretum  lectiones  et  auctoritatem 
recensuit  indicesque  triginta  sectionum  et  suratarum  addidit 
Gustavus  Flilgel.  Editio  stereotypa  C.  Tauchnitzii.  Tertium 
emendata;  nova  impressio  Lipsiae  1869  (I.  1834;  recensionis 
Fliigelianae  textum  recognitum  iterum  exprimi  curavit  Gustavus 
Mauritius  Bedslob,  Lipsiae  1837).  (In  Fliigel's  first  edition  and 
in  numerous  oriental  editions  of  the  Koran,  the  enumeration  of 
the  verses,  which  is  indispensable  for  reference,  is  wanting). 

*Ooncordantiae  Corani  arabicae.  Ad  literarum  ordinem  et  verborum 
radices  diligenter  disposuit  Gustavus  FliXgel.  Editio  stereotypa, 
Lipsiae  1842. 

Chrestomathia  Corani  arabica,  notas  adjecit  glossarium  confecit  C.  A. 
Nallino.     Lipsiae   1893. 

al-Itkdn  fi  'ulum  al-kur'an,  a  sort  of  introduction  to  the  Koran  by 
as-Suyutl  (f  911  H.,  beg.  4.  June  1505);  2  pts.  Cairo  1278.  — 
Sayiity's  Itqan  on  the  exegetic  sciences  of  the  Qordn.  Edited  by 
Mowlawies  Basheerooddeen  and  Noorool-Haqq  with  an  analysis  by 
A.  Sprenger.     Calcutta  1852—54. 

al-Kassdf.  Commentary  on  the  Koran  by  az-Zamahsart  (f  538  H., 
beg.  16.  July  1143).  2  vols.  Bulak  1281.  —  The  Qoran  with 
the  commentarj^  of  Zamakhshari  entitled  the  Kashshaf,  an  haqaiq 
al-tanzil,  ed.  by  W.  Nassau  Lees  and  Khadim  Hosain  and  'Abd 
al-Hayi,     Calcutta  1856. 

*Beidhawii  (f  685  H.,  beg.  27.  Febr.  1286;  or  692)  commentarius  in 
Coranum  ex  codd.  Parisiensibus  Dresdensibus  et  Lipsiensibus  edidit 
indicibusque  instruxit  H.  0.  Fleischer.  2  vol.  Lipsiae  1846 — 48. 
40,  —  Indices  ad  Beidhawii  commentarium  in  Coranum  confecit 
Winand  Fell.     Leipzig  1878. 

Chrestomathia  Baidawiana.  The  commentary  of  El-Baidawi  on  Sura 
III  trans,  and  expld.  .  .  .  hy  D.  S.  Margoliouth.    London  1895. 

*Le  Becueil  des  traditions  musulmanes  par  Abou  Abdallah  ibn  Ismail 
al-Bokhari  {al-Buhdrl  f  257  H.,  beg.  29.  Nov.  870)  publi6  par 


Literature  F.  151 

L.  KreJd.  I —III.  Leyde  1862  —  68  (incomplete).  —  Oriental 
edition:  Sahih.  al-Bahari.  8  vols.  Cairo  1290 j  also  frequently 
elsewhere,  with  and  without  commentary. 

Sahih  Muslim.  Collection  of  the  Traditions  of  the  Prophet,  composed 
by  Muslim  (f  261  H.,  beg.  16.  Oct.  874).  With  commentary  by 
an-Nawam  (f  676  H.,  beg.  4.  Juni  1277).     5  vols.     Cairo  1283. 

Masabih  as-sunna,  composed  by  Husain  ibn  Mas'iid  al-Farra  al-Ba- 
'  gatcl  (t  516  H.,  beg.  12.  March  1122).     2  vols.     Cairo  1294. 

Ihya  al-'ulum,  by  al-Gazali  (f  505  H.,  beg.  10.  JuH  1111).  4  vols. 
40.  Bulak  1289.  — (Cf.  Richard  Gosche,  Uber  Ghazzalis  Leben 
und  Werke:  Abhdl.  d.  kgl.  Akad.  d.  Wiss.  zu  Berlin  1858). 

* Abdu-r-razzdq's  Dictionary  of  the  technical  terms  of  the  Sufies  edited 
by  Aloys  Sprenger.     Calcutta  1845. 

*Das  Leben  Muhammeds  nach  Muhammed  ibn  Ishdk  (f  151  H.,  beg. 

26.  Jan.  768)  bearbeitet  von  'Abd  el-Malik  ibuHischdm  (f  218  H., 
beg.  27.  Jan.  833);  hrsg.  von  F.  Wustenfeld.  2  Bande.  Gottingen 
1858 — 60.  Oriental  edition;  Sirat  ibn  Hisam.  2  vols.  Cairo  1295. 
(Translated  into  German:  Das  Leben  Muhammeds  u.  s.  w.  be- 
arbeitet  von   Q.  Weil.     Stuttgart  1864). 

Muhammed  in  Medina.     Das  ist  Vakidi's  {al-Wdkid/i  f  207  H.,  beg. 

27.  May  822)  Kitab  al-Maghazi  in  verkiirzter  deutscher  Wieder- 
gabe  herausgegeben  von  J.  Wellhausen.     Berlin  1882. 

Sama'il  at-Tirmi^i  (f  279  H.,  beg.  3.  April  892)  Traditions  respecting 
the  Prophet.    Cairo  1273;  with  commentary  2  vols.    Bulak  1296. 

Usd  al-gaba.  List  of  7500  persons  who  knew  Muhammed,  drawn 
up  by  Ibn  al-Atlr  (f  630  H.,  beg.  18.  Oct.  1 232).  5  vols.  Cairo  1286. 

al-Isabe,  A  biographical  dictionary  of  persons  who  knew  Muhammed 
'by  Ibn  Hagar  {Ibn  Bagar  f  852  H.,  beg.  7.  March  1448).  Edited 
in  Arabic  by  Mowlawies  Mohammed  Wajyh,  'Abdal-Haqq,  and 
Gholam  Qadir  and  A.  Sprenger.  Bibliotheca  Indica.  Vol.  I,  Cal- 
cutta 1856;  vol.  IV,  Calcutta  1873.  Vol.  II,  fasc.  1—13;  vol.  Ill, 
fasc.  1  — 15. 

Kisas  al-'anbiya  (Legends  of  the  Prophet),  by  at-Ta'labi  (f  427  H., 
beg.  5.  Nov.  1035).     Cairo  1297  and  often. 

Pillar  of  the  creed  of  the  Sunnites  by  al-Naaafi,  ed.  by  W.  Ctvreton, 
London  1843. 

Ad-dourra  al-fakhira:  la  perle  precieuse  de  Ghazali  [al-Gazdll  f  505  H., 
beg.  10.  July  1111)  par  L.  Qautier.  Geneve  1878.  —  Muslim 
Eschatology. 

Muhammedanische  Eschatologie  nach  der  Leipziger  u.  Dresdner  Hand- 
schrift  zum  ersten  Male  arabisch  und  deutsch  herausgegeben  von 
M.  Wolff.     Leipzig  1872. 

Disputatio  pro  religione  Mohammedanorum  adversus  Christianos 
Textum  arabicum  (composed  942  H.  =  1535)  e  codice  Leidensi 
cum  varr.  lect.  edidit  F.  J.  van  den  Ham.    Lugduni  Bat.  1890. 


152  Literature  F. 

Book  of  religious  and  philosophical  sects  by  Muhammed  al-Shahra- 
stdni  {ah-Sahrastdni  f  528  H.,  beg.  29.  March  1153).  Now  first 
edited  by  W.  Cureton.  2  vol.  London  1846.  —  Abu-'l-Fatli 
Muhammad  asch-Schahrastani's  Religionsparteien  und  Philo- 
sophenschulen.  Aus  dem  Arabischen  iibersetzt  mit  Anmerkungen 
von  Th.  Haarbriicker.     2  Bande.     Halle  1850 — 1. 

*{Bihle)  Kitab  al-mukaddas  (Old  Testament).  London.  E,.  Watts. 
1822.  (New  Testament  1.  vol.  1821.)  —  f  Beirut,  various  editions, 
t  New  York  1867. 

Arabic  Bible- Chrestomathy  with  a  Glossary  edited  by  Geo.  Jacob. 
BerUn  1888. 

j3   Written  by  Eurojpeans, 

Der  Koran  nach  Boysen  von  Neuem  aus  dem  Arabischen  iibersetzt 
mit  einer  historischen  Einleitung  und  Anmerkungen  von  (?.  Walil. 
Halle  1828. 

Der  Koran.  Aus  dem  Arabischen  wortgetreu  neu  iibersetzt  mit  An- 
merkungen von  L.   TJUmann.     6.  Aufl.  1862. 

Le  Koran,  Traduction  nouvelle,  faite  sur  le  texte  arabe  par  Mr. 
Kazimirski.     Nouv.  ed.     Paris  1854. 

The  Koran  commonly  called  the  Alcoran  of  Mohammed:  translated 
into  English  from  the  Original  Arabic.  With  explanatory  notes 
taken  from  the  most  approved  commentators.  To  which  is  pre- 
fixed a  preliminary  discourse.  By  George  Sale.  London  1774. 
Last  ed.  by  E.  M.  Wherry  "with  additional  notes  and  emenda- 
tions".    4  vols.     London  1882—87. 

J.  M.  Rodwell,  The  Koran,  translated  from  the  Arabic.  2.  ed.  Lond.  1876. 

The  Qur'an  translated  by  E.  H.  Palmer.  2  parts.  Oxford  1880.  (The 
sacred  books  of  the  East  translated  by  various  oriental  scholars 
and  edited  by  F.  Max  Miiller,  vol.  VI.  IX). 

Der  Koran.  Im  Auszuge  iibersetzt  von  Friedrich  Rilckert,  heraus- 
gegeben  von  A.  Miiller.     Frankfurt  a.  M.  1888. 

Die  fiinfzig  altesten  Suren  des  Korans  in  gereimter  deutscher  Uber- 
setzung  von  M.  Klamroth.     Hamburg  1800. 

f*Geschichte  des  Qorans  von  Theodor  Nbldeke.     Gottingen  1860. 

tjber  die  Religion  der  vorislamischen  Araber.  Eine  zur  Habilitation 
etc.  offentlich  zu  vertheidigende  Abhandlung  von  Ludolf  Krehl. 
Leipzig  1863. 

*Skizzen  und  Vorarbeiten.  Von  /.  Wellhausen.  Drittes  Heft.  Reste 
arabischen  Heidentumes.     Berlin  1887. 

Kinship  and  marriage  in  early  Arabia.  By  W.  Robertson  Smith. 
Cambridge  1885. 

*Das  Leben  und  die  Lehre  des  Mohammad  nach  bisher  grossten- 
theils  unbenutzten  Quellen  bearbeitet  von  A.  Sprenger.  Zweite 
Ausgabe.     3  Bande.     Berlin  1869. 


Literature  G.  *  153 

f  Das  Leben  Muhammed's.    Nach  den  Quellen  popular  dargestellt  von 

Theodor  Noldeke.     Hannover  1863. 
*W.  Muir,  The  Life  of  Mahomet  and  History  of  Islam.    4  vol.   London 

1858—61.     3rtl  edition  1  vol.  1894. 
fDas  Leben  und  die  Lehre  des  Muhammed.    Dargestellt  von  Ludolf 

Krehl.     1.  Theil.     Das   Leben    des   Muhammed.     Leipzig  1884. 
Skizzen  und  Yorarbeiten  von  J.  Wellhausen.    Viertes  Heft.    1.  Medina 

vor  dem  Islam.    2.  Muhammad's  Gremeindeordnung  von  Medina. 

3.  Seine  Schreiben,  und  die  Gesandtschaften  an  ihn.    Berlin  1889. 
f  Was  hat  Mohammed  aus  dem  Judenthum  aufgenommen  ?  von  Abra- 
ham Oeiger.     Bonn  1833. 
*i2.  Dozy,  Het  Islamisme.    Leiden  1863.    2  ed.    Haarlem  1880  ^  Essai 

sur  I'histoire  de  I'Islamisme  par  R.  Dozy  trad,  par  V.  Chauvin. 

Leyde-Paris  1879. 
*Snouck  Hurgronje,  Het  mekkaansche  Fest.     Leiden  1880. 
Die  Mu  taziliten  oder  die  Freidenker  im  Islam.     Ein  Beitrag  zur  all- 

gemeinen  Kulturgeschichte  von  Heinrich  Steiner.    Leipzig  1865. 
De  strijd  over  het  Dogma  in   den  Islam  tot  op  el-Ash'ari  door  Dr. 

M.  Th.  Houtsma.     Leiden  1875. 
Zur  Geschichte  Abu  '1-Hasan  al-As'ari's  (f  about  324  H.  =  935)  von 

Wilhelm  Spitta.     Leipzig  1876. 
Expose  de  la  reforme  de  I'Islamisme  commencee  au  Illeme  si^cle  de 

I'H^gire   par  Abou- 1-Hasan  Ali  el-Ash'ari  et  continuee  par  son 

ecole.      Avec    des    extraits    du   Texte    arabe    d'Ibn  Asakir    par 

M,  A,  F.  Mehren.     Vol.  II  des    Travaux  de  la  3e  session   du 

Congres  international  des  Orientalistes. 
I.  Goldziher,   Die    Schule  der   Zahiriten,   ihr  Ursprung,  ihr  System 

und  ihre  Geschichte.     Leipzig  1884, 
*Mohammedanische   Studien  von   I.  Goldziher.     Erster   Teil.     Halle 

1889.     Zweiter  Teil.     Halle  1890. 
Polemische  und  apologetische  Literatur  in  arabischer  Sprache  zwischen 

Muslimen,    Christen   und    Juden,    nebst  Anhangen   verwandten 

Inhalts.  Von  Moritz  Steinschneider.   Abhandlungen  fiir  die  Kunde 

des  Morgenlandes  VI,  3.     Leipzig  1877. 

G.    JURISPRUDENCE. 

al-Muwatta'  fil-hadit.  Corpus  juris  composed  by  Malik  ihn  Anas 
al-Himyari  al-Madani  (f  179  H.,  beg.  27.  March  795).  Frequently 
printed;  also  with  commentaries,  e.  g.  that  of  az-Zarkani  (f  1122 
H.,  beg.   19.  Febr.  1710).     4  vols.     Bulak  1280. 

Sunan  Abi  'Abdallah  al-KazwIni,  known  as  IbnMdga  (f  273  H.,  beg. 
8.  June  886).     Delhi  1282  and  1889.     (Legal  traditions). 

Sunan  Abi  Dd'ud  Sulaiman  as-Sigistani  (f  275  H.,  beg.  16.  May 
freq.  printed,  e.  g.  Bulak  1280.    2  vols.    (Legal  traditions). 


154*  Literature  H. 

al-Gdmi  hy  Abu  isa  Muhammad  at-Tirmidl  (f  279  H.,  beg.  3.  April 
892).     Frequently  printed.     (Legal  traditions). 

Sunan  Abi  'Abd  ar-rahman  an-Nasd'l  (f  303  H.,  beg.  17.  July  915); 
lithogr.  in  Kanftlr  1847.     (Legal  traditions). 

Flugel,  Die  Classen  der  hanefitischen  Rechtsgelehrten:  Abhandlungen 
der  k.  Sachs.  Gesellschaft  der  Wissenschaften  VIII.  Leipzig 
1860. 

Jus  Schafiiticum.  At-Tanbih  auctore  Abu  Ishak  as-Shirazi  {Ahu 
Ishdk  a^-Slrdzl  wrote  the  work  in  the  year  452/3  H.  =  1060/1) 
edidit  A.  W.  T.  Juynboll.     Lugduni  Bat.   1879. 

Pr6cis  de  Jurisprudence  Musulmane  selon  le  rite  Chafeite,  par  Abu 
Chodja  {Ahu  Sugd^  f  in  the  6*^  cent,  of  the  Plight).  Publication 
du  texte  arabe,  avee  traduction  et  annotations,  par  S.  Keijzer. 
Leyde  1859. 

Minhadj  at-Talibin,  le  guide  des  zeles  croyants.  Manuel  de  juris- 
prudence musulmane  selon  le  rite  de  Chafi'i  (as-SdfiH).  Texte 
arabe,  publie  par  ordre  du  gouvernement  avec  traduction  et 
annotations  par  L.  W.  G.  van  den  Berg.  3  vol.  Batavia  1882  — 1884. 
(Cf.  Snouck  Hurgronje  in  the  Indian  Gids,  1884  ff.  Elaborate 
criticism.) 

Pr6cis  de  jurisprudence  musulmane  suivant  le  rite  malekite  par 
-S'*^  Khalil  (Halil  lived  in  the  8tli  cent,  of  the  Flight)  pubH^  par 
les  soins  de  la  Societe  asiatique.    Quatrieme  edition.    Paris  1877. 

Maverdii  (al-Mdwardi  f  450  H.,  beg.  28.  Febr.  1058)  constitutiones 
politicae.     Ex  recensione  Maximiliani  Engeri.     Bonnae  1853. 

H.   PHILOSOPHY. 

a  Written  by  Orientals, 

Documenta  philosophiae  Arabum,  edidit  latine  vertit  illustravit  Aug. 
Schmolders.  Bonnae  1836.  —  Cf.  id.  Essai  sur  les  ecoles  philo- 
sophiques  chez  les  Arabes  et  notamment  sur  la  doctrine  d'Algaz- 
zali.     Paris  1842. 

Tahafut  al-falasifa  (the  mutual  refutation  of  the  philosophers)  by 
al-Oazdli  (f  505  H.,  beg.  10.  July  1111),  Ibn  Busd  (f  595  H., 
beg.  3.  Nov.  1198),  Hoga  Zdde  (f  893  H.,  beg.  17.  Dec.  1487). 
Cairo  1303. 

Die  sogenannte  Theologie  des  Aristoteles  aus  arabischen  Handschriften 
zum  ersten  Male  herausgegeben.  Von  Fr.  Dieterici.  Leipzig 
1882  (Abhandlungen  des  Berl.  Or.-Congresses).  Cf.  Die  so- 
genannte Theologie  des  Aristoteles  aus  dem  Arabischen  iibersetzt 
und  mit  Anmerkungen  versehen  von  Fr.  Dieterici.    Leipzig  1883. 

II  commento  medio  di  Averroe  alia  Poetica  di  Aristotele  pubbl.  da 
Fausto  Lasinio.    Parte  I.    II  testo  arabo :  Annali  della  Universita 


Literature  H.  155 

Toscane.  Tomo  XII.  Pisa  1872.  4^. — II  testo  arabo  del  com- 
mento  medio  di  Averroe  alia  retorica  di  Aristotele,  pubbl.  da 
Fausto  Lasinio.  Firenze  1875.  (Pubblicazioni  del  E.  Istituto 
di  studi  superiori). 

Alfdrdbi's  (f  950  A.  D.)  philosophische  Abhandliingen  aus  Londoner, 
Leidener  und  Berliner  Handschrifteu.  Herausgegeben  von  Fried- 
rich  Dieterici.  Leiden  1890.  —  Id.  aus  dem  Arabischen  iiber- 
setzt.  Leiden  1892.  —  AlfdrdbVs  Abhandlung  der  Musterstaat 
aus  Londoner  und  Oxforder  Handschriften  herausgegeben  von 
F.  Bieteerici.     Leiden  1895. 

Philosophie  und  Theologie  von  Averroes  {Ihn  Rusd  f  595  H.,  beg. 
3.  Nov.  1198).  Herausgegeben  von  M.  J.  MxiUe)-.  Miinchen 
1859.  —  Aus  dem  Arabischen  iibersetzt.     Miinchen  1875. 

Le  Guide  des  Egares.  Traite  de  Theologie  et  de  Philosophie  par 
Moise  ben  Maimoun  dit  Maimonide  (f  605  H.,  beg.  16.  July 
1208).  Public  pour  la  premiere  fois  dans  I'original  arabe  et  ac- 
compagne  d'une  traduction  fran^aise  par  Munk.  I — III.  Paris 
1856—66. 

Kitab  Ihican  as-safa  wa-hullan  al-wafa  (between  950 — 1000  of  our 
era).  4  vols.  Bombay  1305 — 1306.  —  A  part  of  the  rasail 
ihwan  as-safa  has  also  been  printed  in  Cairo,  1306.  —  Die 
Abhandlungen  der  Ichwan  Es-Safa  in  Auswahl  herausg.  von 
F.  Dieterici.     3  Hefte.     Leipzig  1883—6. 

Statio  quinta  et  sexta  et  appendix  libri  Mevakif  auctore  'Adhad-eddin 
el-Igt  (f  756  H.,  beg.  16.  Jan.  1355)  cum  commentario  Gorganii 
ex  codd.  etc.  edidit  Th.  Sorensen.  Lipsiae  1848  (Scholastic 
Metaphysics). 

Definitiones  viri  meritissimi  Sejjid  Scherif  Ali  ben  Mohammed  Dschor- 
dschani  [al-Gorgdrii  f  816  H.,  beg.  3.  Apr.  1418).  Accedunt  de- 
finitiones theosophi  Mohji-ed-din  Mohammed  ben  Ali  vulgo  Ibn 
Arabi  (f  638  H.,  beg.  23  July  1240)  dicti.  Ed.  et  adnot  critica 
instruxit  Gustavus  Fluff  el.     Lipsiae  1845. 

P  Written  by  Europeans. 

Die  griechischen  Philosophen  in  der  arabischen  Uberlieferung.  Von 
August  Midler.  (Festschrift  der  Franckischen  Stiftungen  zu  dem 
50jahrigen  Doctorjubilaum  Bernhardy's).     Halle  1873. 

Al-Kindi  (f  ca.  850  A.  D.)  genannt  „der  Phiiosoph  der  Araber".  Ein 
Vorbild  seiner  Zeifc  und  seines  Volkes.  Von  G.  Flilgel.  Leipzig 
1857.  (Abhandlungen  der  D.  Morg.  Ges.  1.  Band.  Nr.  2).  Cf. 
Otto  Loth,  Al-Kindi  als  Astrolog,  Morgenlandische  Forschungen. 
Leipzig  1875,  pp.  261  ff.  and  Sir  Wm.  Muir,  The  Apology  of 
Al-Kindy  2  Ed.     London  1887. 

Al-Farabi,  des  arabischen  Philosophen,  Leben  und   Schriften.     Von 


156  Literature  I. 

Moritz  Steinschneider:  Memoires  de  TAcademie  Imp.  des  Sciences 
de  St.  Petersbourg.     VII.  serie,  tome  XIII,  4.     1869.     40. 

Ernest  Benan,  Averroes  et  rAverroisme.     3.  ed.     Paris    1861. 

Die  Philosophie  der  Araber  im  X.  Jahrhundert  n.  Chr.  aus  den 
Schriften  der  lauteren  Briider  herausgegeben  von  Fr.  Dieterici. 
Die  Naturwissenschaft  mid  Natm-anschaumig  der  Araber.  Berlin 
1861.  —  Die  Propadeutik.  Berlin  1865.  —  Die  Logik  und  Psy- 
ohologie.  Leipzig  1868.  —  Die  Anthropologie.  Leipzig  1871.  — 
Die  Lehre  von  der  Weltseele.  Leipzig  1872.  —  Die  Natm'- 
anschauung  und  Naturphilosophie.  2.  Ausg.  Leipzig  1876.  — 
EinleituDg  und  Makrokosmos.  Leipzig  1876.  —  Mikrokosmos. 
Leipzig  1879. 

I.   NATURAL  SCIENCE  AND  MEDICINE. 

F.  Wiistenfeld,  Geschichte  der  arabischen  Arzte  und  Naturforscher. 
Gottingen  1840  (rather  out  of  date). 

Histoire  de  la  medecine  arabe  par  le  Dr.  Lucien  Leclerc.  2  vol. 
Paris   1876  (insufficient), 

Jbn  Abi  XJseibia.  Herausgegeben  von  August  MiiUer.  Konigsberg 
i.  Pr.  1884  {Ibn  Abi  TJsaibi'a  f  668  H.,  beg.  14.  May  1297 
wrote  this  great  work  on  the  history  of  Arab  physicians  under 
the  title:  'Uyun  al-'anba'  fi  tabakat  al-'atibba'.  For  which  see 
Vol.  II  des  travaux  de  la  6^  session  du  Congres  international  des 
Orientalistes  a  Leide.     Leide  1884.     p.  257  ff.). 

Hay  at  al-haiwan  (zoological  work)  bj^  ad-Damirl  (f  808  H.,  beg. 
29.  June  1405).     2  vols.     Bulak  1284.     Cairo  1305. 

Kitab  al-kanun  fit-tibb,  Theory  of  Medicine,  composed  by  Abu  'All 
ibn  Sind  (Avic'enna    f    428    H.,    beg.    25.    Oct.    1036).      3   vols. 
V  Bulak  1294. 

al-Gami'  li-mufradat  al-'adwiya  wal-'agdiya  (On  the  common  medicines 
and  foods)  by  Diya'  ad-din  Abii  Muhammad  Ibn  al-Baitdr 
(t  646  H.,  beg.  26.  April  1248).     4  vols.     Bulak  1231. 

Tedkire  (Science  of  medicine)  by  Dd'-ild  al-Antdki  (f  1005  H.,  beg. 
15.  Aug.  1596).     3  vols.     Cairo  1294. 

La  Chimie  du   moyen-age  .  .  .  par  M.  Berthelot.     Tome  III.     L'al- 
chimie  arabe  comprenant  une  introduction  et  les  traites  de  Crates, 
d'el-Habib,  d'Ostanes  et  de  Djaber  .  .  .  texte  et  traduction  .  . 
avec  la  collaboration  de  M.   O.  Houdas.     Paris  1893.     40. 

Materiaux  pour  servir  a  I'histoire  des  sciences  mathematiques  chez 
les  Grecs  et  les  Orientaux  par  M.  L.  P.  B.  A.  Sedtllot.  2  tomes. 
Paris  1845.  1849. 

Traite  des  instruments  astronomiques  des  Arabes,  trad,  par  J.  J.  Se- 
dillot.  Paris  1834.  1835.  Memoires  sur  les  instruments  astro- 
nomiques des  Arabes  par  J.  J.  Sedillot.    Paris  1841—45. 


Literature  K.  157 

K.    HISTORY,  BIOGRAPHY. 

a  Written  hy  Orientals. 

Ihn  Coteiha's  {ihn  Kutaiha  f  276  H.  he^.  6.  May  889)  Handbuch  der 
Geschichte  herausgegeben  vouFerd. Wiistenfeld.  Gottingen  1 850. — 
Oriental  edition:    Kitab  al-ma'arif.     Cairo  1300. 

Abu  Bekr  Muhammed  ben  al-Hasan  Ibn  Doraid's  (f  321  H.,  beg. 
1.  Jan.  933)  genealogisch-etymologisches  Handbuch  herausgegeben 
von  F.  Wiistenfeld.     Gottingen  1854. 

*Chronologie  orientalischer  Yolker  von  Alberuni.  Herausgegeben  von 
Eduard  Sachau.  Gedruckt  auf  Kosten  der  D.  M.  Ges.  Leipzig 
1878.  40.  —  Chronology  of  ancient  Nations.  An  English  Version 
of  the  Arabic  Text  of  the  Athar  ul  Bakiya  of  Albiruni,  or 
"Vestiges  of  the  Past".  Collected  and  reduced  to  writing  by 
the  Author  in  A.  H.  390—1,  A.  D.  1000.  Translated  and 
Edited,  with  Notes  and  Index,  by  C.  E.  Sachau.  Published  for 
the  Oriental  Translation  Fund  of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland. 
Roy  80.     London  1879. 

Ibn  Wadhih  (Wadih)  qui  dicitur  al-Jaqiihi  (Ya'kiibi)  Historiae  (composed 
ca.  297  H.).    2  partes  ed.  M.  Th.  Eoutsma.    Lugduni  Batav.  1883. 

Anonyme  Ai'abische  Chronik  Band  XI  vermuthlich  das  Buch  der  Ver- 
wandtschaft  und  Geschichte  der  Adligen  von  Abulhasan  ahmed 
ben  jahja  ben  gabir  ben  dawud  elbeladori  elbagdadi  (al-Balad^irt, 
t  279  H. ,  beg.  3.  Apr.  893).  Autogr.  und  herausgegeben  von 
W.  Ahlwardt.     Greifswald  1883. 

Kitab  al-ahbar  at-tiwal  verf.  von  Abu  Hanifa  Ahmed  ibn  Daud  ad-Dai- 
nawari  (f  282  or  290  H.)  hrs.  von  Wladimir  Oirgas.    Leiden  1888. 

*Annales  auctore  Abu  Djafar  Mohammed  Ibn  Djarir  At-Tabari  (at- 
Tabari  f  309  H.,  beg.  12.  May  921),  quos  ediderunt  J.  Barth, 
Th.  Noldeke,  O.  Loth  (f),  E.  Prym,  H.  Thorbecke  (f),  S.  Frankel, 
D.  H.  Miiller,  M.  Th.  Houtsma,  S.  Guyard  (f),  V.  Rosen  et 
M.  J.  de  Goeje  I,  1—5;  II,  1—3;  III,  1—4.    Leiden  1879  seq. 

MaQoudi  (al-Masudl  f  346  H.,  beg.  4.  Apr.  957)  Les  prairies  d'or. 
Texte  et  traduction  par  C.Barbier  de  Meynard  et  Pavet  de  Cour- 
teille.     9  tomes.     Paris  1861—77.     (id.  2  vols.  Bulak  1283). 

Hamzae  Ispahanensis  [Hamza  wrote  about  350  H.)  annalium  libri  X. 
Edidit  J.  M.  E.  Qottwaldt.  I.  textus,  II.  transl.  Petropoli-Lipsiae 
1844.  1848. 

Fragmenta  historicorum  arabicorum.  Tomus  pi'imus  continens  partem 
tertiam  operis  Kitabo  '1-Oyun  wa  'Ihadaik  fi  akhbari  '1-had^ik 
(written  after  the  11*^  cent.  A-D.)  quem  ediderunt  M.  J.  de 
Goeje  et  P.  de  Jong.  Lugduni  Bat.  1868.  4^^. —  Tomus  secundus 
continens  partem  operis  Tadjdribo  'lOmami,  auctore  Ibn  MasTcoioaih 
(t  421  H.,  beg.  9.  Jan.  1030)  edidit  M.  J.  de  Goeje.  Lugd.  Bat.  1871. 


158  Literature  K. 

*Ibn  el-Athiri  {ibn  al-'Atir  f  630  H.,  beg.  18.  Oct.  1232)  Chronicon 
quod  perfectissimum  (el-KamQ)  inscribitur.  Edidit  Carolus  Jo- 
hannes Tornberff.  14  vol.  Lugdnni  Bat.  1851 — 1876.  —  12  vols. 
Bulak  1290  and  later. 

Commentaire  historique  sur  le  poeme  d'Ibn-Abdoun  (Ibn  ^Abdiin 
t  529  H.,  beg.  22.  Oct.  1134)  par  Ibn  Badroun  {Ibn  Badrun 
wrote  in  the  same  century)  publie  par  B.  P.  A.  Dozy.  Leide  1846 
(Ouvrages  arabes  publies  par  Dozy). 

Historia  saracenica  arabice  olim  exarata  a  Georgio  Elmacino  (al-MaJcm 
■f  672  H.,  beg.  18.  July  1273),  edita  et  latine  reddita  opere  et 
studiis  Thomae  Erpenit.     Lugduni  Bat.   1625. 

Ta'rih  muhtasar  ad-duwal  (Outlines  of  History  by  Gregorius  abu 
'1-Farag  Ibn  el-*Ibri  {Barhebraeus  |  1286  A.  D.)  ed.  by  Salhdni. 
Beirut  1890.  (The  edition  by  Pococke,  2  tomi  40.  Oxonii  1663 
is  rare). 

Elfachri.  History  of  the  Moslem  Empires  from  the  beginning  to 
the  end  of  the  Califate  by  Ibn  etthiqthaqa  (wrote  about  1302 
A-D.).     Edited  in  Arabic  by  W.  Ahlwardt.     Gotha  1860. 

Abulfedae  (f  732  H.,  beg.  4.  Oct.  1331).  Annales  muslemici  arabice 
et  latine.  Opera  et  studiis  J.  J.  Reiskii,  nunc  primum  ed.  J.  G. 
Ch  Adler.     5  voh     Hafniae  1789—94.  —  2  vols.     Stambul  1286. 

f  Abulfedae  historia  Anteislamica ,  Arabice  e  duob.  Codd.  Paris, 
edidit,  vers.  lat.  notis  et  indicibus  auxit  H.  0.  Fleischer.  Lipsiae 
1831.     40. 

Ta'rih  Zain  ad-din  *Umar  ibn  al-Wardl  (f  749  or  760  H.  =  1348/9). 
2  vols.  Cairo  1285.  —  An  excerpt:  Aegyptus  auctore  Ibn 
al-Vardi.  Edidit  vertit  notulisque  illustravit  Martinus  Frdhn. 
Halae  1804. 

Ibn  Ealdun  (f  808  H.,  beg.  29.  June  1405)  al-'ibar  etc.  History  of 
the  World.  7  vols.  Bulak  1284.  —  Prolegomenes  d'Ebn- 
Khaldoun.  Texte  arabe  par  Quatremere.  3  vols.  Paris  1858 
(Notices  et  extraits  des  mscr.  XVI,  1.  XVII,  1.  XVIII,  1.).  — 
Prolegomenes  historiques  d'Ibn  Khaldoun.  Traduction  par  Mac 
OucJcin  de  Slane.  3  vols.  Paris  1862 — 68  (Notices  et  extr.  XIX, 
1.  XX,  1.  XXI,  1). 

The  Tarikh  al-Kholafa;  or  history  of  the  Caliphs,  from  the  death  of 
Mohammad  to  the  year  900  of  the  Hijrah  by  the  celebrated  Jalal 
al-Din  Al-Osyooti  [as-SuyuU  f  911  H.,  beg.  4.  June  1505),  ed.  by 
W.  N.  Lees  und  Mawlawi  Abd  al-Haqq.  Calcutta  1857.  Another 
edition  Cairo  1305. 

*Liber  expugnationis  regionum  auctore  Imamo  Ahmed  ibn  Jahja  ibn 
Djabir  al-Baladsori  {al-Baldduri  f  279  H.,  beg.  3.  Apr.  892)  ed. 
M.  J.  de  Goeje.     Lugduni  Bat.  1866.     40. 

Oicsdma  ibn  Mounkidh  un  6mir  syrien  an  premier  si^cle  des  Croisades, 
(1095 — 1188)  par  Uartwig  Derenhourg.    Deuxi^me  partie.    Texte 


Literature  K.  159 


arabe  de  I'autobiographie  d'Ousama.  Paris  1886  (cf.  Carlo  de 
Landberg,  Critica  arabica  II.  Leyde  1888).  —  Ousama  ibn 
Mounkidh  etc.  par  H.  Derenbourg  (French  edition.).    Paris  1889. 

'Imdd  ed-dln  el-katib  el-isfahani  (f  597  H.  =  1201)  Conquete  de  la 
Syrie  et  de  la  Palestine  par  Salah  ed-din.  Public  par  le  comte 
Carlo  de  Landerg.     Vol.  I.     Texte  arabe.     Leyde  1888. 

Vita  et  res  gestae  sultani  Almaliehi  Alnasiri^Saladini  auctore  Bohad- 
dino  P.  Sjeddadi  {Balm  ad -din  ibn  Sadddd  f  632  fl.  =  1234) 
edidit  ac  latine  vertit  Alberttts  Schultens.  Lugduni  Batav.  1732 
(1755).     fol. 

Kitab  ar-raudatain^fi  ta'rih  ad-daulatain  (History  of  Nureddin^  and 
Saladin)  by  Sihab  ad-din  al-Mukaddasi ,  called  Abu  Sdma 
(t  665  H.  =  1267).     Cairo.     2  vols.     1287. 

Kitab  al-'ins  al-galil  bi-ta'nh  al-kuds  wal-halil.  History  of  Jeru- 
salem and  Hebron  by  Mugtr  ad-din  (f  927  H.,  beg.  12.  Dec. 
1520).  —  Cf.  Histoire  de  Jerusalem  et  d'Hebron.  Fragments  de 
la  Chronique  de  Moudjir-ed-dyn  traduits  sur  le  texte  arabe  par 
Henry  Sauvaire.     Paris   1876. 

Die  Chroniken  der  Stadt  Mekka.  Gesammelt  und  herausgegeben  von 
Ferdinand  Wuste7ifeld  (I  Azraki.  II  Fakihi,  Fasi,  Ibn  Dhuheira, 
III  Kutb  ed-din.  IV  German  edition).    I— IV.    Leipzig  1857 — 61. 

Hulasat  al-wafa  bi'ahbar  dar  al-mustafa  (ffistory  of  the  town  of 
Medina)  by  as-SamhUdi  (f  911  H.,  beg.  4.  June  1505).  Bulak 
1285.  —  Extracts  translated  by  Wiistenfeld  in  den  Abhandlungen 
der  k.    Ges.   der  Wissenschaften   zu  Gottingen.     Bd.  IX.  1860. 

*al-Hitat  (Geography  and  History  of  Egypt)  by  al-Malnrizi  (f  845 
^H.,"beg.  22.  May  1441).  2  vols.  Bulak  1270.  —  Histoire  des 
Sultans  Mamlouks  de  PEgj'pte,  ecrite  en  arabe  par  Taki-eddin- 
Ahmed  Makrizi,  traduite  en  fran^ais  et  accompagnee  de  notes 
par  Quatremere.     2  vol.     Paris  1837 — 45.     40. 

Abul-Mahdsin  ibn  Tagri  Bardii  (f  874  H.,  beg.  11.  July  1469)  Annales 
(History  of  Egypt)  I,  1.  2  ediderunt  T.  O.  J.  Juynboll  et  B.  F. 
Matthes.  II,  1.  2.  ed.  T.  0.  J.  Juynboll.  Lugduni  Bat.  1852—61 
(incomplete). 

Husn  al-muhadara.  History  of  Egypt  by  as-Suyutl  (f  911  H.,  beg. 
4.  June  1505).     2  vols.     Cairo. 

'Agaib  al-atar  fit-taragim  wal-ahbar  (History  of  Egypt)  by  aUQabartl 
(t  1236  =  1821).     4  vols."  Cairo  n.   d. 

Ahmedis  Arabsiadae  [Ahmed  ibn'Arab§ah  f  854  H.,  beg.  14.  Febr. 
1450)  vitae  et  rerum  gestarum  Timuri,  qui  vulgo  Tamerlanes 
dicitur  historia.  (Ed.)  Latine  vertit  etc.  S.  H.  Manger.  2  vol. 
Leovardiae  1767.  1772.  —  Cairo  1285. 

The  History  of  the  Almohades  by  Abdo - '1 -Wahid  al-Marrekoshi 
(wrote  in  the  year  621  H.  =  1224)  edited  by  B.  Dozy.  2.  ed. 
Leyden  1881. 


160  Literature  K. 

Historia  Abbadidarum  praeiiiissis  scriptorum  Arabum  de  ea  dynastia 
locis  nunc  priraum  editis ,  auctore  R.  P.  A.  Dozy.  I — III.  Lug- 
duni  Bat.  1849.     40.     (Deals  w.  Spain). 

Annales  regum  Mauretaniae  a  condito  Idrisidarum  imperio  ad  annum 
fugae  726,  ab  Abu-1  Hasan  Ali  ben  Abd  Allah  Ibn  Abi  Zer' 
Fesano,  vel  ut  alii  malunt  Abu  Muhammed  Salih  ibn  Abd  el 
Halim  Granatensi  conscriptos  ed.  illustr.  Carolus  Joh.  Tornherg^ 
2  vol.     Upsaliae  1843.  1846. 

Histoire  de  I'Afrique  et  de  l'EsiDao:ne  intitulee  al-Bayano  '1-Moglirib 
par  Ibn  Adhdri  (de  Maroc)  (I6n  al-'Iddn  wrote  between  363 
and  366  H.)  et  fragments  de  la  chronique  d'Arib  (de  Cordoue) 
publics  par  B.  P.  A.  Dozy.     2.  vols,     Leyde  1848—51. 

Analectes  sur  I'histoire  et  la  litterature  des  Arabes  d'Espagne  par 
Al-M^kkari  (al-Makkari  f  1041  H.,  beg.  30.  July  1631).  Publies 
par  B.  Dozy,  G.  Dugat,  L.  Krehl  et  W.  Wright.  2  vol.  Leyde 
1855 — 61.  (Conf.  Fleischer,  Textverbesserungen  in  Al-Makkari's 
Geschichtswerke.  Kleinere  Schriften.  Vol.  II  pt.  1.  Leipzig 
1888.)  —  Lettre  a  M.  Fleischer  contenant  les  remarques  critiques 
et  explicatives  sur  le  texte  d' Al-Makkari  par  B.  Dozy.  Leyde 
1871.  —  Cf.  The  history  of  the  Mohammedan  Dynasties  in  Spain 
by  Ahmed  ibn  Mohammed  Al-Makkari.  Translated  and  illustrated 
by  Pascual  de  Gayangos.     2  vol.     London  1840 — 3.     4^. 

Bibliotheca  arabo-sicula,  ossia  Raccolta  di  testi  arabici  che  toccano  la 
geografia,  la  storia,  la  biografia  e  la  bibliografia  della  Sicilia, 
messi  insieme  da  Michele  Amari.  Lipsia  1857;  Appendice,  ibid. 
1875. 

Alheruni's  India,  an  account  of  the  religion,  philosophy,  literature, 
chronology,  astronomy, .  customs,  laws  and  astrology  of  India 
about  1030.  Ed.  by  Edw.  Sachau.  London  1887.  4'\  —  Id. 
An  English  edition  with  notes  and  indices.  By  E.  Sachau.  London. 
2  vol.     1888. 

Scriptorum  Arabum  de  Rebus  Indicis  loci  et  opuscula  inedita  rec. 
et  illustr.  Joannes  Oildemeister.  Ease.  pr.  Bonnae  1838.  — 
Cf.  id.,  Dissertationis  de  rebus  Indiae,  quo  mode  in  Arabum 
notitiam  venerint,  pars  I.     Bonnae  1838. 


*Ibn  Challican,  Vitae  illustrium  virorum.  E  codd.  nunc  primum 
arabice  edidit  variis  lectionibus,  indicibusque  locupletissimis  in- 
struxit  Ferd.  Wiistenfeld.  Gottingae  1835—40,  40.  —  Ibn  Hal- 
likan  (f  681  H.,  beg.  11.  Apr.  1282).  2  vols.  Bulak  1275;  another 
edition  1299.  —  Ibn  Khallikan's  Biographical  Dictionary,  translated 
from  the  Arabic  by  Baron  Mac  Guckin  de  Slane.  4  vol.  Paris- 
London  1843—71.     40. 

Fawat  al-wafayat  (supplement  to  Ibn  Hallikan)  by  as-Salah  al-KutuM 
(t  764  H.,  beg.  21.  Oct.  1362).    ^2  vols.     Bulak  "1283. 


r  OF  THE 

CTNIVERSITI 

Literature  K,  ^'"^Jf-  iftl?ORH\^ 

The  biographical  dictionary  of  illustrious  men  chiefly  at  the  beginning 
of  Islamism  by  Abu  Zakariya  Jahya  el-Nawawi  (f  676  H.  =  1277) 
edited  by  Ferd.  Wiistenfeld.  Gottingen  1842 — 47  (cf.  idem  for 
the  Life  and  Writings  of  el-Nawawi,  Gottingen  1849,  from  the 
4*11  vol.  of  the  Abhandl.  d.  kgl.  Ges.  d.  Wiss.  zu  Gott,). 

Nuzhat  al-'alubba  fi  tabakat  al-'udaba.  Concerning  celebrated  Men. 
By  Abul-Baraka't  al-Anbdri  (f  577  H.,  beg.  17.  May  1181). 
Cairo  lithogr.  n.  d. 

P   Written  hy  Europeans. 

f  Vergleichungstabellen  der  muhammedanischen  und  christlichen  Zeit- 
rechnung  nach  den  ersten  Tagen  jedes  muhammedanischen  Monats 
berechnet.  'S.er2i\xss:e°;ehen  van  Ferd.  Wiistenfeld.  Leipzig  1844. — 
Fortsetzung  der  Wiistenf.  Yergl.  -  Tab.  bis  1500  von  E.  Mahler. 
Leipzig  1887. 

*Die  Geschichtsschreiber  der  Araber  und  ihre  Werke.  Von  F.  Wiisten- 
feld. (From  the  XXVIII.  and  XXIX.  vol.  of  the  Abhandlungen 
der  Kgl.  Ges.  d.  W.  zu  Gottingen).     Gottingen  1882.     40. 

*Genealogische  Tabellen  der  Arabischen  Stamme  und  Familien  .  .  . 
Aus  den  Quellen  zusammengestellt  von  Ferdinand  Wilster^feld. 
Gottingen  1852.  q.-fol.  —  Register  zu  den  genealogischen  Ta- 
bellen der  Arabischen  Stamme  und  Familien.  Mit  historischen 
und  geographischen  Bemerkungen  von  Ferdinand  Wiistenfeld. 
Gottingen  1853. 

*  Caussin  de  Perceval,  Essai  sur  I'histoire  des  Arabes  avant  I'islamisme 
3  vol.     Pai'is  1847. 

Geschichte  der  Perser  und  Araber  zur  Zeit  der  Sassaniden.  Aus 
der  arabischen  Chronik  des  Tabari  iibersetzt  und  mit  ausfiihr- 
lichen  Erlauterungen  und  Erganzungen  versehen  von  Th.  Noldeke, 
Leyden  1879. 

t*Der  Islam  im  Morgen-  und  Abendland.  Von  A.  Miiller.  2  Bande. 
Berlin  1885.  1887.  (Allgemeine  Geschichte  in  EinzeldarsteUungen 
hrsgg.  von  L.  Oncken.     Zweite   Hauptabteilung.     Vierter  Teil). 

*Geschicbte  der  Chalifen.  Nach  handschriftlichen  grosstenteils  noch 
unbeniitzten  Quellen  bearbeitet  von  Gxistav  Weil.  3  Bande. 
Mannheim  1846 — 51.  —  Geschichte  des  Abbasidenchalifats  in 
Aegypten.     Von    Qustav    Weil.     2   Bande.     Stuttgart   1860 — 2. 

t Geschichte  der  islamitischen  Volker  von  Mohammed  bis  zur  Zeit 
des  Sultan  Selim  iibersichtlich  dargestellt  von  Qustav  Weil. 
Stuttgart  1866. 

fGeschichte  der  Araber  bis  auf  den  Sturz  des  Chalifats  von  Bagdad. 
Von  Gustav  Fliigel.     2.  Aufl.     Leipzig  1864. 

The  Caliphate,  its  rise,  decline,  and  fall  from  original  sources  by 
Sir  William  Muir.  London  1891.  New  and  revised  edition  1894. 
Socin.  Arabic  Grammar.'  11 


162  Literature  L. 


Handbuch    der   morgenlandischen  Miinzkunde.     Von   J.   G.   Stickel. 

2  Hefte,     Leipzig  1865—70.     40. 
Catalogue  of  Oriental  Coins  in  the  British  Museum,  9  vol.     London 

1875—1889. 
The  Mohammadan   Dynasties,   chronological  and  genealogical  Tables 

with  historical  Introductions  by  St.  Lane-Poole.     London   1894. 
Die  Charidschiten  uuter  den  ersten  Omayyaden.     Ein  Beitrag   zur 

Greschichte    des    ersten    islamischen    Jahrhunderts    von    B.    E. 

Brunnow.     Leiden  1884. 
De  opkomst  der  Abbasiden  in  Chorasan  door  Gr.  van  Vlooten.  Leiden  1 890. 
Memoires  sur  les  Carmathes  du  Bahrain  et  les  Fatimides  par  M.  J. 

de  Goeje.     Leiden  1886. 
Die  Statthalter  von  Agypten  zur  Zeit  der  Chalifen.    Von  F.   Wiisten- 

feld.     Parts  1  and  2.     Abhandlungen  der  Kgl.  Ges.  d.  Wissen- 

schaften  zu   Gottingen.     1875  (4^^).     Band   20.     Parts    3  and  4. 

ibid.     1876,  Band  21. 
History  of  the  Moors  in  Spain  to  the  Conquest  of  Andalusia  by  the 

Almoravides   (711 — 1110),   by  R.  Dozy.     German   Edition    with 

additions  by  the  Author.     2  vols.     Leipzig  1874. 
Poesie  und  Kunst  der  Araber   in  Spanien  und  Sicilien.     Von  Adolf 

Friedrich  von  Schack.     2   Bande.     Berlin    1865.     2.  Aufl.  1877. 
*Culturgeschichte   des  Orients  unter   den  Chalifen.     Von  Alfred  von 

Kremer.     2  Bande,     Wien  1875 — 77. 
Das    Einnahmebudget    des    Abbasiden-Reichs     vom    Jahre    360    H. 

(918 — 919)  von  Alfred  von  Kremer.    Denkschriften  der  philos.-hist. 

Classe  der  Kais.  Akademie  der  Wiss.  in  Wien.   Bd.  XXXVI.  1887. 
*Gescliichte  der  herrschenden  Ideen  des  Islams.    Der  Gottesbegrifif,  die 

Prophetie  und  Staatsidee.    Von  Alfred  v.  Kremer.    Leipzig  1868. 


Die  Baustile.   Historische  und  technische  Entwicklung.   Des  Handbuchs 

der  Architectur  (von  J.  Durm)  Zweiter  Theil.  3.  Baud,  zweiteHalfte ; 

Die  Baukunst  des  Islam.    Von  Franz  Pascha.    Darmstadt  1887. 
Prisse  d'Avennes,  L'art  arabe  d'apres  les  monuments  du  Caire  depuis 

le  Vile  siecle  jusqu'  a  la  fin  du  XVIIIe.    3  vol.    fol.  1  vol.  4. 

Paris  1877.  —  La  decoration  arabe.  (Extrait  du  grand  ouvrage.) 

Paris  1865.     fol. 

L.    COSMOGRAPHY,  GEOGRAPHY,  ETHNOGRAPHY, 
TRAVELS. 

a  Written  by  Orientals. 

Cosmographie  de  Chems  ed-din  Abou  Abdallah  Mahommed  ed-Dimichqi 
(ad-Dimi§ki  f  654  H.,  beg.  30.  Jan.  1256).  Texte  arabe  publie 
d'apres  I'edition  commencee  par  M.  Frahn,  et  d'apres  les  manu- 


LiTERATUEE  L.  163 

scrits  par  M.  A.  F.  Mehren.  St.  Petersbourg  1866.  40.  —  Manuel 
de  la  cosmographie  du  moyen  age,  traduit  de  I'arabe  „Nokhbet 
ed-dahr  fi  'adjaib-il-birr  wal-bah'r"  de  Shems  ed-din  Abou-'Abdallah 
Mohammed  de  Damas  et  accompagnee  d'eclaircissements  par  M. 
A.  F.  Mehren.     Copenhague  1874. 

*Zakarija  Ben  Muhammed  ben  Mahmud  el-Caztcini's  (aUKazmni 
f  682  H.,  beg.  1.  Apr.  1283)  Kosmographie.  Herausg.  von  Ferd. 
Wiistenfeld.  2  Bande.  Gottingen  1848—9.  —  id.  nach  der 
Wiistenfeld'schen  Textausgabe  etc.  iibersetzt  von  Hermann  Ethe, 
Erster  Halbband.     Leipzig  1868. 

Haridat  al-'agaib  wa-faridat  al-garaib,  a  species  of  Cosmography 
composed  by  'Umar  ihn  al-Wardi  (f  749  or  750  H.  =»  1348  or  9). 
Cairo  1292. 

Specimen  e  literis  orientalibus  exhibens  az-Zamaksarzi,  (az-ZamalSari 
t  538  H.,  beg.  16.  July  1143)  lexicon  geographicum  quod  auspice 
T.  Gr.  J.  Juynboll  edidit  Mathias  Salverda  de  Grave.  Lugduni 
Bat.  1856. 

Al-Hamddni's  (f  334  H.,  beg.  13.  Aug.  945)  Geographie  der  Arabischen 
Halbinsel.  Nach  den  Handschr.  herausgegeben  von  David  Heinrich 
Muller.     Leiden  1884. 

Das  geographische  Worterbuch  des  Abu  'Obeid  'Abdallah  ben  *Abd 
el-'Aziz  el-Bekri  (f  487  H.  =  1094)  nach  den  Handschriften 
zu  Leiden,  Cambridge,  London  und  Mailand  herausgegeben  von 
Ferd.   Wiistevfeld.     2  Bande.     Gottingen,  Pai-is  1876.  1877. 

*Jacut's  {Yakut  f  626  H.  =  1229)  Geographisches  Worterbuch  aus 
den  Handschiiften  zu  Berlin,  St.  Petersburg  und  Paris  auf  Kosten 
der  Deutschen  Morgenlandischen  Gesellschaft  herausgegeben  von 
Ferdinand  Wiistenfeld.     6  Bande.     Leipzig  1866 — 73. 

Jacut's  Moschtarik,  das  ist:  Lexicon  geographischer  Homonyme. 
Herausgegeben  von  Ferd.   Wiistenfeld.     Gottingen  1846. 

Marasid  al-ittila*i,  Lexicon  geographicum  ed  T.  G.  J.  Juynboll  I — VL 
Lugduni' B.  1850—64.     (An  Extract  from  Yakiit). 

Geographie  d'Aboulfeda  (AJw'i-/irfa  f  732  H.,  beg.  4.  Oct.  1331).  Texte 
arabe  par  Beinaud  et  Mac-Guckin  de  Slane.  Paris  1840.  — 
Geographie  d'Ismail  Abou  '1-Feda  en  arabe  publiee  par  Charles 
Schier.  iEd.  autogr.  Dresde  1846.  —  Geographie  d'Aboulfeda, 
traduite  de  I'arabe  en  fran^ais  par  Reinaud  I  (*Latroduction 
g6nerale  a  la  geographie  des  Orientaux)  II,  1  Paris  1848 ;  II,  2 
par  Stanislas  Guyard.     Paris  1883. 

*Bibliotheca  geographorum  arabicorum.     Edidit  M.  J.  de  Goeje. 

Pars  prima.  Viae  regnorum.  Descriptio  ditionis  moslemicae 
auctore  Abu  Ishak  al-Farisi  al-Istakhri  {al-lstahrxj  cf.  Zeitschrft 
d.  D.  Morgenl.  Ges.  Bd.  25,  p.  42  ff.).     Lugduni  Bat.  1870. 

Pars  secunda.  Viae  et  regna.  Descriptio  ditionis  moslemicae 
auctore  Abu  '1-Kasim  Ibn  Haukal  fibid.).    Lugduni  Bat.  1873. 

11* 


1 64  Literature  L. 

Pars  tertia.  Descriptio  imperii  Moslemici  auctore  Al-MoTiad- 
dasi  {al-Mukaddasi  wrote  in  year  378  the  H.).    LuQ^duni  Bat.  1876. 

Cf.  Description  of  Syria  &c.  by  Mukaddasi.  Translated  from 
the  Arabic  by  Guy  Le  Strange.   (Palestine  Pilgrims'  Text  Society). 

Pars  quarta.  Continens  indices,  glossarium  et  addenda  et  emen- 
danda  ad  part.  I— III  auctore  M.  J.  de  Goeje.    Lusfduni  Bat.  1879. 

Pars  quinta.  Compendium  libri  Kitab  al-boldan  auctore  Ibn 
al-Fahih  al-Hamadhani  (wrote  ca.  A.  D.  290).    Lugd.  Bat.   1885. 

Pars  sexta.  Kitab  al-masalik  wal-mamalik  (liber  viarum  et 
regnorum)  auctore  Abu'l-Kasim  Obaidallah  ibn  Abdallah  ibn 
Khordddbeh  (Ibn  Hordadbeh  wrote  in  the  second  half  of  the 
9th  cent.  A.  D.)  et"  excerpta  e  Kitab  al-Kharadj  (K.  al-harag 
Taxbook)  auctore  Koddma  ibn  Djafar  (Kuddma  ibn  Ga^far 
wrote  about  930  A.  D.).     Lugduni  Bat.  1889. 

Pars  septima.  Kitab  al-a'lak  an-nafisa  VII  auctore  Abu  Ali 
Ahmed  ibn  Omar  ibn  Rosteh  (wrote  before  301.  H.)  et  Kitab  al- 
boldan  auctore  Ahmed  ibn  abi  Jakiib  ibn  Wadhih  al-Katib  al- 
Jakiibi  (cf.  p.  157).     Lugduni  Bat.  1892. 

Pars  octava.  Kitab  at-tanbih  wa'1-ischraf  auctore  al-Masudi 
(cf,  p.  157).  Accedunt  indices  et  glossarium  ad  tomos  VII  et 
VIIL  Lugduni  Bat.  1894. 
Description  de  I'Afrique  et  de  I'Espagne  par  Edrist  (wrote  548 
H.,  beg.  29  March  1153)  texte  arabe  public  pour  la  premiere  fois 
d'apres  les  man.  de  Paris  et  d' Oxford  avec  une  traduction,  des 
notes  et  un  glossaire  par  B.^Dozy  et  M.  J.  de  Goeje.  Le3'de  1866. 
The  travels  of  Ibn  Jubair  (Ibn  Gubair  end  of  the  6th  cent.)  edited  bj^ 

William  Wright.     Ley  den  1852. 
Voyages  d'Ibn  Batoutah  (Ibn  Batuta  f  779  H.,  beg.  10  May  1377). 
Texte  arabe,  accompagnee  d'une  traduction  par  C.  Defremery  et 
B.  B.  Sanguinetti  (Publications  de  la  Societe  asiatique).     4  vol. 
Paris  1853—58;  deux.  tir.   1874—77.  —  Cairo   1288. 

j3   Written  by  Eicropeans. 

F.  Wilstenfeld,  Die  Litteratur  der  Erdbeschreibung  bei  den  Arabem. 

Zeitschrift  fiir  vergleichende  Erdkunde  hrsgg.  von  J.  G.  Liidde  I, 

1841,  S.  24—67. 
Carte  generale   des   provinces  europeennes  et  asiatiques  de  I'Empire 

Ottoman,    dressee  par  Henri  Kiepert  4   feuilles.     Deux.   ed.  en- 

tierement  corrigee  et  augmentee  d'un  index  alphabetique.    Berlin 

1892. 
(Karte  von)  Arabien  zu  C.  Bitters  Erdkunde,  Buch  III,  West-Asien, 

Teil  XII  und  XIII  bearbeitet  von  H.  Kiepert.    Neue  berichtigte 

Ausgabe,  die  Orthographic  revidiert  von  Th.  Noldeke.  Berlin  1867 

(D.  Eeimer). 


Literature  L.  165 

Skizze  der  Geschichte  und  Greoofraphie  Arabians  von  den  altesten 
Zeiten  bis  zum  Propheten  Muhammad.  Auf  Grund  der  Inscliriften, 
der  Angaben  der  alten  Autoren  und  der  Bibel  von  Edzcard  Glaser. 
Zweiter  Band.     Berlin   1890. 

Die  alfce  Geographie  Arabiens  als  Grundlage  der  Entwicklungsgeschichte 
des  Semitismus  vou  A.  Sprenger.     Bern  187.5. 

Arabien  im  sechsten  Jahrhundert.  Eine  ethnographische  Skizze  von 
Otto  Blau.  Mit  einer  Karte :  Zeitschrift  der  deutschen  morgenl. 
Gesellschaft.     Leipzig  1869  (XXIII  B.)  p.  559—592. 

Arabien  und  die  Araber  seit  hundert  Jahren.  Eine  geographische 
und  geschichtliche  Skizze  von  Albrecht  Zehine.     Halle  1875. 

Palestine  under  the  Moslems.  A  description  of  Syria  and  the  Holy 
Land  from  A.  D.  650  to  1500.  Translated  from  the  works  of  the 
mediaeval  Arab  Geographers  by  Gruy  le  Strange.   (London)  1890. 

Relation  de  I'Egypte  par  Abdallatif  {^AhA  al-Latif  al-Bagdadi  f  629  H., 
beg.  29.  Oct.  1231).  Le  tout  traduit  et  enrichi  de  notes  par 
Silvester  de  Sacy.  Paris  1810.  4".  (The  text  of  'Abd  al-Latif 
has  been  published  by  J.  White:  'AbdoUatiphi  Historiae  Aegypti 
compendium.     Oxonii  1800). 

*Beschreibung  von  Arabien.  Aus  eigenen  Beobachtungen  und  im 
Lande  selbst  gesammelten  Nachrichten  abgefasst  von  Carsttn 
Niebuhr.     Kopenhagen  1772.     4^. 

Carsten  Niehuhrs  Beisebeschreibung  nach  Arabien  und  andem  um- 
liegenden  Landern.  1.  Band.  Kopenhagen  1774.  2.  Band.  1778; 
English  edtn.     2  vols.     Edinb.   1792. 

f*Travels  in  Arabia  (1814)  comprehending  an  account  of  those  territories 
in  Hedjaz  which  the  Mohammedans  regard  as  sacred.  By  the 
late  John  Lewis  Bnrckhardt.  London,  2  vol.  1829.  —  Johann 
Lxidwig  Burckhardt's  Beisen  in  Arabien,  enthaltend  eine  Besclirei- 
buug  derjenigen  Gebiete  in  Hedjaz,  welche  die  Mohammedaner 
fiir  heilig  achten  .  .  .  Aus  dem  Englischen  iibersetzt.   Weimar  1830. 

f*/.  L.  Burckhardt,  Notes  on  the  Bedouins  and  Wahabys.  2  vol. 
London  1831.  —  Bemerkungen  iiber  die  Beduinen  und  Wahabi's. 
Weimar  1831. 

Richard  Burton,  Personal  narrative  of  a  pilgrimage  to  El  Medinah  and 
Meccah.  2  vol.  London  1857  (and  frequently,  also  in  the  Tauchnitz 
edition). 

*Travels  in  Arabia  Deserta  by  Chxrles  M.  Doughty.  2  vol.  Cambridge 
1888.     (With  new  map). 

Adolf  von  Wrede's  Eeise  in  Hadhramaut,  Beled  Beny  'Issa  und  Beled 
el  Hadschar.  Herausgegeben  .  .  .  von  H.  Freiherr  von  Maltzan. 
Braunschweig  1870.  —  Eeise  nach  Siidarabien  und  Geographische 
Forschungen  im  und  iiber  den  siidwestlicheu  Teil  Arabiens  von 
Heinrich  Freihern  von  Maltr,an.     Braunschweig  1873. 


166  Literature  M, 

Mekka  von  Dr.  C.  Snouck  Hurgronje.  2  Bande.  Mit  Bilder-Atlas. 
Haag  1888.   1889. 

I*  An  account  of  the  manners  and  customs  of  the  modern  Egyptians, 
written  in  Egypt  etc.  By  Edward  William  Lane.  Various 
editions.  London.  —  Lane,  Sitten  und  Gebrauche  der  heutigen 
Egypter.     Ubersetzt  von  /.  Zenker.     3  Bde.     Leipzig  1852. 

E.  W.  Lane,  Arabian  society  in  the  middle  ages.  Studies  from  the 
Thousand  and  One  Nights  ed.  by  Stanley  Lane  Poole.  London 
1883.  (Supplement  to  the  "Manners  and  Customs",  containing 
the  notes  to  Lane's  translation  of  the  Thousand  and  One  Nights 
{y.  infra). 

M.   VERSE. 

Delectus  veterum  carminum  arabicorum.  Carmina  selegit  et  edidit 
Th.  Noeldeke,  glossarium  confecit  A.  MilUer.     Berolini  1890. 

Tiber  Poesie  und  Poetik  der  Araber  von  Wilhelni  Ahlwardf.  Gotha 
1856.     40. 

Beitrage  zur  Kenntniss  der  Poesie  der  alien  Araber.  Von  Th.  Noldeke. 
Hannover  1S64. 

Kitdb  al-agdnl  by  Abu  '1-Farag  *Ali  al-Isfahdnl  (f  352  H.,  beg. 
30.  Jan.  962).  20  vols.  Bulak  1285.  —  Alii  Ispahanensis 
liber  cantilenarum  magnus,  ed.  Kosegarten.  T.  1.  Gripesvoldiae 
1840.  40,  —  The  twenty-first  volume  of  The  Kitab  al-aghani 
ed.  by  Bud.  E.  Brunnow,  Leyden  1888.  —  Tables  alphabetiques 
du  Kitab  al-Agani  par  J.  Quidi.     ler  fasc.     Leide  1895. 

Kitab  raudat  al-adab  fi  tabakat  suara*  al'arab  by  Iskander-Aga 
Abkarins  (modern  Beyrout  scholar).     Beimt  1858. 

Bizanat  al-adab  wa-lubb  lubab  lisan  al-'arab,  by  '' Ab-dal-Kddir  ibn 
"TJmar  al-Bagdddi  (f  1093  H.;  beg.  21.  Aug.  1629)  4  vols.  Bulak 
1291  (A  work  on  poets;  on  the  margin  are  printed  the  Sawahid 
al-'Aini).  An  index  to  the  poets  appeared  from  the  pen  of  Guidi 
in  the  transactions  of  the  R.  Accademia  dei  Lincei,  Rome  1887. 

*The  Diwans  of  the  six  ancient  Arabic  poets  Ennabiga,  'Antara,  Tharafa, 
Zuhair,  'Alqama  and  Lnruulqais,  ed.  by  W.  Ahlwardt.  London. 
1870. 

Bemerkungen  iiber  die  Achtheit  der  alten  Arabischen  Gedichte  mit 
besonderer  Beziehung  auf  die  sechs  Dichter  etc.  von  W.  Ahlwardt. 
Greifswald  1872. 

Le  Diwan  de  Ndbiga  Dhobyani  publie  par  H.  Derenbourg.  Journal 
asiatique  1868 — 9. 

JBL.  Thorbecke,  'Antarah,  ein  vorislamischer  Dichter.     Leipzig  1867. 

Die  Gedichte  des'AZfc aw?  a  Alfahl.  Mit  Anmerkungen  herausgegeben 
von  Albert  Socin.     Leipzig  1867. 

Le  diwan  ^.^Amro'lkais  par  le  Bon  de  Slane.    Paiis  1837.     40.     With 


Literature  M.  167 

Commentary  by  al-Batalyusi.  Cairo  1308.  Cf.  Amrilkais,  der 
Dichter  und  Konig.  Von  Fr.  Rilckert.  Stuttgart  und  Tu- 
bingen 1843. 

f*Septem  Mo'allakdt  carmina  antiquidsima  Arabum,  textum  etc.  rec. 
F,  A.Arnold.  Lipsiae  1860  (out  of  print)  —  With  commentary 
by  az-Zauzani  (f  375  H.,  beg.  24.  May  958).     Cairo  1288. 

A  commentary  by  Abii  Zakariya  Sahya  at-Tibri'zi  (f  420  H. ,  beg. 
11.  Aug.  1108)  on  ten  ancient  Arabic  poems  edited  from  the  Mss. 
of  Cambridge,  London  and  Leiden  by  Charles  James  Lyall. 
Fasc.  I  Bibliotheca  Indica,  New  Series,  No.  789,  Calcutta  1891; 
Fasc.  II  ib.  No.  840.     Calc.  1894. 

Der  Diwan  des  LeMd.  Nach  einer  Handschrift  zum  ersten  Male 
herausgegeben  von  Jusvf  Dija-ad-dln  al-Chdlidi.  "Wien  1880. 
Cf.  A,  von  Krenier  in  den  Sitzungsberichten  der  phil.-hist. 
Classe  der  Kais.  Akademie  d.  Wissenschaften  98.  Bd.  2  Heft. 
Wien  1881.  —  Die  Gedichte  des  Lebid.  Nach  der  Wiener 
Ausgabe  iibersetzt  und  mit  Anmerkungen  versehen  aus  dem 
Nachlasse  des  Dr.  A.  Huber  herausgegeben  von  Carl*  BrockeU 
mann.     Leiden  1891. 

Die  Mufaddalijat  (Anthology  of  the  Granmaarian  al-Mtifaddal]  f  about 
170  H.)  Nach  den  Handschriften  herausgegeben  von  Heinrich 
Thorbecke.     Erstes  Heft.     Leipzig   1885. 

*Hamasae  carmina  cum  Tebrisii  scholiis  integris  edidit,  indicibus  in- 
struxit,  versions  latina  et  commentario  illustr.  O.  G.  Freyiag. 
2  vol.  Bonnae  1828—47  (collected  by  Abu  Tammam  f  190,  beg. 
27.  Nov.  805;  at-TabrIzi  Comm.  f  420  H.,  beg.  11.  Aug.  1108). 
Anbther  edition  Bulak  1296.  Cf.  Hamasa  oder  die  altesten 
ai'abischen  Volkslieder,  gesammelt  von  Abu  Temmam,  iibersetzt 
und  erlautert  von  Friedrich  Ruckert.     2  T.     Stuttgart  1846. 

The  Hudsailian  poems  contained  in  the  manuscript  of  Leyden  edited 
in  Arabic  and  translated  with  annotations  by  J.  G.  L.  Kosegarten. 
Vol.  I.  London  1854.  40.  —  Letzter  Theil  der  Lieder  der  Hu- 
dhailiten,  arabisch  und  deutsch:  Skizzen  und  Vorarbeiten  von 
/.  Wellhausen.  1.  Heft.  Berlin  1884.  Comp.  Z.  der  D.  Morgenl. 
GeseJlschaft  39.  pp.  104,   151,  411  ff. 

Die  Gedichte  des  'XJrvca  ibn  Alward.  Von  Th.  Noldeke:  Abhandlungen 
der  Kgl.  Ges.  d.  Wiss.  zu  Gottingen.     Hist.-Phil.  Classe  11. 

Gedichte  und  Fragmente  des  ^Aus  ibn  Eajar,  gesammelt,  herausgegeben 
und  iibersetzt  von  Rudolf  Geyer:  Sitzungsberichte  der  Kais. 
Akadeinie  der  Wissenschaften  in  Wien.  Philos.-hist.  Classe.  Band 
126.     Wien   1892. 

Anis  al-gulasa  fi  diwan  al-Hansa  (The  poetess  al-Hansa  is  said  to 
have  died  A.  H.  24,  beg.  7.  Nov.  644  A.  D.)  Beirut  1888.  — 
Le  diwan  d'al  Hansa'  traduit  par  le  P.  de  Coppier  et  suivi  de 
fragments  inedits  d'Al-Hirniq.     Beyrouth  1889. 


168  Literature  M. 

Ibn  Hisami  (t  762  H.,  beg.  11  Nov.  1360)    Commentarius  in  Carmen 

Ka^bi  ben  Zoheir  Banat  Suad  ed.   Guidi.     Lipsiae  1871.    1874. 
Der  Diwan    des   Garwal  b.   Aus   al-Hutefa  (f  between  68  —  70   H.) 

Bearbeitet   von    Iffnaz    Goldziher:    Zeitschrift    der    D.    Morgenl. 

Gesellschaft   Bd.   46,    8.    1—53;    173—225;   471—527;   Bd.  47, 

S.  43—85;  168—201.   Also  in  a  collected  edition.    Leipzig  1893. 
Diwan  sayyidna  Hassan   ibn  Tdhit  (f  54    H.,   beg.    30.    Aug.  683). 

Tunis   1281. 
Diwan  d'al-Ahfcal,  Texte  arabe  publie  pour  la  premiere  fois  d'apres  le 

manuscrit  de   St.  Petersbourg  et  annote   par  le  P.  A.  Salhani 

S.  J.     Beyrouth  1891. 
Divan  de  Ferazdak  (f  110  H.,  beg.  16.  April  728)  recits  de  Mohammed 

ben-Habib  d'apres  Ibn-el-Arabi  publie  sur  le  manuscrit  de  Sainte- 

Sophie   de  Constantinople   avec  une  traduction  fran^aise  par  B. 

Boucher.     Paris  1870.     4".     (incomplete), 
Magmii'  mustamil  'ala  hams  dawawin  (an-Nabiga,  'Urwa,  Hatim,  'Al- 

karaa  and  Farazdak)  Cairo    1293   cf.    Z.   der  D.   Morgenl.  Ge- 

sellschaft  31,  667  ff.' 
Chalef  elahma7-^s  (died  after  155  H.)  Qasside.    Berichtigter  arabischer 

Text  etc.  von  A.  Ahlivardt.     Greifswald  1859. 
Diwan  al-Buhturt  (f  190  H.,  beg.  27  Nov.  805).    Constantinople  1300. 
Diwan  des  Abu  Nowas  nach  der  Wiener  und  Berliner  Handschrift 

mit  Benutzung  anderer  Handschriften  herausgegeben  von  W.  Ahl- 

icardt.  1.  Die  Weinlieder.  Greifswald  1861.  —  Diwan  Abi  Nuwas. 

Cairo  1277.     (Abio  Nuwas  f  about  195  H.  =  810). 
Diwan  poetae  Abu-'l-Walid  Moslim  ibno-'l-Walid  al-Angari  cognomine 

Qano-l-ghawdni  (Sart    al-gawdni  f  208  H.,  beg.   16.  May  823) 

quern  edidit  M.  de  J,  Goeje.     Lugduni  Bat.  1875.     4". 
Al-anwar  az-zahiya   fi   diwan    Abi'l-'Atahiya    (Abu*l-  Atdhiya  f  221 

H.,  beg.  26.  Dec.  835).     Beirut  1886.     2me  6dit.  1888. 
Diwan  Abl  Tammdm  Habib  ibn  Aus  at-Ta'i  (f  231  H.,  beg.  7.  Sept. 

845).     Cairo  1292.' 
Diwan  amir  al-mu  minin  Ibn-al-Mu  tazz  nl-'Abbasi  (f  296  H.  =  909) 

Cairo  1891.      Cf.  Uber  Leben  und  Werk  des  'Abdallah  ibn  al- 

Mutazz  von   Otto  Loth.     Leipzig   1882. 
Mutanabbii  (al-Mutanabbl  f   354  H.  =  965)  carmina  cum  commen- 

tario  Wahidii  primum  edidit,  indicibus  instruxit,  varias  lectiones 

adnotavit  Fr.  Dieterici.     Berolini  1861.     4^. 
Diwan    Abi   Firds   al-Hamdani    (f    357    beg.   7.  Dec.  967).     Beirut 

1873. 
Abu'l-AW  al-Mdarri  (f  449  H.,  beg.  10  March  1057)  Sakt  ez-zind, 

Poems  with  Commentary.    2  vols.    Bulak  1286  and  1302  (Another 

edition  Beirut  1884).  —  Luziim  ma  la  yalzam.     Bombay  1303. 

40;  Luzumiyat  2  vols.    Cairo  1891.  —  Caroli  Bieu  de  Abul-Alae 


Literature  N.  169 

poetae  arabici  vita  et  camiimbus.  Bonnae  1843.  Cf.  Zeitschrift 
der  D.  Mor^enl.  Gesellschaft  29,  304;  30,  40;  31,  471  ff. 

Yatimat  ad-dahr  fi  suara'  ahl  al-'asr,  Anthology  composed  by  Abu 
Mansui'  'Abd  al-Malik  sX-Tadlibi  (f  429  H.,  beg.  14.  Oct.  1037) 
4  vols.     Damascus   1302. 

Anthologie  arabe  ou  choix  de  poesies  arabes  inedites  traduites  pom- 
la  premiere  fois  en  fran^ais  et  accompagnees  d' observations  critiques 
et  litteraires  par  M.  Grangeret  de  La  Grange.     (Paris)  1828. 

N.   BELLES-LETTRES,  ETHICS,  ROMANCES. 

♦The  Kamil  of  El-Mubarrad  (f  285  H.,  beg.  28.  Jan.  898),  edited 
for  the  German  Oriental  Society  by  W.  Wright.  Part.  1 — 12; 
Leipzig  1864—92.     A   reprint  appeai-ed   in  Cairo  2  vols.  1308. 

al-'Ikd  al-farid,  by  Ibn  'Ahd-rabhihi  al-Andalusi  (f  328  JE.,  beg. 
28.  March  860)  3  vols.     Bulak  1293. 

Kitab  al-Muwassa  of  Abu  't-Tayyib  Muliammed  ibn  Ishaq  al-Wa§§d 
(lived  860—938   A.   D.)   edited  by  B.  Briinnoiv.     Leyden  1886. 

Ibn  Arabschah  (f  854  H.,  beg.  14.  Febr.  1450)  Fructus  imperatorum 
et  jocatio  ingeniosorum  edidit  G.  G.  Freytag.  2.  vol.  Bonnae 
1832.  4".  —  Oriental  editions  with  the  title:  Fakihat  al-hulafa' 
wa-mufakahat  az-zurafa'. 

Makamat  badr  az-zaman  al-Hamaddnl  (al-Hamadani,  the  predecessor 
of  Hariri  died  398  H.,  beg.  17.  Sept.  1007)  with  commentary  by 
Seih  Muhammad  Abdo.  Beirut  1889.  Other  Makamat  of  Hama- 
dani  Constantinople  1298. 

*Les  seances  de  Hariri  (al-Harlri  f  516  H.,  beg.  12.  March  1122), 
avec  un  commentaire  choisi  pao  Silvestre  de  Sacy;  1  6d.  Paris 
1822;  2.  ed.  par  Reinaud  et  /.  Verenbourg.^  2  tom.  Paris 
1847—1853.  —  With  the  Commentary  of  as-Sariid  (f  619  H., 
beg.  15.  Feb.  1222)  2  vols.  Bulak  1284.  —  Makamat  (Vowelled 
text)  2.  Ed.  Beyrouth  1886.  —  The  Assemblies  of  Al-Hariri, 
transl.  &c.  by  Thomas  Chenery.  Vol  I  1867.  —  Do.  Arabic  text 
with  English  notes  &c.  by  F.  Steingass  1895. 

*Kitab  Adab  al-Kdtib  (proply.  an  aid  to  elegant  writing)  composed 
by  Muhamraed  Abdallah  ibn  Muslim  Ibn  Kutaiba  (f  in  the 
2nd.  half  of  the  3rd.  Centy.  of  the  Flight).     Cairo  1 300. 

Kitab  al-matal  as-sa  ir  fi^  'adab  al-katib  was-sa'ir  (Treatise  on  Style) 
by  Ibn  al-Atlr  al-Gazari  (f  637  H.,  beg.  3.  Aug.  1239)  Cairo 
1282. 

Rasail  (Letters)  abi'1-Fadl  badi'  az-zaman  al-Hamaddni  (f  398  H., 
beg.  17.  Sept.  1007).     Constantinople  1298. 

al-Maiddm  (f  518  H.,  beg.  19.  Feb.  1124)  Magma'  al-amtal.  (Collec- 
tion  of  Proverbs).     2  vols.     Bulak  1284.  —  Arabum  proverbia, 


170  Literature  N. 

vocalibus  instruxit,  latine  vertit,  commentario  illustravit  G.  Q. 
Freytag  I,  II,  III  (a    b.),  Bonnae  1838—43. 

fLes  colliers  d'or,  allocutions  morales  de  Zamakhschari  (az-ZamahSari 
t  538  H.,  beg.  16.  July  1143)  texte  arabe  suivi  d'une  traduction 
frangaise  et  d'un  commentaire  philologique  par  C.  Barbier  de 
Meynard.     Paris  1876. 

AWs  hundert  Spriiche  arabisch  und  persisch  paraphrasiert  von  Eeschid- 
eddin  Watwat,  nebst  einem  doppelten  Anhang  arabischer  Spriiche 
herausgegeben,  iibersetzt  und  mit  Anmerkungen  begleitet  von 
H.  L.  Fleischer,  Leipzig  1837.     40. 

Sirag  al-muliik  (Ethics  and  Anecdotes)  composed  by  Abii  Bekr  Mu- 
hammed  at-Tartusl  al-MalikI  (f  520  H. ,  beg.  27.  Jan.  1126). 
Cairo  1289. 

Muhadarat  al- udaba  wa-muhawarat  as-§u'ara'  wal-bulaga ,  a  species 
of  Ethics  with  Anecdotes  by  ar-Ragib  al-Isfahdnl  (f  in  the 
beginning  of  the  6*1^  centy.  of  the  Flight).    2  vols.    Cairo  1287.  40. 

al-Mustatraf  fl  kull  fann  al-mustazraf,  a  species  of  anthological  En- 
cyclopaedia compiled  by  Ahmad  al-IbUhi  (lived  about  800  H.) 
2  vols.     Cai,ro  1304.  1307. 

Siret 'An^ar  ibn  Saddad,  32  vols.  Cairo  1286.  1307.  (another  recension 
10  vols.  Beirut  1871).  Cf.  Antar,  a  Bedoueen  romance.  Trans- 
lated from  Arabic  by  T.  Hamilton.    Part.  I,  i — iv.    London  1820. 

Alf  laila  wa-laila.  Tausend  und  eine  Nacht  arabisch.  Nach  einer 
Handschrift  aus  Tunis  herausg.  von  Maximilian  Eabicht  I — VIII; 
fortges.  von  E.  L.  Fleischer  IX— XII  vol.  Breslau  1825—43. 
(This  edition  is  not  suitable  for  beginners  in  Arabic,  as  the 
language  is  in  many  parts  strongly  influenced  by  the  vulgar 
tongue).  —  The  Alif  Laila  or  book  of  the  thousand  nights  and 
one  night,  published  from  an  Egyptian  Ms.  by  W.  H.  Macnaghten. 
4  vols.  Calcutta  1839—42.  —  4  vols.  Bulak  1279.  —  Original 
in  expurgated  edition.  Beyrout  1888 — 90.  —  Following  the 
earlier  Bulak  edition:  The  thousand  and  one  nights  commonly 
called,  in  England,  The  Arabian  nights'  entertainments.  Trans- 
lated by  W.  Lane.  3  vol.  London.  1  ed.  1841.  Other  editions 
by  Edw.  Stanley  Poole  (the  last  1882). 


PART  n. 

PARADIGMS,  CHRESTOMATHY 

AND 

GLOSSARY. 


Socin,  Arabic  Grammar.' 


PARADIGMATA. 


TABULA 

I. 

Suffixa  et  Praefixa 

in  ilexione 

verbi  adhibita. 

Persona 

Numems 

Perfectum 

Imperfectum 

3.  masc. 

sing. 

;(i) 

3.  fern. 

n 

0        ^ 

s-  a-) 

2.  masc. 

» 

^_ 

S  (i) 

2.  fern. 

n 

^— 

(^_)  ^_  i-  (i) 

> 

*    * 

1. 

n 

—  t  (1) 

3.  masc. 

dual. 

1 ' 

(1^)  ^ji_s(;.) 

3.  fern. 

n 

iV 

(I')    Jl^5(i') 

2. 

n 

a- 

(1^)  ^l_  5  (i) 

3.  masc. 

plur. 

l^-L 

(1,^)  ^,JL  S  (i) 

3.  fern. 

« 

u— 

u-  '^  (i) 

2.  masc. 

n 

^- 

(l-L)  ;^,-L:(i-) 

2.  fem. 

n 

;,-^-(^-) 

1. 

n 

LS_ 

—  i  d) 

AT 


4* 


Paradigmata. 


^^% 


t 


a 

fee 


CO 

0. 


a 

> 
•i-i 


p. 
o 
o 
o 

P4 


o 

a  w 


d  ;t  d  =4  =4 


:v^  :^  ^^3 


^4.  ^4 


:|  %  4 


!4  i^  i|  i|  i^ 


Paradigmata. 


;3 


•1-1 


r  i- 


3v  ,ry>-^.-0  ^-^ 


^.V     ^;3      \  ;3       ^.D-      VD*     \*3      ^ ;' 
o  :ol      o  :o(       o  :«       o  :o(       o  :o(       «  :g(       o  :< 

7^  ^^  ^7^  f:i,  °i^  -J, " 


^1  :^  ^5  1  "4  "i  i  "^ 


;|  -:|  ^,3  ;|,44-4 

3n     3s     3^,  V  5     ^^    ^  3     '^ 


;3  ;i3  :3  .4  :j3  ,'i3  ^3  J 

r3                                '^ 

.  masc. 
.  fern. 

.  masc. 
.  fem. 
.  masc. 
.  fem. 

CO 


Paradigmata. 


TABULA  III. 

Paradigma  flexionis 


Passivi  I  verbi  sani 

Persona 

Nume- 
rus 

Perfec- 
turn 

Imperfectum 

Indicativus 

Subjunc- 
tivus 

Apocopat. 

3.  masc. 

sing. 

J^- 

J^xib 

3.  fern. 

>5 

0     -j-     ' 

JjCiu 

C  ^  0   J 

2.  masc. 

n 

JjCiiJt 

o  ^  0  > 

2.  fern. 

n 

0       > 

J^^^-> 

1  .".."i.' 

1. 

n 

'  r..!. 

3.  masc. 

dual. 

IxH 

.i^ 

3.  fern. 

n 

Lxlxi 

-    ^0    > 

2. 

J7 

>   0       J 

^Lxiij) 

^  ^  ft  > 

3.  masc. 

plur. 

1^- 

'  -"> 

3.  fern. 

51 

-  f.:.^ 
,j«*^^ 

2.  masc. 

« 

>  CI         > 

2.  fern. 

n 

,jiixi' 

^  f.-:.^/. 
^^^j 

1. 

V) 

^0       ' 

LULxi- 

^^0  > 

0    ^0> 

Paradigmata. 


S 


CO 

u 


y-'i   V%    \12    :^ 


xn  .  en 

^J                 OQ  ■♦^  CO 

c;)          cS  O  c3 

^         (X,  -<  P-( 


QQ 


8* 


Paradigmata. 


■I 

i  -^ 

B 


^:o|       i  i4\     N:o(       \:o|      ^3  ;■? 


^4  :^  :^  4  :t  4  i|  a 


^4D       r:3^      ^-p^    A:^      -^^-K    r:^^      ^^^     '' '"^ 

^^   .A^   °^  „i3^    ^-^   ^i3.  ^i2      S 


'^' 


^  »A 


\-A      3  .X\     o-A'     jr3v     \-A     «  :■?      3  ;^  ^^ 

^     -^        ^     »^        ^     .^     «^     ^,J^: 


cK 


o 


o 

P-l 


a 

O 

a. 


V4 

Ph 


Paradigiiata. 


1^ 


a 


-■^  -4  4'  "'-^ 


^  :.? 


^-6   -A   *-S  crA     -6   --6  '■•^A  «=< 


\:o|       \  :-<       \:cl       \  O       -^  :c<        xX        \  ;5       \  :ci 

^-S    :i3,    -^  ,,D^    ^^   ;j3^  ,:j2,  '••'-i 


,^ 

?- 

> 

'T3 

c 

R 

c 

ra 

c 

R 

r 

o 

CD 

<JJ 

- 

a 

1» 

J3 

S 

a 

CO 

:3 

:3 

0) 

'-+3 

f~i . 

:3 

P^ 

t> 

.*^ 

Oi^ 

c3 

-*j 

«+iH 

--H 

o 

!^ 

O 

o 

u 

O 

03 

cS 

^ 

o 

C3 

O 

5= 

C« 

CLh 

CiH 

^ 

l-H 

Ph 

\—» 

10' 


Paradigmata. 


TABULA  VI. 

Paradigma  flexionis 

Activi  I  verbi  mediae  geminatae 


Persona 


Nume- 

Perfec- 

rus 

tum 

sing. 

0    C^ 

v 

^y. 

« 

^)yi 

n 

^;? 

J  0^^ 

« 

■^)f 

dual. 

9 

r) 

by- 

n 

plur. 

'y 

n 

Cy/ 

n 

o    '«„ 

n 

c^*;;* 

T) 

^y 

Imperfectum 


Indica- 
tivus 


Subjunc- 
tivus 


Apocopatus 


3.  masc. 
3.  fern. 
2.  masc. 

2.  fern. 
1. 

3.  masc, 
3.  fern. 
2. 

3.  masc. 
3.  fern. 
2.  masc. 
2.  fem. 
1. 


,=  .- 

«  »- 
7^ 


05     ^ 

y¥ 
7^ 


d    - 


c    '    o    "- 


Paradigmata. 


ir 


TABULA  Vn. 

Paradigma  flexionis 

Passivi  I  yerbi  mediae  geminatae 


Persona 


Nume- 
rus 


Perfec- 
tum 


Imperfectum 


Indicati- 
vns 


Subjunc- 
tivus 


Apocopatus 


3.  masc. 
3.  fern. 
2.  masc. 

2.  fem. 
1. 

3.  masc. 
3.  fem. 
2. 

3.  masc. 
3.  fem. 
2.  masc. 
2.  fem. 
1- 


sing. 

a' 

f 

» 

«  a' 

n 

^    0      ' 

n 

^)f 

V 

-;/ 

dual. 

9 

n 

^ 

" 

piur. 

'y 

n 

-0      ' 

«       « 

V 

7^- 
1°'' 

i       7^ 


'•I 

1^ 


7^ 


S5- J     0^«> 

f)7^ 

'/^ 

,«-'■' 
7^;7^ 


12' 


Paeadigmata. 


> 

'^       oi       ^1       oi       '^  \       «■        ol       =^ 

s 

0^ 

^til!%iii\viii;| 

© 

1— 1 
> 

CO 

s 

P 

3ULA  VllI 

mediae 

1—4 

¥\—       -^  'J*    \i\—       -  o     •A— ~.      •v  n:      •»  9         -—Oil 

Si 

a? 

M 

0 

'a- 

s 

•^               P               «=                R            -^               P                «               K 

^     a     .     „    ^     £     a 

S      1      1      .2       S      1      .2       § 

5     ^      11     3     5     ^     .2^     .^ 
o       >::       So       o       t^       «      .t^ 

^    §.    ^  -^    ^    s.  -^   ^ 

,^     a     a     ^^     ^^     a     ««     fl 

Paradigmata. 


13' 


TABULA  IX. 

Paradi^ma  formarum  selectanim  flexionis 

verborum  hamzatorum 


Verbi  pr. 


Verbi  sec. 


i  verbi  tert. 


I.  Perf.        Act. 

?' 

r*^'  Cis' 

Impf.           » 

.,  .* 

rSi^:JS^ 

Imperat.    « 

r^i4^. 

Par  tic.       n 

i^- 

Perf.      Pass. 

rJ 

Imp  erf.      « 

?^ 

II.  Imperf.   Act. 

'•«' 
7^^ 

Infin.          » 

7-> 

i^-s^* 

IV.  Perf.       Act. 

;^'" 

Perf.      Pass. 

^''» 

^i 

VIIL  Perf.       Act. 

^1  (ii\) 

;.Ldt 

Imperf.      « 

Perf.      Pass. 

^99    ^  ii 

|42il 

Imperf.      « 

^LiOi 

14* 


Paradigmata. 


TABULA  X. 

Paradigma  flexionis  verborum 

primae  radicalis  .  et  ^ 


Verbi  pr.  5 
Imperf.  i 

Verbi  pr.  ^ 
Imperf.  a 

Verbi  pr.  ^  sani 

Verbi  pr. 
i5 

I.  Perf.        Act. 

J^5 

e'^ 

C"^ 

wmO 

Imperf.     « 

Imperat.   « 

a 

e 

(Jil,  J^jl) 

>^] 

Imperf.  Pass. 

J-^^ 

9^9 

Infinit. 

0  0          ^^  ^ 

6    ^ 

G  0  ^ 

•    7^ 

IV.  Perf.        Act. 

^,1 

Imperf.     n 

5 

>     > 

Partic.       » 

JLoy> 

£i?^ 

0     > 

Infinit. 

jlTn.l 

|''^l 

t^l 

;^! 

mi,  Perf.       Act. 

J«^'f 

^JJl 

cs 

Imperf.      » 

r! 

Perf.      Pass. 

j-^i 

£tXjl 

pri^^ 

>3i 

X.  Perf.        Act. 

ft 

^j 

Infinit. 

6.  -         «  . 

?l                -"1 

^1    -     -."t 

Paradigmata. 


15^ 


TABULA  XI. 

Paradigma  ilexionis 

Activi  I  yerbi  mediae  radicalis 


Persona 

Nume- 
rus 

Perfec- 
tum 

Imperfednm 

Impera- 

Indicati-  i  Subjunc- 

Apocopa- 

tivus 

vus             tivus 

tus 

3.  masc. 

sing. 

Jii 

7       9  ^ 

J^l 

3.  fern. 

n 

^'li 

9      f^ 

0  >  -» 

2.  masc. 

n 

oJU 

0   >- 

:^ 

2.  fem. 

n 

0  > 

U^^' 

4y^i 

iyo* 

iy 

1. 

n 

'     1" 

0    >^ 

3.  masc. 

dual. 

:5(U 

U^^. 

^^.! 

^,k^. 

3.  fem. 

n 

UJU- 

a^>^- 

i(^- 

i^- 

2. 

n 

c)^^- 

V^ 

V 

3.  masc. 

plur. 

yu- 

1                     1 

y^ 

3.  fem. 

« 

0  9^1              "   '^    \ 

.- 

2.  masc. 

n 

9  0  9 

U3^^ 

y^ 

>       9 

2.  fem. 

n 

iii;- 

^ 

1. 

n 

Jy6 

1  • '  ' 

0     >^ 

16* 


Paradigmata. 


TABULA  XII. 

Paradi^ma  flexionis 


Activi  I  verbi  mediae  radical] 

s^ 

Persona 

Nume- 
rus 

Perfec- 
tum 

Imperfectum 

Impera- 

Indicati-     Subjunc- 
vns             tivus 

Apocopa- 
tus 

tivns 

3.  masc. 

sing. 

\Lw 

vAamO 

0     ^ 

7^. 

3.  fern. 

« 

IOnLu; 

9 

^ 

"^ 

2.  masc. 

« 

--    0 

9             ^ 

>^ 

„>; 

0 
7- 

2.  fern. 
1. 

n 

0 
J    0 

157*^' 

^^^^* 

Y**'' 

c5/Vt;^ 

3.  masc. 

dual. 

iji: 

J'^. 

Laju*.J 

|*JUaO 

3.  fem. 
2. 

» 

1;- 

3.  masc. 

plur. 

i,;u 

tJ^T*^ 

'j^. 

1    ' 

3.  fem. 

« 

.-0    ^ 

2.  masc. 
2.  fem. 

55 

n 

9             " 

—  *    — 

—  0      " 

iIj7" 

1. 

jj 

Uww/ 

>   - 

;-^ 

0 
r^ 

Paradigmata. 


17' 


TABULA  XIII. 

Paradigma  flexionis 

Passivi  I  verbi  mediae  radicalis  .  vel 


Persona 


Nume- 
rus 


Perfec- 
tum 


Imperfectum 


Indicativus 


Subjunc- 
tivus 


Apocopa- 

tus 


sing. 


dual. 


3.  masc. 
3.  fern. 
2.  masc. 

2.  fern. 
1. 

3.  masc. 
3.  fern. 
2. 

3.  masc. 
3.  fern. 
2.  masc, 
2.  fem. 

1.  j     »         LLU 

S  o  c  i  n ,   Arabic  Gramiuar.* 


plur. 


^^. 


^-» 


JUi- 
JUI 


Jl4 
Jlii- 
JUi- 

juf 

yiii- 


Jlii 


JUu 
B 


4Ui- 
■>,* 
j^-i 

'  I"' 
lyiis 

Jjij 


18' 


Paradigmata. 


X 


X 


a; 

<  © 


u 
en 

2 

S 

■S 

u 


a> 

M    a 


:J  -J  ^1  :4  \1  ^^•3  rJ  -.1  %j 
^=D  ^*^  .a=r^  ..J-  ^4  -A  .A  i^ 


v;3 


^    «-D     cr=5 


s 


;i3 


v«J     — Dl     ^    «-0^    '-i     "-0    ^'-O    ,-)=^ 


-■i   -4    ^  „J;   v4  -=D  «4  <.-!^ 


J 


J 

v^ 


,:^>  !]V)'    ..A     ,J      M;  -5  ^^    vl 


n  ''I  '^  'i  4=  '^'  -'i  - 


-a1 


o 

O) 

© 


^        5r!        2 

&.  &^         1h 


Ph 


o 

o 
Ph 


►S        Ph 


P 

P 


Paradigmata. 


19^ 


TABULA  XV, 

Paradigma  llexionis 

Activi  I  verbi  ultimae  .  Jjti 


Persona 


Nume-j  Perfec- 
rus    i      turn 


Imperfectum 


Indica-     Subjunc- 
tivus  tivus 


Apoco- 
patus 


Imyera- 

tivus 


3.  masc. 
3.  fern. 
2.  masc. 

2.  fern. 
1. 

3.  masc. 
3.  fem. 
2. 

3.  masc. 
3.  fem. 
2.  masc. 
2.  fem. 
1. 


sing. 


9 


5>^i  ;>^ 


dual. 


plur. 


JO" 


if" 


'•I 


eti 


.Uj  I     I, 


U^>*^' 


♦  «V*J 


B* 


U^>*^' 


>  o  » 


,    0> 


u^T' 


C.I 


20* 

Paradigmata 

TABULA  XVI. 

Paradigma  flexionis 

Activi  I  verbi  ultimae  ^  J^ii 

Nume- 
rus 

Perfec- 
tum 

Imperfectum 

T...  „ ,  —  _ 

Persona 

Indica- 
tivus 

Subjunc- 
tivus 

Apoco- 
patus 

Imptra- 
tivus 

3.  masc. 

sing. 

^) 

0^ 

'?: 

3.  fern. 

« 

0     -'^ 

^? 

c^' 

2.  masc. 

ii 

0  ^ 

>55/ 

0  ^ 

61 

2.  fern. 

n 

0  ^^ 

0  ^ 

0  ^ 

0   ^ 

J)\ 

1. 

" 

9    0^^ 

4 

'4. 

pi 

3.  masc. 

dual. 

LLok 

o^'f- 

'-i^yi 

LLojj 

3.  fem. 

n 

lii^ 

J^f 

^^T^ 

1-  ".-: 

2. 

n 

1 "  .'.*'-'- 

1'  "•• 

LLojj' 

^>' 

^;j 

3.  masc. 

plur. 

'P; 

-      9  o  ^ 

1^^ 

3.  fem. 

55 

G^^; 

U^_^ 

^j^}^ 

2.  masc. 

n 

5  0^^ 

^       ?  0  ^ 

1  '"' 

1  '"'• 

'r^;i 

2.  fem. 

n 

03     >   0^^ 

o^p"' 

>I^*?r'■ 

'^f 

^;j 

1. 

n 

1  r"-- 

*5^^ 

-       0- 

\   ii' 

Paradigmata. 


21* 


TABULA  XVII. 

Paradigma  flexionis 

Activi  I  verbi  ultimae  .  vel  ^  Jjii 


Nume- 
rus 

Perfec- 
turn 

Imperfectum 

Persona 

Indica- 
tivus 

Subjunc- 
tivus 

Apocopa- 

tU8 

Impera' 
tivus 

3.  masc. 
3.  fern. 
2.  masc. 

2.  fern. 
1. 

3.  masc. 
3.  fern. 
2. 

3.  masc. 
3.  fem. 
2.  masc. 
2.  fem. 
1. 

sing. 

n 

n 
n 

dual. 

n 
n 

plur. 

« 

n 

V 

n 

•  -    - 

9               - 

a  J 

1'-."- 

—  0    —  0  — 

—  0    —   0   " 
^     0   —    0^ 

1                      —    0  " 

,   -   -0- 
,    -   -0  ' 

Lcoo 

,0-0- 

-  0    -  0- 

—  0   ,-    0  -^ 

—  0  — 
0^0^ 

-     0   -  0  ^ 
,0^0-* 

22^ 


Paradigmata. 


CO 


> 

> 

> 

ad       x-c         j.^,     ,:^        j.^^     \:rf       ^  :Q      ,  :c 

'•s^  °.2^  5c^  '■€  "-f  \h  'h  ^-f ' 

-0 

t 

> 

^^^»^|-D.-^.:^^^j^i^ 

> 

;jkv.^i^^:^..7-Vv|iii^ 

Perfectum     Activi 
Imperfectum     » 
Imperativus      « 
Participium       « 
Perfectum    Passivi 
Imperfectum     w 
Participium       » 
Infinitivus          « 

Paradigmata. 


23* 


^j,  !B  ^'  ;i3  f^  ^=ii;§^  i;i  'B 


\^\ 


*-+3 

'oQ 

o 

09 

<1 

a 

a 

o 

«2 

CO 

P 

•  »-< 

a 

c3 

a 

;3 

a 

o 

a 

.2 

CD 

> 

o 

Ut 

U 

O 

o 

^ 

o 

c2i 

a 

S3 

a 

a 

c3 
P-l 

o 

a 

C8 

t— ; 

24* 


Paradigmata. 


TABULA  XVIII. 

Paradigma  flexionis 


Passivi  I  verb 

I  ultimae  ^ 

vel  ^ 

Nume- 
rus 

Perfec- 
tum 

Imperfectum 

Persona 

Indicativus 

Subjunc- 
tivus 

Apocopa- 

tus 

3.  masc. 

sing. 

'^ 

^    "  9 

3.  fern. 

V 

"  "   .1 

^    "  9 

ijdJu 

2.  masc. 

r» 

—     0  > 

^  O  9 

^     "9 

2.  fern. 

« 

> 

^    0       -0   > 

0    -^   «-  > 

9                .' 

^ci 

oi 

1. 

5) 

^^•1 

C5^-| 

(ja-»! 

3.  masc. 

dual. 

LLai 

1-    -    **' 

Ludib 

3.  fem. 

" 

LxLt^' 

^  ^ " ' 

2. 

n 

1-.'.    ..'. 

^   ^  o  9 

1  -  -.  ?..'. 

1  -•'*' ' 

U.OJL> 

3.  masc. 

plur. 

^     0    ^^  9 

,0      ^''J 

.0    -    *    ' 

3.  fem. 

« 

^^' 

^      0     -     Oj 

^      0    ^    6    > 

^     0     ^    ^    J 

2.  masc. 

11 

c  ..            •   •• 

^    0     ^     *    > 

,"  -.  f.' 

2.  fem. 

n 

^    0    -  *■  ' 

1. 

n 

^               9 

^(1    9 

1       -^' 

Paradigmata. 


25^ 


TABULA  XX. 

Paradigma  flexionis  nominis 

a)  generis  masculini 


a)  triptoti 

indeterminati 

determinati 
cum  articulo 

determinati  in 
statu  construct 

Sing.  Norn. 

(oL^* 

'  («^LoJ» 

Gen. 

1  "^  " 

6  ^o^ 

> 

1  fi  " 

Ace. 

GLas 

oLoi* 

Dual.  Nom. 

^GLli- 

jjULoiUl 

ULls 

Gen.-Acc. 

"-1  = :. 

""1  -'.?r 

0    --,       S^ 

Plur.  Nom. 

U^'^* 

^^L^i 

•.fLoj' 

Gen.-Acc. 

^^^ 

-    1  ''••?r 

^Lli* 

P)  diptoti 

Sing.  Nom. 

F 

ji3i 

F 

Gen. 

>^'" 

^i3f 

7^' 

Ace. 

^^i" 

;^r 

F 

Dual. Nom. 

u'}^*" 

^i^^T 

'7^[ 

Gen.  Ace. 

c^^>^:^i 

(57^' 

26* 

Pabadigmata. 

indeterminati 

determinati 
cum  articulo 

determinati  in 
statu  constructc 

Plur.  Norn. 

U^T^^' 

.F 

Gen. 

Ace. 

uij^' 

^^Ift 

^^T 

TABULA  XXI. 

b)  generis 

feminini 

a)  triptoti 

Sing.  Nom. 

kl'lf 

xiLl 

Gen. 

X^H 

o 

xiLlJI 

'is^S*^ 

Ace. 

^LcLl 

xiLlJI 

k^Ll 

Dual.  Nom. 

^jLc^Law 

^JL^LIJ| 

La^LIw 

Gen.- 

Ace. 

'"''1  "  iT 

^iUv 

Plur.  Nom. 

v:^L&Ll 

4ULlJt 

v:yLilIw 

Gen.- 

Ace. 

^LiLlJI 

v^LcLl 

P)  dipfofi 

Sing.  Nom. 

2Lyo 

ceterum  idem 

Gen. 

Ace. 

^ 

Paeadigmata.  27* 

TABULA  XXn. 

a)  generis  masculini  in desinentis. 

.    -  ^  ^.     determinati       determinati  in 

indeterminati  .     ,  ,       ^ 

cum  articulo    statu  constructo 


Sing.  Nom.-Gen.         ^U* 

^UJI 

^^• 

Ace.                  Ll^Li* 

^Uji 

'^"^ 

Dual.  Norn.            ,jLLo^' 

LLoli 

Gen. -Ace.    ^jaavsU* 

^^^liJl 

0    "         l" 

Pliir.  Nom.              M^^* 

^^lUi 

Gen. -Ace.      ^^^pli 

^liJi 

V5^^- 

b)  nominis  in  ^— ,  !—  desinentis. 

a)  triptoti 

Sing.  Nom.-      ]         Tr  «  '         tt  "'Ir  ^T  •   ' 

Gen.-Acc.)      ^5*^*^      cs^^*-^'  i5*^»-^ 

Dual. Nom.            ^jLAph,>o,/c  ■jLgh,o»,!|  LABh,vi;o 

Gen.-Acc.  ^jju^oh^^    v^j^o^^t ^^  ^xftia-ojo 

Plur.  Nom.             ^^iLjk^    ^^oh^^.M  ^Ik^ 

Gen.-Acc.     ^^gh^n^    ^^d[i,^4..fl  q^^^ 


28*  Paradigmata. 

.     ,.     determinati       determinati  in 
mdeterminati  ^.     .       ,   ,  .       . 

cum  articulo    statu  constructo 

Sing.Nom.-      |         Lik  U^|  Li^ 

Gen.-Acc.J 

Dual.Nom.  ij^T^       ^II-ojJI  I^-ox 

P)  diptoti 

Sing.Nom.-      1  -^.  -^^  r,  -3^. 

id.  Llit>  UJtXJi  v^<> 

TABULA  XXIII. 

Paradigma  nominis  cum  suffixis. 

a)  nominis  masc.  in  singulari  positi  loLIai*;  fem.  ibxLi.. 
cum  suffixo  1.  pers.  sing.  (C?^^  ^®™^*  cs^)    • 

»  »        2.      r        ?)     masc.     dLjUai* 

n  »        2.      n        n     fem.       dbUki* 

fl  I)        3.     n        »     masc.     2oLai>  (gen.  xjLoi*) 

»  »        3.      57        »     fem.     L^Uoi* 

T)  n        2.      M     dualis  UJoLoi? 

»  «        3.      »        w  Li.^lAai*(gen.  Li^L.oi*) 

n  »        1.     n  pluralis  LLLai' 

»  «        2.      55        »     msc.     IJoLoJ* 

n  55        2.      55        55     fem.    ^jGlAai* 

»  55        3.      55        T)     msc.     i;  I?  4  J-tV  (gen.  l.^Loi*) 

»  »        3.      51        5»      fem.   ^^Lai*  (gen.^.^l.Aai*) 


OF  THK 


Paradigmata.  i      "*  -^  ^JgRSITY" 


b)  nominis  in  duali  posih. 

Nominativus  cum  suffixo  l.pers.  sing.  ^^LSLki* 

t)  n  r      2.    w        «    msc.  dLSLLi  etc. 

Gen.-Acc.        »         «      1.    r        -  ^Lai* 

n  n  »        2.     n  n      mSC.     dLoLoJ) 

n  »  n        3.     n  »  »  2UjLi^' 

w  n  w      3.    n        n     fem.  LijoLfliJ  etc. 

c)  nominis  masculini  in  plurali  positi. 
Nominativus  cum  suffixo  1.  pers.  sing.  (C^*-^* 

n  n  n         2.      n  n       mSC.     cJoL^'etC. 

Gen.-Acc.         w  «      1.    n        »  .-jLo-s 

n  »  n         2.      n  J)      mSC.     viJLoLoJ* 

w  '.)  r      3.    «        w     msc     auoLoj 

j>  n  n      3.    »        r     fem.   L^AjUaJ*  etc 

d)  nominis  feminini  in  plurali  positi. 
Nom.-Gen.-Acc  cum  suff.  1.  pers.  sing.         ^'liLl 
Nominativus    n  »      2.    «        »     msc.   db'LiCw 

«  »  >j         3.      n  M         n  aG'LcLyw  CtC. 

Gen.-Acc         »  »      2.    n        »      »       s^JbLcLl 

>)  n  n        3.      w  »        n  XjLtLw  etC 


EXERCISES  AND  TEXTS. 

I. 

A.   EXERCISES  IX  READING. 

\^Xh».    Ja.l2.a».    j.Sk\    I«jXawI    tj'^^    v,_/JLfr    L^:?)-*    '«*-^^ 

U^)^    filj  ^^   oLb   li)«-Xjww    iUwCio   ,joLo  ^>^*    ^y^  J^-^^-J 

SbL^P   vilii^j    (j^^iij)    sLcw  i^^Ji?*  -,.^t>  u^LIa^^ 
2.  3.  s-.!^    u't^    ^->'^^.    (•t^  )yi^  f}^   Vt**^   <-^^* 

UoJ     5Vy^     0•*-»i^X)    J^wJ.     ^aOs     iU^     ^yy      JC}yiJ     2SJI..KXS 
o ,-  ^       f^    ^  o-       »     '  I   *         f  f  '  G  J  <  -  o    5     I     ^    -  J      ^       '.".*" 


>  O^      I   -   T    ? 


^  ^♦jJww  lyuAw  /*i5yj'  f*^"^  Lj.tXi*' 

^    i^^  0^>o    ItXo   ^Lfca-    Jolp  ^k? 


Exercises  in  reading.  31* 


L.».<^j>      «^jwwJ!     isJiiJI     ^.^^.AamO     aI    ^«X4JI     <o^^v^>  5. 


O-^        J        ^     Ci     ^       9  w  >o-- 


7«.--jo^     's"^     ^       a"*'-'     J""" 


O^O-O  Jj-        a**  ^^  ^     ^  ^(fC      ■£■       f  f  9  ^«">o 

_^       a  _^    o-o^ 

U4>^  iU^^  c5t>Jfi  Sc>Uo  JJ"  1*-^]^  <J-^^  e^-V^*^^  ^-  ^• 

(V^-oU    ,j-»^yi    v^!^A*J!     ^oJ^     '^ya^     ^     (5r^ 
^.^    lyLUS-l    ii-U^*    ^^t^    xXS^^I    J^AA*/|    (c-^AAj] 


32  Exercises  and  texts. 

B.   EXERCISES  ON  THE  ETYMOLOGY. 

16-29.  ^^jA-o^     ^T**""*    ij-^^     U7^^    V)^    V'^'^^l  r^ 

J^    /*^-^i    v-^^J^I    tX^oLw    (3JJajt^    «:pJa^|  ^^s^Xw!^ 

c^Ajl  ^^^«^Jo  /^^y^  J»^*A^!  Jy^y^*  ^"^^^  r*^^  J^^ 

^   Jyi\   iwJvia^l  yo^  /p^^^  Vt^*  J"^ 
30-33.  ft^y^  *JtXJiJ>»^  j^^www^^*.!  >wA^>->  v.:>iS»»wi:».!  LM-Xi*.  loyj^ 

L5x;>!  ^\jLsd^^^  ^bJiX^i  d^^  J^^-^  /P^l  ^y*-^pt  0)r 

Cyw^Js!       ,^'^-^AJ        j^'wO        (^JjlHI        jvA>JO        }y^.£^yJl      yJi^'J 

OUCi^Xaj  ci^wAA^ift.!  ^w^.A/Xo  v^>JL)  ^^^^J  v«^>L.SX/J 
v::a<Lwu>..^  !».aaJ!^  LijtAAi/oj  ^i2J.Av.J)  |V^v^  ucXaamI  p-'y^. 
L^5o    LwAa.^1^  l.tXLlo    ^jAj    Ucryi    I^Aw«J|   ^^4.X.tt 

.    Nvi*-   i^^-^**^   iXJ'vJ   y«y^*0    ^^^AJ    UiA.AA.^1    ^^«.».^,?    Ljt>Js 

{•kA^!  (jSy*^.   '^7^   (jdiiAj   i^Aiyj*   |VA4.^J&  ^viiJ   c:aaaaa«j 

^       4>tX.O.J*      yAXM^      t:yOjwW      *.^      Jo^ 


34-36    ^^ 


Exercises  on  the  etymology.  33* 

LaaJLXjI^  j-^ .J  jj*i4>uLwwO  <X^\J6  ^jMoJS  }^yjo  (>J  U  37-38 

,j».gJ5».«J       CP^.      ^-*4^       '^^        i^-'^^      ^T^^'       ft^\yX^ 

(^^^.A*AA^*    !«xU     *j|    rvJ^Jb    wO   UwCi!    *jij   ^^ijyi^  41-44. 

!«»Lo!     yjJt^,     ^^    ^^-fi^     Sr*-*     U^T^^    5^-^'^^V.    ^^>^^J 

sLg-o      Ljl^I      OC^.jJ       j^ltXjO      JjJ      Ujxikt      L»A.fta> 

j-       'o        o-  >^    ^ o   JO  s^         •''iT?      '^'      "  °  "        ""I"''* 

dLj'     LU^     |W     1*^LoJo      (V^'rt^      O^JJ^f      i>^AXywO      lC.>sL^j 

!^^»-fr    ;^(>JLo    o^AAJ     {JOjo\    o^tXi    o^x-wu/jI    ^c4^.  45-48. 

^>xo    jj^-*^^    y^yL^y    y^yKJM}    y^jX^y    ^^aaj    (^^^.aaju 
^    v:>Ji>    ^:i^»^*.j    [VA*o    ^<»^^1  Sr'^'^;    ^^i^;'^'    ^v°;j 

Socin,   Arabic  Grammar.*  C 


60 


34*  Exercises  and  texts. 

49.  jj^jj  Ujc^  cyJij*|  {^y^yri  ^^^^^  <5y^  ^^^^^^  1*^. 

^  "^^^  is^  '^; '  >^'  o-"/ 

53.  S..4JU  ^    4^*^H^.    (*^  ^-*-i^'    (*"§^7^*   '-S-^^^   sLUji^ 

^    U^^^Lb   (j^'tX^   (j^LU-Lb 

-61.  ^L:^x/o  y.«dX^  io%AA^  joXmjo  ^  J^  i\x3yj0  |*(>^.^ 

»%-^Lft^    J<4-^   ^\jjO    «iSVj2-«a/0    >»AXX>    Ji,Lj    >*t^^   ^i/j-^ 

JUjIaamI  oLmaXJJ    P''»"^V^'    'T"^^    [^•^^'    )^^-i-^|.  '^^•-^^^^^^^ 

f^    tXiLa;:/?   ^-A^yii*    J^-^*x> 
^-71.  Jo*./o  V^  VH^^^J  r'         (J^-Ji^  ;ji>f  <i/L\jajf  jvww 
y^y^    iX^vj:^    (j*-*^.!  ^^^    cH '    y^'    Y^-**^    o«Jyo 

G^isj     G,-    ,      G^--    fr"'      2^1  ^"J      T"?"*     ^^i"'  i  "^ 

cXaJOo    ^v.a*oJ^    J^"^^     Lb-yo    ;^A4^    ^^-^i.   vo'7^*    S«XfX> 

Go^  Go^        S         o-       G    o^        ^,.     ,         Q  ,       Q    J-         o  6-- 

^^-^  Of      ^ "      G.-'J      Gs-'j      G       "      G^"  G|^       G         J 

iiLcLbl^  ^>^LaJ    ^^'^    y^^«^    H.^    )^-^^^i  ri^    (HS^*^ 
o«i^      -.yuo      v:>-y>      ;'«^'*-<'      cN-V-^^     r^^T^*      xJuU.%«j 

G  --       G.^^-  9      >         G      /-  0    5        G        o-^  ^l"-."!        ^  "- 


Exercises  on  the  syntax.  35 


jjLc     iXxXjQ    ^^xLft/)     ELUi'l    ^J^^♦^     ^c-*^-^    ^^^     (5^^^ 
^i    t<^)    B^Lft:^    ^vAoJ,   vCtX>o    ^JkJuLwww^    ^^JJ    li]i>\Juo 
^    .tX^    ,5-4^    ^^    CS-S"^^^    ^^^♦^^^    ^5*^*^ 
^^     j^Lw^.^     uU-£    J'*^^     L^^5^    e^W.<^'    ^^^"^  ^^*  ^^' 

iLuAx!   J^J  i>lMJm>   v«ft^P    >^'^'    ^"^  lJ'^   xX^] 

(^^bLw   aL^I    ^bJJl    v.::OsLIfc    v.li>    J^'    J'-S^    s*-^^ 

9  > ''f    s.^o^     G^  5"'    9  *'.     9  ^j       'kw^-'    ®iT  "? 

^j«wJ!    |»Usj!    (J'y^    i^y    f*^    ^>-^*^    viUUjo    sUax>! 

9,.       9*>     s^,     9>     ^«>rr-     ®»r«f     '     r^ 

'      »-  -      l^»^^       ®l^        '      .--        i  ,^  -      9o,  ^^     ff^tTxr  - 

9,  rr^    ^  »    s  ^,  ^ 
C.  EXERCISES  ON  THE  SYNTAX. 


cW    J^l^    4^  JL^pi    ij-^^^    ^^^^   i   iLlJI 


1  §  130.  2  §  99c. 


36  Exercises  axd  texts. 

^  ^jjjojU  ^ItX^l^hJ^   4|e  ^s^Lv^l^  ^1  iLol  ^si 

abx^AJI  ciJyjl  ^  ^LftXj|  oL§^  xLLc  LT^r*^  ^r^'^^'"? 
^jLkJLwiil    (j-«    ^W     <^^l     ^^    ^^iU^     'iyMi^     vi>^" 


diyu  ^^^j   diUJ!    bl    jyw    |W   x-AA^   ^L^-^i 

1  §110.  149.  2  §  136c  2.  3  §124.  4  §  ll3b.  5  §ii8c.  6  §  137 d.-  j 
7  §  121a.  8  §  101b.  9  §  113d.  10  §108.  11  §  126.  12  §  109.  13  §  HO.  ^ 
14  §  92b.   15  §  113a.    16  §141.   i7  §  108.   18  §  ef  2.  i9  §  98ef.  20  §  116. 


Exercises  on  the  syntax.  37* 

^o     ^iiil^     (c^^     ^^'^■=^     7^^     <J^^^^     \'^^^ 

__   55    «o 

ju^^    1;-^    <^^^^^     l5;    <J*«^^     iujVo    Jouju!        1^^  "• 

u-';  ^c5^  ^   ^  r^  7^'^    »7^   (^   ^  ^^ 

G       *     J  *|       '    5*'''    *?  0_^0«O  (I  ^  ,     ^O-O^  y    ^o-<o  ^o  ^ 

^u:=>  dyjt  #  coy t  y*s.  ^  ^is^^  5  ;'^'  oy 
■ixkj\  %  ^U\  |vOi  ^iit  |.Uisi  s^yi  >_^ip; 


1  §  147  a,  148  b  note.       2  §  99  a,    cf.  note    b.      3  §  1 


23, 


38  Exercises  and  texts. 


'  "  f^      -r  5  ''  0^^    > 


?      .  '-  »9' 


i^y   S^    dUi    ^    ^l'''^    ^LS^'  ^J'i    i    ^^i" 

»  §  134.      2  §  152. 


Exercises  on  the  syntax. 


39* 


i^yJu]      ^    ^ajLuo    J^vi!    iU)tXi*    l^^r^'    (•U-J 
Jai^JLi    1,^<vJUJo    jjJjyi^    L^Ui'l    sLa^Jl^    ^^' 

x^l  ^j^  'i^^v^  ^^    J^*^  ^  ^JLfti  »v4.Aj  JuLww 

G.J 

ijMjci^o.  ^u^(>  &Loj'^  aXmmJ!  ^9^  ^^"^I  ^'^LS'  |0^ 

!.-    I-'     "ilC.  ^  *f  it-       '       "At  '"-    CJ  -"x- 

io^Lxx)   jLs    ^   v^^^wxiaJ!^   ^i'^-H^i    ;5y^.  ^    4^   ^r^ 


1  §  131.        2  §  101  a  note.         3  §  152.       4  §  ggd.        5  §  132. 
6  §  144.         7  §  141. 


100. 


40  Exercises  and  texts. 

2U2».L.O-«    '^VS??     >lj-COyi     HwwLjuo    vI^aa:^    ,jI    jjLLo^ 

j^^     ^    ^^^^     ^-i^^     ^^^^     3     vd)JN3     ^     »La-f 
^     ^^t     aL»-fti     8>«oj    J^Y-^i    /^-y^.    ;J^     ^-^^     ^T**'^ 

,j»^^        «JJ!      ^4>       ^        jv5cXO-5^        wAyJL^Jl^      ^-♦ii-f       3 


1  §  151.  2  §  113b.  3  §  157. 


Exercises  on  the  syntax.  41* 

of-     oj-'o-r"^*-      o     oj-^       T- "  '"?■'      " ' -^  **  • 

O  J  o    .   "  '      o  -^ 

Ur   ^M    ^IjJl     ^     ^J-V^pt    ;^l     U     I^Li*  154  ff. 

H      "  ^1     ""^{f      I     -        Of.         O  or.  ,w-  O     J     ^  "    *    - 

,^^o-o  C5^  .,.^-„:f-o'<o       ^  J,   ^o«o         '   o  ^  "  ^1  '' 

ULcpl    Jly'b   xlSlwL  JjL>   (^iXJI    ^LUJ!   Jiio 

;^jJI     i^l^b     iOAJ     ^ia-w      ^j-daj      ^tXJ!     J1A4J 
xj     viLob     Juiii     <^M^     ji.s^Luo     1^1     ]|^     e)^j^ 


42  Exercises  and  texts 


i^a      ^    ^ 


^S-^       i  9  i^^ 


'Of-      CI        o_^ 


158  flF.  (3JtX-o   oiJI  ^aX^uao    ^.    ItX^I.    l^tXfi^    J.AA^i*   ^ 


Exercises  on  the  syntax.  43* 

.....  .  ^^  ^  ..  ^ 

f6|^   &AX4-0   J^LiJLi   pilx^l   J^l    16^    J^y!   JLs 


9^0^^ 


JJJlI!    y-v^^    J'-^    [•La^    J^    4Jf    ^y*^    Vr*^.^ 
l^-^U**^!^    (JilwiJI     jl^    jvXjJo!^    jvXpy:^^    ly^^Li 

(v4^'    cM^    ^^    ^6^^    ^i^i^;    V^^^    4    ^^^^ 


44  Exercises  and  texts. 

y^i^XuM^J^Mj  *        *.A.^^        (.^I«K^I        v.:>JLX£«         ^L^mw-JI        i«jt«.j| 

^     ^4r^^^     ^^^     ij^^     ^"^^    J^tXi*     jjl    (^    viL 

JJCP    (V^A-oly^    (?^^y;    l*-f^y  ^  iJ'-Vti^^'    ^>^ 

^5SS\i  ^\^  Lo  aJJI*.i  v,J-l^yi  (vS't^LL  *j  J^r?.  J'^ 
,^^  xjLb-l^  syb  JLfti  ^iLo  |v5\.a^L  ^^  LLw 
[tXi5  ^5^1^  ;5<^'^^  ^5tX^I  ^jJyij  J'  #  ^W 
jJiJ     J^^     aJuT    iQ     ^llj     ji^^     xiif    tijc^i 


Exercises  ox  the  syntax.  45'' 


^^     ^:i>tX.5u«     xaxjjLw     owajIj.     ^UL.wA^     ooLb     xiLLi*. 
— ..J    d*J    UJ     ^    iU>o    j^^AaJI     ^r'vAJ^    aU^ij    ouol4>« 

"T"  n't  T         "     "'1^1      1  ®  ' "         ^^^ 


'-     «  *:.   J, 


o  '    "  -  "  :;  o 


aLXxAJ'!     jv^^^l    ,j««    v:>J^ML.^Luwl    Ui    (jwUJI   j^    Jol 


,-  o  -r    ^  ^  ^ 


'Jo  ^^  O  -SJ     ,  >   o      ^  o 


^|w£:^l      JjtS?      ;^^.XibX>      (^tX:^       [•^^^      &Lftiil       u4jU 


46*  Exercises  a^d  texts. 

^1      ^;C^       oJUil      ^LX3       L^^l       (JwLu;       ^       ^1< 

i^Lxi     ^4^:^    r-^-*-?     ^y^l    u^-*^    ^^^)     ^'-^ 

^L=>-N    J^    LgjCjLo*i    ^*^.«m:SV^    &J    2L>^L:^  2U:eLs?  S^Lo.J  I 

J^Lc  J^4>  ^  »w&.^l  sU  ,^^  v'^-*^*  ^-^^  LIjjJI 

LyA-UUwuo    SLX:^*i    »-^    iO<j\    ^^s    L-jUaii^!    j^    ^♦xJ 

S     ^Ls     JyCftl      aJ      JLfti      (3^uJl     v.:ijCv     oJ^t> 
^^«o     J^4^     ^io     ^3:?yi'     ^-«4^    *^^^^     viL^lj    (^^yi* 


Exercises  on  the  syntax.  47"^ 

lo     aJU^     ^^)^)     ^^))^    '-'4*^    ^yX^\    {JOJU    JU 


>    ,.-       » 


"--^oJE        J 


*L^^     aLU-2^     (jjw Jou  I     auJI     ^^.-TS^vJ     n-^^3.     xfti^v  I 
JU  \b  UJ  JU  ^t>;!^l  i|  JU  sjuaiwj  ^J  v^lp! 

>>-Laj     Ux     aJlIwI     U^La.     U^.;ys^     Lg-?     (j^      (5^*^ 
^,>^|J|   aJ    JUi    *ljiia-LI    'iyj^^S    Juii*    ^U    ^ci^-^^ 

clJiJ    I6|    JU    1^   Li^    JU   S^Li   viJLllI^  J  J^^ 


48* 


Exercises  and  texts. 
II. 

AEABIC  PROSE  EXTRACTS. 
Li^   LI3^xx)   L^^t>   t—is^   \^\ykl\  p^^U  ^yr-'U 

^1    ^A^tXiJI    vilij   ijjct    jj^  J4>-;   J^-i^*!   <^i  ^'  t4-^ 
^iiJl    L§j|    id    J  Li*    (W    XJ    V^)^    |vl-^    id   ^v^ 

JUi   ltX5&   ^2%^.  ^^  >iU  s^gJc  U^  Ui^A/)  dKI  j^j[ 
jj^^    2Uj<>i.M    » jje   Ui   o-U  UXI   ^1^  DL^tX4Jt   ^ 

^xi      a*   L^KIw.  •L-?>1^  »-*.j(>.xj   »tX^  JLfti  1.^.^5  Uw 


Arabic  prose  extracts.  49* 

LgJuo    v^ii:!    ^^    UlLs^   L^    J^^i    ^«    Li-^^    L^^ 
aXr^  jlijwgJI  L^  j^^JuCiLi   R:$!o!>   N-A-^isI    ^.    x^LLo 


C»o       >^^o-c  ww.-e        ^    ^  ^     \ 


^s.  jLitX^M  Ow.»ajli  J^ljJf  >4^l  c)w>Li^r 
2^,',.^  ^ul^}  ijU  iui  XAJcXiJI  ooLr"!  t^Lix^M 
(XJuo     dU-Lb     ^     ^-^^    oU^  ^^jI    ULfti    id    J^.N. Jo 

Socin,   Arabic  Grammar.-  D 


V 


50  Exercises  aistd  texts. 

^^-  jTi^i  £i>i^  £;yt  ^yi^  u^i^ifi;  j^w 
jja^i  iai-  lylris  |j  ^^1  L^yi^  j/ut  oL^ 

x^    ^^aIJ  jL^tX^il   ^<^!^    (j^-l   dU/j   ^.liUj  iol^l 

ullf    lyti^    ^1    J^;    J^*    J^     U^r^'    \:iOt4.:5^l 

"  ^-  M '       »"   I ' ^  """  "^  *•    I  ""f^    '  '  *  "'^    * r " 


Arabic  prose  extracts.  51* 

X-Ul   J^-w'^   /*-^  U^"T^*   /*^Vt^    5't>ljt4J    5^*    jv^LjC    (c^ 

^Lo"^    StXJLfc   0.3I5'  ^^1    >*^t^yt    '^Y^   ^^vi  v^    H^^ 

ii/eU^  5^y^  oui^-CifLC  Jls.  nULII  oLj  ,J^  l«-Ri^ 
J^-wwN  tr-y^  l*iwOj!.  tX^I  ^LxJ!  !j^  ^^  Lo  ULfti 
^.♦fljo  Jkjj  iu!  (jioJJ  o^i^*^  ^^.<^-^^  vij  L^.Xo  xJJI 
aJJl  J%^;  JLi*  i^i  UjU  iLsL-w  2UloI.  i^v^  i^t 
,jjLj    «-Lii    x^A^^i    fvJ^^'    cy«^LJLs    xijlwww    LLft5^l  [*-g^M 

JLi*    N^-o-Uil     xixiil     y^j^Li    ^Y-^^     jj^    (5^^ 

J^N    ^^    uLL^    v:iA«\jf.    LcoLs*.    •bj>  I    ^^)    ^«ii^M    ^ 

D* 


52  Exercises  and  texts^ 

^aJ  ^IUI^  ^lo^  5tU5  ^!  ^ya^JI  J^  x^  ^*^ 

N^.«aA4J!   xi   JLfti   xaJ|  aij>w.<d^li   SsLd^^Lj   ^w/oU  Rax  I 


?    .  -      -1.   --     .  ^0  - 


vAxI    L>    JLfti    L-A-w    L^-^    [W^*   S^^   L^    L^:^^li    iLyol 
^^^     &3     I^     JU    Rax!    ^-aaJ    ^J^    ooII    (JjOx^I  -^ 
dlAJuLx    Ui    JU    !il     JU    (V^t-?;^     ^^y"^^     d     (^ 


^         —     I 


,  C'O        ?  .        -'^ 


|V-§JUxi|     c^AAJ     ^^     xii;^li     XAi     ^j,A^i-ww»-«JI     !^-«JJi?     Uo 

&Jt>Lfc      XaAJ     RxjUI     J,I      -.^U^i     ,.wAAX)^|    wAxI    Lj   JLfti 

Jf«-cl      wCt      Jl^xl      A-g-i      v.::/jb'     t\i     ^A/ot     ^AJ     ^U 

iUwIs       «is      [V->      JLcLaw       ^*.«C1A4JI       ,W\.JbLi       Jli       j^A^A^4jl. 

I —       ^-    .       "  -      «        "   "  *  iT       "f    I  "     ^     '     I"     "ri"" 
Uo.      (V<Xo      tXi     jll      •^A-Cw.jf     ,^J      Uo      ^-^r)      V.     JvJ*^ 

T..    I*-     -!""     ''fvf*     1"^--     I--        "7       T"      *    " 
J.AS     L^nfr     •.AJtJ     ^j!    jJj^    U.**^     Uc.     ^^c^   ^^y^    V^ 

1^  "1^     ""''Ti''..  "I"      "^  n     i"-'     fi"*'.     '"- 

L>   ^A^L^    |V*i    JLr    ie^La».    -^    ^^    J^    J«    rv-J    &a£ 


Arabic  prose  extracts.  53* 

4    t5*^    (J^     U^^    C5^    (^^-f^"    ^    ^J^^y^^  ;^' 

^  ^j.;  I  u  ^  ill  Ji  Si  ^jJr  Jji^  v^Jt 

j^  5  ^  ^  ^    '  o-c      ''  ^     >        ^    o  — o-*    ^  Ct    ^  ^      ^    ^       ^  jj,  ,o-o  ^ 

^^xa««   »w5^j    (^4-^^   JWi    <X=-i    xjf^    ^w^L^    aGb*  ^'U 
&J    JUii    ScXj    ^^    >tib    ^jf    ,^    Li«^*    ^-^y^    WtX?  ^ 

>«^o.AiJ!     2J    JUi     XA.M     L^i^^t    ;^>-2»>l    O^I  I    au^U. 
j^^»AA/c •-♦.;!   vA/ol   L>  ,^   JLs   cN^yc    ^j..^   v.:>Ajti  Lo  (^^  Uo 

d^^    ^i    dLo^^  xAjUaj    ^   J^-4^   aJLT  Ijoc    ^1 
^A^JI    ItXsi    J.X*^    oolv     L.(0    Jyb    5j5j    wAi".    2CU 


54*  Exercises  and  texts. 

j^lJ^LhA*;*!    X4-bix>     jjD^     «jo!    Jou    ^Juo    ^j^JijI 

5^--         ^      ^—        '''       O^*"*^  >O^0,<j__         >^c.«o       jO^     ^"0-^       f  9     ^     Cj 

&X/0  ^^  xiw*4.JI^  JJiaJI^  aUX^I  i^Lil.  iulia-Lww 
;^f^     s^a5     jj!     ;2i     at^i^i>     ^^     ^•♦^^      U**  -5      ^tX:^    ' 

l^"/^     XJis^Uo     j|    |li;.£^tX^.    ijli!^!/    I^^^L^^'i"    ^^ 

XXlL+^il  viLlj  xJ^rL  l^v^  u^r^^  ^I^f  <i^W  u5*)' 
ZjuS  Li-Li  L^aa:^.  ^^  viULiiJI  v*^.  LixtXi'  fvis-c^ 
sLILi    *^-^     ^^    iiX&Lb    Jl^    S^tX^    L/')^    ^4^    "ii       ' 

4Xa>0.^     U^T^^      viLL/0.      JoLj      (joJ      ^ii     /c^^     rtXAX**;^! 

(j^  ^-f  ;j^  <>^^  u^;*^  u^;'  ^i  ^'-^  i^-'  ^^^' 
^^o   ^!   Jot^   J^Lj   ;ji.^!   jl^  ^^    jvJ   iXA^ii  J^' 


Arabic  prose  extracts.  55* 


jvIa-     5"^^'^      lO^     U^*?:?      ''^♦^      2U-L&     uyJJLwU     JjCal 

aul.^?!      «4-^tr     XJuO     s^'vJ     ^tVJ!     «Jy^^    3     ^4XJL^-u;J)| 
"^-x    c5 ',  -x  r      «  >l  ^  >    >a  --      >     '  c5  ^  -     >     '  ^ -;,^ 

i-fi3'^  |V->  v^5»k>  ^j^    Sr'^?'^^*    «i    ^^5"^^^    5yax:skj    s^jLixi 

^J>     f*-^-^5     (^y*'^    J^  cMi^    eUXil    wCi.Ji/0    Li    JLfti 
tX^i.    J.5^  l»Liii    lh&!i>    xxliJJj    oyjw    R^U^   ij>^ 


56*  Exercises  and  texts. 


!^aJ<>  |»^JI  ,^-^^i  (^4"-^  T-y*"''^  '^•^^v*-^  (•^-^•^^  ^>-^^' 

dLj*U.AJ«    oi^j*    ^    vii.i*«^    ojb'    tXi'    JUii   ^^S    *li'^ 
tXi     ^^y^    ^A,oLi     L-ftA^fcA-5    JJ     ^J*La^    lJ*V    'TT^* 

^SSXjh     ^ji5^     W^^Ow^    vilj'«-o    ^jl^    tXi'    J  Lai    v^i    |»l5j 
'         lAJiiajt.     xj^Xlw.j     ncNjXa^NI     US'*.^     JU"i    ^1    ^Ls^ 


III. 

TEANSLATION  INTO  ARABIC. 

Note.  The  order  of  the  words  in  the  following  sentences 
has  been  adapted,  so  far  as  possible,  to  that  required  by  the 
Arabic  translation.  In  addition,  however,  the  student  must  bear 
especially  in  mind  the  difference  of  order  (§§  135,  139 — 142) 
which  marks  the  cardinal  distinction  between  verbal  and  nominal 
sentences  (§  139  note).  The  square  brackets  enclose  words 
which  in  translation  should  be  omitted,  while  those  in  curved 
brackets  give  the  form  of  the  sentence  required  by  the  Arabic 
idiom.  —  Past  and  perfect  tenses  are  generally  to  be  rendered 
by  the  Arabic  perfect,  present  and  future  tenses  by  the  Arabic 
imperf.  The  extensive  use  of  the  (generic)  article  in  Arabic  is 
to  be  noted.  All  nouns  not  in  the  construct  state  should  have 
the  (definite)  article  prefixed  unless  qualified  in  English  by  an 
indefinite  article.  —  So  far  as  lexical  the  footnotes  to  the  exer- 
cises are  only  Supplementary  to  the  Glossary.  It  is,  for  example, 
only  in  special  or  exceptional  cases  that  "oh"  is  to  be  rendered 
by  l^jj  instead  of  by  U,  and  the  notes  draw  attention  to  such 
cases.  —  The  apology  for  violence  done  to  the  Queen's  English, 
in  the  interests  of  the  learner,  may  be  repeated  from  the  first 
edition,  from  which  the  following  is  in  the  main  reprinted. 


58  Translation  into  Arabic,  a. 


A.    Nominal  Sentences.  ^ 

1.  The  glory  of  the  man  [is]  his  sons,  and  the 
solicitude  of  the  man  [is]  his  dwelling  and  his  neigh- 
bour.— 2.  The  elegance  of  the  man  [lies]  in  his  tongue, 
and  the  elegance  of  the  woman  in  her  understanding. — 
3.  The  liberal  [man  is]  related  to  God. — 4.  The  worst 
(of)  repentance  [is]  at  the  day  2  of  resurrection. — 5.  The 
love  of  the  world  [is]  the  beginning  of  every  sin. — 6.  The 
promise  of  the  king  [is]  a  security. — 7.  The  learned 
[men  are]  the  heirs  of  the  prophets. — 8.  Wisdom  [is] 
for  the  character  3  like  medicine  for  the  body.  3 — 9.  The 
world  [is]  the  prison  of  the  believer  and  the  paradise 
of  the  unbeliever. — 10.  Contentment  [is  a  part]  of^ 
the  nature  3  of  the  domestic  animals. — 11.  The  malady 
of  covetousness  has  no  (not  is  s  for  it  a)  cure;  and  the 
disease  of  ignorance  has  no  (not  is  for  it  a)  physician. — 
12.  The  nutriment  of  the  body^  [is]  (the)  beverages 
and    (the)    viands,   and  the  nutriment   of  the   under- 


§§  139  ff.     2  §  113  (J.     3  plur.     4  ^^     5  §  50. 


Translation  into  Arabic,  b.  59* 

standing  [is]  wisdom  and  learning. — 13.  Money  has 
(to  money  [is])  a  difficult  entrance  and  an  easy  exit.  — 

14.  Yerily  i  God  [is]  forgiving  and  2  compassionate. — 

15.  Yerily  ye^  [are]  in  a  manifest  error. — 16.  The 
nobles  of-*  Pharaoh's  folk  said^,  "Yerily  this  [is]  surely  6 
a  learned  enchanter". — 17.  Yerily  in  that*^  [lies]  surely 
an  example  for  the  unbelievers. — 18.  Flight  in  its 
[proper]  time  [is]  better  than  endurance  in  its  wrong 
time  (in  another  than  its  [proper]  time). — 19.  There 
is  no  (nots  [is  there])  strength  and  no  (nots)  power 
except  with  9  God,  the  High  and  10  Mighty  [One]. — 
20.  The  best  of  gifts  [is]  understanding,  and  the  worst 
of  misfortunes  [is]  ignorance. — 

B.    The  Strong  Verb. 

21.  Jonah  went  out  from  the  whale's  belly. — 
22.  Zaid  killed  Muhammed.  — 23.  They  gave>5  (beat) 
Omar  a  violent  beating  ^i. — 24.  The  direction  of  prayer 
was  shifted  12  from  Jerusalem  to  Mecca. — 25.  God 
knoweth  (knowing)  what  1 3  ye  are  doing. — 26.  Yerily' 
God  provides  for  every  one  his  sufficiency. — 27.  Learning 
and  money  [they]  cover  up  ^^  every  fault,  and  poverty 


1  §  147  a.  2  §  149.  3  suffix.  4  J^.  5  perf.  sing.  §  136. 
6  §147  J.  "§147  0.  8  §111.  9^.  10  §  122.  11  §  109.  I2§i36fe. 
13  l^,  §  56  note  a.     1^  dual.  §"l36  d.     is  §  137  h. 


60*  Translation  into  Arabic,  b. 

and  ignorance  [they]  uncover  i  every  fault. — 28.  They 
took  him  away  and  put  him  in  the  bottom  of  the 
well. — 29.  The  brothers  of  Joseph  returned  2  to  their 
father. — 30.  "Why  hast  thou  3  not^  washed  thy  shirt? 
— -31.  The  most  5  of  mankind  are  not^  grateful  2. — 
32.  They?  believe  not 8  in 9  the  future  life.— 33.  We 
made  heaven  [to  be]  a  [well-]preserved  roof. — 34.  Do 
not  do  good  out  of  ^^  hypocrisy,  and  do  not  leave  off 
[doing]  it  out  of  10  modesty. — 

35.  Why  do  ye  render  waste  the  cultivated  coun- 
tries ? — 36.  Thereupon  we  sent  Moses  and  his  brother 
Aaron  with  our  signs  to  Pharaoh  and  his  nobles;  then 
they  declared  the  two  of  them  11  to  be  liars. — 37.  The 
angels  said  12,  "0  Mary!  be  obedient  to  thy  Lord  and 
"prostrate  thyself;  verily  1 3  Qod  giveth  thee  glad 
"tidings  of  a  word  from  1^  him;  and  he  ^^  [is  on.e]  ofi^ 
"those  16  who  are  placed  near  [to  God],  and  he  shall 
"talk  to  mankind  in  the  cradle!" — 38.  It  is  not  seemly 
to  hurry  (not  is  good  the  hurrying),  except  in  the 
marrying  of  a  i?  daughter,  and  the  burying  of  a  i?  dead 
[man],  and  the  entertaining  of  a  is  guest. — 39.  Glorify  i^ 
God  in  the  early  morning  20  and  [late]  in  the  evening  20. 


^  1  dual.  §  136  d.  2  piur.  3  fem.  *  ^  §  101  c.  5  sing.  §  127. 
6  "5.  "  pronoun.  8  part.  9  <^>.  lo  §  us  d.  n  suffix  in  the 
dual.  12  §  136  Z,.  13  §  147  a.  ^  pronoun.  15  ^.  1 6  part. 
17  §  118c.     i^  §  118c.     la.plur.     20  indeterm.  accus.  §  113a. 


i 


TrANSLATIOX    into    ARABIC,    B.  61* 

40.  Verily  the  hypocrite  has  (to  the  hyp.  [belong]) 
three  characteristics;  his  tongue  contradicts  his  heart, 
and  his  speech  his  action,  and  his  exterior  his  in- 
terior.— 41.  The  men  of  his  people  used  to  sit  with 
himi  on  account  of  his  learning. — 42.  Yerily  the 
holy  war  [is]  incumbent  2  on  you. — 43.  The  vehemence- 
of  a  (the)  man 3  [is  what]  causes  him  to  perish^. — 
44.  The  head  of  al-Husain  the  son  of  Ali  was  brought 
into  the  city^  of  Damascus  ^  and  was  placed  before 
Yazid. — 45.  Yerily  we"  have  become  Muslims,  so 8 
become  Muslims  ye 9  [also]! — 46.  Do  not  talk  to  one 
another  with  disgraceful  talk! — 47.  Every  thing  has 
(to  every  thing  [belongs])  an  indication;  and  the  in- 
dication of  understanding  [is]  reflection,  and  the  in- 
dication of  reflection  [is]  being  silent. — 48.  We  started 
off  towards  Bagdad  to  bring  an  action  against  one 
another  10  before  ^  its  12  governor. — 49.  The  most  ex- 
cellent [kind]  of  praise  [is],  "[there  is]  no  i3  god  ex- 
cept God!"  and  the  most  excellent  of  [good]  works 
[are]  the  fivei^  prayers;  and  the  most  excellent  [kind] 
of  character  [is]  (the)  being  humble. — 50.  They,  fought 
with  one  another   four    days  1 5,    then    the    Byzantines 


1  vi3>^  sing.,  then  subject,  then  the  verb  in  the  plur.cf.  §§89  notee;  . 
136  d.    2  part,  'a  2^.    4  nominal  sent.  §  139  fZ  a.   5  §  107.     6  §  128. 
7  §   96   d.      8  J^.     9  pronoun.     10  part.   §  mb.     ^  (j,\.     12  §  72. 
13  §  111.       1*  masc.  determ.    after  the  noun,   §  92  a.      ^s  §  113  a. 


b 


62*  Translation  into   Arabic,  b. 

were  routed'. — 51.  What  is  disliked  in 2  the  king  [is] 
the  being  devoted  to  (the)  pleasures,  and  the  hearing 
of  (the)  songs  and  the  spending  of  (the)  time  therewith 
(with  that). — 52.  They  said^  "0  our  father!  verily  we  3 
"went  away,  running  races -*,  and  left  Joseph  with^ 
"our  baggage;  then  the  wolf  ate  him". — 53.  Observe 
what  [is]  in  the  heart  of  thy  brother  by  means  of  his 
eye,   for^  the   eye   [is]  the  title-page  of  the  heart! — 

54.  In  the  fourth  year  from  the  birth  of  Muhammed 
the  [two]  angels '  cut  open  8  his  belly  and  extracted  ^ 
his  heart;  then  they  cut  it 9  [his  heart]  open  and 
extracted 9  from  it  a  black  clot  of  blood;  thereupon 
they   washed  9    his   heart  and    his  belly  with  snow. — 

55.  They  conversed  10  about  the  case  of  the  Apostle. — 

56.  Yerily  God  hath  (to  God  [are])  n  servants 
whom  12  he  distinguishes  (he  distinguishes  them) 
with  his  favours. — 57.  Restrain  thyself  from  meatus 
which  1^  causes  thee  to  acquire  an  indigestion,  and  [from] 
an  action  which  i^  occasions  thee  regret  i^ — 58.  Thou 
hast  fallen  in  love  '^  with  a  girl,  a  possessor  of  beauty  i^ 
and  elegance  ^\ — 59.  Muhammed  said,  "Help  thy  brother, 
"[whether  he  be]  doing  wrong  i'   or  wronged  i^!"   They 


»  fern.  sing.  2  J.  3 §96  f^.  4imperf.inerely,§  157  b.  ^  J^^  with  gen. 
6^.  7  dual.  Ssfng.  §136a.  9  dual  §  136  d  lo  §  137  «.  ii§l47a. 
12  without  relative  particle  §  155.  ^3  indeterm.  1*  without  rela- 
tive particle  §  155.     »»  indet.     is  §  98  e.     i^  §  m  b. 


Translation  into   Arabic,   c.  63* 

asked,  "0  Apostle  of  God!  how  shall  we  help  him, 
"[if  he  be]  doing  wrong  i?"  He  said,  "By  restraining 
"him  from  doing  wrong!" — 60.  Do  not  turn  away 2  a 
beggar! — 61.  A  man  (servant)  does  not  believe,  until 
he  love  for  his  neighbour  (brother)  what  3  he  loves  for 
himself. — 

C.    The  Weak  Verb. 

62.  A 'poor  [man]  begged  of  me,  so  I  gave  him 
[two]  pieces  of  money*. — 63.  Be  mindful  of  death,  for 
he 5  takes  hold  of  your  forelocks;  if  6  ye  fly  from  him, 
he  overtakes  you,  and  if 6  ye  stay,  he  seizes  you. — 
64.  Music  [is]  like  the  spirit  and  wine  [is]  like  the 
body;  then  through  their 7  coming  together  is  born 
joy. — 65.  The  Apostle  used  to^  preach  to  his  com- 
panions and  to  exhort  them  and  to  teach  them  the 
beauties  of  character  9. — 66.  Verily  10  our  [true]  friends 
will  1 1  entrust  to  us  their  secrets. — 67.  The  lust  12  of  the 
world  entails  care  and  sorrow,  and  abstinence  with 
regard  to  it  restores  the  heart  and  the  body. — 68.  Moses 
said,  "I  have  brought '^  you  an  evidence  from  your 
"Lord;  so  let  go  i-*  along  with  me  the  Sons  of  Israeli" 
— 69.   Depend  on  the  Living  [one],  who  does  not  die! 

1  §  113  ^>.  2  contracted  §  36.  3  l^  §  156  and  note  a.  *  dual. 
5  pronoun  with  foil.  part.  6  §  159.  7  dual-suffix.  8  see  p.  61* 
note  1.   9pl.  determ.  »o§  147  a.   ii^§99a.  12  (3.   >3§98e.   m  sing. 


64*  Translation  into   Arabic,   c. 

— 70.  He  pleases  me,  who  makes  poetry  to  i  show  his 
education,  not  to  ^  make  gain,  and  applies  himself  to 
singing  to  i  enjoy  himself,  not  to  ^  seek  for  himself  [reward]. 
— 71.  Demand  help  of  the  good  (people2  of  the  good), 
and  of  those  that  act  well  (and  of  the  acting  well). — 

72.  Choose 3    whichever    of    the    pages    thou   wilt! — 

73.  Supplicate  much  (make  much  the  supplicating), 
for  thou  4  dost  not  know  when  5  answer  6  will  he  given 
thee! — 74.  Restrain  your  tongues  and  dower  your 
glances  and  guard  your  continence! — 

75.  A  (the)  kingdom  is  made  flourishing  through 
justice  and  is  protected  by  courage  and  is  ruled 
through  [good]  government. — 76.  [Good]  government 
[is],  that  7  the  gate  of  the  chief  be  guarded  §  in  the 
[proper]  time  of  being  guarded  9,  and  opened  in  the 
[proper]  time  of  being  open  9,  and  the  gatekeeper 
friendly. — 77.  Jalal-al-din  used  not  to  go  to  sleep  lo 
except  drunk  11,  nor  (and  not)  to  arise  in  the  morning 
except  seedy  and  tipsy  ii. — 78.  It  is  not  seemly  for 
the  wise  [man],  that  12  he  address  the  fool,  like  as 
it  is  not  seemly  for  the  sober  [man],  that  he  address 
the  drunken  [man].  — 79.  People  i3  of  the  world 
[are]  like  folk  in   a  ship,  who  ^^  are   carried  onwards 


1  inf.  §  113  d.  2  §  133.  3  fem.  *  §  96  d  5  ^X^.  6  impf. 
pass,  impers.  '  §  U8b.  8  ^^Jl^  with  part.  §  110.  9  61  c.  »"  see 
p.  61*  note  1.     11  §  113  6.     12  §  usb.     13  §  133.     !♦  §§  155,  156. 


TRANSLATION    INTO    ARABIC,    C.  66"^ 

whilst  they  are  sleeping  i. — 80.  The  evil-doer  [he] 
does  not  consider 2  mankind  except  [as]  evil,  because 
he  3  sees  them  with^  the  eye  of  his  nature. — 81.  God 
elected  Abraham  [as]  an  [intimate]  friend. 7 — 82.  Every 
aifair  in  the  world  [is]  transitory. — 83.  Wickedness 
[is]  to  be  feared^,  and  no  one  (not)  fears  it  except 
the  intelligent  [man];  and  good  [is]  to  be  hoped  for, 
and  every  one  6  seeks  it. — 84.  [To]  a  man  (servant)  shall 
not  8  be  given  [anything]  more  ample  than  endu- 
rance.—  85.  I  looked  into  Paradise,  then  I  saw  the 
most  of  its  inhabitants  [to  be]  the  poor ;  and  I  looked 
into  hell-fire,  then  I  saw  the  most  of  its  inhabitants 
[to  be]  (the)  women. — 86.  He  9  whose  counsel  is 
asked  [is]  onei<>  in  whom  one  confides;  and  he  10  who 
asks  counsel  [is]  one^o  who  is  to  be  aided. — 87.  Do 
not  put  offi^  the  work  of  to-day  till  to-morrow  12. — 
88.  Thou  dost  not  ■  3  find  (see)  in  the  creation  of  God  any  !•* 
imperfection. — 89.  Little  which  10  continues  [is]  better 
than  much  which  ^0  is  interrupted. — 90.  Pharaoh  said, 
"We  will  IS  kill  16  their  sons  and  spare  their  women." — 
91.  A  Bedouin  looked  at  a  gold-piece;  then  he  said, 
"How  small  i'  is  thy  size  and  how  great  ^^  thy  value!" — 

^  1  §  157  a.  2  §  139  d  a.  3  suff.  4  ^_,.  5  §  60  c.  6  j!it. 
7  \U1:L.  8  y  §  100  end.  9  part.  "  10  part.  »i  §  101  6. 
12  indeterm.  i3  [U.  u  ^  as  used  §  141.  i5  ^,  §  99  a. 
16  §  19.     17  §  52. 

Socin,  Arabic  Gramma^.*  E 


66*  TRANSLATION    INTO    ARABIC,    D. 

92.  The  envious  [man]  is  not  well-pleased  with  thee  S 
until  thou  diest!  —  93.  Be  [the]  tail  and  be  not  [the] 
head!  for 2  the  tail  escapes  whilst 3  the  head  perishes. 

D.  Various  subordinate  Sentences. 
94.  Muhammed  said,  "Do  not  anticipate  (begin)  ^ 
Jews  and  Christians  by  the  greeting,  but  when  ye 
meet  one  of  them  s,  (ihen)  ^  force  him  towards  the 
narrowest  place  (his  narrowest)". — 95.  When  comes  to 
thy  knowledge  concerning  thy  brother  what  is  evil, 
then  seek  for  him  excuse;  but  if  thou  dost  not^  find 
[one],  then  say,  "Perhaps  he  has  an  excuse." — 96.  If  8 
thou  eat  little,  thou  shalt  live  long. — 97.  Ifs  ye  talk 
in  a  good  manner  (make  ye  good  the  talk),  ye  shall 
enter  Paradise. — 98.  Ali  said, — may  9  God  be  well 
pleased  with  him  10 — "Q  '  1  mankind!  do  not  hope  except 
for  your  Lord,  and  do  not  dread  [anything]  except  your 
transgressions;  and  be  not  he  ashamed,  who  12  doth  not 
know,  to  13  learn,  and  be  not  he  ashamed,  who  12  knoweth, 
to  13  teach!" — 99.  The  subsistence  which  thou  seekest 
is  like  the  shadow  (the  likeness  of  the  subsistence . . . 
[is]  the  likeness  of  the  shadow)  which  moves  on  along 


1    verbal  ^sentence.  2    ^^Ls.  3    §    157    nomin.    sent. 

4  plur.     5  S^\  with  gen.  §  133  end.     6  §  lei  c.    J  §§  159,  101c. 
®  §  1.60  6.    9   §   98  d.    10  after  the  subject.     ^  l^\  §  85.     ^^  ^^. 


3  ^\  with  subj. 


TRANSLATION    INTO     ARABIC,     D.  67* 

with  thee;  thou  i  dost  not  overtake  it  in  pursuing  2  [it], 
then  when  thou  turnest^  away  from  it,  it  follows 
theeU — 100.  A  man  said  to  the  Apostle  of  God: 
"0  Muhammed,  give  me  thy  cloak!*';  then  he  threw 
it  down  to 5  him;  then  he  said:  "I  do  not 6  want  it"; 
then  he  [Muh.]  said,  "May^  God  combat  thee!  thou 
didst  wish  to  8  declare  me  to  be  niggardly,  but 
(and)  God  has  not  made^  me  [to  be]  niggardly!" — 
101.  Whoso  10  longs  for  Paradise,  he  is  unmindful  of 
lusts  11. — 102.  That  a  man  22  give  in  alms  in  his  Ufe- 
time  a  drachma  (the  alms -giving '2  of  a  man — a 
drachma)  [is]  better  for  him  than  that  ^3  he  give  in 
alms  a  hundred  drachmae  at  his  death. 

103.  The  Prophet — may  God  bless  '4  him  and  save 
him — said,  "Whoso  10  drinketh  wine  in  this  world,  [and] 
thereupon  do  not^^  repent,  he  shall  be  forbidden  it>6 
in  the  future  life." — 104.  If  anyone  light  a  lamp  in  a 
mosque,  then  verily  ^^  the  angels  [they]  will  beg  for- 
giveness for  him  as  long  as^s  that  lamp  continues  ^9 
kindled  20. — 105.  The  reed-pen  [is]  a  tree,  whose  21 
fruit  [is]  the  ideas,   and   thought  [is]   a  sea,  whose 21 


»  pronoun.  2  part.  113  6.  3  §  1_58  a.  *  perf.  5  ^J.  6  U 
with  irnperf.  t  %  98  d.  8  ^\  with  subj.  9  §  101  e. 
1^'  §  159.  11  determ.  12  inf.  i3  ^f  ^  §  148  6  with  subj. 
11  §  11  end.  15  ^§§  160  c,  101c.  »6  §  108.  i7§i6la.  is  §  158  6. 
19  §  110.     20  part.  pass.  §  110.     21  §  155.     22  jAo. 

^    E* 


68*  TRANSLATION    INTO    ARABIC.    D. 

pearls  [are]  wisdom. — 106.  Verily  the  dead  [man]  and 
he  who  1   has    no    religion    (he  who    no  2    religion   to 
him)    [are]    equal  3;    and   there   is  no  2   trust   in    (to) 
him     who  1     has    no  2    piety. — 107.      Every    woman 
that  ^  has  no  ^  modesty  [is]  like  a  dish  that  has  no  ^ 
salt. — 108.    If  anyone's 6  [whoso,  his]  tattle  is  much, 
his   erring   is   much    [also]. — 109.     The    anger  of  the 
nohle   [man],    although  his   fire   flare   up',    [is]    like 
smoke   of  woods  in   which    [there  is]    no 9  blackness. 
— 110.  To  the  ignorant  [man]  are  forgiven  10  seventy  11 
transgressions,  ere  to  the  knowing  [man]  is  forgiven  one. 
111.    Be  not  12   like  the  needle,  which  1 3   clothes 
mankind  whilst  i*  it  [is]  naked,  nor  (and)  like  the  wick, 
which  14  gives  light  to  mankind  whilst  it  is  consumed  is. 
— 112.    The  believer  does  not  escape  from  the  chas- 
tisement of  God,  until  he  leave  off  four  things,  lying, 
and   pride,   and  niggardliness,   and  evil  thinking  (evil 
of   the  thinking). — 113.    It  is  seemly  for  the  younger 
[ones]  to  16  precede  the  elders  in  three  places;  wheni' 
they  travel  by  night  ^%  or  wade  through  a  stream,   or 
encounter  horsemen. — 114.   Do  not  drink  (the)  poison 
out  of  reliance  19   on    the    antidote   which   thou   hast 

1  Cr*-  ^  §  111-  '  sing-  *  §§  1^5,  156.  5  part.pass.  §  110. 
6  §  166.  7§159.  8  indeterm.  §  155.  9§111.  io§136a.  »i§92Z). 
t2  "J  with  energ.  I.  §  101  b.  i3  §  155.  u  §  157  a.  is  §  157  a,  pron. 
with  imperf.     le  §  us.     n  §  158  a.     '8  §  113^1.     19  §  113  d. 


TRANSLATION    INTO    ARABIC,    D.  69* 

(that  which  [is]  with^  thee  of 2  the  antidote). — . 
115.  Paradise  is  desirous  3  of  four  [kinds  of]  folk;  the 
first 4  of  them 5  [are]  those  who  have  fed**  a  hungry 
[man] ,  and  the  second  [are]  those  who  have  clothed  7 
a  naked  [man],  and  the  third  [are]  those  who  fast^ 
in  8  the  month  of  Eamadan^,  and  the  fourth  [are] 
those  who  read  10  the  Koran. — 116.  Socrates  was  asked, 
"Why  hast  thou  notn  mentioned  in  thy  law-code  the 
"punishment  of  him  who  kills  12  his  brother?"  He  said, 
"I  know  not  that  this  [is]  a  thing  which  exists." — 
117.  Everything  [it]  begins  smalHs,  thereupon  it  be- 
comes great,  except  misfortune^'*;  for  it  begins  great, 
thereupon  it  becomes  small ;  and  every  thing  [it]  becomes 
cheap,  when  15  it  becomes  abundant,  excepting  education; 
for  16  when  it  becomes  abundant,  it  rises  in  value. 

118.  After  Moses  had  returned  to  the  Sons  of 
Israel  with  the  Thora  (and  along  with  him  [was]  the 
Thora),  they  refused  to  i"  accept  it  and  to  do  according 
to  what  [was]  in  it. — 119.  God  commanded  Moses  to  is 
fast  thirty  is  days  and  to  purify  himself  and  to  purify 
his  garments,  and  to  come  to  ^  ^  the  mountain,  that  he 
might  talk  to  him  and  give  him  the  book. — 120.  After 


1  y>^.  2  ^/ye,  3  part.  *  masc.  5  suffix  in  fern.  sing. 
6  perf.  sing.  "  imperf.  sing,  s  §  naa^.  9  §  128.  10  imperf. 
sing.  11  §  101  c.  12  §  159.  jz  §  113  2,.  u  accus.  §  151.  is  §  158  a. 
16  with  suff.  §  96  d.    n  ^\  with  subj.     is  §  us  a.     i9  Ji- 


70* 


TRANSLATION    INTO    ARABIC.    D. 


.Damascus  was  taken-,  mucli  folk 2  of 3  its  inhabitants 
joined  Heraclius,  whilst  ^  he  was  in  ^  Antioch. — 121.  A 
certain  one  of  the  wise  men  said,  Nothing  (not)  repels 
the  onslaught  of  the  conquering  enemy  like^  being 
submissive  and  giving  way,  like  as  ^  green  plants  are 
safe  from  the  vehement  wind  through  their  pliancy,  be- 
cause they  s  turn  along  with  it,  as  (how)  9  it  turns. — 
122.  They  disagree  10  concerning  "Waraka;  and  of  1 1  them 
[thereare]  thosewho  assert  ^^  that  12  he  died  a  Christian  i3 
and  did  not  i4  reach  the  appearance  of  the  Prophet; 
and  of  1 1  them  [there  are]  those  who  are  of  opinion  i^ 
that  12  he  died  a  Muslim. — 123.  0  [ye  two]  companions 
of  the  prison!  as  to  the  one  of  you^^^  he  shall  serve 
to  his  lord  wine  i',  and  as  to  the  other,  he  shall  be 
crucified,  then  shall  is  the  birds  eat  of  12  his  head;  the 
affair  is  decreed  ^^  concerning  which  ye  inquire! — 
124.  The  Apostle  wrote  to  chieftains  ^ 7  ofn  the  tribes, 
inviting  20  them  to  become  Muslims  21. — 125.  A  wise 
[man]  was  asked,  "What  [is]  the  thing,  which  [it]  is 
not  good  that  it  be  said,  although  it  be 22  right?"  He 
said,  "A  man's    eulogizing  himself23". — 126.    Woe  to 

1  fern.  §  136  ?>.  2  j^  coH.  ^  c^t'  '*§157fl^.  5  ^^.  6  JJu  as 
subject,  §  145  h.  ^  ^^l  US'  §  147  a.  §  sing,  suff.  9  §  159.  ^lo  §  98  6  with 
J5,  §Jl37a.  11  cr*.  i2§i47o.  13  §113  6.  i4§ioic.  15  §98  6. 
16  j^\  w.  dual  suif.  §  133.  ^7  indetenn.  is  fem.  sing.  §  136  c,  2. 
"  §  98  h.    20  §  99  Z).    21  infin.  determ.    22  ^^  §  159.  23  §  131  w.  Ace. 


TRANSLATION    INTO    ARABIC,    E. 


IV 


[him]  who  converses  with  lying,  that  he  may  make  the 
people  laugh  by  it! — 127.  This  (the)  world  and  the 
future  life  [are]  as  the  East  and  the  West;  when  thou 
approachest  one  of  them  \  thou  dost  recede  from  the 
other. — 128.  Fear  ye  God  in  secret  2  and  do  not  enter 
into  what  is  not  lawful  for  you! — 129.  The  devotee  without 
learning  [is]  like  the  ass  of  the  mill  3,  who  ^  goes  around 
and  does  not  5  get  through  (cut)  the  distance. — 1 30.  The 
eye  of  hate  [it]  draws  forth  every  fault,  and  the  eye 
of  love  [it]  does  not  find  the  faults. 

E.    Anecdotes. 

131.  An  astrologer  was  being  crucified ;  then  he  was 
asked 6,  "Hast  thou"  seen  this  in  thy  star?"  Then  he 
said,  "I  saw  a  raising  upS,  however  I  did  not^  know 
that  it  [was  to  be]  upon  a  piece  of  wood." 

132.  A  man  knocked  at  the  door  of  ^o  '  Amr  the  son 
of 'Ubaid;  so  he  said  "Who  [is]  this?"  He  said,  "I."  He 
[' Amr]  said,  "I  do  not  know  (I  am  not  I  know  1 1)  among 
our  friends  (brothers)  12  [any]  one  i3,  whose  name  [is]  I." 

133.  (The)  thieves  came  i^  in  upon  Abu  Bekr  al- 
Rabbani,    seeking  i^   something  (a  thing),  and  he  saw 


1  dual  suffix.  2  determ.  3  §  123,  note.  *  §  155  note.  »  §  1576 
))  w.  impf.  6  137  a.  '  with  interrog.  part.  J^.  ^  73  c  end. 
9  §  101  c.     io  ^.     11  Jij3  §  50  and  impf.      12   order   §    idi-b. 


13 


-\-      1^  §  136  a.     '5  §  157  ^,  imperf.  alone. 


72* 


TRANSLATION    INTO    ARABIC.    E. 


them  going  around  i  in  the  house.  Then  he  said,  "0 
young  men!  This  which  ye  are  seeking  2  in  the  night  ^ 
we  have  4  already  sought  2  in  the  day-time,  but  have 
not  5  found  it!"    So  they  laughed  and  went  out. 

134.  It  is  related  6,  that^  a  certain  one  of  the 
polite  scholars  eulogized  a  certain  one  of  the  princes; 
so  he  commanded  [that]  to  him  an  [ass's]  saddle  and 
saddle-girth  [should  be  given].  So  he  took  them^  on  9 
his  shoulder  and  went  out  from  his  presence  10.  Then 
a  certain  one  of  his  companions  saw  him,  then  said, 
"What  [is]  this?"  He  said,  "I  eulogized  the  prince 
with  the  most  beautiful  of  my  poems,  then  he  invested 
me  with  [something]  of  ^i  the  most  glorious  of  his  dresses". 

135.  Al-Mugira,  the  son  of  Suba  said:  No  one 
(not)  12  has  deceived  me  except  (another  than)  a  youth 
of  13  the  sons  of  al-Harit.  For  I  mentioned  a  woman 
of  theirs  (of  i^  them),  that  is  I  should  marry  her;  then 
he  said,  "0  i^  Prince!  [There  is]  no  good  is  for  thee 
in  her."  So  I  said,  "And  why  [not]?".  He  said,  "T 
saw  a  man  kissing  1^  her."  So  I  turned  from  her;  then 
the  young  man  married  her.  So  I  reproached  him 
and  said,  "Didst  thou  not  i^  inform  me  that  thou  is  hadst 


7  imperf.    2_with  suffix.     3  §  118  a.     *  %  9S^e.     5  U  §150  a. 
6  §  98  6.      7    ?j\.      8  dual  suffix.     9  j^.     10  «v>-lft  ^.     11  ^. 

12   101  c.     13  J.     14  l4^\.      15  §  111.     16  imperf.     i^  p\  §  101  r. 
18  v^l  with  suff. 


TRANSLATION    INTO     ARABIC.    E,  73' 

seen  a  man  kissing  her?"     He  said,  "Yes,  1  saw  her 
father  kissing  her." 

136.  Al-Dahhak  the  son  of  Muzahim  said  to  a 
Christian,  "[How  would  it  be]  if  i  thou  wert  to  become 
a  Muslim?"  He  said,  "I  have  not  2  ceased  loving  3 
Islam  4,  except  that  ^  my  love  for  wine  6  prevents  me  from 
it."  So  he  said,  "Become  a  Muslim  and  drink  it !"  So 
after  he  had  become  a  Muslim,  he  said  to  him,  "Thou 
hast  7  become  a  Muslim,  so  if  thou  drink  it  s,  we  shall 
chastise  thee ;  and  if  thou  apostatize,  w^e  shall  have  thee 
killed  9,  so  choose  for  thyself.  Then  he  chose  Islam  and 
his  Islam  was  good.  So  he  had  taken  lO  him  by  stratagem. 
'  137.  A  Bedouin  stole  a  purse  in  which  (it)  [were] 
pieces  of  money  ^  \  thereupon  he  entered  the  mosque 
to  pray  12;  and  his  name  was  ^3  Moses.  Then  the 
leader  of  prayer  recited,  "And  what  is  that  1^  in  i5  thy 
right  hand,  Oh  Moses  ^'^P"  go  he  said,  "By  God,  verily 
thou  [art]  an  enchanter!"  Thereupon  he  threw  away 
the  purse  and  went  out. 

138.    A  man  claimed  the  (a)  gift  of  prophecy  in 
the    days  i7  of  al-Rasid.     So   after   he   had  appeared 


<  y  §  102.  2  U  with  perf.^^  3^§  110  with  indeterm.  part. 
^  §  132  end.  5  §§  147  c,  148  ^\  "^1  with  foil,  verbal  sentence. 
6  §  131.  7  §  98c  with  Ss.  s  §  159.  9  §  17,  note  b.  »o  perf. 
11  indetei-m.  12  §  99  J.  n  <^^,  1*  fern,  is  ^.  16  gurah  20,  18. 
»"  §  113a. 


T  \'R  ^  A  R 


74* 


TRANSLATION    INTO    ARABIC.    E. 


before  him  [the  Caliph],  he  asked  him,  "What  [is 
that]  which  is  said  of  thee?"  He  said,  "that  I^  am 
a  noble  prophet."  He  asked,  "But  what  2  indicates 
the  truth  of  thy  claim?"  He  said,  "Demand  what 3 
thou  wilt"  4.  He  said,  "I  wish  that  ^  thou  make  theses 
beardless  slaves,  [who  are]  standing 7  [there]  this 
moments  [to  be  furnished]  with  beards »"  Then  he 
looked  down  for  a  while  10,  thereupon  he  raised  his 
head  and  said,  "How  is  it  lawful  that  I  make  these  ^ 
beardless  [ones  to  be  furnished]  with  beards  ^  and 
alter  these 6  beautiful  12  forms?  buti3  I  will  make  the 
bearded  ones  (owners  of  beards)  beardless  in  one 
twinkling."  So  al-Rasid  laughed  at  him  and  pardoned 
him  "and  commanded  a  present  [to  be  given]  to  him. 
139.  A  person  pretended  to  prophecy  1^5  then  they 
besought  of  him  in  i5  the  presence  of  al-Ma'mim  a 
miracle.  So  he  said,  "I  will  cast  for  you  a  pebble  into 
the  water,  then  it  will  dissolve".  He  [al-Ma'miim]  said, 
"We  are  16  content."  So  he  brought  out  a  pebble 
[which  he  had]  along  with  him^',  then  cast  it  into  the 
water;   then  it  dissolved.     So  they  said,  "This  is  is  a 


1  §  96  (Z.  2  fe^  ^\.  3  §  5,  note  b.  4  perf.  §  159.  s  ^\. 
6  §  120  cZ;  the  dem.  in  sing.,  the  adj.  in  broken  pi.  '  determ. 
§  120  a.  8  §  118  a.  9  indeterm.  lo  §  113  a.  '^  plur.  12  §  120 
fern.  sing.  "  UJ^^.  i4  §  22.  is  <_;  16  §  93  c.  '-  <^^^  §  121  a. 
18  §  143. 


TRANSLATION    INTO    ARABIC.    E. 


trick;  however,  we  will  give  ^  thee  a  pebble  of  our 
own 2,  and  let^  it  dissolve!"  Then  he  said,  "Ye  are 
not  4  more  illustrious  ^  than  Pharao  and  I  am  not  (and 
not  1 6)  mightier  in  wisdom '  than  Moses,  and  Pharao 
did  not  8  say  to  Moses,  'I  am  not  9  content  with  what 
thou  do  est  lo  with  thy  staff,  so  that  ^  i  I  will  give  thee 
a  staff  of  my  own  ^',  which  i3  thou  shalt  make  [into]  a 
serpent.'"  So  al-Ma'mun  laughed  and  let  him  pass  on. 
140.  It  is  said  i-i  that  Abu  Dulama  i^  the  poet  was 
standing  16  before  al-Saffah  on^^  a  certain  day  (a 
certain  one  of  the  days).  Then  he  said  to  him,  "Ask 
of  me  what  thou  dost  want  (thy  want)!"  So  Abu 
Dulama  said  to  him,  "I  want  a  hunting-dog".  So  he 
said,  "Give  ye  it  is  to  him!"  Then  he  said,  "And  I  want 
a  horse,  oni9  which  I  may  go  forth  to  hunt."  He  said, 
"Give  ye  it  to  him!"  He  said,  "And  a  page 20,  who  21 
will  lead  the  dog  and  hunt  with  him."  He  said,  "And 
give  ye  him  a  page!"  He  said,  "And  a  slave-girl 22, 
who  23  will  prepare  the  game  and  give  us  to  eat  of  it." 
He  said,  "Give,  ye  him  a  slave-girl!"    He  said,  "These, 


1  imperf.  2  li^x-U  ^.  3  imper.  of.  ^>^  w.  suff.;  then  iuipf. 
^O-^"§110-  '§63&.  6  lit  ^5.  7  §  113c.  8§ioic.  9  p. 
10  §  156.  11  ,^^;;^  with  subj.  12  ^v>J^  ^^.  13  §§  155—56. 
14  §  98  c.  15  147  (z.  16  ^U"  ^vith  part.  §  110.  i7  ^3.  is  with 
4.^,  which  stands  last,  §  54  6.  i9  ^  (after  the  verb)  §  155. 
20  accus.     21  §  155.      22   accus.     23  g  155. 


76=* 


TRANSLATION    INTO    ARABIC.    E. 


0  Prince  of  the  Believers!  have  need  of  ([there  is] 
no  1  escape  for  them  from)  a  dwelling,  which  2  they 
may  inhabit."  So  he  said,  "Give  ye  him  a  dwelling, 
which  2  will  contain  them !"  He  said,  "And  if  they  have 
not  (and  if  not  is  3  to  them)  an  estate,  then  wherefrom 
shall  they  live  ?"  He  said,  "I  grant  *  thee  ten  cultivated  ^ 
estates  and  ten  w^aste  estates  V  He  said,  "And  what 
[are]  the  waste  ^  [ones]  0  Prince  of  the  Believers?" 
He  said,  "In  which 6  [there  are]  no  plants 7."  He 
said,  "1 4  grant  thee,  0  Prince  of  the  Believers,  a 
hundreds  waste  estates  of 9  the  deserts  of  the  Sons 
of  Asad."  Then  he  laughed  at  him.  and  said,  "Make 
them  10  all  of  them  lo  cultivated!  lo" 

141.  It  is  related  ii,  that  Harim  al-Rasid  had  (that 
to  H.  was  12)  a  black  slave-girl,  of  ugly  mien  i3.  Now 
he  scattered  one  day  gold-pieces  i^  among  (between) 
the  slave-girls;  so  the  slave-girls  set  about i^  gather- 
ing i6  up  the  gold-pieces,  whilst  i"  that  slave-girl  stood 
still,  looking  is  at  the  face  of  al-Rasid.  Some  one 
asked  (it  was   asked),  "Dost   thou  1 9  not  pick  up  the 


1  §  111.  2  §§  155—56.  3  ^  p.  4  §  98c  with  ^. 
^  §  87  a.  6  L^  and  prep,  with  pronoun  at  the  end  of  the  sentence. 
7  §  111.  8  §  92  c.  9^£r^.  lofem.  sing,  n  §  98c.  12  J  <j\S  ^\ 
§  147  c.  13  determ.  §  134.  i*  indeterm.  is  §  136  o.  16  §§  152 
note  6,  136  d  (impf^  pi.  fern.)  i"  §  157  a  with  part  is  §  157  h 
impf.  alone.       i^  ^\  av.  impf.  fern. 


TRANSLATION    INTO    ARABIC.    E.  77* 

gold -pieces?''  Then  she  said,  "Verily  what  i  they 
seek  [is]  the  gold-pieces,  but  (and)  what^  I  seek 
[is]  the  owner  of  the  gold-pieces."  Then  her  speech 
pleased  him;  so  he  placed  her  near  [to  him]  and 
brought  good  upon  her.  Then  the  report  got  to  the 
grandees,  that 2  Harim  al-Rasid  was  enamoured 3  of 
a  black  slave-girl.  So  after  that  had  come  to  his 
knowledge,  he  sent  for  the  whole  of  the  grandees, 
until  he  had  assembled'*  them  in  his  presence  ^  Then 
after  he  had  commanded  the  bringing  in^  of  the 
slave-girls,  he  gave  every  one  of"  them  a  goblet  of^ 
chrysolites  and  commanded  it  to  be  thrown  down 6. 
But  they  declined  [doing  it]  in  a  body  (as  a  whole  9). 
Then  the  turn  came  to  (the  affair  got  to)  the  ugly 
slave-girl;  but  she  threw  down  the  goblet  and  broke 
it.  So  they  said,  "Look  10  at  this  girl,  her  name  [is] 
ugly,  and  her  manner  [is]  ugly,  and  her  action  [is] 
ugly".  Then  said  to  her  the  Caliph,  "Why  then  didst 
thou  break  11  it"?  Then  she  said,  "Thou  didst  12  command 
me  to  break  it^^;  so  I  was  of  opinion  that^^  ini^  its 
being  broken  [lay]  a   detriment  ^^  with  regard  to  the 


1  part.  pass,  with  s  affix.     2  ^^b.     3  imperf.     *  §  152,  note  c. 
5   ij^.        6    v-->    with    infinitive    §    131.  "^    cr*    §    119  a. 

8  determ.      9  §^113  5.      10  plur.     "  2nd.  pers.  fern.  perf.  w.  suflf. 
§  53  a.    12  §  98  e.     is  <_>  with  inf.     i*  ^\,     15  ^^,     le  §  147 a. 


78* 


TRANSLATION    INTO    ARABIC. 


treasure  of  the  Caliph,  and  in  its  not  being  broken 
(in  the  lack  of  its  being  broken)  a  detriment  ^  with  re- 
gard to  his  command ;  and  the  detriment  with  regard 
to  the  first  is  fitter  to  keep  intact  2  the  inviolability 
of  the  command  of  the  Caliph.  And  I  was  of  opinion 
that  in  its  being  broken  [lay]  my  being  called  (qualifi- 
ed 3  as  4)  the  crazy  [one],  and  in  keeping  it  intact  my 
called  being  (qualified ^  as^)  the  disobedient  [one];  and 
the  first  [is]  more  agreeable  to  me  than  the  second." 
Then  the  grandees  found  ^  that^  to  be  beautiful  of  her 
and  praised  her  forS  it  and  excused  the  Caliph  for  9 
loving  her.    And  God  knows  best  ([is]  most  knowing  ^o). 


1  §  147  a.  2  §  113^^  indeterai.  inf.  with  foUowing  J  §  131. 
§  61  c.  4  ^_j.  5  §  136  a.  6  at  the  end.  7  ^.  8  ^, 
^.     10  elative. 


GLOSSARY  A. 

pi.  =  plural,  see  §§  88 — 90.   The  numbers  within  parentheses  after 
the  broken  plurals  refer  to  the  forms  as  numbered  in  these  sections. 


Aaron  j..wjo.  Siiter  prep. 

Abraham  (va^j-?^*  agreeable   to   elat.   y^^] 

abstinence  <Uj.  "'"^  ^h 

AbuBekr  al-Rabbani  ^T  ^'"^  (*°)  cJ^  '"^''-  )  ^^ 
i  ,c5o  '*   «,^  with  ace. 

Abu  Dulama  i^Slo  ^|. 

abundant  see  much.  \  all  ^}S'  rvith  determ.  noun 

^  accept  (to)  Jui  /wp/:  «.  ^^  ^"//^-^  §  H^  ^• 

^acquire  (to  cause  to)  ....^  ^^"^^  (*^  g^^'®  ^^)  0^>-^ 

IV  with  two  accus.'  ^'  "^'^^  ^  of  the  gift. 

^  act  well  (to)  ,j-wwua^  /r.  along  with  jt?r6'j9.  li. 

^   action  JJti.  See  also  bring,  already  Jj?  §  98  e. 

address  (to)  ^^  III,  ^^^er  (to)  ^U  med.  ^  //. 

^  affair  pt        '  although  ^^|^^  §  159. 
after,  after  that  conj.  L^^ among  ^^. 

§  98/:  ample  L^!^  ^/a/.  §  63  &. 


80* 


Glossary  A. 


\ 


'Amr  ^y4s-  ^  90n. 
^and  I. 


G^o 


arise  (to,  in  the  morning) 

as  see  like. 

as  to  Loj  with  nom.  and  o 
in  the  apodosis. 

Asad  tXlLl. 

ashamed   (to   be)    ^^   X 
§  49  c. 

^ask  (to)  JU*  med,   .  with 
J.  —  to  ask  something 

of  JLw  /mp/!  a,  with  two 
ace.  §  38  &.' 

ass  J  t^- 

assemble  (to)  1^:^  //wjt?/".  a, 
assert  (to)  l£,\  impf.  u. 

6     w     ^  5 

astrologer  ^^Xjo. 

^  o 

at  (one's  house)^r^^.  Jojt. 

Bagdad  4>|jou. 

baggage  cL^- 
apply  oneself  to  (to)  Ihc     be,  exist  (to)  ^\S' med.  y 
VI  with  ace.  —  not  to  be  yllj  §  50. 

approach  (to)  Csi*  /^i?/*.  /  beard  llU.  jo/.  JJti  (3);  cf. 

!/,  W2Y^  jj^.  '  §  71  &. 


"^  angel  J^p/.RJL&Ui  (28). 

9     ^  ^ 

anger  v.,^.0^. 
animal    (domestic)   il».A.^ 
i?/.  JoLii  (25). 

Go  -' 

X  another  than  ^^.s.  with  fol- 
lowing gen. 

answer  (to  give)  to  »oL^ 
X  med,  .  with  J. 

antidote  ,vLj)'>- 

Antioch  iu5^Uij!. 
apostatize  t^x  VIII. 

G      ,^ 

apostle  J«.^y 
appear  (to)  J.:uo. 
appearance  ^^^b. 


Glossary  A. 


8r 


beardless  SJo]pI.  JjU  (1).     beseech  of  (to)  v^^-Lb  /// 

rvith  ace.  of  person  and 


^  beat  (to)  i^wo  impf.  i,  inf. 
^  beauty  ,j-ww^:=»-  —  beauties 


\ 


beautiful 


ij***^^ 


fern,  k_; 


elat.  §  63  &.  —  to  find 
to  be  beautiful  jj-ww^^  X 

because  ^^  §  147  «. 

Bedouin  ^-jIv^L 

before  (of  place)  =  be- 
tween the  two  hands 
of  (dual  stat.  constr.). 


v^  of  thing, 
best  elat.  of  good, 
better  elat.  of  good. 
between  /^^. 
beverage  v^wCiuo  j?/.  jLftLLo 

(23). 
birds  CO//,  oyb. 
birth  jjjo. 

black  jilt  fern.  §  74&. 

blackness  oll*I». 

bless  (to)  ^Lo  //  with  jLc. 


beg  of  (to)  jU  2>wi?/.  a,  ^o^y  ^^^-^  -P^-  JLjLiI  (17). 

«;e7^  «cc.  -^     Mt)o  (no.  67). 

beggar  j9«r/.  «c^.  of  JLw.  book  <^u5". 

begin,  begin  with  (to)  I  Jo  ^^^^  (to  be)  jj^  F. 

mj?/.  «,  with  ace.  bottom  SbLIi. 

beginning  jj*,|^  (lit.  head),  break  (to)  i^impf  i. 

believe  (to)  ^1  IV;  —  bring  (to)  ^  ^TL  med.  ^. 

believer  id.  i?«r^.  act.  _  to  bring  an  action 

belly  ^^Jaj.  against    one     another 

Sooin,  Arabic  Orammar.*  F 


82' 


Glossary  A. 


*X^  VI.  —  to  bring  in 
^^  IV,  —  to  bring 
into  jLa.4>  IV.  —  to 
bring  out  ^  y£^  IV.  — 

to  bring  upon  ^'1  IV 

V  with  J^. 

^  brother  ?  T  §  90  «,  c :  pL 
§  88,  5;  pL  when  = 
«friends"  §  88,  21. 

bury  (to)  ^t>  impf.  i,  inf, 

S    o  ^ 

but  o. 

by,   by  means  of  o;  in 

oaths  =  ^  ^t'.  /^^  gen. 

§  95  e. 

Byzantines  (the)  coll.  **  Jt- 
Caliph  xi-LXii.. 
care  liD. 

carry   onwards    (to)    sL« 
m^^.  j^,  with  o. 


case  *-{b^. 


cast  (to)       Jd  impf.  a. 


cease  (to)  Jk  ;w^(?.  .  {for 

J.)  §42^,  §44). 

certain  one  (a)  (jdju  w^'^^ 
pi.  of  follow,  noun. 

Go,  G      j,:^      > 

character  i^JLa-  i?/.  JLxil  ^ 
(17). 

G^    ^  ^ 

characteristic  iU^Lr.. 

S3  — 

chastise  (to)  tX^  impf.  u. 

G     ^  ^ 
chastisement  (^lt\^. 

cheap  (to  become)  {jar>^ 

impf.  u. 

G     ^         _-.  ^ , 

chief  jj^^  ;?/.  ^^Ui  (20). 

choose  (to)  .L^  med.   ^ 
F77/. 

chrysolite  ^^isli' 

Christian  ^\1^  pi.  jLjii 

(29);  ^^"Lii. 

claim  (to)  U<^  F///  §  25, 
note. 

claim  ^^ItS. 

cloak  g|<5v. 

/        G  — 

clot  of  blood  aLftJLft. 


Glossaet  a.  83* 


clothe   (to)   Lww.>   impf.  u,  —    to    command    any 

Q  with  vo  ^nd  infin, 

cognizant  of  ^  AjJLi.  "^     ^ 

1.  X  /i.  ^    I    .    rrr  command  yol. 

combat  (to)  jLXi  ///.  > 

,^  V      rf .     ^  .  companion    vI^-^Lo    p/. 

come  (to)  ^!  impf.  t,  —  s\,^^          •    - 

to  come  to  one's  know-  ^                    r 

1  J      ,              •     X  "T"  compassionate  -U^v 

ledge  (concerning)  iJb  ^                  n^ 

m;?/-.  I.,  with  ace,  {and  concerning  ^. 

J^).   -   to   come  in  ^^^^^^  ^^  (*^)  U^^  ^^^^• 

u^on^"^  impf.  u,  with  conquering  i^^r^   ^c^.   0/ 

Jk£.  —  to  come   out  7^ 

from  _  '^  impf.  u,  wiih  °°°^i'^«'^  ^^  (*°)  ^J^  ''"P^' 

^^  u,  with  ace, 

"  consumed   (to   be)    .  1:^^ 

come  together  >,t-^  VIII.  ^/ 

\  command  (to)  ^|  aVw;?/:  u.  contain  (to)  1;^  emj?/.  a, 

-to  command  anyone  ^^^^^^^  ^^^  ^^^  '^^  .^^^ 

to  do  a  thing,  id.  w;e7A  *^'^ 

:g^  «.  —  to  be  content  with, 
aec.    and    .%|  with  the 

^  id.  with  ^^. 

5w&y.  —  to    command  -  0^   ^^ 

anything   to   be   given  contentment  j^Lo. 

to  anyone,  id.  with  J  continence    -l.li    (pL   of 

of  pers.  and  ^^  0/  thing,  ^) . 


84*  Glossary  A. 


continue  (to)  II 3  med.   .  ad-Dahliak  dL^stlj. 

§  ^^^'  Damascus  ;^j^4>. 

contradict  (to)  ^.oJLi:.  III.  .       ,  ,       ®  ?    o  ha  •     // 

^    ^  daughter  o^jo  §  902.    ^ 

converse  (to)  ii>tX^  r. —  g„.        g  ^^ 

to  converse  about,  id.  ^^^  r^.^^'  r^-^  §§  ^^'  ^'^'   ^ 

w?7^  JO.  90  5.  —  one  day  Lo^. 

counsel  (to  ask)  X^  med.  to-day  |»^il. 

y  ^'  day-time  ^L^.         / 

country  jJLs  i?/.  JL*i  (9).  dead  v:i^uuo.         ''^ 

courage  aLcL^ui.  death  i:i>yo.  ^ 

cover  up  (to)  j/i^  impf,  u.  deceive  (to)  cJ^  i^pf-  «• 

covetousness  ^jols»,.  decline  (to)  mJuo  VIII, 

cradle  J^gjo.  decree  (to)  ^^ja3  impf.  L 

crazy  js^rr^  pass,  of   \^  demand  (to)  a  thing  JLw 

^^^^  H^^  impf  a,  with  ,j^  §  38  &. 

G  o  ^  depend  on  (to)  Af^  V,  with 
creation  ioXh^.  ^  ^  '      > 

crucify  (to)  .^JLa  impf  L 

cultivated   part.    act.    of 


desert  iXjtlipl.  JLki  (26); 


'^ desirous  of  (to  be)  ,^Lcc. 


cure  gU.co. 

t  (to)  ^ 

to  cut  open  ^^^impfu.     detriment  uah 


med.  .  VIII,  with  J^or 
cut  (to)  Jnjs  impf  a.  —  j^. 


Glossary  A. 


SS'* 


devoted  to   (to  be)   dU^     dog    s^JLT;     hunting-dog 


\ 


VIII  with  ^. 
devotee  part,  act.  of  Ju^ 

r. 

die  (to)  oLo  med.  .. 

6 

difficult  wLAWLft. 

disagree  (to)  v^jiJLa.  F7//. 

disease  e|3. 

G 

disgraceful 


^^• 


dish  j.ljLb. 


dislike  (to)  t^S irnpf,  «. 

disobedient  j9«r^.  «c^.  0/     early  see  morning. 


domestic  5^e  animal. 

6 

door  j^Lf. 

drachma  (Ci)4>. 

draw  forth  (to)  \o  /F. 

dread  (to)  .^-ci^  imp/.  «. 

dress  ^^^.JLoi?/.  JJLxi  (23). 

drink  (to)  C^y^  impf.  a. 
drunk,  drunken  ^iJCu;. 
dwelling  J 5  (fern.). 


dissolve  (to) 


»|6  med. 


East 
easy 


I^^aSuO. 


distance  RiLwwuo. 
distinguish     (to) 
impf.  u. 


(jg  ^ 


do  (to)  Jl^  impf  a;  Jiii 


eat  (to)  J^j  impf.  u;  imp. 
§  38  &.  —  to  give  to 
eat  of  j^xh  IV with  ace. 

pers.  and  ^^. 


impf  a  (no.  139).  —  to     education^^^l.— to  show 
do    according  to   Jl«^  one's  education  04>!  V. 


with 


elder  ^ri  pL  JlcUI  (23). 


86* 


Glossary  A. 


tk^KS.  impf.  «,  with  ace. 
enchanter  wa-LI/. 


elect  (to)  ^AXD  VIII.  escape  (to)  li  impf.  u. 

elegance  Jl^^.  escape  Jo. 

enamoured     of     (to     be)     estate  xilo  pi.  JLxi  (9). 

eulogize  (to)    "  Juo  impf, 
a.;  id.  VIII  (no.  134). 

evening  (late)  ^l^i. 

every   Ji^'  with    indeterm. 
noun.  §  119  &. 

evidence  iLuo. 

evil  (to  be)  :eUu  me<?.  .. 
—  to  do  evil  id.  JV.  — 
evil-doer  part   act.   of 
id.  IV. 

evil 


encounter  (to)     £}  III.     - 

endurance  ^jJa. 

enemy  ^tX^. 

enjoy  oneself  (to)  ^^JoV. 

entail  ^b)-eu^/F; 

enter  (to)  JlLS  impf  u. 
see  §  107  note. 

entertain  (to)  ^^3  impf.  i. 

inf.  %\Ji. 


example  h1x&. 


entrance  JJi.Juo. 

G 

entrust  (to)  anyone  with     excellent  JwoU  elat.  §  63  &. 
gO^  X  w^Y^  ^w;o  «ccw5.     except  l^H  (=  i  ^^ji)  §  l^^- 


envious  j9«r^.  «c^.  o/ Juw^i*.. 
equal  g)^. 

ere,  co/y*.  ^Jl  JlI^  §  100. 
err  (to)  JaJLi^  2^/.  iaJLt. 

0  /  ^ 

error  JI^Le. 


—  except  that  ju!  ^1 

§  147  c. 
excepting  ^^  Lx)  with  ace. 
excuse  (to)  Cj^  impf  i. 
excuse  ^d^s..  / 


Glossaby  a. 


87* 


exhort  (to)   Jail  impf,  i, 
§  40«. 

exist  (to)  ^iS'med.  .. 

exterior  xlj^i. 
extract  (to)  ^y^  X. 
eye  ,^^  /<?m.  §  72. 
face  2t:^«- 

fast  (to)  ILo  me^.  .. 
father  ii  §  90  a, 
fault  v^^^A^  j9/.  <o«-^^  (10). 
favour  i4.*j  i?/.  Jkjti  (3). 

fear  (to)  oL^  med.  .  mj^/l 
«,  §  42  i?. 

feed  (to)  ^  JV, 


five 


n^M^^ 


§§  91,  92«. 


flare  up  (to)  _.|  F. 

flight  (^w^ft. 

flourishing  (to  make)  lii 
impf,  u. 

fly  (to)  from   ^i   ^mp/".  /, 

folk  p^-;?/.  §  88,  17;^ 
coll.  (no.  120). 

follow  (to)  LfJ  imp/*,  tf. 

fool  part  act  of  Jl^j^. 

for  prep,  J  §  95 A;  cow/. 
^U§96rf. 

forbid  (to)  a  thing  to  any- 
one Iw^i*.  //w/?/.  I,  with 
two  accus. 


fight  (to)  with  one  another     «  /..  x   ^      Trm-    d  oc 

*     ^    ^  force  (to)  wo  VIII.  §  25 


JJ3  F/ 


note, 


find  (to)  J^;  ^W.  i,  §  40a.  ^^^^j^^^   o^^,^,  ^^_  J^,-. 
fire^L.  (24). 

first  J^l.  forgive  (to)  lit  mj?/".  e. 

fit  J^^  ^/«^.  Jjl.  forgiving  J^. 


Glossary  A. 


G        o  ^  '         ^  ^ 

forgiveness  (to  beg)  ^ac  X,     gift  v^^yo  i?/-  J^U>o  (23). 
form  »\^  ^/.  JJii  (4).  5^e  a/50  prophecy. 


four  l^^l  §§  91,  92«. 
fourth  i^ir. 

s        ^ 
friend  v^^^Lo  (see  p.  85*). 

—  of   God  =  Abraham 

G 

—  intimate    ^jt\.o   i?/. 
iSUiT  (18). 

G  '' 

friendly  L-LdaJ. 


girl  xj^Lc^.  -^ 

give  (to)  Lkc  /r  w;e7A  two  / 
ace.  —  to  give  way  inf. 

G         9     , 

glad  see  tidings. 


G    ^0- 


from  jsr^jt?.  ^/». 


fruit  5 


>^. 


glance  1^  ;?/.  JLiiJ  (17). 
glorify  (to)  ^j^  II. 

glorious  y^Li  elat.  §  63  &. 

glory  J^. 

go  round  (to)  'TIS  med.  .. 

—  to  go  away  Cf^c> 
impf.   a.   —   to  go    on 

^^^iuo  impf.  i.  —  to  go 


future  life  see  life, 
gain  (to  make) 

G  o  ^ 

game  Joua. 

Go"  ® 

garment  o*i*  pi  J\jLi  (9). 
gate  voLj. 
gate-keeper  ^->Lj. 
gather  up  (to)  iaJLl  VIII. 
get  to  (to)  ^J  F///  W27^ 

J|.  —  to  get  through     gold-piece  .Uj^  ;?/.  §90  A:, 
•la a  e/Wj9/.  «.  good  /?omw  «w<?  adj\  l^k 


out    "  Ii».   impf  u.  — 

to  let  go  J^^.  IV. 
goblet  "  ji. 
god^l;  God  kill,  by  God  / 


5JU1;. 


G.  ^ 


Glossary  A. 


89* 


elat.  id.  —  to  be  good 

Jwww^^  impf.  u.  —  to 
make  good  toLb  med. 
IV. 


government 


a 


or 


\ 


2LwV 


governor 


grandee  viLU  pL  §  88,  10. 

grant    (to)    JiaJi  IV  rviih 
two  accus. 

grateful  (to  be)  jCi  impf.  u, 
great  luJ.  —  to  be,  be- 
come great  ySimpf,  u. 
green  (fresh)  Zj^y 

Q    ■^   ^ 

greeting  j.iLw. 
guard  (to)   ^L.o  med.  ^; 
inf.  ^yO. 

Go  - 

guest  <wft-co. 
hand  J^S  §  90r. 


9  -    -- 

al-Harit  ^d)>Lil. 
Harun  ar-Rashid 


u^; 


Li 


hate  ijaJU' 

have  (to),  25  expressed  by 
the  subject  in  the  dative 
{with  J)  followed  by  the 

object  in  the  nom.   (as 

G 

JLo  aJ  he  has  money); 
occasionally  a  form  of 

/.li^to  be  stands  before 

the  subject  (as  gj  ^\y 

G 

JLo  he  had  money).  — 
not  to  have  either  as  i?i 
the    last    example,    but 

with  jjIJJ  (§  50)  instead 

of  ^ly  ( jl;  ^  ^0 

or  y  with  following  ob- 
ject (§  111)  and  dative 

of  subject  (aJ   JLo   ^). 

he  IjD  §  12 «.  —  he  who 

G^- 

head  \jt^\y 

hear  (to)  i^  wz;?/.  a,  inf 


:Lma'« 


CT" 


G      *  -  ^      5  > 

heart  ,.^'  ;?/.  J^*i  (10). 


90^ 


Glossary  A. 
I 


^\ 


heaven   gU**-  P^- 

§76  6. 
heir  part.  act.  of  vd>x«  pi 


&j 


V 


(6). 


hell-fire  jllil 

help  (to)  l^aS  impf,  u.  — 
to  demand  help  of  ^Lt 
med.  ,  X  with  l-j. 

Heraclius  J^*j^. 

high  ^i. 

holy  see  war. 

hope  for  (to)  Li.r  mjo/.  w, 
72;«Y^  ace. 

horse  ab|j. 

horsemen  co//.  Jui. 

house  ouo. 


hunt  (to)  5Lo  »«^^.  ^.  — 
to  go  forth  to  hunt  id.  V. 

hunt,  chase  Jy^^.        ^ 
hurry  (to)  J^^scr:  //. 

al-Husain  jj.lwwwi|. 

hypocrisy  (religious)  ^Lj.. 

hypocrite    part.    act.    of 


ILil. 


///. 


how  yJu^. 

however  ^j^^.  i^ith  follg 

verb. 
humhle  (to  be)  *^.  VI. 

hungry  part.  act.  of  cU^     in  prep.  ^^ 


Ignorance  J  ^^- 

ignorantj9«r^.  «c^.  o/'J^:^.. 

idea  ^jixi  J9/.  Jk^LAXj(23). 

if  ^1  §  159;  in  hypothe- 
tical clauses  J  rvith  the 
perf.  —  if  anyone  ^ 
§  159. 

0 

illustrious   Jl-a-A«:^   elat. 

§  63  &. 
imperfection  inf.  of  viyU 


me<Z.  ^  r/. 


me^. 


^•«. 


incumbent  on  (to  be)  ^^jj^^ 


hundred  ibLo  §§  91,  92<?.         .ewp/:  i,  with  ^  §  40«. 


Glossary  A. 


91- 


c^  ^   -r    CI    "^ 

indicate  (to)  JS  impf.  u,     Islam  *^Lu/^!. 

with  J<£.' 
indication  JuJ5. 

s  -  ^ 
indigestion  jv*^- 

inform  (to)  waS.  /F. 

inhabit  (to)  jjXw  mj:?/.  w. 

inhabitants  Jkjcj. 

inquire    concerning    (to) 


Israel  JuoillL 
Jalal  ad-din  ^jj jJI  J^L^. 
Jerusalem  jj^^JuLfj. 
Jews  (the)  coU.  oJ^S. 
join  (to)  (^i  2/wjt?/.  «,  7i>?7^ 


^Ci  X  with  ^. 


Jonah 


LT*^^.- 


intelligent   part,    act.    of    Joseph 
interior  » 


UAaa/0< 


joy 


'T^-r' 


)^r: 


justice  Jj^. 


interrupted  (to  be)    JaS 

j^jj  ^         keep  from  (to 


VIl. 

intimate  see  friend, 
into  prep.  ^^. 


)   «Lc  impf. 
«,  with  ace,  and  ^jo. 
keep  intact  (to)    Jh  IV. 


invest  (to)    anyone   with  kill  (to)  JiS  impf.  u. 

lU  impf  a,  with  JS  kindle^  (to)  Ji^  impf  i. 

ofpers.and  ace.  of  thing,  king  viXLc. 

inviolability  jLol4-.  kingdom  iXX^. 

invite  to   (to)   Li<>  impf  kiss  (to)  J^o  //. 

u,  with  J  I.  knock  (to)  at  the  door  of 


92* 


Glossary  A. 


^i'4>  impf.  u,  with  J<^ 
of  per  s,  and  ace.  of  door. 

know   (to)    IXd   imp/',   a; 

olt  imp,  i  (no.  132), 

^rS  impf.  i  (no.  73). 

knowing  ^«r^.  «c^.  of^J^; 
elat.  §  63  &. 

Koran  ^jLiiJ!. 

lack  j»Jl£. 

lamp  t\y^' 

laugh  (to)  dl^  /mjt?/.  a.  — 

to  laugh  at  id.  roiili  ^^ 

—  to  make  laugh  id. 
IV  with  vo  of  means. 

law-code  i^y^. 
lawful  (to  be)  Jl^.  impf.  i, 
lead  (to)  S\j  med.  .. 
leader  see  prayer, 
learn  (to)  JL&  V. 
learned    (CaJLc    pi    i-'^Jtl 

(20). 
learning  IjL^. 


leave,  leave  off  (to)  ^3 
impf.  u. 

let  (to)  c  5  •  impf  tt  §  40  «. 
liar  (to  declare  anyone  to 
be  a)  ^^dS  11. 

liberal  ^^ . 

lie,   tell   a    lie  (to)  04>i^ 

fm/?/.  2';  2w/'.  to  Jo. 
life  (the  future,  next  world) 


'7^ 


^!. 


life-time  sLvi. 
light  (to)      ^  IV.  —  to 
give  light  to  -Ajo  med. 


IV,  with  J. 


like  (like  as)^re/?.  ^;  conj. 

\^(withvb.sent.),^\  uS 
{nom.  sent.). 

likeness  Jouo. 

6 

little  JoJU. 

live  (to)  yili  we^.  ^. 

living  ^. 

G 

long  Ju^. 


Glossary  A. 
long  for  (to)  (J  Li  med,  . 


OF  THB 

"O-NiVERSI'] 


VIII,  with  Jl. 
look  at  (to)  Jh^  impf.  u, 

with  J|. — to  look  down 
ijjo  IV,  —  to  look  into 

JLb  VIII,  with  ^  §  25, 
note. 

lord  Cjy 

love,  fall  in  love  with  (to) 

J„^^  IV,  with  ace, 
love  v«^u&.. 
loving  inf.  au^- 
lower  (to)  ijai.  impf.  u. 
lust  »jJ:.y  —  lusts  oll-g-cb 


antith.  to  woman  (nos. 
2,  43,  102),  §  90  e. 

manifest  j^flrr?.    act.    ^L 


m^</.  ,c  /F. 


mankind  coll.  y*<UJ!. 

manner  a^-. 

marry  (to)  ^jv  me<?.  ^   F. 

Mary  j^pi. 

meat  li. 

Mecca   iUoo. 

medicine  v^^^* 

meet  (to)  ^aJ  2>w/?/'.  a, 

mention  (to)  Sb  impf.  u, 

mien  JaJLx).  "* 

make,  make  to  be  (to)  Joii.     mighty  jva^  ^/«t  §  63&.  . 

impf.a.  (with  two  accus.).        .„  s^    ^  ,  <: 

mill  Rjy^Lb. 

-to  make  (poetry)  JU^     mindful  of  (to   be)   SS 


G,  ^^ 


med. 
malady  *L^. 
al-Ma'mun  ^^LJI. 

G  G 

man  ^.  pi.  JLii  (9);  gljo 


ji^^o^ 


emp/.  w,  /t'?^^  ace. 

G^     o   J 

miracle  sC^sjo. 
misfortune      aU^^.^ 
J^US  (25). 


;?^. 


94* 


Glossary  A. 


0         "  i 

Muzahim  rv^lyo. 


naked   j^^r^  /^^* 


modesty  eL^. 

moment  (this)  R^LUt. 

money  JU.  —  piece  of     name  ^.^t 

money  ^^.j  pi.  JJlati     narrow  (^jyo  (=  (Jj^a-o) 

(23). 


elat. 


9  0 


Go- 


month  w.g-Cw. 
morning  (early)  S^Xj. 
morrow,   to-morrow  Jlc. 
Moses  ^y^' 
mosque  tX:^iU). 
most  elat,  of  much. 

9^^ 

mountain  JJ^. 

much  ,^^ elat,  §  63&.  — 

to  be  much,  abundant     ^^^^^  J^; 

^Ir ^m;?/.  t/.  -  to  make     ^^^^^^^  r^/ 
much  Ja^IV.  ^• 

al-Mugira  5wa*4.J|. 
Muhammed  tX^.^. 
music  cU-l. 
Muslim  (to  become  a)  JLw 

/r.  —  Muslim  id.  part. 

act. 


nature  «lb  ^/.  §  88,  9. 
near  (to  place)  ^ JJ  //. 
needle  s^l. 
neighbour  ^Li-. 

9 

niggardly  Ju^..  —  to  de- 
clare  anyone  to  be  n. 

So, 

niggardliness  J^si. 


nobles  coll. 


not  5^e  §  150. 

now  conj.  o- 

nutriment  v:^)  J>. 

0!  G  §  85;  «/50  \j^\, 

obedient  to  (to  be)  v:iis 
impf.  u,  with  J. 


Glossary  A. 


95^ 


observe  (to)  yj^  VIII, 
occasion     (as     a    conse- 
quence) (to)  v-aa^  jy, 

with  two  accus. 
Omar  S^.. 
on  acount  oi  prep.  J. 
one    as   pronoun   or   adj. 

J^L   fern,   i ;    with 

pron.  suffix  J^|. 
only  Lis  I. 
onslaught  ^^b. 
open  (to)   ^Jl  impf.   a; 

inf.  ^^Xi. 

opinion  (to    be   of)    ^\\ 
impf.  a,  §  49  &. 

or  ^|. 

other  lil. 

overtake  (to)  J.t>  IV. 

owner    v«^Lo  pi.    JLiil 

(17). 

page  boy  ^'%^. 

Paradise  eUi|. 


pardon  (to)  Li^  impf  u, 

with  jLc. 
part     (=     some)      u^jl? 

(§  133). 
pass  on  (to  let)  vL^  med. 

pearls  coll.  J  J. 
pebble  SLa^. 
people  JL5^|. 
perhaps  JjJ  §  147 «. 

perish  (to)  viiLo  impf.  i; 
—  to  cause  to  p.  id.  IV. 
person  (man)  ^Luil. 
Pharao  ^Icwi. 

9         " 

physician  v^aaaIc. 


pick  up  (to)  iail  impf  u. 
piece,  see  §  73  c. 
piety  xSL^. 
place  (occasion)  ^j^po ;?/. 

jL^lii  (23). 
place    (to)    «^r  /mp/.  a. 

§  40  «.  i-. 

i 


96' 


Glossary  A. 


plants  coll  viLo  (masc). 

please  (to)  v-,*.^'^  ^^'  — 

to  be  well  pleased  with 

"IaoT  imp/',  a.  with  ,j^. 
pleasure  H  jJ  pi  §  76. 
pliancy  ^^^ 


(§    83).     direction    of 

prayer  xJUs. — leader  of 

prayer  JJo\^ 

preach  to  (to)  CJoL^  impf, 

u,  with  ace. 
precede  (to)  j.Jo  V, 


poem,  poetry ^i^p/.  jUit     prepare  (to)  ^^  IV, 


»-4.s  i^  i?/. 


Vo 


(17). 
poet  j-fcLii- 

poison  jvwu. 
polite  scholar 

i%il  (20). 
poor    lOi  i?^.  i^'^Ui  (20) 
possessor    .6,   /<2»J 

§  90  /. 

poverty  Jii. 

power  sJ}. 

praise  (to)  tX^^  ernp/'.  «. 

praise  (God)  J^3. 

pray  (to)  ^Le  //. 

prayer     s^Lo    (=    H^-Lo 


6  »' 


§  43  note)  pi  ^\Juo 


presence  Sw*d^. 

present  (gift)  aULo  (2^/*.  of 

preserve  (to)  ia^L  impf.  a. 
pride  JS. 

prince  y^S  pi  i>'^kx9  (20). 
prison  jj«^JLw. 

G    o^ 

promise  Jc^.. 
prophecy  (gift  of)  S^.  — 
to  pretend  to  prophecy 

to  V. 

prophet   ^AJ  i?/..  f^^^il. 

(18). 
prostrate  oneself  (to)  d^ 

impf  u. 


Glossary  A. 


97^ 


protect  (to)  jIC^  impf,  u,  u     reflection  itif,  of  Jo  V, 

provide  for  (to)  ,iCr  impf.     refuse  (to)  ^|  impf.  a.  - 
w,  with  two  accus. 

punishment  abJit. 
purify  (to)  .  (^  U  //.  —  to 


oneself  id  V. 

purse  'iy^. 

pursue  (to)  mj3  VIII. 

^  y  ^ 

put  (to)  Jljl^  impf.  a.  — 
to  put  off  till  ^T  //. 


with  J. 
qualify  (to)  inf.  k^^ 
raise,   raise   up   (to) 


r 


impf,  a;  inf. 


G  u^ 


& 


Ramadan  ^Ld^Sr. 
ar-Rashid  Joui  J|. 
reach  (to)  e),^  IV. 
read  (to)  |^*  impf.  a. 


to  r.  to  do,  id.  with  ^  | 
and  subj. 

regard,  with  r.  to  ^. 

regret  *Jo. 

relate  (to)  ^J^  impf.  i, 

related  to  v_>Jw5  rvith  ^jo. 

reliance  inf.  VIII,  see  rely. 

religion    ^^.3. 

rely  on  (to)  Jl5^  VIII,  with 

JS  §40^. 

repel  (to)  S\  impf.  u. 

repent  (to)  CjLS  med.  .. 

repentance  iLoljJ. 

report  yxL- 

reproach  (to)  l^f  »»«</.  .. 


,    ^     ^  ^   ^  restore  (to)  -^1*  med.  ,  /F. 

recede  from  (to)  Jul?  2/w/?/.  C  ^      ^^  -^ 

restrain  from  (to)  JjiS'impf. 


a,  with  Jwxj. 

recite  (to)  Q*  m^/.  «. 
reed-pen  jJLr. 

Socin,  Arabic  Grammar.* 


u.  with  ace.  and  ^i.  — 
to  r.  one's  self  from  id. 


with 


u^' 


98* 


(tlossary  a, 


resurrection  X/jLii'. 

return  to  (to)  iiT  impf.  i, 
with  J, I. 

right  (due)  (S-i- 

9 

right,  right  hand  jjjy^j. 
rise  in  value(to)  ^£  mjo/*.  w. 
root  v-ftA*w. 

routed  (to  be)  *yc  F//. 
rule  (to)  (j^Lw  me^.  .. 
run  races  (to)  ^^j^  VIII, 
saddle  (of  an  ass)  ilcOwj. 
—   saddle-girth  *lw^. 
safe  (to  be)  IJLl  mj?/!  «. 

as-Saffah     \juJi\. 

9    f 

salt  ^>J^. 

save  (to)  jvJLav  //. 

say  (to)  JU  »i^^.  ..  —  to 
say  of  anyone,  id.  with 

^jx.  —  to  s.  to  anyone, 
id.  with  J. 

scatter  (to)  *.aj  impf.  u,  i. 


sea 


7^- 


second  ^b. 

secret^  jp/.  JL*il  (17). 

9  -^ 

security  ^\^. 

see  (to)  ^^\Umpf.  a,  §  49  ^. 

seedy  part,  pass,  of  ^^is^. 

seek  (to)  vj^lij  2^^?/.  w.  — 
to  seek  for  one's  self,id.  V. 

seemly  (to  be)  ^  VII. 

seize  (to)  Os^S  impf.  u. 

self  jjliS  §  12  e. 

send  (to)  Jlu/^  /F;  for 
ujLLss-,*  with  v^. 

serpent  ^Loii'. 

9  o  ^ 

servant  (i.  e.  of  God)  jJx 

;?/.  jlii  (9). 
serve   wine   to   (to)   ,-£1 

impf.  2,  w;?Y^  ^w'O  ace. 

set  about  (to)  ^Lo  med.  ^, 
with  impf.  §  99  note  a. 
seventy  ^yju,^. 
shadow  JlIo. 


Glossary  A. 


99^ 


shift  (to)  \S Jc  impf.  i. 

ship   iLUJ^. 

shirt  u^flj^j*. 
shoulder  ._<?>< 
sign  ibi  jt?/.  §  76. 
silent  (to  be)  inf.  v^^^^o. 

9 

sin  x^jlU^. 

singing  (art  of)  gllc. 

sit   with   (to)   (jjJLai-    ///, 

.       .?-.  r. 
size  2ocb. 

slave  vJ^Xi^  ;>/.    Ja^Ux 

(27).—  slave-girl  LsLi 

;>/.  ^\yl  (24). 

sleep,  go  to  sleep  (to)  ILS 
me^. .,  impf.  a; part.  act. 
pL  §  88,  9. 

small  jj^^o.  —  to  become 

s.  ykuc  impf  a. 

smoke  ^^LLt>. 

snow   Jo. 

so  conj.  o- 


sober  j9«r/.  act.  of  lis?. 


J        --  O    5 


Socrates    t^Lffw 

solicitude  iUiC. 

son  ^j  §   90  &   (pluralis 

sanus    with    names    of 
tribes). 

songxAAili?/.^Ul(Jk^Lil). 

S  o  J 

sorrow  j^y^. 

spare  (to)  "^  ^,  §  49  c. 

Go' 

speech  J^'. 

spend  (to)   {of  time)  inf. 

spirit     ^^y 

staff  Lai. 

stand  (to)  Ili  m^^. . ;  part, 
act.  pi.  §  S^,  9.  —  to 

stand  still  \Jii\  impf  i. 

star  1^. 

start  off  (to)  &s^^  V.  rv.^\. 

stay  (to)  *U*  med.  .  /r\ 

steal  (to)  iVv.!  //TJs;?/'.  /. 

g:^ 
stratagem  iiJLya.. 


100* 


Glossary  A. 


stream  JlLw. 
strength  J^:^. 
Su'ba  iujUw. 

w 

submissive  (to  be)  J 3   V- 
subsistence  ^\y 

sufficiency  xjLa^ 

supplication  g.LcO. 
surely  J  (after  ^p. 
tail  ^b, 

r  ^  * 

take  (to)  tX^I  impf.  u.  — 
(of  a  city)  Ij3  2>w/?/.  «. 

to  t.  away  ^^b  impf.  a. 
with  <^.  —  to  t.  hold  of 

tXis.|  imjpf.  w,  with  ^. 

talk  to  (to)  ^)6  II,  with 
ace.  —  to  t.  to  one  an- 
other, id.  V. 

talk  lis. 

tattle  ihJii' 

teach  (to)  JLd  //,  with  two 
accus. 


ten  ^A.c  §§  91,  92  a. 

than  J^  §  63  &. 

that  j9ro;2.  siJUo  §  13  c. 

that  (in  order  that)  J  with 

sulj,  §  100. 

that    conj.    ^\   {he fore   a 

verh)  §  148&;  ^.j  {before 
a  noun)  §  147  a. 

that  which  Lo. 

then  o. 

thereupon  j^*. 

thief  (jLl  j9/.  j^  (10). 

thing  g^  jy/.  JLiil  (17) 
but  without  the  nuna- 

tion  illcil. 
think  (to)  J^ii  impf.  w,  w;/^^ 

two  accus.yinf.  j^wiij. 
third  Ijb  §  93  a. 
thirty  j^j^'^i  §§  91,  92&. 
this  Ij^  §  13&. 


Thora  (the)  sljyd 


those  who  ^  §  14  &. 
thou  viol. 

6  " 

thought  Jo. 


Glossary  A.  101* 

transitory ;?ar^.  act  of  ^i, 
travel  (to)  TLL  med.  ^. 
treasure  iUjj^. 
tree  Sw^^. 

tribe  iiJLuJ'i?/.  JoLii  (25). 
trick  iiJL*^. 


three  ^^  §§  91,  92«. 

through    (by    means    of) 

prep.  ^. 

throw  away  (to)  ^J  impf,     ^^^^^  I^Lif; 

i.  —  to  throw  down  ,  JlI      ^     ^,      s  o 

*^        truth  ,  vJco. 

tidings,  to  give  glad  tid-     turn  (to)  JUo  med.  ^ 
ings    to   anyone   of    a 
thing  yj^  11^  with  ace. 


VL 


of  pers.  and  \^. 
time^^lJov. — (proper)  time 


to  turn  from  ^y^ 
with  Jwft.  —  to  t.  away 
{act.)  t>r  impf.  u.  —  to 
t.  away  from  (neut.)  ^^ 
//,  with  ^jc. 

twinkling  xU-L. 
'Ubaid  Juu.£. 

9      ^  G 

Ugly  ^.o  A^-  ii— • 


tipsy  ,j!^. 
title-page  ^lyi-^. 
to    {direction)   prep.    Jl^; 
(52>;i  of  the  dative)  J. 

tongue  ^UJ;?/. xl*il (1&).  unbeliever  p«r^.  <zc^.  of  ysS 

towards  prep.  J[,  i?^.  §  "76. 

transgression     ^1^3 3     p/.  uncover  (to)  UiMimpf.  i. 

JjAi  (10).  understanding  Jkii£. 


102* 


Glossaky  a. 


unmindful  of  (to  be)  ^Lw. 

V,  with  ^^. 

until  conj.  ^^  generally 
with  subj.  (cf.  §  152  c). 

upon  prep.  ^y. 

used  to  ^\\y  med.  .  with 
follg.  impf.  §  99(7;  subj. 
gen.  betw,  ^\S' and  impf. 

value  'L^. 

vehemence  HlX^. 

vehement  v«L^Li. 

verily  ^(§§147,  96^. 

viand  Jdiii?/.aUULLo(28). 

9  -^ 

violent  JotXw. 

wade  through  (to)  ,j^L^ 

med.  .,  w^iY^  «cc. 
want  (to)  oK  wc<?.  .  -^^. 
want  ki^Li. 


.     6    I  -^    ^         9 

waste  woLd  /<?»».  X_l_.  —  to 


render  waste 


'7^ 


II. 


water  eLo  §  90^. 
well  sl^s*.. 

well-pleased  5^e  please. 
West  Cjyiuo. 

whale  (oj^s*.. 

what  r^/.  inter r.  Lo. 

when  re/,  interr.  Joo ;  cow/. 

iSt  §  158. 
where? 


c>^. 


j.    —     from 


where, whence ^^o I  ^j^. 

.  *-' 
which  re/«^.  ^5  jJI« 

whichever  ^c,\  §  14c. 

9  ^   ^ 

while  (a)  xcLL. 

whilst  cf.  §  157. 

who  rel  (^tXJf ;  interr.  ^jjo. 


war   (holy)   m/.   JLii   0/*    whoever,  whoso  ^jjo§§  14  &, 
0^  /i/.  '  159. 


Waraka  Si 


whole 


';r 


2^- 


wash  (to)  Julc  ?;wi?/*.  /.         why?  IJ;  why  then?  I  j  UJ. 


wick  iJLj  j. 
wickedness  ww. 
will  (to)  ^LaO  med. 
wind  ^s  fern,  §  72 


Glossary  A. 

word   aUJL^ 


103* 


wme 


wisdom  aUX^. 


work  Jux  /?/.  JLiil  (17). 
world  (the,  this)  UjjJI. 

2  " 

worst  wCi  §  63  note, 
write  to  (to)  .^^^impf.  u, 
with  J  I. 

wise  jCxXi  pi'  i^^Jii  (20).     wrong    (to,    to    do)    lUo' 
wish  (to)  ols  /w^^.  ^  ^^-  ^'wp/'.  i;  inf,  jJLJi?. 

with  «jo  (in  company  w.) ; 
(^    (in    union    w.,    by 
means  of), 
without  yjJu  {with  gen.). 
woe  to!  ij  Jo., 
wolf 


Yazid 


9f^o.  9fo- 

woman    slyol,     si 


plur.  gLlj  §  90/: 

9      J  St' 

wood    4>yt.   —  piece   of     youth  J^ks. 

9  o^ 

Zaid  tX->\. 


zid  Ju'o. 

ye  (wOl. 

9-»  -- 

year  xju*,  i?/.  §  90  m. 

yes  |US. 

young  luLo  ^/«^.  §  63  b. 

pL  Jl^uT  (23). 
young  man  ^Xi  p/.  ,j^^ 

(21). 


wood  Sjuww^. 


104* 


Glossary  B. 


GLOSSAEY  B. 


I  pari,  inter r.  often  before 
the  first  half  of  an 
alternative  question. 

4>l  s^.  c.^jf(§  90  «)  father. 
Jol  impf.  i  to  stay,  remain. 

I  Jo  I  adv.  always,  for 
ever;  with  neg.  never. 

^^1  impf.  i  to  run  away. 

^^ 

^i  impf.  i;  c.  ace.  come, 

come  to.  c.acc.  p.  et\^ 

r.    to    bring,    to    give 
somethg.  to  some  one. 


r 


5 1  impf.  w  to  make  an  im- 


pression. 

^'1  ph  sli'l  trace,  sign, 
mark. 


7^ 


&►!  wages,  hire,  reward. 


i^^Sfem.  ^tX^I^ one, some 
one. 

^\  (§90c)i?/i^prother, 
neighbour. 

tXi^l  /mjo/.  w  to  take,  to 
sieze,  catch  hold  of. 

VIII io  make;  w.  2  Ace. 
to   adopt,  regard  (as). 

yc^\  //to  put  off,  postpone, 
end 


i.|  the  last,  second, 


9    ,      -^o- 


Hw^!^f  I  the  next  world. 


r' 


fern. 


^r- 


I  other. 


.;>|  V  to  conduct  one's 
self  with  propriety. 

i^4>|  good  breeding, 
politeness,  education, 
polite  reproof. 


Glossary  B. 


105^ 


'iJ^^\   vessel  for    holding     ^JjjCw^l  I  (the  Arabs  have 


water,  made  of  skins. 

j^<>|  //  to  pay  (tribute). 

61  lo!  see!  when  lo! 

131    conj.  when,    if;    adv. 
lo!  see! 


treated  the  first  two 
letters  of  the  name  as 
the  article)  Alexander. 

jbsJoJCw^f!  Alexandria. 


^ol/mi?/.  «;  c.  Jpers.  et     ^f  ^^e  root,    the  chief 


v^  ret  to  allow,  permit. 
X  to  ask  permission. 

^'o\  pi  ^\'o\  ear. 
j.<>l  m/.  /permission. 
^^61  /rto  injure,  molest. 

,^c>N^I  Jordan,  the  Jor- 
dan district. 

jujjJLbUa-wxl  Aristotle. 

^.  I  /<em.  earth,  land,  coun- 
try, ground. 


LT 


Lll  foundation. 

,1  /mp/'.  2  to  tie ,   bind, 
take  captive. 


yA.M; 


I  a  captive. 


thing. 

^\  pl.  ^Ul  region,  di- 
strict. 

jvxiii   pi    (vJUl    (xXT(xa) 

region,  country. 

J^l  rto  gather  strength, 
become  confirmed. 

J^l  zmp/.  If  to  eat;  to  get 
to  eat. 

///  to  eat  with  some 
one. 

Go* 

J^  I  inf.  I  eating. 

^   '  ^^ 

J^Li  various  kinds 

of  food. 
y  I  part,  composed  of  ^\ 
and  Sf. 


106* 


Glossary  B. 


'(§  151). 
^SJirem.^ii^Ua)  he 
that ;  whoso,  who,which. 
^ftjl  impf.    a   to   become 
familiar  with  .  . . 

VIII to  be  on  intimate 
terms ,  familiarly  ac- 
quainted (with). 

<^li?/.  o!^l!  or  0^1 
thousand. 

^  J  |intimate,f amiliar . 

IJI  /m/?/*.  «  to  feel,  suffer 
pain. 

(^1  painful. 

iJl^jt?/.  x.^1  a  god. 

'jd}\  ex  jfe^  Jl    (the 

true)  God,  Allah.  Ju.^ 

ill  <« 
^JJ|  name  of  a   man. 

^^ijf  0  God! 

^1  prep,  (§  96  &)  towards, 
in  the  direction  of,  to, 
till,  ns  far  as. 


*!  part,  interr,  or. 

*|  //wj?/".  u,  to  direct  one's 
course  by  something. 

*!  j3/.  cjLgjoi  mother. 

x/jj  the  people  of  a 
(particular)  religion, 
nation,  people. 

yjo\  impf.  w,  c.  ace.  p.  et  o 
r.  to  order,  command. 

pl  command,  power ; 

affair,  matter.    ^,^^\Jo 

1^1  commander. 

i|     commander. 


prince. 


jjjOx)^!  *jl«  I  the  prince 

of  the  (true)  believers, 
commander  of  the  faith- 
ful =  the  Caliph. 

^joj  m;?/*.  «,  c.  ace.  to  be 

safe  from  . .  . 
IV  io  believe. 

kaS  pi.  |l;ol  female  slave. 

iiUjo|Umayya(man's  name). 


Glossary  B. 


107* 


.  i 


^1  (§  100,  148&)  that.  J^t  Aw.  J^l  ^rst  {determ, 

'r(§§  147,  148  «)  that.  «^^^  beginning.) 

^i  (§§  159,  160)  if.  y^lgen.andacc.  J^|t;.^j. 

^1  (§147)  lo!  truly,  verily  ^f^«^^. where?  whither? 
(often  untranslatable). 


bl  pron.  (§  12)  I. 
v::AJli?^o/e.;  fern,  ool,  thou. 
^j^l  impf,  a  to  have  fami- 
liar intercourse  with. 
^J^\  coll,  ,j*.b  man. 
1.^1  nose. 
Ujt  j9flrr^    (composed   of 

^.1^  and  Lo)  only  (refers 
in  this  sense  usually  to 
last  word  of  sentence), 
but. 

^\  part,  whence?  how? 

IS. 

,,^\  V  c.  J  ret  to  equip 
one's  self,  to  be  prepar- 
ed (for  any  thing). 

Jjcl  coll.  one's  kinsfolk, 
family,  people  (cf.§  133), 
inhabitants. 


•  jjol  ^Xl  whither?  ^ 
^1  (from)  whence  ? 
where  ? 

abl  sign,  revelation. 

-a* 

L^l  (§  85)  particle  of  ex- 
clamation. 

^j  prap.  in,  on,  at ;  with,  by 
means  of;  for  (of  price), 
by  (in  oaths).  i»_5  1;d  |  jl 
lo!  there  was  ... 

JuLj  Babylon,  Babylonia. 

U-^  iT^pf'  u  to  be  brave, 
courageous. 

yj^b  courage,strength, 
power. 

y^s.2  sea,  great  river. 

Ijo  /tw;?/*.  «  to  begin. 


108* 


Glossary  B. 


J  Jo  lie  ace.  to  exchange, 
alter,  change. 
X  e.  ace.  et  \^  to  take 

something  in  exchange 
for  (something  else). 

1,  ^  impf.  a  to  go  away, 

cease. 

y^2  II.  e  ace.  pers.  et  u^ 

r.  to  tell  some  one 
something  as  a  piece  of 
good  news. 

Z^   or    'ij^al    to    glance, 

perceive;  to  understand 
something  thoroughly. 

yj>£L^  pl  >Lojf  glance, 
intelligence. 

.U"^  to  come  too  late. 
IV  to  delay. 
X  to   find  that  sthg. 
comes  too  late. 

^jjaj  belly;  bottom  (of  a 
valley). 

iUkj  repletion. 


(^.bLj  J9/.  ^j-ifip  the 
lowest  part;  the  heart 
or  secret  thoughts  of 
a  person. 

J  impf.  a  to  arouse, 
awaken;  to  send. 

tXxj  impf.  u  or  tXau  impf. 
a  to  be  distant,  far  off. 
VI  to  be  far  distant 
from  each  other. 

jLjiI  prep,  after,  after 
the    departure ,    death 

of  .  .  .  tX«j  ^    after 

the  death  of. 

(jojl:    one   (§  133),   part, 
portion;  some  (of). 

ijdJu  impf.  a  io  hate. 
(jcju  hatred. 

S  -   o* 

iiL«dij    ?^.,     state    of 
being  hated. 
iLoju  hatred. 
^  impf.  i  to  seek,  strive. 


Glossary  B. 


109^ 


VII  to  be   necessary,      ^jS  impf.  i  to  build. 

^iL  inf. 


meet,  behoove. 

JfilJij  Hippocrates. 

^iu  impf.  a  to  remain,  re- 
main over,  continue  in 
life. 

s  U;  inf 


126)  pi,  illlt  son. 
XjJl,  v.:iL  (§  90  0  daughter. 
R^y^^^^  p/.  |wL^  animal,  a 

brute  beast. 


jG  ^1  Abu  Bekr,  name  ^\^pl.^\^\  gate,  door. 

of  the  first  Caliph.  viUIji^^-^LAj!,viUjliouse, 
^^  /m;?/:  2  to  weep.  family.         ^Ql 

Jjj  i?/.  ^Sk^  country,  vil-  treasury. 

lage(plur.  CO//. country).  £Lj  irnpf.  i  to  sell,  buy 


iJLj  ?Vwj9/.  w,  c.  flfcc.  to  reach, 
attain  to;  to  come  to 
one's  ears. 

y^guLftJb  Bilkis,  queen  of 
Sheba. 

^  impf.  u  to  try,  afflict. 

^j  j9«r^.  certainly;  nay, 
on  the  contrary. 

j^j  (^vT  Uj)  wherewith?  by 

what  means? 


inf  I  selling,  sale. 


^\S  med.  ^ 


IV  to  be  evi- 
dent. 

^    (§    114)    prep. 

o    -  ^    ^    c- 

between.  . .  •  ^tXj  ,j^ 
prop.  bet.  the  hands  of= 
before,  in  presence  of. 

Lijo  conj.  with  a  nom. 
sentence:  while,  whilst. 

iuli    evidence,  proof. 


110* 


Glossary  B. 


cy«jLj>  masc.  coffin. 


^to  be  well  arranged, 
be  in  good  order. 

l^impf. «,  c.  ace,  to  follow. 

IV  c.  2  ace.  to  make 

sthg.  follow,  to  attach 

sthg.  to,  some  one.  -x  -   ^  ^        i    i    i     • 

^L>  X  to  ask  help  in  se- 

VIII    to     follow,     en-      >      .._:„„ /u^..J^  „ 

deavour  to  aquire. 


li*  impf.  i  to  be  finished. 

*Uj'  perfect. 

Hw^jj  nom.  unit,  a  date. 

ab^^xJI  (§  2  ^  note.)  the 
Torah  (five  books  of 
Moses). 


curing  (blood)  revenge. 


Ji^*  prep,  under.  ^^ 
^^*  id. 

koiyj"  earth,  morsel  of 
earth. 

c)3  /^wjt?/".  1^  to  aban- 
don ,  leave ,  give  up, 
omit. 

^^iu  (cf.  ^^)  fern.  (or. 

^yAi  msc.)  piety. 
vdUb  fern.    (§   13  c)   that 

(woman). 

Go  G  ^         -.  -. 

iX-^ij  i?/.  5  js^^"  pupil, 
disciple. 


ouJ  /mjo/".  w  to  be  or  stand 
firm,  to  be  fixed. 
IV  to  fix,  establish. 

viiob  Elat.  ^^^j<^\  con- 
stant, fixed,  firm. 
Jc^'  /m/?/. «,  to  lose  a  child 

(fifcc.)  by  death  (said  of 
a  mother). 


M  ^     ^  ^ 


G     ^  ^  _ 

yi>!^j  /(?»i.  iu^*  three. 


«? 


Sy^wX 


cij^'   thirteen. 


jvi*  «^y.  thereupon,  then. 

Jo  em/?/".  2  to  bend. 

X  to    make    an    ex- 
ception of. 


Glossary  B. 


Ill 


_>5j  garment. 


jil^strength  of  character. 

9 

jo<\:^  new. 

i^iXss^  kid. 

vJitX^    VIII  to    draw    to 

oneself. 
y^  impf.  u  to  drag,  pull. 
impf.  i  to  run,  flow. 


^n 


ib^U;?/.^!^  (§89) 
female  slave,  young  girl. 

island ;  5  ^j;^  I  Meso- 


potamia. 

^C^  impf.  i  to  reward, 
requite. 

///to  pray  God  to  re- 
quite some  one  for  sthg. 

G   ^  ^ 

iXZ^  the  body. 

JoL^  to  place ;  make,  pre- 
pare; c,  2  ace.  to  make 
to  be  sthg.;  to  begin 
(§  99  note  a). 

._Q^  impf.  i  to  become  dry. 


LI^  impf.  u  to  be  rude. 

%\j^  inf.  tyranny. 

j^  impf.  i  to  be  great, 
powerful,  exalted. 

JuJLs^  great,  illustrious, 

sound  (in  judgment). 

aLlX^  might,  majesty. 

jJJLi  mj?/".  2  to  sit  down ; 
c.  J  to  give  an  audience. 

///  c.  ace.  to  sit  down 

by  some  one,  sit  with. 

9    ' } 
j^^JLs.  inf.  sitting. 

companion     one     sits 

with. 

9  „  . 

a  live  coal. 


'r^ 


cr 


impf.  a  to  bring  to- 


gether, gather,  collect. 


with   2 


,:y^ 


to  bring 


about  a  meeting  of  two 
parties,  to  have  them 
both  come  into  one's 
presence. 


112' 


Glossary  B. 


(also  without  ii,^U  and 
with  ^1)  to  decide  upon, 
resolve  to  do  sthg. 

VIII  to  come  together, 
to  assemble. 


If     ^ 


%ju^  the  whole,  all 

(L*jL«.^  as  ace.  of  con- 
dition: all  together). 

xiUi      a      number, 
party  (of  people). 

Jl^  to  be  beautiful. 

G 

J.A4^  beautiful,hand- 
some,  elegant,  kind. 

"w^  m/?/.  ?/  to  cover  over, 
conceal. 


J9/.  ^U:^  garden 


of  trees,  Paradise. 


.U^  interior,  heart, 
soul,  character. 


^L^  belonging  to  the 
demons,  a  demon. 

.j;i:i  VIII  to  avoid. 

G    "^  o 

v^^As^  side,    v^a:^    ^^ 
in  comparison  with. 
8\U:5:.   pi,   wUs*   corpse, 
funeral  bier. 

(^^^^impf.aioi  take  trouble 
about  sthg.,  exert  one's 
self. 

///  to  fight,  do  battle, 
esp.  w.  unbelievers  i.  e. 
non-Moslems. 

Jl^  impf.  «  to  be  igno- 
rant. xiL^  inf. 

G  G  a  , 

Ju^L^-  pl,  jLg.5^  igno- 
rant. 

Ga 

iUJLsoLi.  the  state  of 
ignorance,  i.  e.  (pre- 
islamic)  heathenism. 

hell. 


U^ 


coll.  demons,  Jinn. 


c^Ld.    rned. 


IV  c    ace. 


Glossary  B. 


pers.  et  ^\  r.  to  give  or 
grant  an  answer,  an 
audience  to  some  one, 
listen  to,  promise,  con- 
cede sthg.to  one,  comply 
with  his  request. 

Xto  hear,  in  the  sense 
of  answer  (a  petition). 

5Li.  med. .  to  be  generous. 

vLi  med.  .  c.  ace.  to  pass 

by. 

in  c.  ace.  to  pass 
beyond,  exceed,  trans- 
gress. 

cLi  med.  .  to  be  hungry. 

x^-^  {nom.  unit.  § 
73  c)  hunger. 

tL^  med.  ^,  c  ace.  to  come. 
e.  o  to  bring. 

2^  inf. 
^jioe^  army, 
^^o^  /r  to  love. 

JS^  love. 

Socin,  Arabic  Grrammar.* 


{elat.  v^il  c. 
jl  j9ro  </«?/2;.  pers.)  pi. 
ilx^l  dear  to  some 
one,  beloved,  friend. 

iujs?  love,  friendship. 
^-wi^JCi  Abyssinian. 

LLi  2^^/".  w  c.  f/cc.  pers.  et 
vo  re«  to  present  some 

one  with  sthg. 

^i^  until;  so  that;  for 
the  purpose  of;  {some- 
times  =  finally). 

^..a*.  impf.  u  to  make  the 
pilgrimage  to  Mecca. 

aUs\^  jt?/.  ^^3L^   the 
pilgrimage  to  M. 

2C^^   J9/.    ^^     good 

reason  or  excuse. 

vJXsv^  2/WJ9/*.  a  to  prevent, 
exclude. 

(^Lsx^  curtain,  veil. 
H 


114= 


Glossary  B. 


sl^:i^li  porter,  gate- 
keeper, chamberlain. 

cjtXi  mpf.  u  to  be  new. 

II  c.  ace.  pers.  to  in- 
form, relate. 

Zto  newly  adopt,  get 
stbg.  new. 

oocX^  a  story,  nar- 
rative (applied  esp.  to 
the  traditions  respect- 
ing Muhammed). 

r(\£>  m-pf.  «,  c.  ace.  vel  ^jjo 
to  be  on  one's  guard 
against  .  .  . 

9  ''  ^ 

X  jcs.  inf. 
i%d<^  inipf.  a  to  be  clever, 

skilled. 

IiO;I>)  vi)  iinpf. « to  be  free. 

lLi?^.xl^!  free,noble. 

s^^^  ///   to    make    war 

upon,  fight  with  some 

one. 

VI  to    carry    on  war 
with  each  other. 


Sli  impf.  i  to  strive  eager- 
ly after. 

i^y^   eagerness,   zeal, 
anger, 
^w^    //   c.    J.£,    r.    to 
incite  (to),  stir  up  (to). 

^IL  IV  to  burn,  singe. 

^1^  II  to  move,   to  stir 
up,  agitate. 

I'i.  impf.  u ,  c.  Js^  to  be 
forbidden  to  one,  to  be 
legally  prohibited  one. 
II  to  pronounce  un- 
lawful, declare  to  be  for- 
bidden, to  prohibit. 
J.'^  to  be  troubled,  sad. 
IV  to  trouble,  make 
sad. 
^^^^S^  impf.  u  to  reckon. 

^U^  reckoning. 
OJ^  impf  u  to  envy. 
Jwl/^  impf.  u  to  be  beauti- 
ful, good. 
7Fto  do  good. 


Glossary  B. 


115* 


X  to  find  to  be  good. 

^^u^^j^  beauty,  good- 
ness. 


-~3      ^     ^ 


elat. 
beautiful,  good. 

G  -^  - 

i^xi.^  coll.  suite,  servants, 
escort. 

-,  ^^  impf.  u,  c.  ace.  pers. 

vel  j<£.  to  be  present 
with  or  at. 

IV  io  bring  forward, 
esp.  to  bring  before  a 
sovereign  or  ruler. 

VIII  c.  ace.  to  come 
upon  one  (said  of  death). 
Pass,  to  be  near  to 
death. 


jLa.  impf.  u  to  surround. 

IXa.  impf.  i  to  dig. 

VIII  to  dig  for  one's 
self. 

fe.o^  impf  a  to  take  care 

of,  to  guard,  to  be  atten- 
tive. 


VIII  c.  <^  r.  to  take 
care,  give  heed. 

^^:^  impf  i  to  be  right. 

j£i  truth,  certainty; 
right,  claim. 

Jii  impf  u  to  be  despised. 
X  to  despise. 

yfji:^  despised. 

IXla.  impf  u  to  decide,  give 
judgement. 

x»C>  wisdom. 

|VS^  P^'  ^UX::*.  wise, 

learned. 

f^U^  i?/.    j.LX^    go- 
vernor, ruler,  judge. 
^la.  zm/?/.  i  io  relate. 

Jki  impf  u  to  loosen, 
untie;  impf  i  to  be  al- 
lowed. 

IV  or  X  to  pronounce 
sthg.  allowed,  declare 
lawful,  to  allow. 

Jc^  Fto  adorn  one's  self. 

H* 


116^ 


Glossary  B, 


|vi  (1.  pers.  v:iM.^)  impf,  a, 
to  be  hot. 

^♦:^  fern,  fever. 

I^aK^^  pigeon. 

d^L.  impf.  i  to  praise. 

S.^  Muharamed  (the 
praised  one). 

^^t"--  impf.  w  to  be  foolish. 

(i4.cb.|  foolish,  stupid. 
Jl*.^  impf.  ito  load,  carry ; 

bring ;  transport,  c.  J^ 


Till  c.  jl^  to  require, 
be  in  need  of. 

^^».L^  c.  v«3  need,  want ; 
c.  ^^\^  request. 

J^  prep,  round,  round 
about. 

Jl:^  state,  condition, 
situation. 

(^1^  impf.  i,  to  gather 
together,  take  posses- 
sion (of  everything). 


to  attack;  c.  ace.  pers.       "      impf.  §  49  c.  to  live. 
et  J^£.  r.  to  make  s.  o. 


sit   upon  sthg.;   to  in- 
cite to  some  action. 


to  commit  sm. 

F  to  purify  one's  self 
from  sin. 

Lj^  //  to  embalm. 

oUsi.^1  al-Ahnaf,  (a  man's 
name). 

^L^m^^.^/r^p.t(§44 

note  b)  c.  Jt  to  compel. 


-^  tribe,  clan. 

'iy.f^  life. 

impf.  u  to  be  bad, 
wicked. 

vi^uuX      bad,       vile, 
vicious,  profligate. 

IXi  //  c.  2  ace:  io  relate, 
tell  some  one  sthg. 

VIII    to     test,     try, 
prove. 


Glossary  B. 


117* 


1^^  pi  ^Llis-!     infor- 
mation, news,  affair. 


r^ 


well    informed, 


forward,  to  produce,  to 
expel. 
^  bring  out,  draw  out. 

^  tribute. 

^SL  impf.  i  to  make  bread,     ^yL  impf,  a  to  be  dumb, 
to  bake. 


wise. 


bread 


a  cake  of  bread, 


I£L.  impf.  i  to  seal  up,  put 
one's  seal  to. 

jL^pcX^  Hadiga  (Muham- 
med's  first  wife). 

Ijki  impf,  u  to  serve. 
2(x)J^  tnf. 

G   ^    -- 

*tX^   coll.  (tbe   staff 
of)  servants. 

*t>LL  a  servant. 

I^   impf.    i   to    prostrate 
one's  self,  to  fall  down. 

I,li  impf,  u  to  go   out, 
come  out,  go  out  from, 
depart  from. 
IV  to  bring  forth  or 


,  iw^  impf.  i  to  make  a 
hole  in,  to  pierce. 

VII  to  have  a  hole  put 
through,  be  pierced. 

VIII  to  break  through, 
flow  through. 

^Li  impf.  u  to  store  up. 
ii  fy^pl.^  Ci  treas- 
ure ,   treasure-house. 

^.Oci  impf  a,  c.  ace.   r. 

to  fear  sthg. 

[jaL^  impf.  u  to  be  some 
one's  special  property. 

^jfiL^,  coll.  iuflLb.  an 
intimate  friend;  persons 
of  distinction. 

^^^^J^dJ^  impf.  i  to  dye  (esp. 
the  hair). 


118* 


Glossary  B. 


v«A-ydj^  dyed. 

wwiik  IX  to  be  or  become 

green. 

^J^'^  impf,  a  to  sin. 

oLkil  al-Hattab  (a  man's 
name). 

v-di.  2wp/.  2  to  be  light 
(opp.  of  heavy). 

i^ftAAjb-  ^/.  ^.jLi.1  light. 

jJ-i^  impf.  u  to  be  ever- 
lasting, to  remain. 

cr^-i"-  ^-^^/ to  appropriate 
to  oneself  secretly. 

^jaXh^  II  c,  ace.  pei-s.   et 
\j.^  to  rescue,  to  free. 


<J.Xh.  impf.  u  to  be  behind, 
to  succeed. 
//  to  leave  behind. 
2^AUi^  pL  ilAX^  Ca- 
liph. 

(J-U.   impf.  u  to  create, 
form. 

C3-^  1)  one's  out- 
ward form;  2)  coll. 
people. 

^^X^pl.  (^-^is^f  one's 
(natural)  disposition, 
character,  mental  and 
moral  traits. 

J^  impf.  u  to  go  out  (of 
fire  and  light). 


JJ^  escape,  way  of    7^,*°^  ^"™""*- 

w.4.is.    /<?m.    fermented 
drink,  wine. 


escape. 

SaX^  Vlllprop.  to  become 
commingled;  to  come 
on  (said  of  the  darkness 
in  which  objects  can 
no  longer  be  disting- 
uished). 


^LL  med.  ^   (§42^;  44) 
impf.  a  to  fear. 

//  to  put  in  fear. 

\^^  tear, 
six  med.  ^  to  be  good. 


Glossary  B. 


119= 


VIII  to  choose,  select  Tj   coll.^    nom.   unit.    H^o, 
for  one's  self.  pearl. 

wx^  (also  as  ^/«^.) good  ^J^^>  IV  to  attain,  reach, 
(adj.  and  noun) ,  pro-  comprehend. 


sperity. 

JLL-  med.  (^  //to  imagine 
something. 

iri3  Darius. 

v«>t>  /wjo/.  2  to  walk  slowly. 

ib!t>  p/.  ^I«t>  beast  of 
burden  and  for  riding. 

o<S  IV  to  turn  one's  back, 
go  away. 

jL2».t>  c.  f/cc.  to  enter,  to 

come;  c.  JLd  to  come  to 
see  one,  to  consummate 
marriage  with  (coire) ; 

c.^^jj  to  interfere. 

IV  to  bring  into,  in- 
troduce. 

Jy.s^C>  inf.  I. 


|Ci;4>  i?/.  Jv?f;3  a  dirhem, 

a  silver  coin. 
^^.j  impf.  i  to  know, 
/r  cans. 

Lct>  /mj?/".  w  to  call,  to  call 
upon,  invoke,  c.  v^  to 

pray  to  God  for  some- 
thing, to  call  to  one's 
aid,  to  name ;  c.  ace.  et 

Jl  to  induce  s.  o.  to  do 
sthg.,  invite,  summon. 

VI  to  call  to  one  an- 
other, c.  io  to  bring  a 
complaint  against  .  .  . 

'iy£.C>  prayer. 

«i5  impf.  a  to  push;  hand 
over,  deliver  up. 


jLfi».|i>entering,future,     LS5  impf.u,  c.  ^  to  come 
next.  near. 


120* 


Glossary  B. 


^4>  elat,  ^jol  low, 
humble,  trivial,  near; 
pi'  jo^4^'  ^^^  nearest 
parts. 

LliJ  fern,  world. 
15  med.  ,  II  to  subdue. 


j^^<S  debt. 

G  ,      s  ,- of 

^jJ  i?/.  ^bt>l  re- 
ligion. 

nUj*>  denar,  a  gold  coin. 

13  pron.  (§  13  «)  this. 
tSU(§  15)  what  (then)? 


s  it 


5  wolf. 


C-  5 

J  3  ?w^<?.  •  c.  J  to  surround. 

9    --  G     >  -  ^  ^ 

sl4>  J3^.  wi>  dwelling-      w^3   ^^i/?/".   a^    c,   ace.    to 
place,    house,    abode,  frighten. 


court. 

j.lt>  med.  .  to  remain,  con- 
tinue, be  durable. 

^^O prep,  on  this  side  of, 
below,  beneath;  other 
than,  exclusively  of,  be- 
sides, before.  ^54>;j»f  id. 

^.4>  impf.  a  to  be  indis- 
posed. 
IV  to  treat  medically. 

g|j5  medicine. 

^13  med.  ^  to  be  in  sub- 
jection. 


^5'3  impf.  w,  c.  ace.  to  think 
of,     mention,     name, 

speak  of.   Inf.  ii. 
J 3  xVwjt?/*.  e  to  be  insignifi- 
cant, feeble. 

G        ^ 

JuJ3  miserable,       * 

feeble. 

^yc>fem.  ^3 pron.  (§  13  c) 

that. 

s^^bimpf.  a  to  go,go  away. 
IV  to  cause  to  disap- 
pear. 

^i3  gold. 


Glossary  B. 


121= 


.6  the  (man)  of,  possessor      *j.  pi.  cLn  house,  pi  real 
ofcf.§§90/,  133.  estate.' 


:I3    Tned. 


to   become 


known,  spread  abroad. 
IV  to    make    public, 
publish. 

(j^K  J9/.  [j>^^y  head,  the 
chief  thing. 

(j**jojj»/.  iUw5j  leader, 

general. 

Jj  zm/?/.  ^^,  (§  49  h) 
to  see,  be  of  opinion, 
think,  believe,  consider 
advisable,  c.  2  ace.  to 
regard  or  esteem  a  per- 
son or  thing  as,  hold 
to  be. 

IV ^Ac.  2  ace.  to  show. 

^^K  insight,   counsel, 
advice. 


aaJII!     ar-Rabr,     (a 
man's  name). 
5oJ  /"<?»«.  xjunI  four, 
/m/?/'.  i  to  turn  back. 


return. 

So  S  ,  t,:^ 

Jl:^.  fern.  pL  Jk^-.  I  foot, 
leg. 

G  G 

J^^  /?/.  JLis  a  man. 
Ii.»  /mp/".  u  to  stone. 
(vAii^'I  stoned,  accursed. 

L^'l  /twj?/.  w,  c.  ace.  to  hope 

for  sthg. 
,.^^-^«  to  be  wide,  broad. 
77  c.  t^  to  bid  anyone 
(^^  lord,  God.  welcome  (Lxi^i). 

ill  impf.  u  to  tie,  fasten.      "^  impf.  a,  c.  ace.  pers. 

to  have  pity  on,  com- 


Jajos    ^/«^.    iaoJ     se- 
curely fastened,  firm. 


passion  for,  some  one. 


122* 


Glossary  B. 


VI  to  take  compassion 
on  each  other. 

i^As  loving  kindness 
(esp.  of  God) ,  deed  of 
kindness. 

^r  fern.  mill. 
'iL.^^  vel   "^"I  to  be  flaccid, 

soft. 

iSs  impf.  u  to  bring  back, 
give  back. 
VIII  to  turn  back. 

3r  inf.  I  giving  back. 

^^v  impf.  w,  c.  2  ace.  to 
present,  grant,  furnish, 
bless  with,  give  food. 

^•..  food  (esp.  as  given 
by  Allah),  sustenence. 

^XJo  Marziik, (man's 
name). 

(^^s  IV  io  send. 
6  >  ^  G  , , 

senger,  apostle  (esp.  of 
God). 


«.on  //  to  set  (of  jewels), 
inlay. 

i^.  impf.   a  to  suck  (at 

the  breast). 
IV  to  give  suck. 

l^r  impf.  «,  c.  ace.  to  be 

content  with,  acquiesce 
in,  take"  pleasure  in. 

2U£:  x-UI  ^x    God  be 

gracious  unto  him! 

IV  to  satisfy,  render 
content. 

j^K   in/.  I  pleasure, 

delight  (in  sthg.). 

j^"  VIII to  shake,  tremble. 

^'  impf.  a  to  watch,  tend. 

c!)  i?/.  'i\.s.s  herdsman, 
shepherd. 

kic.  pi  \2S's  subjects 
(also  sing.  coll.). 

isLc^jo  J9/.  cSyjo  pasture- 
ground.      ^ 


Glossary  B. 


123^ 


^^*   impf.  a    to    have  a 

strong  craving  for;  c. 

^£,  to  give  up  the 
Graying  for  sthg.,  to 
shun,  relinquish. 


i^i?/.  Xiisl  (flat)  cake. 

iiT  impf.  a  to  raise,  lift 

up  (the  voice);  c.  jl  to 
bring  sthg.  before  the 
judge. 

«Ai^  high,  noble. 

/Ji'T  IV  c.  (^  to  be  kind, 
gentle  with  .  .  . 

^yApl^^Syjo  elbow. 

^<.  impf.  i  to  be  or  become 
thin,  abject,  mean. 

/w\  bondage,  slavery. 

<i-*"  i?npf.  a  to  mend,  patch. 

ajLr>  patch. 

v_^   impf.   a,  c.   ace.  to 

mount  on  horse-,  camel- 
back  &c.,  to  ride. 


^y^s     W-     stepping 
into,  aboard  (a  ship). 

^\J6jOy  name  of  a  month. 

ir  impf  i,   c.   ^^  r.   to 

throw,  pelt  with. 

vS?;  2WJ9/*.  «,  c.  ace.   rei 

to  be  afraid  of  sthg. 

v^^C  monk. 

1,\\  IV  med.  y  c.  ace.  et 


c^^ 


to  rid  .  .  .  of. 

ffi  ^^^^  z?>}  ^^^'' 

pi.  «^L3>  wind. 

k^L  smell,  scent. 

o\s  med.j  IV  c.  ace,  to  will, 
wish,  intend,  endeavour 
to. 

IC  med.  .  to  seek,  desire, 
attack. 

j^I^  /mp/*.  2  to  relate. 

\Jls^\  impf.  «  to  advance 
slowly. 

c*\  /mp/*.  a  to  sow. 


124^ 


Glossary  B. 


c  Ns  coll.  seed,  green 
corn,  green  crop,  differ- 
ent sorts  of  grain. 

cCc\  to  shake  violently. 
//  (reflexive). 

ivi\  impf.  u  to  assert,  re- 
late. 

o\  impf.  u  to  conduct  a 
bride  to  her  husband's 
house. 

l^v  w//.  .  to  increase,  to 
be  good,  pure. 


K  m^</.  J  7/  c.  2  ace. 
i;^/  c.  ace.  et  ^^  t;^/  J 
to  marry  some  one  to, 
join  in  wedlock ;  c.  ace. 
to  take  in  marriage. 
V  c,  ace.  reflex. 

riv  med.  •  impf.  u  to  visit. 

5xL}\  inf. 
Jk  ?we<?.  .  ew;?/".  a  to  cease. 
JL  V  inf.  cessation.  Noon 


or  afternoon, 


^'^  elat.  ^^  \  pure,      ^i) 


impf.  i  to  remove,  clear 


delicate,  dainty. 

JJv  to  shake  (trans.).  II 
to  shake  (int.),  tremble. 

Idmpf.u  to  fasten  securely. 

*Lx)\  bridle  (nose-rein). 

^Uov  time,  space  of  time. 

Lit  2W/?/'.  ?^  to  shoot  up,  to 
flourish,  prosper. 

y\  mf 


away, 
^^iv;?/.  LSl^v  corner. 
i>|C  w^e^.  (^  ewp/".  2,  c.  2  «cc. 
to  give  more,  to  add  to. 
Joyo    ^'^A;    increase, 
addition. 
::.part.  §  95<?;  99flf. 
Ia-1  impf.  a  to  be  or  remain 


over. 


^Lw^    remaining,    the 

rest,  all. 

JLww  impf.  «,  c.  2  ace.  to 
ask  one  for  sthg.  c.  ace. 

pers.  et  ^^  to  enquire 
for,  ask  respecting. 

JoL«  beggar. 

iULwwuo  the  asking,   a 
question. 

Juub-w  m«5c.  or  /(?/w.  way, 

right  way,  road. 

ocAw  /^'w.  jUaa*  six. 

e/wjo/.  u  or  i  to  hide, 


Glossary  B. 

9     o^ 


125= 


-.  ^  p/.  ^^ Y^  saddle. 

cwl  /^  to  be  in  haste,  c. 
^  to  make  haste  with . . . 


d-r- 


elat. 


tr 


I, 


quick,  swift,  speedy. 


7^ 


SillAA;    Suraka,    (a    man's 
name). 

eia^  zVwjy/".  a  to  spread  out. 
^  U...  the  flat  roof  of 
eastern  houses. 

Jut  La*-  p/.  JlcI^  the  fore- 
arm. 


shield  (e.  g.  from  the     j^  ^^^^  ^^  ^^  ^   ^^^   ^ 

gossip  of  the  people).  .     ,    ,      ^  ^ 

p^r5.  to  lodge  intorma- 


Jl^u*/  xVwjf?/".  w,    c.    J,   to 

prostrate      one's     self 
irpoaxovsiv. 

0^-s3u*;  inf. 


tion  against,  denounce. 

9  -^  -^  9    -^  "  ^ 

wftA«  ;?/.  nUaw!  journey. 

9."    .^     1- 

iOjULyw  snip. 

oJCw  impf.  u  to  become 
or  be  silent. 


cX;sDL.ww^  mosque. 

LI  IV  e.  (Jl^  p^r5.  to  tell 

s.  0.  sthg.  as  a  secret.     ^jCl  mp/.  «  to  he  or  be 

vAA/  J3/.  ;'j-ww!  secret. 


come  drunk. 


126* 


Glossary  B. 


drunk. 

^SCm  impf.  u  to  dwell,  in- 
habit,rest,  be  quiescent. 

jj  jCw  rest,  quiescence. 
^j.S'Lw  p/.   ,jl5Cuw     in- 
habitant. 
jL.4-yJLww  to  put  in  chains. 

Ja-Lw  impf.  w  to  be  or  be- 
come powerful. 

//to  make,  install  as 
ruler. 


|vi^  ladder. 

G    ^  ^ 

l*^L>gw  immunity  from 
ills,  prosperity,  wel- 
fare. ^iCiT  &IJU 
peace  be  with  him! 
(parenthetically  placed 
after  the  names  of  high 
religious  personalities). 

G^     ^  ^ 

'sjo'^kjM  peace  and  pro- 
sperity. 

G  /    o 

pfc^L^I^  {inf.  IV)  Islam. 


•j       ^      O   3 


^jLkJLww  c.  Js£.  autho-      [V-w  impf.  u  to  put  poison 
rity  over,  ruk;   ruler,  into  any  thing,  to  poison. 


sultan. 

1X1;  impf.  a  to  be  whole, 

intact. 

//  to  bestow  health 
and  prosperity;  c.  J^ 
to  greet,  salute. 

IV  c.  jsJJi  to  declare 

one's  self  resigned  to 
to  God;  to  become  a 
Moslem. 


jVA*.  poison. 
impf.  a  to  hear. 


viU-A*/  pl'  RXl-wi  fish. 

L4.AA/  //  c.  2  flfcc.  ?;^/  c.  ace, 
et  (^  to  call  by  name, 
to  give  a  name  to. 

G  o 

f^j^\  (§  56  a)  name. 
eU-1  heaven. 


Glossary  B. 


127* 


Jv^  impf.  uX)\o  sharpen, 
2)  ordain,  institute. 

^^  tooth,  age. 

'i.kjM  pl.  ^jX^  regula- 
tion, institution,  tradi- 
tion  (of  the  Moslems). 

4>jl1  IV  to  support. 

IsHipl.  nom,  l^y^  (§  76  &; 

90  ni)  year. 
I.^  impf.  «  to  keep  awake. 

^Lwm^^.«tobebad,wicked. 
IV  to  spoil,  corrupt, 
to  do  ill. 

^Llw  wi^^.  .  to  sink  into 
the  ground. 

5L1  med.  .  c.  «cc.  to  be- 
come lord,  ruler,  over... 

^yJ\  fern.  i>\Oy^  pl. 
^b^^,    t>^  black. 

G  w  ^  G  ^ 

Juuv  i?/.  sjLw  lord, 
ruler,  chief. 


siLl  hour,  short  space 
of  time,  moment. 

^Jju  part.  §  96  d;  99  a. 

^Ll  /w^^.  •  to  drive. 

^•^A«  pl.  ^\y^^  mar- 
ket, bazaar,  lane. 

[iy^  Vlllto  be  equal, alike, 

simultaneous  with. 

%\y^    c.    J^  (quite) 
the  same,  indifferent  to. 

ri*w  m^</.  ^  impf.  i  to  jour- 
ney,goalong,go.  ^-1  ^. 
to  follow  one's  track. 

Hw>ywwuo  distance  travel- 
led. 

G  o  ^  G^     >  >  G.  '  o^ 

sword,  sabre. 
*Lcc.  F/ to  find  a  bad  omen. 

f*5^  a  bad  omen. 
9^  impf.  a  to  be  satiated. 

IV  to  satiate,  satisfy. 
aLyi  //  to  compare. 


128^ 


Glossary  B. 


I:sc/i  impf.  u  to  be  intri- 
cate, intertwined. 

J^^  nom.  u?iit.  s^ijow 
tree,  shrub. 
jL^  impf.  u  to  bind,  tie. 

//  c.  J^  to  press  hard 
on  one. 

r/// to  become  strong, 
powerful,  heavy. 

powerful;  vehement. 
^  (1.  pers.  ^sjj^)  impf. 
a  to  become  bad. 

li,  (g/«t  id:)  pi.  ;^v^^ 
bad,  wicked.    Mischief, 
woe,  war. 
Cjv-»i  x^;?/".  CL  to  drink. 


AJv^j9/.  olw^l  noble, 
aristocratic,  respected. 

^•y^  tmpf.  u  to  rise  (of 

the  sun). 
(V'v-cioo    place    of  the 

sun's  rising  ==  the  East. 
ii)w*x<  impf.  a  c.  ace.  to  be 

one's  companion. 

JwCi  net. 
s 
viJbw.ci  companion,ally. 

(^ww  mj^/".  i  to  buy,  sell. 
VJII  to  buy,  negotiate. 

be  deeply  struck  with. 

&Xw  p/.  sLft^  lip. 
----  --  ''  " 

laJi.^  IV  c.  Jsx.  to  be  ten- 
derly solicitous  for  . .  . 

wXli<  impf.  u  to  thank,  be 
J!i  2^jt?/.  w  to  be  high.  thankful. 

IV  to  be  high,  lofty.     \Xl  impf  u,  to  complain. 


drink. 


wine,     strong 


nobility. 


height,     fame, 


VIII  to  complain. 
i  //c.  ace.  to  say  "God 


Glossary  B. 


129* 


bless  you"  to  a  person 
(e.  g.  sneezing). 

i  fern.  sun. 


Juj^  left  (hand  or  side). 

tX.^  2^^/.  a  c.  ace.  to  be 
present  at  sthg.,  to  wit- 
ness, to  give  evidence. 
///  c.  ace,  to  see,  be 
an  eye-witness. 

JjcLi  pi,  4>«-g-cb  wit- 
ness. 

8t>L^     testimony, 
guarantee,  security,   a 
bearing  testimony. 

yj^  pl.  .^  '•>■!  month. 
L§^  F///  to  desire,  wish. 

s«  ^xij  sensual  desire, 

appetite. 
--^  G   ^ 

?.Li    CO//,  wo/w.  ww^Y.   gUw 

small  cattle,  sheep  and 

goats ;  nom,  unit,  a  single 

head  of  these. 

TLw    med.  .  /r  c.   J I    to 
point  to. 

Socin,  Arabic  Grammar,* 


[^y^  impf.  i  to  roast. 

■^Lx,med.  ^  impf.  a  to  will, 
wish. 

%^  a  matter,  thing, 
something. 

voLci  med,  ^  to   become 
gray-haired. 

v^^AJui  gray  hairs. 

^Lw  m^^.  ^^  to  become 
an  old  man. 

^.^yi  old  man. 

^Uajui  i?/.  ,jj^Lui  devil, 
Satan. 

cL^  med.  ^  to  spread  a- 
broad,  become  public. 

//  to  accompany,   to 
follow. 

y^jJc  impf.  u  to  pour,  pour 
out. 

IfjJc  impf.  w  to  be  attrac- 
tive, good-looking. 
IVio  enter  the  time  of 


130* 


Glossary  B. 


early  morning,  c.  ace.  be- 
come sthg.  early,  soon. 

x^La^  beauty,  love- 
liness. 


1^1 


associate;  friend,  com- 
panion ;  owner,  inhabi- 
tant of  (cf.  §  133). 

Sm  impf.  ^,  c.  JS  to  have     ksu^  pi.  kJ^  leaf, 
patience  with,  to  put      ^  - 

up  with,  endure. 

^  "  ■^ 

k/u£>  impf.  u  or  a  to  dye. 

Uio  impf.  u  to  be  foolish; 


youthful. 

^Ici  pi.  jjLL-o  little 
boy. 

e^  mj?/".  i  to  be  in  good 


health,  sound. 


e^ 


i?/. 


-iL^  g/df^. 


<s   ^ 


I  right,  correct. 


Cj.^  impf.  «,   c.   ace.  to 

keep     company     with, 
have  to  do  with. 

HI  to  take  for  com- 
panion. 


<Xo  impf.  u  to  turn  away 
from,  alienate. 

(Vjco  im/)/'.  u  to  speak 
the  truth,  be  truthful, 
sincere. 

//  to  consider  sthg.  to 
be  true,  right,  to  believe 
one. 

V  c.  Jld  pers.  ei  ^^  rei 
to  give  one  sthg.  as 
alms. 

friend. 
olo  impf.  i  to  turn  from. 
VII  to  turn,  go,  away, 
return  (home). 

XacLo  thunderbolt. 


X  to  take  with   one     oLo  2m/?/'.  w,  to  be  small, 
as  an  associate.  little. 


Glossaby  B. 


isr 


>y4^ 


silence. 


yjuo  inf.  littleness. 

^.JLo  impf.  u  to  place  in  a 
row,  draw  up. 

VIII to  arrange  (them- 
selves),to  stand  in  a  row. 
yft-r  IX  to  be  yellow. 

jsuc\  pi.  Juc  yellow. 
Juc  VIII  to  choose. 

oU^jfl  man s  name. 

^JLo  impf.  a  to  be  good, 
be  in  order. 

IV  to   put  in  order, 
set  right. 

ii^jJLo  apious  action, 

good  deed. 
^Lo  //  to  pray,  perform 

divine  service,  to  wor-      t>Lo  med.  ^  to  hunt, 
ship.    xjJU  aJuf  ^Jjo  tXli«V.liunting,what 


iLo    impf.    a    to    make, 
prepare,  to  do. 

wg-o   p/.    )L4^I    relation 

(by  marriage). 

CjLo  ^^t?.  .  IV  to  befall, 
fall  to  one's  share. 

JLijufljo  misfortune. 

9   o   ^ 

v:i>«-o  voice. 

5j^.oi?/.  *^  figure,  shape, 
form. 

Isjuoyc  cell. 

"Li  med.  ^  to  cry  out. 
VI  to  shout  at  each 
other. 


P^: 


^-?  - 


contracted     to 


,UJLfl§  11. 

S^Lo,    s^JLo     divine 
service,worship,prayer. 


is  caught,  game. 

TLi  mg</.  ^,  c.  ace.  to  be- 
come  or   be  sthg. ;   to 
repair  to. 
II to  cause  to  become; 


impf,  u  to  be  quiet.  to  appoint,  to  place. 


132^ 


Glossary  B. 


»^iJd  VIII  to  lie  on  one's     ^^Li  med.  ^  IV  to  press 
side.  hard,  hem  in. 

^^^^  straits,  distress. 


forenoon. 


^^  jt- 


Cj%^  «^J3/'-«  to  strike,  heat.     LbLb  to  sink  (trans,.). 
VIII    refl.    to     heat     ^  ^^^f^  ^  ^^  ^  to  treat 

medically. 
.^^ouJs  physician,  doc- 


against  each  other. 

OwO  2w/.   /  striking, 
heating. 


tor. 


L^    a   single  hlow,      J^:  /F  to  cover  with  a 


a  heating. 


d  impf,  u  to  he  weak. 
v-ftA*^  weak. 
Jlo  /^jt?/.  ?  to  err. 

aJ^Lo  erring,  error. 

55  ^ 

|V-o  2mj9/.  w  to  put  close 
to,  press  against,  to 
gather. 

^L2  med.  .  to  he  clear, 
hright,  shining. 

%J6  light,  hrightness. 

^ULo  hrightness. 
v-ftA^  j»/.  oUajI  guest. 


lid. 
F//  to  he  covered  up. 

^sx^  impf.  a  to  grind. 

J^AisUo  flour. 

4>w^  impf.  u  to  chase  away, 
drive  away,  pursue. 

ijjo  IVto  cast  down  one's 
eyes. 

jvxio  impf.  a  to  eat. 
/F  to  feed  (trans.). 

^Ljtio  inf.  I  eating, 
taste,  a  meal,  food,  a 
(particular)  dish. 


Glossary  B. 


133* 


v_jLb  impf.u  to  seek,  search 
after;  wish  for. 

v^.JLb  inf.  I  seeking, 
a  search. 

v^LL  JT  Abu  Talib 
(Muhammed's  uncle). 

«JLb  impf.  u  to  stand  up, 
get  up,  rise  (of  the  sun). 
VIII  c.  Ji  to    look 
at,  see. 

^^jJLb  //  c.  ace.  to  set  free, 
give  divorce  to. 
IV  to  set  free. 
VII     to     go     away, 
depart. 

«tU)  2>wj9/'.  «  to  strive  to 
obtain,  to  covet,  sthg. 

«t^  2/?/'.  covetousness, 
greed. 

y^  impf.  w  to  be  clean, 
pure. 
II  to  cleanse,  purify. 


cUo  med.   .    to   obey,   be 
compliant. 
/Fid. 

k^Lb  m/".,  obedience, 
subjection. 

oLb  m^<?.  .  to  go  round. 
^Li«-b  flood. 

JLb  med.  ^  IV  to  lengthen, 
protract;  to  be  long 
over  sthg. 

6 

Jo^-b     long,     lasting 
long. 

j^lb  impf.  i  to  fold,  fold 
up  or  together. 

oLb  med.  ^  to  be  good, 
pleasant,  excellent. 


Elat.  ^^^\goodi, 
excellent,  nice  to  the 
taste,  sweet  (scent). 

iujLb  something  good, 
a  dainty. 
TLb  ;w6^.  ^^  to  fly. 


134^ 


Glossary  B. 


^Lb  med.  ^  II  to  plaster 

with  clay  or  mud  (^^lo). 

jjlij  impf.  i  to  treat  unfair- 
ly, injure,  do  wrong  to. 

IV  to  grow  dark. 

ii^JUb  darkness. 

A^Us  darkness,  dusk. 

A^Uij  one  that  acts  in- 
juriously, oppressor. 

y^  impf.  a  to  appear,  to 
come  in  sight. 
IV  to  bring  to  sight. 


0^  ^ 

St>L^  adoration,  wor- 
ship. 

ICc^  mjo/*.  2^  to  cross,  to 
pass  along  (a  certain 
road). 

hIxc  an  example  (from 

which  to  take  warning). 

y^ljlfc  impf.  i  to  look  stern, 
black-browed.| 

y^LliJ!        al-*^  Abbas, 
(man's  name). 

H*Lld  mantle,  cloak. 


w^ib  the  back,  upper     (^ic  mj9/.  2  to  be  or  be- 
part,  surface.  come  free. 


yS^Ub  elat.  ^  (f  io)  pro- 
minent, striking. 
jjlc  ^Wjo/".  w  to  worship. 

G  0  ^  G       ^ 

tXxc  coll.  J.AX&   slave, 

g"  ^ 

servant;  pi.  t>Lx&  man 
(as  the  servant  of  God). 


IV  to  free,  liberate. 

Go 

j^A.D   nobility,    high 
rank. 
jLoi  free,  noble,  old. 

^Ua£.      Utman,     (mans 
name). 

aJUl  tXxD  'Abdallah  (a     Cf^  ^  ^-  ^  to  wonder 
man's  name).  at  sthg. 


/<!      >     O    ^ 


Glossabt  B. 


135" 


a  wonder,  miracle. 

jLSJLt  //to  expedite. 

Jcc^  mj9/*.   Uy  c.    2   «cc.  to 
count,  reckon  as  .  .  . 

\J*d^  lentils. 

JtXfr  impf.  I  to  be  just. 

J;>Lft  just,  impartial. 

Iji  impf.  a,  c.  ace.  to  be 

without  sthg. 

ijLfc  Fc.flfcc.to  cross  over, 
go  beyond. 

///  c.   ace.  to   treat 
as  an  enemy,  attack. 

^Jc&i?/.  Itjcftt  enemy. 

s.ljLt  enmity. 

G  jcft  //to  torture,  punish. 

l-j!  ji  torture,punish- 
ment. 

rjca  F///  to  excuse  one's 
self. 

sJl£    excuse    (in    the 
sense  of  a  refusal). 


Oy^  coll.  the  Arabs. 
jtwfti  a  Bedouin. 

\jdZs,  impf.  i  to  interfere 
with,  thwart,  offer. 
Fto  come  in  one's  way. 

I  jr  ^  //w/?/.  /  to  perceive, 
know,  recognize. 

Xiwjtxj  knowledge. 

o.lii  a  favour,  kind 
deed. 
^slyxJI  name  of  the  count- 
ry known   to   the   an- 
cients as  Babylonia. 

ye  impf.  i  to  be  strong, 
powerful  (often  paren- 
thetically after  aJUl: 
he  is  powerful). 

wyt   elat.  ytj  strong, 
powerful. 
J'y£.  impf.  i  to  depose. 
VIII    to    take    one's 
leave,  be  deposed. 


136* 


Glossary  B, 


^yt  c.  acc.  et    »^  rei  II 
to  console,  comfort. 


aUk^  ;?/.  bUbi   gift. 


present. 
jiLs^   pL  y\^  a  body      "^  ^^^f^  ^  to  be 


or  be- 


of  troops,  army. 
IjiLft    II  to  build  a  nest 

Iciw^  ///  to  associate  with. 

wAa  /<?/w.  HwwLc  ten. 
i-    .  -         ;        V|  -r  - 

tribe,  tribesmen. 

y^ujuo   assembly ,    the 
whole;  those  present. 

^^o_ft  impf.  i,  c,  acc.  to 
resist,  not  obey  some 
one. 

iU^juo  p/.  ^JolJw  re- 
sistance, revolt,  sin. 
ydk  member. 

fjjJas.    impf.    i    or    u    to 

sneeze. 
Uxfc  IV  c.  acc.pers.  et  rei 

to  give  sthg.  to   some 

one. 


come  great,  large ;  c.  Jkx 
to  appear  to  be  great, 
insolent. 

I»,ta.c  inf.  greatness. 
jvAlor  elai.  Jgs- 1  great, 
of  great  account,  august. 


c:o>La£ 


jjjjx     pi.     ojsLa^     a 
wicked,  clever  demon. 

Lii  e'^wj?/".  w,  c.  jj^  to 
pardon  (a  person),  be 
gracious  to. 

s  ".?"      7      '    I  .r- 

LjwO^  /?/.  v_jsUld  scor- 
pion, a  bitter  enemy. 

Jkift  mi?/.  2.  or  jLft^  impf.  a 
to  be  intelligent. 

JJlc  intellectual  abi- 
lity, intelligence;  pru- 
dence. 

Ji  F///  to  fall  ill. 


Glossary  B. 


137=* 


& 


SJLfi  illness,  sickness. 
///  to  treat. 


lv-JLi    impf.    a   perceive, 

know,  learn  (that),  c.  \^ 

to  know  something. 

IV c.  2  ace,  to  acquaint, 
inform  one  of  sthg. 

Go  0      >  > 

jJLc  pi.   j»^JU  know- 
ledge, science. 


13  ^       --    ^ 


Suo^Lc  mark,  sign. 


6.,   - 


IJLi    elat.     |V-UI   pi. 

i^UJLft  possessing  know- 
ledge, a  learned  man, 


savant. 


*^L&  very  knowing. 
j^Ajtjo  teacher. 

^Lfr  i/wp/.  w  to  be  high. 

VI  to  be  highly  exal- 
ted, esp.  parenthetically 
after^//«^:  He  is  exalted 
(§  23). 

j^  prep.  (§  96  b)  over, 
on  the  ground  of,  on, 


upon,  at;  with  verbs  of 
entering :  chez ;  against, 
in  the  direction  of,  to- 

wards.^^^  J^  yo  to  be 
in  a  state  of,  to  be  ac- 
customed to  sthg. 

JS  elat.  J^l  high; 
also  man's  name  'Ali. 

JLi   elat.    J^\    high, 

prominent,  excellent. 

f^  impf.  u  to  be  or  become 
common;  to  increase. 

riuncle(on  the  father's 

side);  ^\  J^J  cousin. 

x/)L&  the  common 
people  (plebs),  large 
crowd. 
SI,  II  to  furnish,  provide 
handsomely. 
1^^  life;  in  the  oath 
^^  by  my  life. 

lii  'Omar  (man's 
name). 


138^ 


Glossary  B. 


•  ^-♦i(§  90  n  pronounce 
^Amrun)  'Amr  (a  man's 
name). 

Jl4»c  impf.  a  to  do,  make, 

construct. 

X  to  employ  one  for 
for  some  purpose,  to 
apoint  governor. 

J^4-^  V'^'  JU^I  work, 
act,  deeds  of  piety, 
province. 

J^Ld  pi.  JUx  a  func- 
tionary, vicegerent, 
prefect. 

l^i  impf,  a  to  be  or  be- 
come blind. 

IV  to  disfigure,  make 
unrecognisable. 

" *  ^  Go? 

^5^i  i?^-  ^54J:^  blind. 

^^prep.  away  from,  from 
(hinderance) ;  about, 
concerning ;  according 
to,  on  the  authority  of. 


Luai 


(o 


vine, 


grape. 
iXic  J9r^p.  by  the  side  of, 

near,  with,  by  (one). 
^La  med.  .  IX  to  be  bent, 


E 


croo 


led 


5Lc  »?^^.  •  to  return,  c. 
ace.  to  visit. 

<^Lt  w^t?.  .  c.  ^  to  take 

refuge  in  . .  . 
X  to  ask  for  protec- 

tion;tosay:  xJUb  3^1 

(Surah    114)    "I    take 

refuge  in  God",  c.  ^ 

from. 
"Li   med.    .    /F  c.    tfcc. 

to  help,  support. 
X  to  help  one's  self, 

to  help  on,  succour. 

xj.Uuj  Mu'awiya,  the  first 
Omayyad  Caliph  (661 
—679). 

^ii^jy^  Jesus. 


Glossary  B. 


(OTNIVERS] 


jJ^Ld  med.  ^  to  live. 

aLccwLC  life,  way  of  liv- 
ing, (§  64  c). 
ItXi  ult.  ,  to  come  early. 
F   to    breakfast,    to 
refresh  oneself  early. 

j^wft   impf.  u   to    set   (of 
the  sun). 

v^wjbe  place  where  the 

sun  sets,  the  West. 

^y£.  IV  to  make  to  sink, 
drown. 

J  Li  gazelle. 

Jusfci  a/wp/.  i  to  wash. 

^Ai  iVw/?/".  a  to  cover. 
iU.wlxi?/.yi;|^saddle- 
cover,  horse-cloth. 

■J]-  ^^  impf.  i  c,  ace.  rei  et 


Jti.  impf.  i  c.  J  pers.  to 
pardon,  forgive. 

'ilsJuo  pardon,  forgive- 
ness. 

^  ^  ^ 

Jkii  impf.  u  to  neglect. 

G  --  o  ^ 

SJLsx  inattention,  neg- 
ligence. 

v^^JLi  2m/?/.   e  to   be    all- 
powerful,  victorious. 

j^jjli  II  et  IV  io  bolt,  bar, 
shut. 

G   - >  G     ^o 

l»^  pi  ;jUJLc    a  young 
man,  lad,  slave. 

^IjLt  /Twjt?/*.  «,  e.  ^.^  to  be 
rich. 


^^  pi.  iLoi!  rich. 
^^Lc  //to  sing. 
JLo  jy.    to    take   sthg.     ;Li  m^ef.  ^   to   penetrate 
from  one  unlawfully.  ^^^  ^^^^^  go  down.  ^ 


t  /m/?/*.  a  to  get  angry,  ^ 

be  angry  with. 


vLi  a  cave. 
^L^  w^^.  .  to  dive. 


140* 


Glossary  B, 


>L£  med.  ^  to  be  absent, 
c.  jj^  to  disappear. 


S    o^ 


pl.     L_>.j»^     a 
secret. 

iuA^     absence ,     stay 

among  strangers. 

s 
v^Axxi  inf.  sunset. 

JLd  med.   ^  II  to  alter, 
change. 

wi^  (§  133  with  gen.) 
another,somethg.differ- 
ent  from,  no  (with  neg.), 
except;  before  substs., 
adjs.  and  parts,  it  ren- 
ders the  converse,  like 
our  prefix  un-  or  in-;  Ax 
yjS  without. 

Jco;y-.(§§95^;  152;161) 
and  so,  then,  and. 

impf.    a    to    open, 
to  open  (intr.). 
VIII  to  conquer,  ac- 
quire for  one's  self. 


^^    im 
^     VII 


G   0^ 

i^Jii  inf,  /. 


,-XxkApl.  >sjoLix)  key. 


^ 


VIII   c. 


to    be 


struck    with    emotion, 
bewitched,  by. 

.JUs  a  young  man. 

nUi  a  young  woman, 
girl. 

y^  impf.  u  to  transgress, 
act  viciously. 

G         ^  0    es  ^ 

yssXi    pl.    sLsJ     evil- 
doer. 

wi  zwjt?/.  flj   to   boast   of, 
glory  in. 

///    to    give    oneself 
airs  towards  some  one. 

Go^ 

y^  inf.  I. 
^  impf,  i  to  flee. 


9  (I  io^ 


JJ^^JI 


the  Persians, 


G-^ 


ijw.Li  Persia. 


jjwii   a  horse,    esp.   of  a 
good  breed. 


\J^f 


i  impf.  u  to  spread  out. 


Glossary  B. 


141' 


(ji/lvj  pi.  jiyi  carpet,  J^^di    bounty,    kind- 
cushion,  bed.  ^ess,  favour, 
^y  impf.  i,  c.  JU  pers.  ^  ^^^Pf'  «  *«  be  clever, 
to  impose  sthg.  on  one  |r^  intelligence, 
as  a  duty. 


2^  /wp.  M,  c.   ^jQ  to  be 

empty,        disengaged, 
finished  with  sthg. 

jJIi  ?>wp/.  w,  to  separate, 
part. 

///  to  leave. 

VIII  to  become  sepa- 
rated, to  disperse. 

c  yi  2/wj?/.  a  to  get  a  fright, 

be  afraid. 

jcU  impf.  u  to  become 
bad,  wicked. 

jLui  m/.  the  doing 
of  mischief,  evil,  wrong. 

LLs  IV  to  divulge,  publish, 
betray. 

jL«di  impf.  u  to  be  or 
remain  over,  to  be  ex- 
cellent. 


Juti  impf.  a  to  do. 

Go  G    ^ct 

Juti  ;?/.   JL*il    deed, 

act,  mode  of  action. 

juJi    r  to  miss,   enquire 
for,  some  one. 

wLfti  J^/.  ilJii  poor. 

dli    F7/  to  free  oneself, 
to  become  disattached. 
Jo  F  to  reflect. 

aLgi^U  i>/.  x5  l«j  fruit. 
>^  IV io  become  happy, 
^successful,  to  prosper. 

G«  >        G>  > 

viUi,  viUi  a  (large)  ship. 
/j^  so  and  so,  Mr.  Such- 

and-  Such. 
H^  pi.  ui)l  Jli  desert. 
!i  mouth  (§  90  o). 
viLi  »i^^.  •  c.  ace.  to  pass 


142* 


Glossary  B. 


by,  to  expire  (of  the 
time  for  some  one  to 
do  sthg.). 

^U  med.  ,  to  excel,  be 
excellent. 

^S      prep.      above, 
higher  than. 

8«i  (§  90o  j9/.  sl^l)  mouth. 

^  prep,  in,  into,  at,  on, 
among,  accompanied 
by,  by;  with  (before  a 
quality),  in  relation  to, 
with  regard  to. 

G>-o^  G^        ^  ^ 

o^-vw^Lxi  pl.  IsJuJ^h  phi- 
losopher. 

^^*  X  to  find  detestable. 

G  o^  G     J  > 

yj3  pl.  syj3  grave. 
(j»dXi  impf.  i  to  take  hold 
of,  take  into  one's  hand. 

Jlo  mjt?/.  «  to  accept. 
IV  to  approach,  come 
nearer;  be  susceptible 
to. 
rto  receive. 


X  to  be  opposite. 

Jui*  adv.  vel  Jlo  ^j^ 
before. 

Jlo  jor^-jt?.  before. 

Jlo  prep,  in  the 
presence  of,  in  the 
sphere  of  .  .  .  xiii*  ^j^ 
on  his  side,  of  his  party. 

G     j^ 

Jj.Ai*  m/.  /  acceptance. 

G^       - 

XJLujJ  tribe,  family  (in 
wide  sense). 

G^-     ^9 

RjbLJLo  comparison,  re- 
lation. 

Joi'  ^Vwp/.  w  to  kill,  make 
away  with. 

///  c.  acc.^  to  fight 
with,  fight. 

G  o^ 

JjCi*  m/.  /  killing,  exe- 
cution. 

G         ^  ^0^ 

Jou3  ;?/.  JsAi  killed. 

yy         y     9  9f- 

XiLsxi'    5-3 1   Abii   Kuhafa, 
the  father  of  Abu  Bekr. 


Glossary  B. 


143* 


ji  (§  98  e,  99  d)  particle, 

J  Jo  im'pf,  i  to  be  able  to, 
can,  could  (also  with 
folg.  impf.).  c.  Jlc  to 
have  power  over. 

IV  c.  JLd  to  make  one 
more  powerful  than  . . . 

.  4Xjj  worth,  value,  due, 
power.  vJJb  in  rela- 
tion to,  in  proportion 
to  .  .  . 

*Jo  impf.  «,  to  advance, 
approach. 

//  to  place  before, 
set  sthg.  before  s.  o. 

IV  to  approach. 

V  to  go  before,  pre- 
cede. 

ft^,(Xii  P^'  i'LoJo  an- 
cient,old,  of  a  past  time. 

^  impf,  i  to  stay,  persevere. 

IV  to  render  stable,  c. 

{^  m  to  confess  to  sthg. 


X  to  stand  fast,  hold 
good. 
AyS  continuance,  rest. 

I  Jj  impf  a  to  read. 

-1^*     Kur'an    or     a 
passage  therefrom. 

CjS  im'pf.  u  to  be  near  at 
hand. 

//  to  place  near,   to 

take  as  intimate  friend, 

to  offer,  set  before  one. 

F7to  be  close  together. 

s_ju>J>  pl.  :^b  J>l ;  elat. 

ph  (o.Ujl(subst.).c.^ 

near,  close(to) ;  related. 
iu^Js    the    tribe    of   the 

Kuraish,     the    Kurai- 

shites. 
"l^jj  nom,  rel.Si  Ku- 

raishite. 
^Ji  horn;  ^j^yA}\  ^b  the 

two  horned  (Alexander 

bicornis). 


144* 

6^  ci^ 


Glossary  B. 


'^^  P^'  ^^  place,  village.      Iki  impf.  a  to  cut 
Lwli^  ult.  ^  to  be  hard. 


off. 


VII  c. 


^^ 


to  become 


jv-wwii'  /F  to  swear. 

<Xoi*  impf.  I,  to  make  for, 
repair  to,  some  one. 

JuflXo   the    end  of  a 

journey. 

wo.i*  to  be  short. 

F/  to    shorten   one's 
self,  to  shrink. 

yCLi  pl.  \yj^  castle, 
fortress. 

goi*  F//  to  let  one's  self 
down,  dart  down  (of  a 
bird). 

^.♦dS  impf.  i  to  decide  judi- 
cially; to  accomplish, 
finish;  to  discharge  a 
claim. 


parted  from  ;  to  o^se. 

tXjti)  impf.  u  to  seat  one's 
self,  sit  down. 

iJJLi  pl  jLfti*!  lock,  pad- 
lock. 

Jj>  m/?/.  2  to  be  small,  few. 

IVto  make  small,  take 

little  of. 

Xto  deem  small,  think 

little  of,  despise. 
s 

Jui-i*  small,  few,  scant. 
^  -» ^ 
v,^^*  impf  i  to  turn  round, 

to  change. 

F7/to  alter  (intr.),  to 

change  one's  mind. 

s^jj3  pl.  oJU  heart. 


VII    to    be    finished,     c!^^  ^^-^/^  to   tear   away, 
brought  to  an  end. 
iLdi'  inf.  I  payment. 


take  away. 

[jaJ3impf  i  to  hunt,  catch. 

iajj  adv.  ever,  with  negat.     US  VIII  io  procure,  pur- 
never.  chase. 


Glossary  B. 


145* 


S\j  med.  .  to  lead,  guide. 
VII  to  let  one's  self 
be  guided. 

JU*  med.  .  to  say,  tell; 
often  =  ask.  c.  J  to 
name. 

Jj>  pi  JlJj|  speech, 
utterance,  apothegm. 
JULo  speech. 

J.U'  med.  .  to  stand  up, 
proceed  (to). 

/rtofix,  setup,  estab- 
lish; halt,  stop,  stay. 

X  to  be  upright,  faith- 
ful. 

^ys  coll.  people,  one  s 
dependants ,  nation, 
subjects. 

SjoLlr  resurrection. 

i^\j  pi  ^\'^  foot. 

AJjo  place,  occasion. 

^^yji  impf.  a  to  be  strong. 

^    GiS  * 

Hjjj   strength,    force; 

Socin,  Arabic  Grammar.- 


c.  ^  the  means  to  do 

sthg. 

^^  (c.  JI)  strong, 

powerful. 

J(§§95/';  145  &  prop,  subj.) 
as,  like  as. 


s;  ^. 


^L5^(it  is)  as  if  .  .  . 

yjSimpf.  u  to  be  great,  large. 
V  to    vaunt    oneself, 
be  proud. 

G^  J 

ySinf.  /to  be  advanc- 
ed in  years. 

yfjS^  elat.  ySS  great, 
old. 

y^^ijS'impf.  u  to  write. 
///  c.  ace.  to   corre- 
spond with. 

Q        y  G       >   > 

^b^fpl.  w».x5"a  writ- 
ing, scripture  (=  writ- 
ten revelation),  letter, 
book. 

^^xS^impf.  u  to  conceal. 
K 


146* 


Glossary  B. 


^L^X^inf.  concealing, 
keeping  close. 
^  to  be  much  or  many. 

JV   to    make    many, 
take  much  of. 

X  to   consider  ^  much 
or  many. 

yf^'xS  elat.  wa5  I  much, 

many  (often  rather  as 
a  subst.  in  apposition). 

i^dSifnpf.  i  to  lie,  tell  lies. 

77  c.  ace.  pers.  vel  ^o 

rei  to  charge  one  with 
falsehood,  discredit. 

^dSinf.  I,  lying,  a 

lie,  falsehood. 

i^S  impf,  w,  to  cause  one 
trouble,  pain. 

KiS  grief,     distress, 
anxiety. 

^^oS pl  ^j».^i^\S  divi- 


^S  impf.  u  to  be  noble, 
generous. 
^S  pL  iLo^  noble, 

high-souled,        highly 
esteemed. 

'iLoSjopl.  -xLjCoanoble 

quality,    generous    ac- 
tion. 

•^Simpf.  a  to  dislike. 

.^^j^  VIII  to  acquire,  to 
attain  to  sthg. 

^^JlmS impf.  i  to  eclipse. 

v_i.^<  mjo/.  /,  c.  ^  to 
uncover. 

F77  to  be  uncovered, 
be  carried  off. 

s^^jjiS^  ankle-bone,  a  die 
(pi.  dice). 

\jiS^ III  c.  ace.  pers.  et  J^a 
r^/  to  requite,  recom- 
pense one  for  sthg. 


sion  (of  cavalry),  squad-     ^impf.  u  to  be  unthank- 
ful, to  deny. 


ron. 


I 

■  X 


Glossary  B. 


147* 


yi^  pi.  ^Lft^unbeliev-     \jjSimpf.  a  to  hide  one's 


ing. 


self. 


^^^impf,  u  to  wrap  in  a    yi^P^-  ^yi"  treasure. 


shroud. 

.JC^impf.  i,  c.  ace.  pers.  et 
r,  to  do  sthg.  in  some 
one's  place;  to  protect 
s.  0.  from  sthg. 

Jr  (§  119  &)  totality;  be- 
fore determ.  subst.,  all; 
before  indeterm.,  every. 

LJl5^as  often  as  .  .  . 

.jJL^  //  c.   ace.  pers.    to 
speakwith,  address  one. 
V  to  speak,  talk,  make 
speeches,  e.  ^^  to  pro- 
nounce, utter. 

aLiJli^word. 

A^^J^speech,  talk,  con- 
versation. 

j^(§  15)  how  much? 
U^(d  +  U)  as. 

G 

JuL«y  perfect. 


\jS^  impf.  u  to  give  one  a 
s  ^ 
surname  contg.  ^^f. 

^^l^  m^^.  .  to  be,  exist. 
(Sometimes  the  perf.  of 
this  verb  is  to  be  trans- 
lated by  our  present). 
c,  ace.  (§§  110,  149)  to 
be  something,    c.  J  to 

be    translated    by    "to 
have". 

6   ^  ^  G^     o* 

^\>^  pl.  &jLCo|  place. 
^.Ax^how? 

j(§§95^;147&)acorrobo- 
rative  particle. 

J  prep.  (§§  96  h;  117; 
130;  131;  132)  for;  is 
sign  ^f  the  dative ;  on 
account  of,  for  . . .  sake 
(giving  purpose,  mo- 
tive); at  (the  time  of). 
J  conj.  c.  subj.  (§  100) 


148* 


Glossaet  B. 


in  order  that;  c.  mod. 

because. 
y  (§§   101  &;   111;   150c) 

not,  no.  '^ prep.  c.  gen. 
without.  By  means  of 
3  a  preceding  negation 
is  very  frequently  re-     ,jt^  impf.  w  to  be  fine, 


Jo  jj  elat.  jJI  tasty, 
delicious,  sweet, 
lyj   impf.    a,    c.    ace.   to 
remain  in  .  .  . 

^LJ  jt?/.  ^jU\  tongue. 
ij^j^  VIII  to  cling  to. 


sumed. 


i^ 


^%  ^  (often   ^^) 

nevertheless,  but. 

d^  (also  di^)i?/.  IjG3G 
angel. 

vK^    2/w/?/*.    a    to    tarry, 

delay. 

j^  x/wp/l  «  to  put  on. 
IV  c.  2  ace.  to  clothe. 

(j^aA/oJ!?/.  j*o!^  cloth- 
ing, dress. 

^\Ximpf.a  c.  (^  or  c.acc.  to 
overtake. 

jj,  1.  pers.  06  jJ,  mjp/.  « 

to  be  tasty,  sweet. 


slender,  kind. 

Go    J 

^  o\n\  c.  o  kindness, 
graciousnesSjtowar  ds. . . 

G 

<J.Ail  kind. 
v^^^jlI  /m/?/.  a  to  play,  sport. 
Ji*J(§  147)  may  be,  perhaps, 
^jtj  m^/".  «  to  curse. 

JUjJ  a  curse. 

y^^jjai  II  c.  ace.  pers.  et  ^^ 

to  surname,  give  a  nick- 
name to. 

jvaJ   impf.   a  to   swallow, 

gulp  down. 

G  ^  o> 

aL«jU  a  morsel. 


Glossaey  B. 


149' 


^j  impf,  a  to  meet,  meet 
with. 
IV  c.  ace.  to  throw. 
X  to  throw  one's  self, 
to  lie. 

p  (§  101  c)  not. 

UJ  conj.  after,  when. 

p  j9«r^.  if,  introduces  a 
condition,  which  is  not 
likely  to  be  fulfilled. 


*y  med,  .  to  blame. 

U^  ^^*  ijiyi  colour,  sort, 
kind. 


U  not  (of.  §  150). 

L^vLo  Ma'rib,  a  town  in 
South  Arabia. 

G  o 

jLt5  resemblance ,  like- 
ness ;  the  like,  same ;  one 
(pers.  or  thing)  like,  cf. 
§  145  &. 

Jjuo  resemblance,  na- 
ture, quality(of  athing), 

^^^  impf.  a  to  put  to  the 
test. 

aJ^  inf. 

G     >    9 


'iXj(\x  pi.  ^i\jQ  ,     ^j^\d^ 

9  ^  ^O^  9  ^  ^ 

town.  aUj4Xjt  =  iUjJuo 

^^aJI  Medina. 


^(§§50;  110;  144)  not 
to  be^  to  be  non-exis- 
tent. 

iJSj,  xilj  pi  JLJ  (§  90;?)     ^  impf.  uc.^  to  pass  by. 

•♦  ♦♦  at    ••  y  >    ^ 

Swjo  "time  .   gwx  once. 
pi  Clio  often. 
5n!^  bitterness. 


night. 

Lo,  16  Uo^ro/i.(§15)what? 

(§  14)  that  which,  what, 

somethg.  that.  %,  ^   ^  > 

•vol  (§  90^)  man. 
Lc  conj.  (§   158  &)  so      ™s^_ 

long  as.  «lj^l  woman,  wife. 


150* 


Glossary  B. 


b-^^yjo  manliness,  vir- 
tus, manly  virtue. 

jjU\jjo  pi.  au\!j^  mar- 
grave, prefect. 

\jdJo  impf.  a  to  be  or  be- 
come sick. 
(jaj)yjo  sick. 

cj^  Fto  roll  (in  tbe  dust). 

^uQ  Miriam,  Mary. 

>^.A<guo  impf.  a  c,\^to  wipe, 

wipe  off,  away. 

^.ju^l    Christ,    the 

Messiah. 

vJ.Aw^  /  to   take  hold  of, 
si^^e. 
V  to  hold  on  by  sthg. 

Lwuuo  IV  to  enter  on  the 
eventide;  to  do  some- 
thing late. 

^ci^^  impf.  i  to  go,  walk; 

^^^&fjo  inf, 

^J^  impf.  i  to  go,  betake 
one's  self  to. 


G^  ^^       G   ^    c^ 

Jojo  pi.  sUaxil  rain,  shower 
of  rain. 

^  y   ^ 

JJ2X>  impf.  u  to  defer  (a 
payment). 

G  o    ^ 

«i  ^r^j9.    with;    besides; 
alongside  of. 

HJoiJo  stomach. 

v-aXo  mj9/*.  w  to  hate. 

oJLo  hatred. 

iUCo  Mecca. 

oJoo  2m/?/*.  u  to  tarry,  stay. 

^xi  2m/?/.  <?,  c.  ace,  ei  ^^ 

to  fill  sthg.  with  .  .  . 
VIII  to  become  filled. 

dUUo  impf.  i,   c.    ace.    to 
rule,  govern,  possess. 
II  to  appoint  as  king. 

viJiXo  dominion,  sover- 
eignty, reign,  riches. 

Go 

dUU      possessions, 
riches. 


Glossary  B. 


i5r 


viJLLo  pi.  ^yXjo  king.        jowo  (/rom  ^6  ^j^)  since. 

J^     ceremony     of     ^  ^^Pf'  ^'  ^-  ^  «^^-   to 

debar  one  from  sthg.,  re- 


marriage. 

iUCl^x)  j!>/.  dLJUx)  king- 
dom, sovereignty. 

9  ^  ^  9^0  ^ 

iiSULo  for  d^  «^.  under 

l^   =    ^xj   +   J^  (§5 

note  &). 

^j^  who?  (§  15);  he  who, 
they  that;  one  that, 
whoso,  whoever  (§§  14, 
154,  159). 

^^  prep,  of  (=  some  of, 

in  partitive  sense  §  1 14), 
belonging  to;  with  the 
negation  it  has  a  streng- 
thening effect,  §  141 ; 
consisting  of;  away 
from,  from  (separation, 


fuse,  prevent  one  doing 

sthg.;  c.  ace.  et  ^  to 

defend    one    from    or 
against  sthg. 
VIII  to  protect  one's 


self. 
Igjo  impf.  «,    c. 


to  be 

skilled,  clever,  expert, 
wellversed. 


y^  wedding-present, 
price  of  the  bride  (paid 
to  her  father). 

c^Uo  med.  .  to  die. 


//  to  put  to  death. 

o  ^ 


S   o  ^ 

tc^vo  ^^A  death. 


C5^y 


^^Ji  dead. 
Moses. 


point     of    departure);      JLx>   pi.    Jlyj!  goods  and 
hence  in  comparison  =  chattels,         property, 

than;through(passage).  flocks. 


152* 


Glossary  B. 


gU     (§     90  q)    pi.     1\1a 


water. 


8jol/>    pl.   Jol*jo    table, 

tray. 

/    CLo  med.  ^  II  c.  ^j^    to 
.\J  distinguish. 

\u^  II  c,  acc.  pers,  et  {^ 
rei  to  give  one  informa- 
tion regarding. 

Fto  give  one's  self  out 
for  a  prophet. 

iiS  VIII  to  awake  up. 


or^ 


prophet. 

sILo  the  office,  rank, 
of  prophet. 

tX^  impf.  u  to  be  brave, 
courageous. 

StX^  courage,  magna- 
nimity. 

[V^*  i?/.  i*.^  constellation. 

La^  impf.  u  to  become  free, 
to  save  one's  self. 


IV  causative. 
^^^  pron.  we. 

L^  Fto  turn  aside,  to  draw 
back,  retire. 

So^  0 •ox 

J^  c<9//.,  ;zo;w.  wmY.  jUL^ 
palm. 

Ijo  m/?/.  fl!,  ^.  j^  to  re- 
pent of  sthg.,  feel  sorry. 

*Jo  ///  to  be  one's  boon 
companion. 

*j  Jo  pl.  iUotXj  boon 

companion,  mess-mate. 

\SS  III  call  out,  c.  acc. 
to  call  to  some  one. 

s  JO  IV  to  warn. 

cyS  «>wp/.  ?  to  remove. 
VIII  to  strip  off,  dis- 
place. 

Jyi  ?w/?/^  i    to    descend, 

alight,     stop,     lodge, 

encamp,  c.  Jkx  to  alight 

at,  lodge,  stay  with. . . 

IV  to  send  down  (in 


Glossary  B. 


153* 


particular ,    a    revela- 
tion). 


G    o^ 


Jyuo  pL  JvUuo  dwell- 
ing-place, abode,  halt- 
ing-place. 

e"  ZjS  irrvpf,  a  to  copy. 

&^X3  i?^.  ;^»^  a  copy. 
^^mo  2/WJ3/.  tf  to  forget. 

,jLju*o«w/*.  forgetting. 

eLIj  (§  90/)  women. 

tX*go  ///  c.  2  «cc.  to  ad- 
jure by  God. 

Ja^j  «>w;?/.  a  to  be  lively, 

in  good  spirits. 
9    ^^ 
^Lio  inf. 

^,,^^0^  impf.  u  to  set  up. 
v,j.^uuaj  share,  portion. 

^j>rij  impf,  «  to  be  a  true 
friend. 

y£Li   impf.   u,   c.    ace,   to 
help,  succour. 
V  (denom.)  to  become 


a  Christian,  to  live  as 
a  Christian. 


^I^-«3J    pi, 
a  Christian. 


^; 


LoJ 


^^-«aJLJI  al-Mansur, 
the  second  Abbaside 
Caliph  754—775. 

LdS  VII]  to  draw  (the 
sword). 

^Ja3  ^mp/*.  «  to  butt  with 
the  horns. 

jjjaj  impf  i  to  talk. 
/r  to  make,   compel 
to  talk. 

Jfeij  impf.  u  to  see,  look 
at,  examine,  reflect. 

1x3  impf,  a  to  be  soft,  well 

off,  affluent. 

Aju  CO//,  a  herd  of 
camels. 

aUjtjaffluence,welfare. 

IjtS  part,  yes,  yes  in- 
deed. 


154* 


Glossaey  B; 


IaS  impf.  u  vel  i  c.  ^j^  to 

flee  from,  avoid. 

(jjJu  II  to  cheer,  relieve. 

n^Ju  fern.,  pi.  ^yjLi\, 

ijw«-ftj  soul  (anima  ap- 
petens),  self  (§    12^); 

me.  yxxj  ij^Jlj  Juci» 
^jwAi  the  taking  of  a 
life  not  for  a  life^  i.  e. 
without  a  murder  hav- 
ing been  committed. 

ifti  2>wi?/.  a  to  be  of  use. 
VIII  c.  ^  make  use 
of,  profit  by  .  .  . 

isjLtuuo  pi.    ifcsUjo  use, 
useful  qualities,  benefit. 

i^^A^  into  play  the  hypo- 
crite. 

Ia3  iwp/.  if  c.  ^   pers. 

to  reproach  one   with 
sthg. 

VIII  to  avenge  one's 
self. 


aU^j  an  act  of  revenge. 
y^^Xi    ewjt?/*.   u    to   afflict, 
hurt,  injure. 

iuXi  affliction,trouble. 
>sJo  mj9/.  i  to  marry. 

Xid.,  to  wish  to  marry. 

oJUil  -^l5o  marriage 

with  one's  stepmother. 

tXXi  V  to  be  hard,  strait, 
troublesome. 

jXi  /F  to  deny.  c.  ace.  r. 
et  J^£.  to  find  strange, 
to  take  offence  at  sthg. 

Jl^  impf.  u  to  be  fat,  large. 

d^  large,   aspiring, 
generous. 

j-^  i?/.  ;L^I  stream. 

^^  mj^/.  <3f  to  forbid. 
VIII to  arrive  at,  come 
to  an  end. 


z.y' 


i  Noah. 


Glossary  B. 


155* 


J05J  a  mans  name. 


^bAm.^/.^l^ fire,  hell-     \d^,  fern,  sj^  (§  13  &), 
fire.  this,  here. 

jjj  light.  Vr^  «»«i?/'.  u  to  flee. 

clS  p/.  ^Ip  i  kind,  species,     ICi  «wp/.  i  to  put  to  flight, 
different  (sort  of).  ^//  to  turn  and  flee. 

jv^Li  Hasim,  man's  name ; 
A-CwLi  jJU  Muhammed's 
clan. 
J^  part,  interrog. 
*jft,  ^  pron.S.pers.pIur. 
msc.  they  (§12  «). 

S3   ^ 

ivs»  imjo/.  w  to  intend  to  do 
sthg. 

9  a 

&4J0  energy. 
ja.^1  India,  the  Hindus. 
liD  pron.  he. 

rUe  w^^.  ,  F// to  collapse. 

^^\sb  impf.  i  to  lead  by     ^^   ^         ^ 

,1.1.  ,         .1       ,.*Li  med,  ,  to  be  easy, 

the  right  way,  to  guide     U  ^  ^ 


aLsU  ^/.  ^••.i  female  camel. 

ILS  ?w^<?.  •,  impf.  a  to  lie 
down,  sleep. 


1^  impf.  u  to  part  from 
some  one. 


\3^     O 


7    ^   a        «-- 

Sws^,  8^4^  I  the  re- 
moval of  Muhammed 
from  Mecca  to  Medina. 

oL^Jl^I  Hadhad,    name 
of  a  king. 


aright. 

j^iX^I        al-Mahdi, 

name  of  the  third  Abba- 
side  Caliph,  775 — 785* 


X  c.  »^  to  despise. 
^.|li  insignificance. 
^J^  impf.  a,  c.  ace.   to 
fall  in  love  with. 


156* 


Glossary  B. 


EJIS  air,  sky. 
^  pron.  Ill  fern.  she. 

.  conj.  and,  also,  even. 
Asseverative  particle 
w.  the  genit.:  xJUK  by 

God  (be  it  sworn),    c, 
ace.  with  (§  112). 

^^  i?/.  ^Lj;I  an  idol. 

v^^,  impf.  i  to  be  neces- 
sary; to  be  legally  in- 
cumbent on  one. 
IV  to  necessitate. 


:^yo       vei       iU:i.«jo 

(part.     act.     IV)     pi. 

y^^js^  \yKi     that      which 

brings  about  sthg.,occa- 
sion,  cause. 

jL^.  impf.  i  to  find, 
at:^*   V  to  take  the  direc- 
tion of  .  .  .,  set  out. 

2^^    pl.    ^y^j    lace, 
countenance. 

9 

JL^L  one,  single. 


^J    IV  c.    Jj^  ^^r5.   to 
reveal  to  one,  inspire. 

^.  impf.  a  to  love. 

r/  to  love  mutually. 

H  Jyo  love,  inclination. 

pi^ytmpf.c^  to  set, place, 
leave,  let. 
//  to  deposit. 

IV  c.  ace.  ret  et  J( 
;9er5.  to  intrust  sthg. 
to  some  one. 

2uuc>^  jt?/.  >4tc>^  pro- 
perty given  in  trust,  a 
deposit  (of  money  or 
its  equivalent). 

;d>s^  impf  vij^  to  inherit. 

VI  to  receive  as  one's 
portion. 

^X^  heir. 

Ssy   impf  i  to  go  down, 
arrive. 

5u>\«  Waraka,  man's  name. 


Glossary  B. 


157' 


s     ^ 


nister. 


vizier,  mi- 


^^^  impf.  a  to  be  dirty. 

p^^  tnf, 
Lwl  impf.  mZjl  to  be  pos- 
sible, be  open  (to  one). 

IV  to  bring  one  into 
a  comfortable  position; 
to  get  riches  for  s.  o. 

JwA«r  impf,  a  to  be  sleepy. 

y^ucl  impf,  i  to  describe. 

ijuo  description. 

Jufi.   impf,  i  to    connect, 
arrive  at. 

VI  to  be  mutually 
attached  to  each  other. 

.Jol  IV  to  bequeath  by 
will. 

s 

".o.   executor   (of  a 
will). 
'Lb"^  impf,  «^  to  lay. 
VI  c.  J  to  be  humble. 


to  appear  humbly  be- 
fore .  .  . 

VIII  to  be  humbled, 
powerless. 

*A^^  low ,  ignoble, 
mean. 

Mj/i  pi'  /•^'vo  place, 
position,  dwelling- 
place. 

4>^j  impf.   i  to  make  an 
agreement,  promise. 

VIII  to  accept  a  pro- 
mise, to  promise  one 
another. 

iijLfjo  rendezvous, 
appointed  time. 

Jax.  impf,  i  to  warn,  ex- 
hort. 

VIII  to  suffer  oneself 
to  be  corrected. 

^L^.  pi.  au£  •  f  vessel,recep- 

tacle. 
jjr  2m/>/.  i  to  go   forth 


158^ 


Glossary  B. 


to  a  prince,    c.  J^s.  to 
come  to. 

j^^  ///  c.  ace.  to  agree 
with,  correspond  to. 

j^^  imp/',  i  to  be  complete. 
///  c.  ace.  to  come  to, 
arrive  at. 

F^^^j,  ifdJt  sUy?  God 
has  taken  him  (the  Mos- 
lem) to  himself,  has 
brought  him  to  a  bless- 
ed end.  Pass,  to  die  a 
blessed  death. 

SU«  dying;  a  blessed 
end. 

time. 


iiSr  ^mj?/.  «^  to  fall,  fall 

upon,  light  upon ;  c.J^ 
to  find  some  one. 
IV  to  excite. 


S.  m^/*.  2  to  stop,  stand; 

c.  J^  to  go  up  to  one. 

^•r  V  c.  aec,  to  beware, 
be  afraid,  of  sthg. 


VIII  to  be  afraid. 
JlT  .  77  to  appoint  as  over- 
seer.    Fto  trust  (in). 

9 

Jui^^  representative, 
vice-gerent,  agent. 

4XJ.  impf.  I  to  bring  forth. 
IV  c.  ace,  to  beget. 
X  e.  ace.  to  beget  (a 
son)  by  a  woman. 

iy^  pi  c>ii\  child, 

son,  lad.    (In  the  sing, 
also  eolleei.), 

aLijJ.  feast,  marriage  feast. 

^I  impf,  2,  e.  aec.  to  be 

near. 
77  to  turn  one's  back, 

to  turn  round;  e.  ^i 
to  turn  away  from. 

^J^  pi.  iX^^^S  near; 
esp.  'near  to  God'  = 
saint,  helper. 

^Jyo  pi.  (J|y»  client, 
slave. 


Glossary  B. 


159* 


v^^'  impf.  u>^  c,  2  ace. 
to  present  some  one 
with  sthg.). 

\S  part,  of  exclam.  (§  85) 
0! 

(jlo  impf.  a,  c.   ^jjo   to 

despair  of  .  .  . 
*jUj  i?/.  *Lol  orphan, 
o  jL>  Yatrib,  name  of  Me-      ^yj>  pi.  *Gl  (§  90  5)  day, 

dina  before  Islam.  i?^.  length  of  reign.  ^.^ 

on  the  day  that...  (§129). 

Li-j  one  day;  w^//^  5w;f. 

e.    g.    dLo^    thy    day 

(§  125).  f:pi(§ii8«) 

to-day.    (X^jo^  (=  "j*^^ 
6t)  in  that  day,  then. 


iaib  //wp/.  «  to  be  awake. 

IV  io  wake. 
X  to  have  one's  self 
waked,  to  awake. 

^jL*J   on   the   right,   the 

right  side,  right  hand. 

t>«-^l  colL  the  Jews. 

i^^  Joseph. 


o^ 


Ju  Aw.,  jp/.  J^j  (§  90 r) 

hand,power,possession. 

IJo  zmp/.  i  to  play  (either 
with  arrows,  by  wh.  lots 
were  cast,  or  with  dice). 

Iwjyc  play,  game,game 

of  chance. 


^LSo  a  Greek. 


CORRiaENDA. 

pp.  56,  57  for  headings  as  printed  read:  §  65  Nomina  Kelativa; 

§  66  Nomina  Deminutiva. 
p.  68  heading  read:  §  78  Nom.  Diptota. 
p.  93  1.  4,  for  'you'  read  'them', 
p.  40^  4,  read  j^^J^A^^. 

X 

p.  42*,  15  read  C^yo. 


p.  42*,  7  read  f\>,. 


^  o 

)* 


*      ^    ^9  <t 


p.  54%  2  read  j^JUjUo-,^!. 
p.  55*^,  7  read  ^^1. 


PBINTED   BY  W.   DRXJGUIilN,   liBIPZIG. 


OF  THB 

IT  KT  TtnP  T3  O  T  T'-V" 


REUTHER  &  REICHARD,  PUBLISHERS,  BERLIN. 
CHRESTOMATHY 

OF 

ARABIC  PROSE-PIECES 

BY 

DR.  R.  BRUNNOW. 

Crown  80,     Cloth  pp.  334,  price  8  s.  6  d. 


DELECTUS  VETERUM 

CARMINUM  ARABICORUM 

Carmina  selegit  et  edidit 
THEOD.  NOELDEKE. 

Glossarium  confecit 

AUG.  MUELLER. 

Crown  80.     Cloth  pp.  256,  price  7  s.  6  d. 


AN 

ARABIC  BIBLE-CHRESTOMATH.Y 

WITH  A  GLOSSARY 

Edited  by 

DR.   GEORGE   JACOB. 

Crown  80.     Cloth  pp.  64,  price  2  s.  6  d. 

LONDON:  WILLIAMS  &  NORGALE,  14,  Henrietta  Street. 
NEW  YORK:  B.  WESTERMANN  &  Co.,  812,  Broadway. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LT"RARY 

HOME  USE 

CIRCULATION  DEPARTMENT 

MAIN  LIBRARY 

This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 
1 -month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling  642-3405. 
6-month  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing  books 

to  Circulation  Desk. 
Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made  4  days  prior 

to  due  date. 

ALL  BOOKS  ARE  SUBJECT  TO  RECALL  7  DAYS 

AFTER  DATE  CHECKED  OUT. 


JUL  2  H  1974  2  5 


MCtt  gwie  laai       JUL     1  >74 


i 


LD21— A-40m-5,'74 
(R8191L) 


General  Library 

University  of  California 

Berkeley 


^  M  ^- . 


H:'^ 


o^<* 


IS  ^^L 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CAIvlFORNIA  LIBRARY